Ncma Tek Manual Parts 1-5

NCMA TEK
National Concrete Masonry Association

an information series from the national authority on concrete masonry technology
ASTM SPECIFICATIONS FOR

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Keywords: absorption, ASTM specifications, calcium
silicate brick, compressive strength, concrete brick,
dimensions, face shell and web thickness, gross area, net
area, specifications, testing, water absorption
TEK 1-1E
Codes & Specs (2007)
2003 and 2006 editions of the International Building Code

(IBC) (refs. 1, 2), as well as the most current ASTM edition.
Code officials will commonly accept more current editions
of ASTM standards than that referenced in the code, as they
represent more state-of-the-art requirements for a specific
material or system.
INTRODUCTION
The most widely-used standards for specifying concrete
masonry units in the United States are published by ASTM
International. These ASTM standards contain minimum
requirements that assure properties necessary for quality performance. These requirements include items such as
conformance to specified component materials, compressive
strength, permissible variations in dimensions, and finish and
appearance criteria. Currently, seven ASTM standards apply to
units intended primarily for construction of concrete masonry
walls, beams, columns or specialty applications (see Table 1).
The letter and first number of an ASTM designation is the
fixed designation for that standard. For example, ASTM C 55 is
the fixed designation for concrete building brick. The number
immediately following indicates the year of last revision (i.e.,
ASTM C 55-06 is the version of C 55 published in 2006). ASTM
standards are required to be updated or reapproved at least
every five years. If the standard is reapproved, the reapproval
date is placed in parentheses after the last revision date.
Because significant changes can be introduced into subsequent editions, the edition referenced by the building code
or by a project specification can be an important consideration
when determining specific requirements. Also note that it
may take several years between publication of a new ASTM
standard and its subsequent reference by a building code. For
this reason, Table 1 includes the editions referenced in the
LOADBEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

ASTM C 90
As the most widely-referenced of the ASTM standards
for concrete masonry units, ASTM C 90 is under continuous
review and revision. The bulk of these revisions are essentially
editorial, although two recent major changes are discussed
here. In 2006, the minimum face shell thickness requirements
were modified for units 10-in. (254-mm) and wider. Prior to
ASTM C 90-06 (ref. 2), two minimum face shell thicknesses
for these units were listed:
a standard thickness, 13/8 in. for 10-in. units, 11/2 in. for
12-in. and greater (35 mm for 254-mm units and 38 mm for
305-mm and greater), and
a reduced thickness that can be used when the allowable loads
in empirical design are correspondingly reduced. Similarly,
in the engineered design methods (allowable stress design
and strength design), capacity is automatically reduced as the
section properties are reduced.
With the introduction of ASTM C 90-06, the two sets
of face shell thicknesses were replaced with one minimum
thickness requirement (see Table 2).
In 2000, a prior change was made to ASTM C 90, removing
the Type I (moisture-controlled) and Type II (non moisturecontrolled) unit designations which is reflected in the ASTM
C 90 editions adopted by the 2003 and 2006 editions of the
Table 1ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM
Edition referenced in
Type of unit:
Designation:
the 2003 IBC:
the 2006 IBC:
Most current edition:
Concrete Building Brick
C 55
C 55-01a
C 55-03
C 55-06
Calcium Silicate Brick
C 73
C 73-99a
C 73-99a
C 73-05
Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
C 90
C 90-01a
C 90-03
C 90-06b
Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units C 129
C 129-99aA
C 129-01A
C 129-06
B
Catch Basin and Manhole Units
C 139
N/A
N/AB
C 139-05
Prefaced Concrete Units
C 744
C 744-99
C 744-99
C 744-05
Concrete Facing Brick
C 1634
N/AB
N/AB
C 1634-06
A
Although not directly referenced in the IBC, C 129 is referenced in Specification for Masonry Structures (refs. 17, 18)
B
This standard is not referenced in the IBC.
1
TEK 1-1E 2007 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEK 1-1D)
IBC. The designations were withdrawn because they were

difficult to effectively use and enforce, and because of newly
developed concrete masonry crack control provisions. The new
crack control guidelines are based on anticipated total volume
changes, rather than on the specified moisture contents that
formed the basis for Type I requirements. Because the Type
designations no longer influenced recommended control joint
spacing or other crack control strategies, Type designations
were removed. Control joint criteria can be found in References 5 and 6.
Physical Requirements
Physical requirements prescribed by ASTM C 90 include
dimensional tolerances, minimum face shell and web thicknesses for hollow units, minimum strength and maximum
absorption requirements, and maximum linear shrinkage.
Overall unit dimensions (width, height and length) can vary
by no more than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) from the standard specified
dimension. Exceptions are faces of split-face units and faces
of slump units which are intended to provide a random surface
texture. In these cases, consult local suppliers to determine
achievable tolerances. Molded features such as ribs, scores,
hex-shapes and patterns must be within 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) of
the specified standard dimension and within 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
of the specified placement on the mold. For dry-stack masonry
units, the physical tolerances are typically limited to 1/16 in.
(1.6 mm), which precludes the need for mortaring, grinding
of face shell surfaces or shimming to even out courses during
construction (ref. 7).
Minimum face shell and web thicknesses are those deemed
necessary to obtain satisfactory structural and nonstructural
performance. Note that although there are some unique face
shell thickness requirements for split-faced units (see Table 2
Table 2ASTM C 90 Minimum Thickness of Face
Shells and Webs for Hollow Units (ref. 3)
Web thickness
Nominal
Face shell
Equivalent
width
thicknessB, C,
web thickness,
of units,
minimum, WebsB, C, D in./linear ftE
in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm) (mm/linear m)
3
3
3 (76.2) & 4 (102)
/4 (19)
/4 (19)
15/8 (136)
6 (152)
1 (25)D
1 (25)
21/4 (188)
1
D
8 (203)
1 /4 (32)
1 (25)
21/4 (188)
1
1
10 (254) and greater 1 /4 (32)
1 /8 (29)
21/2 (209)
A
Average of measurements on a minimum of 3 units when
measured as described in Test Methods C 140.
B
When this standard is used for units having split surfaces,
a maximum of 10% of the split surface is permitted to have
thickness less than those shown, but not less than 3/4 in.
(19.1 mm). When the units are to be solid grouted, the 10%
limit does not apply and Footnote C establishes a thickness
requirement for the entire face shell.
C
When the units are to be solid grouted, minimum face shell
and web thickness shall be not less than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
D
The minimum web thickness for units with webs closer
than 1 in. (25.4 mm) apart shall be 3/4 in. (19.1 mm).
E
Equivalent web thickness does not apply to the portion
of the unit to be filled with grout. The length of that portion
shall be deducted from the overall length of the unit for the
calculation of the equivalent web thickness.
footnote B), ground-face units (i.e., those ground after manufacture) must meet the face shell thickness requirements contained
in the body of Table 2. In addition to minimum permissible web
thicknesses for individual webs, the specification also requires
a minimum total thickness of webs per foot of block length.
When evaluating this equivalent web thickness, the portion of
a unit to be filled with grout is exempted from the minimum
requirement. This provision avoids excluding units intentionally
manufactured with reduced webs, including bond beam units
and open-end block, where grout fulfills the structural role of
the web.
For a unit to be considered a solid unit, the net cross-sectional area in every plane parallel to the bearing surface must
be at least 75% of the gross cross-sectional area measured in
the same plane. Minimum face shell and web thicknesses are
not prescribed for solid units.
The net area used to determine compressive strength is
the average net area of the block, calculated from the unit
net volume based on water displacement tests described in
ASTM C 140 (ref. 8). For cored units having straight-tapered
face shells and webs, average net area approximately equals
the net cross-sectional area at the block mid-height. Gross and
net areas of a concrete masonry unit are shown in Figure 1.
Net area compressive strength is used for engineered
masonry design, taking into account the mortar bedded and
grouted areas. Compressive strength based on gross area is
still used for masonry designed by the empirical provisions
of IBC Section 2109.
Maximum permissible water absorption is shown in Table
3. Absorption is a measure of the total water required to fill all
voids within the net volume of concrete. It is determined from
the weight-per-unit-volume difference between saturated and
oven-dry concrete masonry units. Because absorption measures
the water required to fill voids, aggregates with relatively large
pores, such as some lightweight aggregate, would have a greater
absorption than dense, nonporous aggregates, given the same
compaction. As a result, lightweight units are permitted higher
absorption values than medium or normal weight units.
Because concrete masonry units tend to contract as they dry,
ASTM C 90 limits their potential drying shrinkage to 0.065%,
measured using ASTM C 426, Standard Test Method for Linear
Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 9)
9).
Finish and Appearance
Finish and appearance provisions prohibit defects that
would impair the strength or permanence of the construction,
Gross area* (shaded) = width (actual) x length (actual)
Net area* (shaded) = net volume (actual)

height (actual)
= (% solid) x (gross area)
* For design calculations, a masonry element's section
properties are based upon minimum specified dimensions
instead of actual dimensions.
Figure 1Gross and Net Areas
but permit minor cracks incidental to usual manufacturing

methods. For units to be used in exposed walls, the presence
of objectionable imperfections is based on viewing the unit
face or faces from a distance of at least 20 ft (6.1 m) under
diffused lighting. Five percent of a shipment may contain chips
not larger than 1 in. (25.4 mm) in any dimension, or cracks not
wider than 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) and not longer than 25% of the
nominal unit height. Similarly, the specification requires that
color and texture be specified by the purchaser. An approved
sample of at least four units, representing the range of color
and texture permitted, is used to determine conformance.
CONCRETE BUILDING BRICKASTM C 55
ASTM C 55-03 (ref. 10) included two grades of concrete
brick: Grade N for veneer and facing applications and Grade
S for general use. In 2006, however, the grades were removed
from C 55 and requirements for concrete brick used in veneer
and facing applications were moved into a new standard: C
1634 (see below). ASTM C 55-06 (ref. 11) now applies to
concrete building brick only, defined as concrete masonry
units with: a maximum width of 4 in. (102 mm); a weight that
will typically permit it to be lifted and placed using one hand;
and an intended use in nonfacing, utilitarian applications.
Requirements for C 55-06 building brick include:
2,500 psi (17.2 MPa) minimum compressive strength (average of three units),
0.065% maximum linear drying shrinkage,
75% minimum percent solid, and
maximum average absorption requirements of 13 pcf for
normal weight brick, 15 pcf for medium weight brick and
18 pcf for lightweight brick (208, 240 and 288 kg/m3).
The finish and appearance section of C 55-06 only addresses defects which might affect placement or permanence
of the resulting construction.
CONCRETE FACING BRICKASTM C 1634
The introduction of this new standard in 2006 reflects
the rise in popularity of concrete brick used in architectural
facing applications. A facing brick (C 1634) is distinguished
from a building brick (C 55) primarily by its intended use.

ASTM C 1634 (ref. 12) defines a concrete facing brick as a
concrete masonry unit with: a maximum width of 4 in. (102
mm); a weight that will typically permit it to be lifted and
placed using one hand; and an intended application where
one or more faces of the unit will be exposed.
Compression and absorption requirements are listed in
Table 4. Linear drying shrinkage, dimensional tolerances and
finish and appearance requirements are similar to those in C
90, with the exception that chip size is limited to + 1/2 in. (13
mm). The minimum permissible distance between any core
holes in the brick and the edge of the brick is 3/4 in. (19 mm),
as it is in C 55. Both C 1634 and C 55 refer to C 140 for compression testing, which requires compression test specimens to
have a height that is 60% + 10% of its least lateral dimension,
to minimize the potential impact of specimen aspect ratio on
tested compressive strengths.
NONLOADBEARING CONCRETE MASONRY
UNITSASTM C 129
ASTM C 129 (ref. 13) covers hollow and solid nonloadbearing units, intended for use in nonloadbearing partitions. These
units are not suitable for exterior walls subjected to freezing
cycles unless effectively protected from the weather. ASTM
C 129 requires that these units be clearly marked to preclude
their use as loadbearing units. Minimum net area compressive
strength requirements are 500 psi (3.45 MPa) for an individual
unit and 600 psi (4.14 MPa) average for three units.
CALCIUM SILICATE FACE BRICKASTM C 73
ASTM C 73 (ref. 14) covers brick made from sand and
lime. Two grades are included:
Grade SWBrick intended for use where exposed to
temperatures below freezing in the presence of moisture.
Minimum compressive strength requirements are 4,500 psi
(31 MPa) for an individual unit and 5,500 psi (37.9 MPa)
for an average of three units, based on average gross area.
The maximum water absorption is 15 lb/ft3 (240 kg/m3).
Grade MWBrick intended for exposure to temperatures
Table 3Strength and Absorption Requirements for Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90 (ref. 3)A
Oven-dry density
Maximum water
Minimum net area
Weight
of concrete, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
absorption, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
compressive strength, psi (MPa)
classification
Average of 3 units
Average of 3 units Individual units Average of 3 units Individual units
Lightweight
Less than 105 (1,680)
18 (288)
20 (320)
1,900 (13.1)
1,700 (11.7)
Medium weight 105 to less than 125 (1,680 - 2,000)
15 (240)
17 (272)
1,900 (13.1)
1,700 (11.7)
Normal weight
125 (2,000) or more
13 (208)
15 (240)
1,900 (13.1)
1,700 (11.7)
A
Note that ASTM C 90-01a does not include requirements for maximum water absorption of individual units. Otherwise,
the requirements are identical between C 90-03 and C 90-06b.
Table 4Strength and Absorption Requirements for Concrete Facing Brick, ASTM C 1634 (ref. 12)
Oven-dry
density of concrete,
Density
lb/ft (kg/m)
classification
Average of 3 units
Lightweight
less than 105 (1,680)
Medium weight 105 (1,680) to less than 125 (2,000)
Normal weight
125 (2,000) or more
Minimum net area

compressive strength, psi (MPa)
Average of
Individual
3 units
units
3,500 (24.1) 3,000 (20.7)
3,500 (24.1) 3,000 (20.7)
3,500 (24.1) 3,000 (20.7)
Maximum water absorption,

lb/ft (kg/m)
Average of
Individual
3 units
units
15 (240)
17 (272)
13 (208)
15 (240)
10 (160)
12 (192)
below freezing, but unlikely to be saturated with water.

Minimum compressive strength requirements are 3,000 psi
(20.7 MPa) for an individual unit and 3,500 psi (24.1 MPa)
for an average of three units, based on average gross area.
The maximum water absorption is 18 lb/ft3 (288 kg/m3).
PREFACED CONCRETE AND CALCIUM SILICATE
MASONRY UNITSASTM C 744
ASTM C 744 (ref. 15) for prefaced units establishes
requirements for the facing materials applied to masonry unit
surfaces. For the concrete masonry units onto which the surface
is molded, C 744 requires compliance with the requirements
contained in ASTM C 55, C 90 or C 129, as appropriate.
Facing requirements in C 744 include: resistance to crazing,
surface burning characteristics, adhesion, color permanence,

chemical resistance, cleansability, abrasion, and dimensional
tolerances.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS FOR CATCH BASINS
AND MANHOLESASTM C 139
ASTM C 139 (ref. 16) covers solid precast segmental
concrete masonry units intended for use in catch basins and
manholes. Units are required to be at least 5 in. (127 mm) thick,
with a minimum gross area compressive strength of 2,500 psi
(17 MPa) (average of 3 units) or 2,000 psi (13 MPa) for an
individual unit, and a maximum water absorption of 10 pcf
(16 kg/m) (average of 3 units). The overall unit dimensions
must be within 3% of the specified dimensions.
REFERENCES
1. International Building Code 2003. International Code Council, 2003.
3. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
Units,, ASTM C 90-06b. ASTM International, 2006.
4.. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
Units,, ASTM C 90-03. ASTM International, 2003.
5. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls
WallsEmpirical
Empirical Method
Method,, TEK 10-2B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
6. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls
WallsAlternative
Alternative Engineered Method. TEK 10-3. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
7. Design and Construction of Dry-Stack Masonry Walls
Walls,, TEK 14-22. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
8. Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units
Units,, ASTM C 140-03. ASTM
International, 2003.
9. Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units
10. Standard Specification for Concrete Brick
Brick,, ASTM C 55-03. ASTM International, 2003.
11. Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick
12. Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick
13. Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
14. Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Brick (Sand-Lime Brick)
Brick),, ASTM C 73-99a. ASTM International, 1999.
15. Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units
16. Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes
Manholes,, ASTM C 139-05.
ASTM International, 2005.
17. Specification for Masonry Structures
Structures,, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
18. Specification for Masonry Structures
Structures,, ACI 530.1-05/ASCE 6-05/TMS 602-05. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2005.
Provided by:
NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and liability for the accuracy and the application of the information contained in this publication.
NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION
13750 Sunrise Valley Drive, Herndon, Virginia 20171
www.ncma.org
To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK Index,

contact NCMA Publications (703) 713-19004
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
SPECIFICATION FOR
MASONRY STRUCTURES
on
concrete
masonry
technology
TEK 1-2C
INTRODUCTION
Specification for Masonry Structures (MSJC Specification) (ref. 1) is a national consensus standard intended to
be incorporated by reference into the contract documents
of masonry construction projects. Compliance with this
Specification is mandatory for structures designed in accordance with Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (MSJC Code) (ref. 2).
The masonry design and construction provisions in
Chapter 21 of the International Building Code (IBC) (ref.
3) are based primarily on the MSJC Code and Specification. When adopting the MSJC Code and Specification,
the IBC typically amends or modifies some provisions.
Because significant changes can be introduced into
subsequent editions of both the MSJC and the IBC, the
edition referenced by the local building code can be an
important consideration when determining the specific
requirements to be met. Note that building officials will
often accept design and construction standards which are
more current than those referenced in the applicable code,
as they represent more state-of-the art requirements for
the specific material or system.
This TEK provides a broad overview of the MSJC
Specification's content, references other NCMA TEK
which describe the various provisions in greater detail,
outlines updates incorporated into the 2008 edition of
the MSJC Specification, and notes differences between
the 2008 MSJC Specification and the 2009 IBC.
THE MSJC SPECIFICATION
The MSJC Specification covers material requirements,
storage and handling of materials, construction, and clean-
Related TEK:
1-3C
NCMA TEK 1-2C
ing, as well as provisions for quality assurance, testing

and inspection. Construction includes requirements for
masonry placement, bonding and anchorage, and the
placement of grout, reinforcement and prestressing tendons. The document is formatted to allow the designer
to modify those provisions which include a choice of
alternatives. Thus, the MSJC Specification may be tailored
to meet the specific needs of a project. Modifications
are considered to be a supplemental specification to the
MSJC Specification.
The advantages of a standard specification include
consistency, coordination and understanding among all
parties involved. A Commentary, which accompanies the
MSJC Specification, explains the mandatory requirements
and further clarifies the Specification's intent.
The document is written in the three-part section
format of the Construction Specifications Institute. Each
of the three parts (General, Products and Execution) is
described in the following sections.
In addition to these three parts, checklists are included
at the end of the MSJC Specification to help the designer
prepare the contract documents. The checklists identify
the decisions that must be made when preparing any
supplemental specifications. They are not a mandatory
part of the Specification.
Several articles of the MSJC Specification are prefaced
with the phrase "when required..." These articles do not
become a part of the contract documents unless action is
taken by the designer to include a requirement in the supplemental specifications. Other articles are prefaced with the
phrase "unless otherwise required..." These articles are a
part of the contract documents unless the designer takes
Keywords: building codes, construction, quality assurance,

specifications
specific action to modify the article in the supplemental

specifications.
PART 1GENERAL
Part 1 of the MSJC Specification covers:
definitions,
referenced standards,
system description, which includes:
1. compressive strength requirements,
2. compressive strength determination (choice of two
methods). See TEK 18-1A, Compressive Strength Evaluation of Concrete Masonry (ref. 4), for more detailed
information.
3. adhered veneer requirements (choice of two methods
to determine adhesion),
submittals, which includes a minimum list of required
submittals. If the designer wishes to specify a higher
level of quality assurance, additional submittals may
be required.
quality assurance, which includes quality control measures as well as testing and inspection. The services
and duties of the testing agency, inspection agency and
contractor are included here (see TEK 18-3B, Concrete
Masonry Inspection (ref. 5), for more detailed information),
delivery, storage and handling requirements, and
cold weather and hot weather construction requirements (see TEK 3-1C, All-Weather Concrete Masonry
Construction (ref. 6)).
Updates to 2008 MSJC Specification
From the 2005 edition of the MSJC Specification to
the 2008 edition, Tables 3, 4 and 5 which define Level
A Quality Assurance, Level B Quality Assurance and
Level C Quality Assurance, respectively, were revised.
Columns were added to the tables to define the frequency
of inspection for the various items. New inspection tasks
in the tables are:
verification of the grade, type and size of anchor bolts
prior to grouting for Levels B and C quality assurance,
and
verification of the grade and size of prestressing tendons
and anchorages for Level B quality assurance.
Part 1 also includes new provisions addressing the
addition of self-consolidating grout to the MSJC specification. See TEK 9-2B, Self-Consolidating Grout for
Concrete Masonry (ref. 7) for further information.
The 2008 Specification includes minor modifications
to the provisions for verifying compliance with the specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm, using the unit
strength method. In prior editions of the MSJC Specification, the unit strength table for concrete masonry implied
that the minimum compressive strength of units could be

less than the 1,900 psi (13.1 MPa) required by ASTM C90,
Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry
Units (ref 8). To avoid potential confusion, Table 2 was
revised to reflect a minimum unit compressive strength
of 1,900 psi (13.1 MPa).
IBC Inspection Requirements
The International Building Code inspection requirements are almost identical to the MSJC requirements but
are organized a little differently. MSJC Level A requirements correspond to the basic inspection requirements
performed by the building official as required in Section
110.3 of the IBC. The special inspection requirements of
IBC for masonry are found in Section 1704.5 of that code.
MSJC Level B corresponds to IBC Level 1 and MSJC
Level C corresponds to IBC Level 2.
IBC Section 2105 addresses quality assurance of masonry. These provisions are essentially the same as those
in the MSJC Specification, with the exception that the IBC
addresses testing prisms from constructed masonry. Such
prisms are addressed only to a minor extent within the
MSJC Specification, via one of the referenced standards,
ASTM C1314-07, Standard Test Method for Compressive
Strength of Masonry Prisms (ref.9).
PART 2PRODUCTS
Part 2 of the MSJC Specification covers:
required material properties for masonry units, mortar, grout, reinforcement, prestressing tendons, metal
accessories and other accessories such as movement
joint materials. These material properties are primarily
references to applicable ASTM standards. See TEKs
1-1E, ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units
(ref. 10), and 12-4D, Steel Reinforcement for Concrete
Masonry (ref. 11), for further information.
mortar and grout mixing requirements, found within
Article 2.1 A via ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (ref. 12), and also
within Article 2.6A (see TEK 3-8A, Concrete Masonry
Construction (ref. 13), for more detailed information),
and
reinforcement fabrication requirements.
The Part 2 provisions were not greatly modified between the 2005 and 2008 editions of the MSJC Specification. The reinforcement used for stirrups and lateral ties
that are terminated with a standard hook is now limited to
a maximum reinforcing bar size of No. 5 (M# 16), because
of the difficulty of bending, placing and developing larger
diameter bars in typical masonry construction.
NCMA TEK 1-2C
As in Part 1, Part 2 also includes new provisions

addressing the addition of self-consolidating grout to the
MSJC Specification. See TEK 9-2B, Self-Consolidating
Grout for Concrete Masonry (ref. 7) for further information.
IBC Masonry Material Requirements
IBC Section 2103 addresses masonry construction
materials, and the requirements are essentially the same as
in the corresponding MSJC Specification. The IBC does
include a provision for surface bonding mortar however,
which is not addressed in the MSJC Specification.
PART 3EXECUTION
Part 3, Execution, covers:
inspection prior to the start of masonry construction,
preparation of reinforcement and masonry prior to
grouting (see TEK 3-2A, Grouting Concrete Masonry
Walls (ref. 14)),
masonry erection, including site tolerances (see TEK
3-8A, Concrete Masonry Construction (ref. 13)),
bracing, which simply requires bracing to be designed
and installed to assure stability (see TEK 3-4B, Bracing Masonry Walls During Construction (ref. 15) for
detailed guidance),
placement of reinforcement, ties and anchors (see TEK
12-1A, Anchors and Ties for Masonry (ref. 16)),
grout placement (see TEK 3-2A, Grouting Concrete
Masonry Walls (ref. 14)),
procedures for prestressing tendon installation and
stressing (see TEK 3-14, Post-Tensioned Concrete
Masonry Wall Construction (ref. 17)),
field quality control requirements, and
cleaning (see TEK 8-4A, Cleaning Concrete Masonry
(ref. 18)).
To help ensure structural continuity between subsequent grout pours, Article 3.5F now requires a 11/2-in. (38mm) grout key (i.e., terminating the grout at least 11/2-in.
(38-mm) below a mortar joint) when the previous grout
lift has set before the next lift is poured. Grout keys may
not be formed within masonry bond beams or lintels.
IBC Construction Requirements
IBC Section 2104 addresses masonry construction
procedures, which essentially references the MSJC Specification without modification.
In the 2006 IBC, many of the provisions of the 2005
MSJC requirements were reiterated in the IBC. In the
2009 IBC however, most of the text of these requirements
was removed from the IBC and a simple reference was
made to the 2008 MSJC.
FINISH AND APPEARANCE
The MSJC Specification addresses structural requirements only and not finish or appearance, though
several Articles, such as 1.6 D Sample Panels and 3.3
F Site Tolerances certainly may affect such. Additionally, several MSJC reference standards, such as ASTM
C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete
Masonry Units, specifically address this topic. Further
guidance may be found by including reference to state
standards such as Arizona Masonry Guild Standard 107,
Levels of Quality (ref. 19), as well as to NCMA TEK
1-1E ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units
and TEK 8-4A Cleaning Concrete Masonry.

In addition to changes addressing self-consolidating
grout, several changes have been incorporated into the
Part 3 provisions, dealing with foundation dowels and
with grouting procedures.
MSJC Specification Article 3.4 B.8(d) is a new provision, allowing foundation dowels that interfere with
masonry unit webs to be bent up to 1 in. (25 mm) horizontally for each 6 in. (152 mm) of vertical height. This
provision is similar to that used in reinforced concrete
construction.
Article 3.5A of the MSJC Specification requires that
grout be placed within 11/2 hours from the introduction
of water into the mix. The 2008 edition exempts transitmixed grout from this requirement, as long as the grout
meets the specified slump.
NCMA TEK 1-2C
REFERENCES
1. Specification for Masonry Structures, TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2005 and 2008.
2. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. Reported by the Masonry Standards
Joint Committee, 2005 and 2008.
3. International Building Code. International Code Council, 2006 and 2009.
4. Compressive Strength Evaluation of Concrete Masonry, TEK 18-1A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
5. Concrete Masonry Inspection, TEK 18-3B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2006.
6. All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-1C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
7. Self-Consolidating Grout for Concrete Masonry, TEK 9-2B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
8. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C90-09. ASTM International, 2009.
9. Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms, ASTM C1314-07. ASTM International, 2007.
10. ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 1-1E. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
11. Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry, 12-4D. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
12. Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry, ASTM C270-07a. ASTM International, 2007.
13. Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-8A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
14. Grouting Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 3-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
15. Bracing Masonry Walls During Construction, TEK 3-4B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
16. Anchors and Ties for Masonry, TEK 12-1A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
17. Post-Tensioned Concrete Masonry Wall Construction, TEK 3-14. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
18. Cleaning Concrete Masonry, TEK 8-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
19. Levels of Quality, Standard AMG 107-98. Arizona Masonry Guild, 1998.
NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and liability for the
accuracy and the application of the information contained in this publication.

www.ncma.org
To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK Index, contact NCMA Publications (703) 713-1900
Provided by:
NCMA TEK 1-2C
NCMA TEK
BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS

FOR CONCRETE MASONRY
TEK 1-3C
Keywords: building codes, construction, masonry design,

quality assurance, specifications
INTRODUCTION
2003 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
The majority of jurisdictions in the United States adopt

a national model code, most commonly the International
Building Code (IBC) (refs. 1, 2), as the basis of their building
code. The intent of the IBC is to reference and coordinate
other standardized documents, rather than to develop design
and construction provisions from scratch. With this in mind,
the IBC masonry design and construction provisions are
based primarily on Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (MSJC code) (refs. 3, 4) and Specification for
Masonry Structures (MSJC specification) (refs. 5, 6).
The code adoption process is shown schematically in
Figure 1. In adopting the MSJC code and specification, the
IBC typically amends or modifies some provisions. Similarly,
depending on state laws, modifications can be made to the
IBC at the state or local level to better suit local building
practices or design traditions. However, most state codes
require that any modifications to the IBC be more stringent
than the corresponding requirement in the IBC.
Because significant changes can be introduced into
subsequent editions of both the MSJC and IBC, the edition
referenced by the local building code can be an important
consideration when determining the specific requirements to
be met. Note that code officials will often accept more current
design and construction standards than those referenced in
the code, as they represent more state-of-the-art requirements
for a specific material or system.
To help determine which code provisions apply and highlight changes of note, this TEK outlines the major modifications
to the MSJC code and specification made in the 2003 and
2006 IBC, as well as the principal changes made between the
2002 and 2005 editions of the MSJC code and specification.
Note that the scope of the MSJC code and specification covers structural design and construction. Hence, requirements
for items such as fire resistance, sound insulation and energy
efficiency are not addressed in the MSJC documents.
The 2003 International Building Code (ref. 1) adopts

by reference the 2002 editions of the MSJC code and MSJC
specification (refs. 3, 5). The MSJC code covers the design
of concrete masonry, clay masonry, glass unit masonry, stone
masonry, as well as masonry veneer. The MSJC code requires
compliance with the MSJC specification, which governs
masonry construction requirements and quality assurance
provisions (see also TEK 1-2B, ref. 7).
N
a
t
i
o
n
a
l
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
Consensus process
MSJC Code and

Specification
adoption with modifications
and additions
International
Building Code
adoption, possibly
with modifications
State/
local
process
State or Local
Building Code
Figure 1Masonry Structural Code

Development Process
9
TEK 1-3C 2007 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEK 1-3B)
The 2002 MSJC Code and Specification

Compared to earlier editions of the MSJC code and
specification, updates included in the 2002 edition are summarized below.
Masonry Design
Changes to masonry design provisions included:
for the design of masonry structures, the 2002 MSJC code
included new strength design provisions (see TEK 14-4A,
ref. 8), offering a design method in addition to allowable
stress design and empirical design,
revised seismic design requirements, including prescriptive
shear wall reinforcement (see TEK 14-18A, ref. 9) and
transition from Seismic Performance Categories to Seismic
Design Categories (SDCs) (see TEK 14-18A, ref. 9),
for allowable stress design, revised allowable flexural
tension values for unreinforced grouted masonry elements
when subjected to flexural tension perpendicular to the bed
joints,
new prohibition on the use of wall ties with drips (bends
intended to inhibit moisture migration from one masonry
wythe to the other),
for empirical design, revised wind speed threshold from
a design wind pressure of 25 psf (1,197 MPa) to a wind
speed of 110 mph (145 km/h) three-second gust,
for empirical design, revised shear wall spacing requirements (see TEK 14-8A, ref. 10), and
revisions to the types of masonry veneer permitted to be
supported by wood construction (see TEK 3-6B, ref. 11).
Construction and Quality Assurance
Specification revisions included:
new corrosion protection requirements for joint reinforcement, anchors and ties depending on their intended use or
exposure conditions (see TEK 12-4D, ref. 12),
new prestressed masonry quality assurance provisions for
Level 2 (moderate) and Level 3 (rigorous) programs (see
TEK 18-3B, ref. 13),
the addition of grout demonstration panels as a means
of meeting grout pour requirements (see TEK 3-2A, ref.
14),
revised cold weather construction requirements, including
new protection procedures for grouted masonry (see TEK
3-1C, ref. 15),
new veneer anchor placement requirements (see TEK 3-6B,
ref. 11), and
updating of ASTM C 270 (ref. 16) mortar specification
tables to include mortar cement.
Differences Between the 2003 IBC and the 2002 MSJC
The 2002 editions of the MSJC code and specification are
included in their entirety (by reference) in the 2003 IBC. The
IBC modifies several areas of the MSJC code and specification applicable to concrete masonry. The most significant of
these are summarized below. In addition, quality assurance
provisions are close, but not identical between the IBC and
MSJC.
Seismic Design Requirements

The IBC bases loads on ASCE 7-02 (ref. 17), rather than
the 1998 edition (ref. 18) referenced by the MSJC,
the IBC includes prescriptive seismic requirements for posttensioned masonry shear walls, which are not included in
the MSJC, and
the IBC has some more stringent seismic requirements than
the MSJC, applicable to SDCs B, C, D, E and F.
Allowable Stress Design
For masonry designed using allowable stress design
procedures, the IBC:
modifies load combinations to be based on IBC section
1605, rather than those in MSJC code section 2.1.2.1,
modifies minimum inspections required during construction,
includes separate design requirements for columns used
only to support light-frame roofs of carports, porches,
sheds or similar structures with a maximum area of 450
ft2 (41.8 m2) and assigned to Seismic Design category A,
B or C,
modifies the minimum required lap splice length for reinforcing bars (Note that development length and corresponding
lap splice length requirements have changed frequently
in recent years. NCMA recommends using the lap splice
requirements published in the 2006 IBC. See TEK 12-4D
(ref. 12) for more detailed information.),
sets a maximum reinforcing bar size based on the size of
the cell or collar joint where the reinforcement is placed
(see ref. 12), and
sets a limit on the amount of reinforcement permitted in
the in-plane direction for special reinforced masonry shear
walls.
Strength Design
For masonry designed using strength design procedures,
the IBC:
sets a maximum width for the equivalent stress block of six
times the nominal thickness of the masonry wall or spacing
between reinforcement (whichever is less), or six times
the thickness of the flange for in-plane bending of flange
walls,
modifies welded and mechanical splice requirements (see
ref. 12), and
adds maximum reinforcement percentage for special posttensioned masonry shear walls.
Empirical Design
The IBC includes empirical design procedures within the
body of the code and references the MSJC code as an alternate
means of compliance. However, the IBC and MSJC empirical
requirements are essentially the same, except that the IBC also
includes:
an exception allowing shear walls of one-story buildings
to be a minimum of 6 in. (152 mm) thick, rather than 8 in.
(203 mm),
provisions for empirically-designed surface-bonded masonry
walls, and
10
additional parapet wall requirements, covering flashing and

copings.
2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
The 2006 International Building Code (ref. 2) adopts
by reference the 2005 editions of the MSJC code and MSJC
specification (refs. 4, 6). The first section below highlights the
major changes between the 2002 and 2005 MSJC code and
specification. The following section summarizes important
changes between the 2005 MSJC and the 2006 IBC.
The 2005 MSJC Code and Specification
Compared to the 2002 edition of the MSJC code and
specification, the 2005 edition includes the following changes
and additions.
Allowable Stress Design
For masonry designed using allowable stress design
procedures:
the use of the one-third increase in allowable stresses has
been tied to specific load combinations,
the minimum required lap splice and development lengths
for reinforcing bars are the same for allowable stress design
and strength design (Note that development length and corresponding lap splice length requirements have changed
frequently in recent years. NCMA recommends using the
lap splice requirements published in the 2006 IBC. See TEK
12-4D (ref. 12) for more detailed information.), and
in-plane allowable flexural tension has been changed from
zero to be the same value as for out-of-plane flexural tension.
Strength Design
For masonry designed using strength design procedures:
the 2005 MSJC code includes explicit bearing strength
provisions,
the modulus of rupture for in-plane bending is now the same
as that for out-of-plane bending,
the maximum reinforcement limits have been modified,
based on less restrictive assumptions that are related directly
to the expected seismic ductility demand,
new provisions for noncontact splices have been added,
the minimum required lap splice and development lengths
for reinforcing bars are the same for allowable stress design
and strength design (Note that development length and corresponding lap splice length requirements have changed
frequently in recent years. NCMA recommends using the
lap splice requirements published in the 2006 IBC. See TEK
12-4D (ref. 12) for more detailed information.), and
provisions for computing effective compression width
have been added, using the same requirements historically
employed for allowable stress design.
Other Revisions
The post-tensioned masonry design provisions have been
updated. The most significant change is that design is now
based on strength design with serviceability checks, rather
than on allowable stress design with strength checks, making
the design procedures easier to use for those accustomed to
strength design of prestressed concrete.
For grouted masonry, the maximum grout lift height has
been increased from 5 ft to 12 ft-8 in (1.5 to 3.9 m) under controlled conditions, such as a consistent grout slump between
10 and 11 in. (254 and 279 mm), the absence of reinforced
bond beams between the top and bottom of the grout pour, and
a minimum masonry curing time of 4 hours prior to grouting.
See TEK 3-2A (ref. 14) for further information.
Empirical design includes several revisions to the limitations that define where empirical design can be used.
In the 2002 MSJC documents, the three levels of quality
assurance were designated Levels 1, 2 and 3, which were replaced by Levels A, B and C, respectively in the 2005 edition.
This change in nomenclature is wholly editorial and does not
affect the requirements specified for each level.
For masonry veneers, prescriptive seismic requirements
have been modified (several requirements that previously applied in SDC D and higher now apply in SDC E and higher),
and new prescriptive requirements have been introduced for
areas with high winds (wind speeds between 110 and 130 mph
(177 and 209 km/hr)).
Prescriptive requirements for corbelled masonry have
been moved from the empirical design chapter to Chapter 1,
making the corbel requirements independent of the design
procedure used.
In addition, design and construction provisions for autoclaved aerated concrete (AAC) appear in the MSJC for the
first time.
Differences Between the 2006 IBC and the 2005 MSJC
The 2005 editions of the MSJC code and specification
are included in their entirety (by reference) in the 2006 IBC.
In addition to the modifications listed under the 2003 IBC
(which are also included in the 2006 IBC unless noted below), the 2006 IBC modifies several areas of the MSJC code
and specification applicable to concrete masonry. The most
significant of these are summarized below.
Development length and minimum lap splice length for
reinforcing bars has been updated to 48 bar diameters for
Grade 60 steel, with some exceptions. See TEK 12-4D (ref.
12) for more detailed information.
Design loads and load combinations are based on ASCE
7-05 (ref. 19), rather than ASCE 7-02.
For grouted masonry, the IBC requires a "grout key" between
grout pours, i.e. a horizontal construction joint formed by
stopping the grout pour 11/2 in. (38 mm) below a mortar
joint.
For certain special reinforced masonry shear walls, the IBC
prescribes a maximum reinforcement percentage, applicable
in the in-plane direction.
11
REFERENCES
3. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
5. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, 2002.
Committee, 2005.
7. Specification for Masonry Structures, TEK 1-2B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
8. Strength Design of Concrete Masonry, TEK 14-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
9. Prescriptive Seismic Reinforcement Requirements for Masonry Structures, TEK 14-18A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
10. Empirical Design of Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 14-8A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
11. Concrete Masonry Veneers, TEK 3-6B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
12. Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-4D. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2006.
13. Concrete Masonry Inspection, TEK 18-3B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2006.
14. Grouting Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 3-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
15. All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-1C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
16. Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry, ASTM C 270-99b. ASTM International, Inc., 1999.
17. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7-02. American Society of Civil Engineers, 2002.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

12
NCMA TEK
GLOSSARY OF
CONCRETE MASONRY TERMS
Keywords: definitions, glossary, terminology
A block: Hollow masonry unit with one end closed by a
cross web and the opposite end open or lacking an end cross
web. (See Open end block.)
Absorption: The difference in the amount of water contained
within a concrete masonry unit between saturated and ovendry conditions, expressed as weight of water per cubic foot
of concrete. [4]
Accelerator: A liquid or powder admixture added to a
cementitious paste to speed hydration and promote early
strength development. An example of an accelerator material
is calcium nitrite.
Adhesive anchor : An anchoring device that is placed in a
predrilled hole and secured using a chemical compound.
Admixture: Substance other than prescribed materials of
water, aggregate and cementitious materials added to
concrete, mortar or grout to improve one or more chemical
or physical properties. [3]
Aggregate: An inert granular or powdered material such as
natural sand, manufactured sand, gravel, crushed stone, slag,
fines and lightweight aggregate, which, when bound together
by a cementitious matrix forms concrete, grout or mortar. [3]
Air entraining: The capability of a material or process to
develop a system of uniformly distributed microscopic air
bubbles in a cementitious paste to increase the workability
or durability of the resulting product. Some admixtures act
as air entraining agents.
Anchor: Metal rod, tie, bolt or strap used to secure masonry
to other elements. May be cast, adhered, expanded or
fastened into masonry. [1]
Angle: A structural steel section that has two legs joined at 90
degrees to one another. Used as a lintel to support masonry
over openings such as doors or windows in lieu of a masonry
arch or reinforced masonry lintel. Also used as a shelf to
vertically support masonry veneer. Sometimes referred to
as a relieving angle.
Arch: A vertically curved compressive structural member
spanning openings or recesses. May also be built flat by
using special masonry shapes or specially placed units.
Area, gross cross-sectional: The area delineated by the out-toout dimensions of masonry in the plane under consideration.
This includes the total area of a section perpendicular to the
TEK 1-4
direction of the load, including areas within cells and voids. [1]
Area, net cross-sectional: The area of masonry units, grout
and mortar crossed by the plane under consideration, based
on out-to-out dimensions and neglecting the area of all voids
such as ungrouted cores, open spaces, or any other area
devoid of masonry. [1]
Axial load: The load exerted on a wall or other structural
element and acting parallel to the elements axis. Axial loads
typically act in a vertical direction, but may be otherwise
depending on the type and orientation of the element.
Backing: The wall or surface to which veneer is secured. The
backing material may be concrete, masonry, steel framing or
wood framing. [1]
Beam: A structural member, typically horizontal, designed to
primarily resist flexure.
Burnished block: (See Ground face block.)
Bedded area: The surface area of a masonry unit that is in
contact with mortar in the plane of the mortar joint.
Blast furnace slag cement: A blended cement which
incorporates blast furnace slag.
Blended cement: Portland cement or air-entrained portland
cement combined through blending with such materials as
blast furnace slag or pozzolan, which is usually fly ash. May
be used as an alternative to portland cement in mortar.
Block: A solid or hollow unit larger than brick-sized units. (See
also Concrete block, concrete masonry unit, masonry unit)
Block machine: Equipment used to mold, consolidate and
compact shapes when manufacturing concrete masonry units.
Bond: (1) The arrangement of units to provide strength, stability
or a unique visual effect created by laying units in a prescribed
pattern. See reference 6 for illustrations and descriptions of
common masonry bond patterns. (2) The physical adhesive or
mechanical binding between masonry units, mortar, grout and
reinforcement. (3) To connect wythes or masonry units.
Bond beam: (1) The grouted course or courses of masonry
units reinforced with longitudinal bars and designed to take
the longitudinal flexural and tensile forces that may be
induced in a masonry wall. (2) A horizontal grouted element
within masonry in which reinforcement is embedded.
Bond beam block: A hollow unit with depressed webs or with
"knock-out" webs (which are removed prior to placement)
to accommodate horizontal reinforcement and grout.
Bond breaker: A material used to prevent adhesion between
two surfaces.
13
TEK 1-4 2004 National Concrete Masonry Association
Bond, running: The placement of masonry units such that head

joints in successive courses are horizontally offset at least onequarter the unit length. [1] Centering head joints over the unit
below, called center or half bond, is the most common form of
running bond. A horizontal offset between head joints in
successive courses of one-third and one-quarter the unit length
is called third bond and quarter bond, respectively.
Bond, stack: For structural design purposes, Building Code
Requirements for Masonry Structures considers all masonry not
laid in running bond as stack bond. [1] In common use, stack bond
typically refers to masonry laid so head joints in successive courses
are vertically aligned. Also called plumb joint bond, straight stack,
jack bond, jack-on-jack and checkerboard bond.
Bond strength: The resistance to separation of mortar from
masonry units and of mortar and grout from reinforcing steel
and other materials with which it is in contact.
Brick: A solid or hollow manufactured masonry unit of either
concrete, clay or stone.
Cantilever: A member structurally supported at only one end
through a fixed connection. The opposite end has no structural
support.
Cap block: A solid slab used as a coping unit. May contain
ridges, bevels or slopes to facilitate drainage. (See also
Coping block.)
Cavity: A continuous air space between wythes of masonry or
between masonry and its backup system. Typically greater
than 2 in. (51 mm) in thickness. (See Collar joint.)
Cell: The hollow space within a concrete masonry unit formed
by the face shells and webs. Also called core.
Cementitious material: A generic term for any inorganic material
including cement, pozzolanic or other finely divided mineral
admixtures or other reactive admixtures, or a mixture of such
materials that sets and develops strength by chemical reaction with
water. In general, the following are considered cementitious
materials: portland cement, hydraulic cements, lime putty, hydrated
lime, pozzolans and ground granulated blast furnace slag. [3]
Cleanout/cleanout hole: An opening of sufficient size and
spacing so as to allow removal of debris from the bottom of
the grout space. Typically located in the first course of
masonry. [2]
Cold weather construction: Procedures used to construct
masonry when ambient air temperature or masonry unit
temperature is below 40F (4.4C).
Collar joint: A vertical longitudinal space between wythes of
masonry or between masonry wythe and backup construction,
sometimes filled with mortar or grout. Typically less than 2
in. (51 mm) in thickness. [1] (See also Cavity.)
Color (pigment): A compatible, color fast, chemically stable
admixture that gives a cementitious matrix its coloring.
Column: (1) In structures, a relatively long, slender structural
compression member such as a post, pillar, or strut. Usually
vertical, a column supports loads that act primarily in the
direction of its longitudinal axis. (2) For the purposes of design,
an isolated vertical member whose horizontal dimension measured
at right angles to the thickness does not exceed 3 times its thickness
and whose height is greater than 4 times it thickness. [1]
Composite action: Transfer of stress between components of
a member designed so that in resisting loads, the combined
components act together as a single member. [1]
Compressive strength: The maximum compressive load that
a specimen will support divided by the net cross-sectional
area of the specimen.
Compressive strength of masonry: Maximum compressive

force resisted per unit of net cross-sectional area of masonry,
determined by testing masonry prisms or as a function of
individual masonry units, mortar and grout in accordance
with ref. 2. [2] (See also Specified compressive strength of
masonry.)
Concrete: A composite material that consists of a water reactive
binding medium, water and aggregate (usually a combination
of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate) with or without
admixtures. In portland cement concrete, the binder is a
mixture of portland cement, water and may contain admixtures.
Concrete block: A hollow or solid concrete masonry unit.
Larger in size than a concrete brick.
Concrete brick: A concrete hollow or solid unit smaller in
size than a concrete block.
Concrete masonry unit: Hollow or solid masonry unit,
manufactured using low frequency, high amplitude vibration
to consolidate concrete of stiff or extremely dry consistency.
Connector: A mechanical device for securing two or more
pieces, parts or members together; includes anchors, wall ties
and fasteners. May be either structural or nonstructural. [1]
Connector, tie: A metal device used to join wythes of masonry
in a multiwythe wall or to attach a masonry veneer to its
backing. [1] (See also Anchor.)
Control joint: A continuous unbonded masonry joint that is
formed, sawed or tooled in a masonry structure to regulate
the location and amount of cracking and separation resulting
from dimensional changes of different parts of the structure,
thereby avoiding the development of high stresses.
Coping: The materials or masonry units used to form the
finished top of a wall, pier, chimney or pilaster to protect the
masonry below from water penetration.
Coping block: A solid concrete masonry unit intended for use
as the top finished course in wall construction.
Corbel: A projection of successive courses from the face of
masonry. [1]
Core: (See Cell.)
Corrosion resistant: A material that is treated or coated to
retard corrosive action. An example is steel that is galvanized
after fabrication.
Course: A horizontal layer of masonry units in a wall or, much
less commonly, curved over an arch.
Crack control: Methods used to control the extent, size and
location of cracking in masonry including reinforcing steel,
control joints and dimensional stability of masonry materials.
Cull: A masonry unit that does not meet the standards or
specifications and therefore has been rejected.
Curing: (1) The maintenance of proper conditions of moisture
and temperature during initial set to develop a required
strength and reduce shrinkage in products containing portland
cement. (2) The initial time period during which cementitious
materials gain strength.
Damp-proofing: The treatment of masonry to retard the
passage or absorption of water or water vapor, either by
application of a suitable coating or membrane to exposed
surfaces or by use of a suitable admixture or treated cement.
Damp check: An impervious horizontal layer to prevent
vertical penetration of water in a wall or other masonry
element. A damp check consists of either a course of solid
masonry, metal or a thin layer of asphaltic or bituminous
material. It is generally placed near grade to prevent upward
14
migration of moisture by capillary action.
Diaphragm: A roof or floor system designed to transmit

lateral forces to shear walls or other lateral load resisting
elements. [1]
Dimension, actual: The measured size of a concrete masonry
unit or assemblage.
Dimension, nominal: The specified dimension plus an
allowance for mortar joints, typically 3/8 in. (9.5 mm).
Nominal dimensions are usually stated in whole numbers.
Width (thickness) is given first, followed by height and then
length. [1]
Dimension, specified: The dimensions specified for the
manufacture or construction of a unit, joint or element.
Unless otherwise stated, all calculations are based on
specified dimensions. Actual dimensions may vary from
specified dimensions by permissible variations. [1]
Dowel: A metal reinforcing bar used to connect masonry to
masonry or to concrete.
Drip: A groove or slot cut beneath and slightly behind the
forward edge of a projecting unit or element, such as a sill,
lintel or coping, to cause rainwater to drip off and prevent it
from penetrating the wall.
Drying shrinkage: The change in linear dimension of a
concrete masonry wall or unit due to drying.
Dry stack: Masonry work laid without mortar.
Eccentricity: The distance between the resultant of an applied
load and the centroidal axis of the masonry element under
load.
Effective height: Clear height of a braced member between
lateral supports and used for calculating the slenderness
ratio of the member. [1]
Effective thickness: The assumed thickness of a member used
to calculate the slenderness ratio.
Efflorescence: A deposit or encrustation of soluble salts (generally
white), that may form on the surface of stone, brick, concrete
or mortar when moisture moves through the masonry materials
and evaporates on the surface. In new construction, sometimes
referred to as new building bloom. Once the structure dries, the
bloom normally disappears or is removed with water.
Equivalent thickness: The solid thickness to which a hollow
unit would be reduced if the material in the unit were recast
into a unit with the same face dimensions (height and length)
but without voids. The equivalent thickness of a 100% solid
unit is equal to the actual thickness. Used primarily to
determine masonry fire resistance ratings.
Expansion anchor: An anchoring device (based on a friction
grip) in which an expandable socket expands, causing a
wedge action, as a bolt is tightened into it.
Face: (1) The surface of a wall or masonry unit. (2) The
surface of a unit designed to be exposed in the finished
masonry.
Face shell: The outer wall of a hollow concrete masonry unit. [5]
Face shell mortar bedding: Hollow masonry unit construction
where mortar is applied only to the horizontal surface of the
unit face shells and the head joints to a depth equal to the
thickness of the face shell. No mortar is applied to the unit
cross webs. (See also Full mortar bedding.)
Facing: Any material forming a part of a wall and used as a
finished surface.
Fastener: A device used to attach components to masonry,
typically nonstructural in nature.
Fire resistance: A rating assigned to walls indicating the
length of time a wall performs as a barrier to the passage of
flame, hot gases and heat when subjected to a standardized

fire and hose stream test. For masonry, fire resistance is most
often determined based on the masonrys equivalent thickness
and aggregate type.
Flashing: A thin impervious material placed in mortar joints
and through air spaces in masonry to prevent water penetration
and to facilitate water drainage.
Fly ash: The finely divided residue resulting from the
combustion of ground or powdered coal.
Footing: A structural element that transmits loads directly to
the soil.
Freeze-thaw durability: The ability to resist damage from
the cyclic freezing and thawing of moisture in materials and
the resultant expansion and contraction.
Full mortar bedding: Masonry construction where mortar is
applied to the entire horizontal surface of the masonry unit
and the head joints to a depth equal to the thickness of the
face shell. (See also Face shell mortar bedding.)
Glass unit masonry: Masonry composed of glass units
bonded by mortar. [1]
Glazed block: A concrete masonry unit with a permanent
smooth resinous tile facing applied during manufacture.
Also called prefaced block.
Ground face block: A concrete masonry unit in which the
surface is ground to a smooth finish exposing the internal
matrix and aggregate of the unit. Also called burnished or
honed block.
Grout: (1) A plastic mixture of cementitious materials,
aggregates, water, with or without admixtures initially
produced to pouring consistency without segregation of the
constituents during placement. [3] (2) The hardened
equivalent of such mixtures.
Grout, prestressing: A cementitious mixture used to
encapsulate bonded prestressing tendons. [2]
Grout, self-consolidating: Highly fluid and stable grout used
in high lift and low lift grouting that does not require
consolidation or reconsolidation.
Grout lift: An increment of grout height within a total grout
pour. A grout pour consists of one or more grout lifts. [2]
Grout pour: The total height of masonry to be grouted prior
to erection of additional masonry. A grout pour consists of
one or more grout lifts. [2]
Grouted masonry: (1) Masonry construction of hollow units
where hollow cells are filled with grout, or multiwythe
construction in which the space between wythes is solidly
filled with grout. (2) Masonry construction using solid
masonry units where the interior joints and voids are filled
with grout.
Grouting, high lift: The technique of grouting masonry in lifts
for the full height of the wall.
Grouting, low lift: The technique of grouting as the wall is
constructed, usually to scaffold or bond beam height, but not
greater than 4 to 6 ft (1,219 to 1,829 mm), depending on code
limitations.
H block: Hollow masonry unit lacking cross webs at both
ends forming an H in cross section. Used with reinforced
masonry construction. (See also Open end block.)
Header: A masonry unit that connects two or more adjacent
wythes of masonry. Also called a bonder. [1]
Height of wall: (1) The vertical distance from the foundation
wall or other similar intermediate support to the top of the
15
wall. (2) The vertical distance between intermediate supports.
Height-to-thickness ratio: The height of a masonry wall

divided by its nominal thickness. The thickness of cavity
walls is taken as the overall thickness minus the width of the
cavity.
High lift grouting: (See Grouting, high lift.)
Hollow masonry unit: A unit whose net cross-sectional area
in any plane parallel to the bearing surface is less than 75 %
of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
[4]
Honed block: (See Ground face block.)
Hot weather construction: Procedures used to construct
masonry when ambient air temperature exceeds 100F
(37.8C) or temperature exceeds 90F (32.2C) with a wind
speed greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Inspection: The observations to verify that the masonry
construction meets the requirements of the applicable design
standards and contract documents.
Jamb block: A block specially formed for the jamb of windows
or doors, generally with a vertical slot to receive window
frames, etc. Also called sash block.
Joint: The surface at which two members join or abut. If they
are held together by mortar, the mortar-filled volume is the
joint.
Joint reinforcement: Steel wires placed in mortar bed joints
(over the face shells in hollow masonry). Multi-wire joint
reinforcement assemblies have cross wires welded between
the longitudinal wires at regular intervals.
Lap: (1) The distance two bars overlap when forming a splice.
(2) The distance one masonry unit extends over another.
Lap splice: The connection between reinforcing steel generated
by overlapping the ends of the reinforcement.
Lateral support: The means of bracing structural members in
the horizontal span by columns, buttresses, pilasters or cross
walls, or in the vertical span by beams, floors, foundations,
or roofs.
Lightweight aggregate: Natural or manufactured aggregate
of low density, such as expanded or sintered clay, shale,
slate, diatomaceous shale, perlite, vermiculite, slag, natural
pumice, volcanic cinders, diatomite, sintered fly ash or
industrial cinders.
Lightweight concrete masonry unit: A unit whose oven-dry
density is less than 105 lb/ft3 (1,680 kg/m3). [4]
Lime: Calcium oxide (CaO), a general term for the various
chemical and physical forms of quicklime, hydrated lime
and hydraulic hydrated lime.
Lintel: A beam placed or constructed over a wall opening to
carry the superimposed load.
Lintel block: A U-shaped masonry unit, placed with the open
side up to accommodate horizontal reinforcement and grout
to form a continuous beam. Also called channel block.
Loadbearing: (See Wall, loadbearing.)
Low lift grouting: (See Grouting, low lift.)
Manufactured masonry unit: A man-made noncombustible
building product intended to be laid by hand and joined by
mortar, grout or other methods. [5]
Masonry: An assemblage of masonry units, joined with
mortar, grout or other accepted methods. [5]
Masonry cement: (1) A mill-mixed cementitious material to
which sand and water is added to make mortar. (2) Hydraulic
cement produced for use in mortars for masonry construction.
Medium weight concrete masonry unit: A unit whose ovendry density is at least 105 lb/ft3 (1,680 kg/m3) but less than
125 lb/ft3 (2,000 kg/m3). [4]

Metric: The Systeme Internationale (SI), the standard
international system of measurement. Hard metric refers to
products or materials manufactured to metric specified
dimensions. Soft metric refers to products or materials
manufactured to English specified dimensions, then
converted into metric dimensions.
Mix design: The proportions of materials used to produce
mortar, grout or concrete.
Modular coordination: The designation of masonry units,
door and window frames, and other construction components
that fit together during construction without customization.
Modular design: Construction with standardized units or
dimensions for flexibility and variety in use.
Moisture content: The amount of water contained within a
unit at the time of sampling expressed as a percentage of the
total amount of water in the unit when saturated. [4]
Mortar: (1) A mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate
water, with or without admixtures, used to construct unit
masonry assemblages. [3] (2) The hardened equivalent of
such mixtures.
Mortar bed: A horizontal layer of mortar used to seat a
masonry unit.
Mortar bond: (See Bond.)
Mortar joint, bed: The horizontal layer of mortar between
masonry units. [1]
Mortar joint, head: The vertical mortar joint placed between
masonry units within the wythe. [1]
Mortar joint profile: The finished shape of the exposed
portion of the mortar joint. Common profiles include:
Concave: Produced with a rounded jointer, this is the standard
mortar joint unless otherwise specified. Recommended for
exterior walls because it easily sheds water.
Raked: A joint where 1/4 to 1/2 in. (6.4 to 13 mm) is removed
from the outside of the joint.
Struck: An approximately flush joint. See also Strike.
Net section: The minimum cross section of the member under
consideration.
Nonloadbearing: (See Wall, nonloadbearing.)
Normal weight concrete masonry unit: A unit whose ovendry density is 125 lb/ft3 (2000 kg/m3) or greater. [4]
Open end block: A hollow unit, with one or both ends open.
Used primarily with reinforced masonry construction. (See
A block and H block.)
Parging: (1) A coating of mortar, which may contain dampproofing ingredients, over a surface. (2) The process of
applying such a coating.
Pier: An isolated column of masonry or a bearing wall not
bonded at the sides to associated masonry. For design, a
vertical member whose horizontal dimension measured at
right angles to its thickness is not less than three times its
thickness nor greater than six times its thickness and whose
height is less than five times its length. [1]
Pigment: (See Color.)
Pilaster: A bonded or keyed column of masonry built as part
of a wall. It may be flush or project from either or both wall
surfaces. It has a uniform cross section throughout its height
and serves as a vertical beam, a column or both.
Pilaster block: Concrete masonry units designed for use in the
construction of plain or reinforced concrete masonry pilasters
and columns.
16
Plain masonry: (See Unreinforced masonry.)
Plaster: (See "Stucco.")

Plasticizer: An ingredient such as an admixture incorporated
into a cementitious material to increase its workability,
flexibility or extensibility.
Post-tensioning: A method of prestressing in which
prestressing tendons are tensioned after the masonry has
been placed. [1] See also Wall, prestressed.
Prestressing tendon: Steel element such as wire, bar or
strand, used to impart prestress to masonry. [1]
Prism: A small assemblage made with masonry units and mortar
and sometimes grout. Primarily used for quality control purposes
to assess the strength of full-scale masonry members.
Prism strength: Maximum compressive force resisted per
unit of net cross-sectional area of masonry, determined by
testing masonry prisms.
Project specifications: The written documents that specify
project requirements in accordance with the service
parameters and other specific criteria established by the
owner or owners agent.
Quality assurance: The administrative and procedural
requirements established by the contract documents and by
code to assure that constructed masonry is in compliance
with the contract documents. [1]
Quality control: The planned system of activities used to
provide a level of quality that meets the needs of the users
and the use of such a system. The objective of quality control
is to provide a system that is safe, adequate, dependable and
economic. The overall program involves integrating factors
including: the proper specification; production to meet the
full intent of the specification; inspection to determine
whether the resulting material, product and service is in
accordance with the specifications; and review of usage to
determine any necessary revisions to the specifications.
Reinforced masonry: (1) Masonry containing reinforcement
in the mortar joints or grouted cores used to resist stresses.
(2) Unit masonry in which reinforcement is embedded in
such a manner that the component materials act together to
resist applied forces.
Reinforcing steel: Steel embedded in masonry in such a
manner that the two materials act together to resist forces.
Retarding agent: An ingredient or admixture in mortar that
slows setting or hardening, most commonly in the form of
finely ground gypsum.
Ribbed block: A block with projecting ribs (with either a
rectangular or circular profile) on the face for aesthetic
purposes. Also called fluted.
Sash block: (See Jamb block.)
Scored block: A block with grooves on the face for aesthetic
purposes. For example, the grooves may simulate raked joints.
Screen block: An open-faced masonry unit used for decorative
purposes or to partially screen areas from the sun or from view.
Shell: (See Face shell.)
Shoring and bracing: The props or posts used to temporarily
support members during construction.
Shrinkage: The decrease in volume due to moisture loss, decrease
in temperature or carbonation of a cementitious material.
Sill: A flat or slightly beveled unit set horizontally at the base
of an opening in a wall.
Simply supported: A member structurally supported at top
and bottom or both sides through a pin-type connection,
which assumes no moment transfer.
Slenderness ratio: (1) The ratio of a members effective
height to radius of gyration. (2) The ratio of a member's

height to thickness.
Slump: (1) The drop in the height of a cementitious material
from its original shape when in a plastic state. (2) A
standardized measurement of a plastic cementitious material
to determine its flow and workability.
Slump block: A concrete masonry unit produced so that it
slumps or sags in irregular fashion before it hardens.
Slushed joint: A mortar joint filled after units are laid by
throwing mortar in with the edge of a trowel.
Solid masonry unit: A unit whose net cross-sectional area in
every plane parallel to the bearing surface is 75 percent or more
of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane. [4]
Note that Canadian standards define a solid unit as 100% solid.
Spall: To flake or split away due to internal or external forces
such as frost action, pressure, dimensional changes after
installation, vibration, impact, or some combination.
Specified dimensions: (See Dimension, specified.)
Specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm: Minimum
masonry compressive strength required by contract
documents, upon which the project design is based (expressed
in terms of force per unit of net cross-sectional area). [1]
Split block: A concrete masonry unit with one or more faces
purposely fractured to produce a rough texture for aesthetic
purposes. Also called a split-faced or rock-faced block.
Stirrup: Shear reinforcement in a flexural member. [1]
Strike: To finish a mortar joint with a stroke of the trowel or
special tool, simultaneously removing extruded mortar and
smoothing the surface of the mortar remaining in the joint.
Stucco: A combination of cement and aggregate mixed with a
suitable amount of water to form a plastic mixture that will
adhere to a surface and preserve the texture imposed on it.
Temper: To moisten and mix mortar to a proper consistency.
Thermal movement: Dimension change due to temperature
change.
Tie: (See Connector, tie.)
Tolerance: The specified allowance in variation from a
specified size, location, or placement.
Tooling: Compressing and shaping the face of a mortar joint
with a tool other than a trowel. See "Mortar joint profile" for
definitions of common joints.
Unreinforced masonry: Masonry in which the tensile
resistance of the masonry is taken into consideration and the
resistance of reinforcement, if present, is neglected. Also
called plain masonry. [1]
Veneer, adhered: Masonry veneer secured to and supported
by the backing through adhesion. [2]
Veneer, anchored: Masonry veneer secured to and supported
laterally by the backing through anchors and supported
vertically by the foundation or other structural elements.
Veneer, masonry: A masonry wythe that provides the finish
of a wall system and transfers out-of-plane loads directly to
a backing, but is not considered to add load resisting
capacity to the wall system. [1]
Wall, bonded: A masonry wall in which two or more wythes
are bonded to act as a composite structural unit.
Wall, cavity: A multiwythe noncomposite masonry wall with
a continuous air space within the wall (with or without
insulation), which is tied together with metal ties. [1]
Wall, composite: A multiwythe wall where the individual
masonry wythes act together to resist applied loads. (See
17
also Composite action.)
Wall, curtain: (1) A nonloadbearing wall between columns or

piers. (2) A nonloadbearing exterior wall vertically supported
only at its base, or having bearing support at prescribed
vertical intervals. (3) An exterior nonloadbearing wall in
skeleton frame construction. Such walls may be anchored to
columns, spandrel beams or floors, but not
Wall, foundation: A wall below the floor nearest grade serving
as a support for a wall, pier, column or other structural part of
a building and in turn supported by a footing.
Wall, loadbearing: Wall that supports vertical load in addition
to its own weight. By code, a wall carrying vertical loads
greater than 200 lb/ft (2.9 kN/m) in addition to its own weight. [1]
Wall, multiwythe: Wall composed of 2 or more masonry
wythes.
Wall, nonloadbearing: A wall that supports no vertical load
other than its own weight. By code, a wall carrying vertical
loads less than 200 lb/ft (2.9 kN/m) in addition to its own
weight. [1]
Wall, panel: (1) An exterior nonloadbearing wall in skeleton
frame construction, wholly supported at each story. (2) A
nonloadbearing exterior masonry wall having bearing support
at each story.
Wall, partition: An interior wall without structural function. [2]
Wall, prestressed: A masonry wall in which internal
compressive stresses have been introduced to counteract
stresses resulting from applied loads. [1]
Wall, reinforced: (1) A masonry wall reinforced with steel
embedded so that the two materials act together in resisting
forces. (2) A wall containing reinforcement used to resist
shear and tensile stresses.
Wall, retaining: A wall designed to prevent the movement of
soils and structures placed behind the wall.
Wall, screen: A masonry wall constructed with more than
25% open area intended for decorative purposes, typically
to partially screen an area from the sun or from view.
Wall, shear: A wall, bearing or nonbearing, designed to resist
lateral forces acting in the plane of the wall. [1]
Wall, single wythe: A wall of one masonry unit thickness.
Wall, solid masonry: A wall either built of solid masonry

units or built of hollow units and grouted solid.
Wall tie: A metal connector that connects wythes of masonry.
Wall tie, veneer: A wall tie used to connect a facing veneer to
the backing.
Water permeance: The ability of water to penetrate through
a substance such as mortar or brick.
Waterproofing: (1) The methods used to prevent moisture
flow through masonry. (2) The materials used to prevent
moisture flow through masonry.
Water repellency: The reduction of absorption.
Water repellent: Material added to the masonry to increase
resistance to water penetration. Can be a surface treatment
or integral water repellent admixture.
Web: The portion of a hollow concrete masonry unit connecting
the face shells.
Weep hole: An opening left (or cut) in mortar joints or
masonry face shells to allow moisture to exit the wall.
Usually located immediately above flashing.
Workability: The ability of mortar or grout to be easily placed
and spread.
Wythe: Each continuous vertical section of a wall, one masonry
unit in thickness. [1]
REFERENCES
1. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 53002/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards
Joint Committee, 2002.
2. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/
TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
3. Standard Terminology of Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry,
ASTM C 1180-03. ASTM International, 2003.
4. Standard Terminology of Concrete Masonry Units and Related
Units, ASTM C 1209-01a. ASTM International, 2001.
5. Standard Terminology of Masonry, ASTM C 1232-02. ASTM
6. Concrete Masonry Bond Patterns, TEK 14-6. National Concrete
Masonry Association, 1999.
Provided by:
Disclaimer: Although care has been taken to ensure the enclosed information is as accurate and complete as possible, NCMA
does not assume responsibility for errors or omissions resulting from the use of this TEK.
www.ncma.org

18
NCMA TEK
TYPICAL SIZES AND SHAPES OF

Keywords: architectural units, bond beams, concrete
brick, dimensions, equivalent thickness, lintels, screen
block, sizes and shapes
INTRODUCTION
Concrete masonry is one of the most versatile building
products available because of the wide variety of appearances
that can be achieved using concrete masonry units. Concrete
masonry units are manufactured in different sizes, shapes,
colors, and textures to achieve a number of finishes and
functions. In addition, because of its modular nature, different
concrete masonry units can be combined within the same wall
to achieve variations in texture, pattern, and color.
Certain concrete masonry sizes and shapes are considered
standard, while others are popular only in certain regions. Local
manufacturers can provide detailed information on specific
products, or the feasibility of producing custom units. A more
complete guide to concrete masonry units is the Shapes and
Sizes Directory (ref. 2).
TEK 2-1A
Unit Properties
UNIT SIZES
Typically, concrete masonry units have nominal face
dimensions of 8 in. (203 mm) by 16 in. (406 mm),
available in nominal thicknesses of 4 , 6, 8, 10, and 12 in.
(102, 152, 203, 254, and 305 mm). Nominal dimensions
refer to the module size for planning bond patterns and
modular layout with respect to door and window openings. Actual dimensions of concrete masonry units are
typically 3/ 8 in. (9.5 mm) less than nominal dimensions, so
that the 4 or 8 in. (102 or 203 mm) module is maintained
with 3/ 8 in. (9.5 mm) mortar joints. Figure 1 illustrates
nominal and actual dimensions for a nominal 8 x 8 x 16
in. (203 x 203 x 406 mm) concrete masonry unit. In
addition to these standard sizes, other unit heights, lengths,
and thicknesses may be available from local concrete
masonry producers.
Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete
Masonry Units, ASTM C 90 (ref. 5) is the most frequently
referenced standard for concrete masonry units. ASTM C
90 includes minimum face shell and web thicknesses for
8" (203 mm)
8" (2
03 m
m)
)
mm
6
0
4
(
16"
Nominal Unit Dimensions
Stretcher unit
Single corner unit

Concrete brick
75/8" (194 mm)
7 5/8"
(194
mm)
m)
97 m
3
(
"
55 /8
1
Actual Unit Dimensions
Figure 1Nominal and Actual Unit Dimensions

TEK 2-1A 2002 National Concrete Masonry Association
Corner return unit
Double corner or
plain end unit
Figure 2Typical Concrete Masonry Units
19
(2002)
the different sizes of concrete masonry units as listed in

Table 1. Overall unit dimensions (height, width, or length) are
permitted to vary by 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) from the dimensions
specified by the manufacturer. Where required, units may be
manufactured to closer tolerances than those permitted in ASTM
C 90. ASTM C 90 also defines the difference between hollow and
solid concrete masonry units. The net cross-sectional area of a
solid unit is at least 75% of the gross cross-sectional area.
In addition to the standard sizes listed above, concrete
brick is available in typical lengths of 8 and 16 in. (203 and 406
mm), nominal 4 in. (102 mm) width, and a wide range of heights.
They may be 100% solid, or may have two or three cores. Like
ASTM C 90, Standard Specification for Concrete Building
Brick, ASTM C 55 (ref. 4), permits overall unit dimensions to
vary 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) from the dimensions specified by the
manufacturer. Nominal dimensions of modular concrete brick
equal the actual dimensions plus 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), the thickness
of one standard mortar joint. However, nominal dimensions of
nonmodular sized concrete brick usually exceed the standard
dimensions by 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3.2 to 6.4 mm).
UNIT SHAPES
Concrete masonry unit shapes have been developed for a
wide variety of applications. The most common shapes are
shown in Figure 2. Typically, the face shells and webs are
tapered on concrete masonry units. Depending on the core
molds used in the manufacture of the units, face shells and webs
may be tapered with a flare at one end, or may have a straight
taper from top to bottom. The taper provides a wider surface for
mortar and easier handling for the mason.
The shapes illustrated in Figure 3 have been developed
specifically to accommodate reinforcement. Open-ended units
allow the units to be threaded around reinforcing bars. This
eliminates the need to lift units over the top of the reinforcing
bar, or to thread the reinforcement through the masonry cores
Table 1Minimum Thickness of Face Shells

and Webs (ref. 5)
Web thickness
Equivalent
Face shell
web thickness,
Nominal width
thicknessa, Websa, in./linear footb,c
of unit, in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
(mm/m)
3/4 (19)
3 (76) and 4 (102) 3/4 (19)
15/8 (136)
d
6 (152)
1 (25)
1 (25)
21/4 (188)
d
1
8 (203)
1 /4 (32)
1 (25)
21/4 (188)
d
10 (254)
13/8 (35)
11/8 (29)
21/2 (209)
11/4 (32)d,e
12 (305)
11/2 (38)
11/8 (29)
21/2 (209)
d,e
11/4 (32)
Open end, or
"A" shaped unit
Double open end unit
Lintel unit
Average of measurements on 3 units taken at the thinnest point

when measured as described in ASTM C 140 (ref. 3). When this
standard is used for split face units, a maximum of 10% of a split
face shell area is permitted to have thicknesses less than those
shown, but not less than in. (19.1 mm). When the units are solid
grouted, the 10% limit does not apply.
b
Average of measurements on 3 units taken at the thinnest point
when measured as described in ASTM C 140. The minimum web
thickness for units with webs closer than 1 in. (25.4 mm) apart
shall be in. (19.1 mm).
c
Sum of the measured thickness of all webs in the unit, multiplied
by 12 and divided by the length of the unit. Equivalent web
thickness does not apply to the portion of the unit to be filled with
grout. The length of that portion shall be deducted from the overall
length of the unit for the calculation.
d
For solid grouted masonry construction, minimum face shell
thickness not less than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
e
This face shell thickness is applicable where allowable design
load is reduced in proportion to the reduction in thickness from
basic face shell thicknesses shown, except that allowable design
loads on solid grouted units shall not be reduced.
Bond beam units
Pilaster units
Figure 3Shapes to Accommodate Reinforcement

after the wall is constructed. Bond beams in concrete masonry
walls can be accommodated either by saw-cutting out of a
standard unit, or by using bond beam units. Bond beam units
are either manufactured with reduced webs or with knock-out
webs, which are removed prior to placement in the wall.
Horizontal bond beam reinforcement is easily accommodated
in these units. Lintel units are similar to the U shaped bond
beam units. Lintel units are available in various depths to carry
appropriate lintel loads over door and window openings. The
solid bottom confines grout to the lintel. Pilaster and column
units are used to easily accommodate a wall-column or wallpilaster interface, allowing space for vertical reinforcement in
20
Sash unit
All purpose or kerf unit
Control joint unit
Bevelled unit
Bull-nosed unit
Screen units
Figure 4Special Shapes
Figure 5Examples of Concrete Masonry Units

Designed For Energy Efficiency
Figure 6Examples of Acoustical

Concrete Masonry Units
the hollow center.

Figure 4 shows units developed for specific wall applications. Sash block have a vertical groove molded into one end
to accommodate a window sash. Sash block can be laid with the
grooves adjacent to one another to accommodate a preformed
control joint gasket. Control joint units are manufactured with
one male and one female end to provide lateral load transfer
across control joints. An all-purpose or kerf unit contains two
closely spaced webs in the center, rather than the typical single
web. This allows the unit to be easily split on the jobsite,
producing two 8 in. (203 mm) long units, which are typically
used adjacent to openings or at the ends or corner of a wall. Bullnosed units are available with either a single or double bull nose,
to soften corners. Screen units are available in many sizes and
patterns. Typical applications include exterior fences, interior
partitions, and openings within interior concrete masonry
walls. Bevelled-end units, forming a 45o angle with the face of
the unit, are used to form walls intersecting at 135o angles. Units
in adjacent courses overlap to form a running bond pattern at the
corner.
A variety of concrete masonry units are designed to increase energy efficiency. These units, examples of which are
shown in Figure 5, may have reduced web areas to reduce heat
loss through the webs. Web areas can be reduced by reducing the
web height or thickness, reducing the number of webs, or both.
In addition, the interior face shell of the unit can be made thicker
than a typical face shell for increased thermal storage, and hence
further increase energy efficiency. Insulating inserts can also be
incorporated into standard concrete masonry units to increase
energy efficiency.
Acoustical units (Figure 6) dampen sound, thus improving the noise reduction attributes of an interior space. Acoustical
units are often used in schools, industrial plants, and churches,
and to improve internal acoustics.
SURFACE FINISHES
The finished appearance of a concrete masonry wall can be
varied with the size of units, shape of units, color of units and
mortar, bond pattern, and surface finish of the units. The various
shapes and sizes of concrete masonry units described above are
often available in a choice of surface finishes. Some of the
surfaces are molded into the units during the manufacturing
process, while others are applied separately.
Figure 7 shows some of the more common surface textures
available. Ribs, flutes, striations, offsets, and scores are accomplished by using a unit mold with the desired characteristics.
Split-faced units are molded with two units face-to-face and
then the units are mechanically split apart.
Glazed units are manufactured by bonding a permanent
colored facing to a concrete masonry unit, providing a smooth
impervious surface. Glazed units are often used for brightlycolored accent bands, and in gymnasiums, rest rooms, and
indoor swimming pools where the stain and moisture resistant
finish reduces maintenance. Glazed units comply to Standard
Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate
Masonry Units, ASTM C 744 (ref. 6).
Ground-face units are ground to achieve a smooth finish
which reveals the natural colors of the aggregates. Often,
specific aggregates will be used to enhance the appearance.
For more information on surface finishes, see TEK 2-3A
21
Architectural Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 1).
Figure 7Examples of Surface Finishes Available For Concrete Masonry Units

(clockwise from bottom left: split face with three scores; single score ground face;
glazed corner unit; ground face; ground face; single score glazed ; split face; ground
face; split face; center: eight-ribbed split face)
REFERENCES
1. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 2-3A, National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
2. Shapes and Sizes Directory, National Concrete Masonry Association, 1995.
3. Standard Methods of Sampling
and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units, ASTM
C 140-01ae1. American Society
for Testing and Materials, 2001.
4. Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick, ASTM C
55-01a. American Society for
Testing and Materials, 2001.
5. Standard Specification for LoadBearing Concrete Masonry
Units, ASTM C 90-01a. American Society for Testing and Materials, 2001.
6. Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium
Silicate Masonry Units, ASTM
C 744-99. American Society for
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

contact NCMA Publications (703) 713-1900 22
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
on
CONSIDERATIONS FOR
USING SPECIALTY
INTRODUCTION

Concrete masonry is an extremely versatile building
product in part because of the wide variety of aesthetic
effects that can be achieved using concrete masonry units.
Concrete masonry units are manufactured in different
sizes, shapes, colors, and textures to achieve a number of
finishes and functions. In addition, because of its modular
nature, different concrete masonry units can be combined
within the same wall to produce variations in texture, pattern, and color.
For the purposes of this TEK, standard concrete
masonry units are considered to be two-core units (i.e.,
those with three cross webs), 8 in. (203 mm) high, 16 in.
(406 mm) long and 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 in. (102, 154, 203, 254
or 305 mm) wide. In addition, concrete brick is available
in typical lengths of 8, 9, 12 and 16 in. (203, 229, 305
and 406 mm), nominal 4 in. (102 mm) width, and a wide
range of heights.

In addition to these "standard" units, many additional
units have been developed for a variety of specific purposes,
such as aesthetics, ease of construction and improved
thermal or acoustic performance. For the purposes of this
TEK, units other than those described above as standard
will be referred to as specialty units. Specialty units can
include units of different sizes or different unit configurations. Units of specialty configuration which are used at
discreet wall locations rather than to construct an entire
wall, such as sash units, pilaster units, etc. are not discussed
here, nor are proprietary units discussed in detail. See TEK
2-1A, Concrete Masonry Unit Shapes and Sizes (ref. 1),
for information on these units.

By definition, specialty units are not available from all
concrete masonry manufacturers. In some cases, such as
the A- and H-shaped units used for reinforced construction,
Related TEK:
1-1E, 2-1A, 5-12,

5-15, 14-1B, 14-13B
NCMA TEK 2-2B
concrete
masonry
technology
TEK 2-2B
Unit Properties (2010)
the specialty is commonly available in certain geographic

areas. In California, for example, A- and H-shaped units
are considered to be standard units. Other unit configurations discussed below may be available across the country,
but from a relatively small number of producers. For this
reason, it is imperative that the designer communicate with
local concrete masonry manufacturers to establish the availability of the units discussed in this TEK, as well as other
specialty units that may be available. Local manufacturers
can provide detailed information on specific products, or
the feasibility of producing custom units.

Regardless of unit size or configuration, concrete
masonry units are required to comply with Standard
Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units,
ASTM C90 (ref. 2). See TEK 1-1E, ASTM Specifications
for Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 3), for more detailed
information.

This TEK discusses the advantages of using specialty
units, and some of the design and construction issues that
may impact the use of these units
SPECIALTY UNIT SIZES

Concrete masonry units may be produced with widths,
heights, and/or lengths other than the standard sizes listed
above. Use of these units produces walls with a scale
and aesthetic properties different from those built with
standard-sized units. Construction productivity may be
impacted by the size, weight and configuration of the units
selected. Also, some of the special shapes and sizes may
not be available, and may require modification on site by
the contractor.

One of the most important construction consideration
when using specialty-sized units is modular coordination. Modular coordination is the practice of laying out
Keywords: unit shapes, unit sizes, modular coordination,

section properties
23
1
and dimensioning structures and elements to standard

lengths and heights to accommodate proportioning and
incorporating modular-sized building materials. Modular
coordination helps maximize construction efficiency and
economy by minimizing the number of units that must
be cut to accommodate window and door openings, for
example. See TEK 5-12, Modular Layout of Concrete
Masonry (ref. 4) for information on modular coordination
with standard-sized units.

In addition to the specialty height units and specialty
length units discussed below, veneer units (typically 4 in.
(102 mm) thick) may be available in various specialty
sizes, up to 16 in. high by 24 in. long (406 x 610 mm).
further information.

Veneer anchor spacing requirements remain the same
regardless of unit height. For units with a height greater
than 8 in. (203 mm), these spacing requirements should
be verified and the anchor spacing planned out prior to
construction. As an example, consider 12-in. (305-mm)
high veneer units installed over a concrete masonry backup
wythe. The anchor spacing requirements are: maximum
wall surface area supported of 2.67 ft2 (0.25 m2); maximum
vertical anchor spacing of 18 in. (457 mm); and maximum
horizontal anchor spacing or 32 in. (813 mm) (ref. 11). In
this case, anchors need to be installed in every course to meet
the requirement for a maximum vertical anchor spacing of
18 in. (457 mm). If the anchors are spaced horizontally at
the maximum 32 in. (813 mm), the wall area supported is
2.67 ft2 (0.25 m2), so this veneer anchor spacing meets the
code requirements. Veneer anchor spacing requirements
are presented in detail in TEK 3-6B, Concrete Masonry
Veneers (ref. 8).

Another consideration for units with a height exceeding
8 in. (203 mm) is the use of joint reinforcement. Joint reinforcement in concrete masonry can be used to provide crack
control, horizontal reinforcement in low seismic categories,
and bond for multiple wythes, corners and intersections.
Most requirements and rules of thumb for joint reinforcement are based on a specific area of reinforcement per foot
of wall height and assume an 8-in. (203-mm) modular unit
height. These should be considered prior to construction for
units with heights exceeding 8 in. (203 mm). For example,
empirical concrete masonry crack control criteria calls for
horizontal reinforcement of at least 0.025 in.2/ft of wall height
(52.9 mm2/m) between control joints. This corresponds to a
maximum vertical spacing of 16 in. (406 mm) when 2-wire
W1.7 (9 gage, MW11) joint reinforcement is used. When
using 12-in. (305-mm) high units, the joint reinforcement
of that size needs to be placed in every horizontal bed
joint to meet this requirement. A better alternative is to use
2-wire W2.8 (3/16 in., MW18) joint reinforcement, with a
Specialty Unit Heights

Although the most commonly available concrete
masonry unit height is 8 in. (203 mm), concrete masonry
units may be available in 4-in. ("half-high") or 12-in. (102and 305-mm) high units. Half-high units are gaining in
popularity. They provide an aspect ratio similar to brick,
but are hollow loadbearing units. See TEK 5-15, Details
for Half-High Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 7) for more
detailed information.

As long as the unit cross-section (i.e., face shell and
web thicknesses) is the same as the corresponding 8-in.
(203-mm) high unit, these specialty height units can be
considered to be structurally equivalent to their corresponding 8-in. (203-mm) high unit.

Vertical modular coordination must be adjusted in
some cases with these units. Using 4-in. (102-mm) high
units provides some additional flexibility in placing wall
openings, as the wall is built on a 4-in. (102-mm) vertical
module rather than an 8-in. (203-mm) vertical module.
With 12-in. high units, the wall height, door opening height
and window opening height should ideally be a multiple
of 12-in. (305-mm) to minimize cutting units on site (see
Figure 1). Note that special door frames may need to be
ordered to fit the masonry opening. See TEK 5-12 for
48 in.
(1,219 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
120 in.
(3,048 mm)
84 in.
(2,134 mm)
48 in.
(1,219 mm)
88 in.
(2,235 mm)
120 in.
(3,048 mm)
32 in.
(813 mm)
Figure 1Vertical Modular Coordination: 12-in. (305-mm) Unit vs. Height 8-in. (203-mm) Unit Height
2
24
NCMA TEK 2-2B
maximum vertical spacing of 24 in. (610 mm), allowing the

joint reinforcement to be placed every other course when
using 12-in. (305-mm) high units. See TEK 10-2C, Control
Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsEmpirical Method (ref.
9) for a discussion of joint reinforcement for crack control,
and TEK 12-2B, Joint Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry
(ref. 10), for an overview of code requirements for the use
of joint reinforcement. Properties of wire for masonry (including steel cross-sectional area) can be found in Table 3
of TEK 12-4D, Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry
(ref. 12)
Specialty Unit Lengths

Specialty concrete masonry unit lengths include 18in. and 24-in. (457- and 610-mm) long units. Concrete
masonry units longer than 16 in. (406 mm) are produced
with the same equivalent web thickness (i.e., the average
web thickness per length of wall) as 16-in. (406-mm)
long units, per ASTM C90. As such, these units can be
considered to be structurally equivalent to a 16-in. (305mm) long unit of the same width.

Horizontal modular coordination should be considered
when using these units. For example, wall length and
placement of wall openings should ideally be a multiple
of the unit length, as shown in Figure 2.

Veneer anchor spacing and joint reinforcement considerations are the same as for standard-length units.
Specialty Unit Widths

In addition to the standard unit widths of 4, 6, 8, 10,
and 12 in. (102, 152, 203, 254, 305 mm), specialty widths
may include 14 and 16 in. (356 and 406 mm). Because
unit width does not affect modular coordination, layout
36 in.
(914 mm)
36 in.
36 in.
18 in.
18 in.
(914 mm) (457 mm) (914 mm) (457 mm)
considerations are generally the same as for walls constructed using standard concrete masonry units.

One construction issue that arises with different unit
widths is corner details. TEK 5-9A, Concrete Masonry
Corner Details (ref. 13), presents details to minimize cutting of units while maintaining modularity for 4, 6, 8, 10,
and 12 in. (102, 152, 203, 254, 305 mm) wide units. Corner
details for 14-in. (356-mm) wide units are similar to those
for 12-in. (305 mm) wide units, using 8-in. (203-mm) wide
units with 2 x 6 in. (51 x 152 mm) pieces of masonry to
fill the gaps in the inside corners. Because 16 in. (406 mm)
is a modular size, corner details for these units are similar
to those for 8-in. (203-mm) wide units. A standard 8-in.
(203-mm) wide unit is used in each course at the corner to
maintain the running bond.

Structural considerations may differ, however, as
both the section properties and wall weight varies with
wall width. TEKs 14-1B, Section Properties of Concrete
Masonry Walls, and 14-13B, Concrete Masonry Wall
Weights (refs. 5, 6), list these properties for 14 and 16 in.
(356 and 406 mm) wide walls.

From a construction standpoint, the larger cores of
14- and 16-in. (356 and 406 mm) wide units accommodate
more reinforcement or insulation, when used, and require
more grout to fill reinforced cells.
SPECIALTY UNIT CONFIGURATIONS

Specialty unit configuration refers to units whose crosssection varies significantly from that of a standard two-core
concrete masonry unit. In this case, structural properties may
be different from standard units. Modular coordination is the
same as for standard units, unless the specialty configuration
32 in.
(813 mm)
16 in.
40 in.
24 in.
40 in.
(1,016 mm) (610 mm) (1,016 mm)(406 mm)
Figure 2Horizontal Modular Coordination: 18-in. (457-mm) Unit Length vs.

16-in. (406-mm) Unit Length
NCMA TEK 2-2B
25
3
is also produced in a specialty size.

A variety of concrete masonry units have been developed to address specific performance or construction
criteria. For example, units developed for improved energy
efficiency may have reduced web areas to reduce heat
loss through the webs, a thickened interior face shell for
increased thermal storage, and/or additional cavities within
the unit to accommodate insulation. Acoustical concrete
masonry units provide increased sound absorption and/
or diffusion.

These units may have unique construction and/or
structural considerations, depending on their configuration. The concrete masonry producer should be contacted
for more detailed information on the specific unit under
consideration.
Units to Facilitate Reinforced Construction

Concrete masonry unit shapes have been developed
for a wide variety of applications. The shapes illustrated
in Figure 3 have been developed specifically to accommodate vertical reinforcement. Bond beam and lintel units
have also been developed to accommodate horizontal
reinforcement.

Open-ended units allow concrete masonry units to be
inserted around vertical reinforcing bars. This eliminates
the need to lift units over the top of embedded vertical
reinforcement, or to thread the reinforcement through the
masonry cores after the wall is constructed.

Because all open cells of A- and H-shaped units are
grouted and bond beam and lintel units are fully grouted,
walls constructed with these units can use the same structural
design parameters as for grouted standard units.
Open-ended or
Open
end, or unit
A-shaped
"A" shaped unit
Double-open-ended
Double
open end unit
or H-shaped
unit
Figure 3Examples of Unit Shapes that

Accommodate Reinforcement
REFERENCES
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Shapes and Sizes, TEK 2-1A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
3. ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 1-1E. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007,
4. Modular Layout of Concrete Masonry, TEK 5-12. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
5. Section Properties of Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 14-1B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
6. Concrete Masonry Wall Weights, TEK 14-13B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
7. Details for Half-High Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 5-15. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
9. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsEmpirical Method, TEK 10-2C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2010.
10. Joint Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-2B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
11. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, TMS 402-08/ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08. Reported by the Masonry Standards
13. Concrete Masonry Corner Details, TEK 5-9A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.

www.ncma.org
Provided by:
26
NCMA TEK 2-2B
NCMA TEK
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS TEK 2-3A

Keywords: architectural units, burnished, fluted, ground

face, glazed, offset face, prefaced, raked, ribbed, sandblasted,
scored, slump, split-face, split-rib, striated
INTRODUCTION

One of the most significant architectural benefits of designing with concrete masonry is its versatility the finished
appearance of a concrete masonry wall can be varied with the
unit size and shape, color of units and mortar, bond pattern,
and surface finish of the units. The term architectural concrete
masonry units typically is used to describe units displaying
any one of several surface finishes that affects the texture of
the unit, allowing the structural wall and finished surface to
be installed in a single step.

Architectural concrete masonry units are used for interior and exterior walls, partitions, terrace walls, and other
enclosures. Some units are available with the same treatment
or pattern on both faces, to serve as both exterior and interior
finish wall material, increasing both the economic and aesthetic advantages. Architectural units comply with the same
quality standards as conventional concrete masonry, Standard
(a) Split Face and Glazed
Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM

C 90 (ref. 3). In some cases, noted below where applicable,
additional provisions govern which are more applicable to the
specific unit.

The units described herein are some of the more common
architectural concrete masonry units. However, manufacturers
may carry additional products not listed here, and conversely,
not all products listed will be available in all locations. Consult
a local manufacturer for final unit selection.
Architectural Unit TYPEs
Split Faced Units

Split faced units have a natural stone-like texture produced
by molding two units face-to-face, then mechanically splitting
them apart after curing, creating a fractured surface. Because
coarse aggregate is also fractured and exposed in this process,
aggregate selection can alter the final appearance.

Split-faced units can also be manufactured with ribs or
scores to provide strong vertical lines in the finished wall.
Rough textures, like those available with split face units, are
often used in areas prone to graffiti, as the texture tends to
discourage graffiti vandals.
(b) Fluted Split Face
(c) Split and Ground Face
Figure 1Examples of Architectural Concrete Masonry Units

TEK 2-3A 2001 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEK 2-3)
27
Ribbed Units

Ribbed concrete masonry units (often called fluted units)
typically have 4, 6, or 8 vertical ribs which align to form
continuous vertical elements in the finished wall. The ribs
are molded into the unit using a special mold. The ribs may
have either a rectangular or circular profile, and may be either
smooth or split for added texture. Figure 1b shows an example
of a wall using ribbed (fluted) split face units.

The ribs can be manufactured to project beyond the overall
unit thickness (i.e., the unit thickness including ribs is thicker
than a typical CMU), or with the rib projection included in
the overall unit thickness. In the first case, the net area, and
corresponding section properties, will be larger than those
published for non-ribbed units, although the effect of this
increase is typically neglected in structural calculations. In
the second case, where the rib projection is included in the
overall unit thickness, the designer should be aware that the
actual bearing area, section modulus, and moment of inertia
are less than those published for non-ribbed units.

When building concrete masonry walls, mortar is typically
placed to all outside edges of the masonry unit. However, with
ribbed units, it is difficult to properly tool the mortar due to
the projections.

Split face units are governed by ASTM C 90, which includes an allowance to account for the rough face. ASTM C 90
prescribes minimum faceshell thickness requirements for all
loadbearing concrete masonry units, but also contains a variance for split face units where up to 10% of a split faceshell
can be less than the minimum specified thickness, but not less
than 3/4 in. (19 mm). This 10% limit does not apply, however,
when the units are solidly grouted. Walls utilizing a variety
of split face units are shown in Figure 1.
Soft Split

A soft split unit is produced using a special mold which
textures the face of the unit as it is removed from the mold.
The appearance from a distance is very similar to that of a split
face, while a closer inspection shows a surface that is not as
well defined as that achieved with a conventional split face. In
addition, aggregate is not fractured in a soft split as it is in a
conventional split face unit. As a result, the final appearance
is not significantly affected by aggregate choice.
Scored Units

Scored concrete masonry units are manufactured with
one or more vertical scores on the face to simulate additional
mortar joints in the wall. Scored units reduce the perceived
scale of the masonry while still allowing construction using
full sized units. The scores are molded into the face of the unit
during manufacture. Units with one vertical score are most
common, and give the appearance of 8 in. x 8 in. (203 x 203
mm) units laid in stack bond. Units may also be available
with 2, 3, 5, or 7 vertical scores. Figure 2a shows units with
3 vertical scores in a standard sized ground face block.

It is usually desirable to lay units so that scores or ribs
align vertically when the units are placed. This may require
different bond patterns, depending on the configuration of the
scores or ribs. For example, units with two and five scores
can be placed in either stack bond or in a one-third running
bond to align scores in adjacent courses. Other appropriate
bond patterns are included in Table 1. Note that varying bond
patterns can impact how the wall responds to structural loads
(see ref. 1).
Ground Face Units (Burnished, Honed)

Ground face concrete masonry units are polished after
manufacture to achieve a smooth finish which reveals the
natural aggregate colors. The units have the appearance of
polished natural stone. The finished look of the ground surface
can be altered by changing aggregate type and proportions.
Often, specific aggregates will be used to enhance the appearance of the polished surface (Figure 1c and 2a), while coatings
are sometimes used to deepen the color. Ground face units are
often scored to achieve a scale other than the conventional 8
x 16 in. (203 x 406 mm), as shown in Figure 2a.
Sandblasted Units
Sand (or abrasive) blasting is used to expose the aggregate in
a concrete masonry unit and results in a "weathered" look.
(a) Scored and Ground Face
(b) Glazed
(c) Slump Block
Figure 2Additional Examples of Architectural Concrete Masonry Units
28
Striated (Raked) Units

Striated units achieve an overall texture by means of small
vertical grooves molded into the unit face. The striations are
most often random, to achieve a naturally rough look, but are
sometimes available in uniform striation patterns. Striation can
be applied to scored and ribbed units as well (see Figure 3c).
Glazed (Prefaced) Units

Glazed concrete masonry units are manufactured by
bonding a permanent colored facing (typically compsed of
polyester resins, silica sand and various other chemicals)
to a concrete masonry unit, providing a smooth impervious
surface. The glazed facings must comply with ASTM C 744
(ref. 4), Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and
Calcium Silicate Masonry Units, which contains minimum
requirements for facing quality and dimensional tolerances. In
addition, the unit to which the facing is applied must comply
with ASTM C 90 when used in loadbearing applications. The
glazed surface is waterproof, resistant to staining and graffiti,
highly impact resistant, as well as being resistant to many
chemicals and bacteria. Special admixtures and mortars are
available for use with glazed units that provide better stain,
bacteria, and water penetration resistance.

Glazed units are available in a variety of vibrant colors,
pastels, earth tones, and even faux granite and marble patterns.
They are often used for brightly-colored accent bands, and in
gymnasiums, rest rooms, and indoor swimming pools where
the stain and moisture resistant finish reduces maintenance.
Kitchens and laboratories also benefit from the chemical and
bacteria-resistant surface.
Offset Face Units

Units with an offset face produce a very highly textured
wall, with strong patterns of light and shadow. The offsets
make it appear as if adjacent units are staggered. This effect is
accomplished by using a unit mold with the desired offsets.
Slump Block Units

Slump block concrete masonry units have a rounded face
that resembles handmade adobe. They are more commonly
available in the Southwest United States where adobe is part
of the architectural heritage. Conventional concrete masonry
units are manufactured using a no-slump concrete mix,
which holds its shape when removed from the manufacturing mold. Slump units, on the other hand, are manufactured
using a concrete mix that slumps within desired limits when
removed from its mold (see Figure 2c).

Slump unit widths may vary as much as 1 in. (25 mm). For
this reason, the structural design should assume the actual width of
slump units is 1 in. (25 mm) less than the nominal dimension.
COLOR

Architectural concrete masonry units are often integrally
colored to enhance the appearance or achieve a particular effect.
Concrete masonry units are colored by adding mineral oxide
pigments to the concrete mix. Mortars can also be integrally
colored to blend or contrast with the masonry units.

The final unit color varies with the amount and type of
pigment used, cement color, aggregate color, and the amount

of water used in the mix (a wetter mix will generally produce
lighter and brighter colors). Both white and gray cements are
available. The use of white cement results in more vibrant
colors, but also increases cost. The aggregates used in the
concrete mix also impact the final appearance. Because of these
varying factors, there are typically some subtle variations in
color among units. When units must be exactly the same color
to achieve a particular architectural effect, uncolored units
should be used, then painted or stained the desired color.

Variegated units provide color variations within each unit,
producing a marbled effect. These units are manufactured by
mixing two different concrete colors into the same unit mold.
Standard Unit Nomenclature

As with many construction products and systems, there
are often regional differences in terminology for the same type
of architectural concrete masonry units: ribbed and fluted,
ground and burnished, etc. The National Concrete Masonry
Association has developed a standardized nomenclature (see
Table 1) which can be used to avoid confusion when specifying
and supplying masonry units. (See Figure 3 for examples).
Table 1 Standard Unit Nomenclature (ref. 2)
Each unit is described using a three-part code in the following format:
XX YYY WWHHLL, where XX describes the number of scores
or ribs, YYY describes the architectural finish, and WWHHLL
describes the overall nominal unit dimensions for width, height,
and length. The various codes are described below.
Scores or Ribs:
00
no scores or ribs, applicable for any running bond
01
one score, applicable for one-half running bond (units overlap
the unit above and below by one-half the unit length)
02
2 scores, applicable for one-third running bond
03
3 scores, applicable for one-half or one-quarter running
bond
04
4 ribs, applicable for one-half or one-quarter running bond
05
5 scores, applicable for one-half running bond
06
6 ribs, applicable for one-half running bond
07
7 scores, applicable for one-half or one-quarter running
bond
08
8 ribs, applicable for one-half or one-quarter running bond
Architectural Finish:
BN1 bullnose unit with 1 in. (25 mm) radius bullnose
BN2 bullnose unit with 2 in. (51 mm) radius bullnose
SCV vertically scored unit
GRF ground face unit
MDC circular ribs, rib projects beyond the overall unit thickness
MNC circular ribs, rib projection included in overall unit thickness
MDR rectangular ribs, rib projects beyond the overall unit thickness
MNR rectangular ribs, rib projection included in unit thickness
STR striated unit
STS striated unit, 1 in. (25 mm) uniform striation pattern
STT striated unit, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) uniform striation pattern
SPF split face unit
NPF split face ribbed unit, rib projections included in unit thickness
SLP slump block
**Q locally provided product
29
08 MNR 080816
8 x 8 x 16 Rectangular ribbed unit
(rib projection included in
overall unit thickness),
with 8 ribs
Figure 3aRectangular Ribbed Unit
06 MNC 080816
8 x 8 x 16 rounded ribbed unit
(rib projection included in
overall unit thickness),
with 6 ribs
Figure 3bRounded Rib Unit
01 STR 080816
8 x 8 x 16 striated corner unit
striated patterns are often
applied to scored or ribbed
units
Figure 3cStriated Scored Unit
00 BN1 120816
12 x 8 x 16 Bullnose Unit with
1 in. (25 mm) radius bullnose.
Figure 3dBullnose Unit
Figure 3Examples of Standard Unit Nomenclature

References
1. Concrete Masonry Bond Patterns, TEK 14-6. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1996.
2. Concrete Masonry Shapes & Sizes Manual, CM 260A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1997.
3. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-00. American Society for Testing and Materials, 2000.
4. Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units, ASTM C 744-99. American Society for
Provided by:
2302 Horse Pen Road, Herndon, Virginia 20171-3499
www.ncma.org

30
NCMA TEK
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS
TEK 2-4B
Unit Properties
Keywords: absorption, architectural units, compressive

strength, coupon testing, dimensions, durability, erosion
control, retaining wall, segmental retaining wall, specifications, testing
INTRODUCTION
Mortarless segmental retaining walls are a natural enhancement to a variety of landscape projects. Applications range from
8 in. (204 mm) high terraces for erosion control to retaining
walls 20 ft (6.1 m) or more in height. The individual concrete
units can be installed to virtually any straight or curved plan
imaginable.
Segmental retaining walls are used to stabilize cuts and fills
adjacent to highways, driveways, buildings, patios and parking
lots, and numerous other applications. Segmental retaining
walls replace treated wood, cast-in-place concrete, steel, and
other retaining wall systems because they are durable, easier
and quicker to install, and blend naturally with the surrounding
environment. Concrete units resist deterioration when exposed
to the elements without addition of toxic additives which can
threaten the environment.
A variety of surface textures and features are available,

including split faced, stone faced, and molded face units, any
one of which may be scored, ribbed, or colored to fit any project
application. Construction of segmental retaining walls does not
require heavy equipment access, nor does the system require
special construction skills to erect. Manufactured concrete
retaining wall units weigh approximately 30 to 100 lb (14 to
45 kg) each and are placed by hand on a level or sloped gravel
bed. Successive courses are stacked dry on the course below
in the architectural pattern desired. Mechanical interlocking
and/or frictional shear strength between courses resists lateral
soil pressure. In low-height walls, overturning forces due to
soil pressure are resisted by the weight of the units, sometimes
aided by an incline toward the retained soil. Higher walls resist
lateral soil pressures by inclining the wall toward the retained
Shoreline erosion control

Terracing
Figure 1Examples of Segmental Retaining Wall Installations
TEK 2-4B 2008 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEK 2-4A)
31
(2008)
earth, or by other methods such as anchoring to geosynthetic

reinforcement embedded in the soil. Further information on
the design of segmental retaining walls can be found in Design
Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls (ref. 1) and Segmental
Retaining Wall Drainage Manual (ref. 2).
Segmental retaining wall units are factory manufactured
to quality standards in accordance with ASTM C 1372, Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units (ref. 3).
These requirements are intended to assure lasting performance,
little or no maintenance, structural integrity, and continued
aesthetic value.
Segmental retaining wall units complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1372 have been successfully used
and have demonstrated good field performance. Segmental
retaining wall units currently being supplied to the market
should be produced in accordance with this standard so that
both the purchaser and the supplier have the assurance and
understanding of the expected level of performance of the
product.
ASTM C 1372 covers both solid and hollow units which
are to be installed without mortar (dry-stacked). Units are
designed to interlock between courses or to use mechanical
devices to resist sliding due to lateral soil pressure. If particular
features are desired, such as a specific weight classification,
higher compressive strength, surface texture, finish, color, or
other special features, they should be specified separately by
the purchaser. However, local suppliers should be consulted as
to the availability of units with such features before specifying
them.
Materials
ASTM C 1372 includes requirements that define acceptable cementitious materials, aggregates, and other constituents
used in the manufacture of concrete segmental retaining wall
units. These requirements are similar to those included in
ASTM C 90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete
Masonry Units (ref. 4).
Compressive Strength
Minimum compressive strength requirements for segmental retaining wall units are included in Table 1. Units meeting
or exceeding these strengths have demonstrated the integrity
needed to resist the structural demands placed on them in
normal usage. These demands include impact and vibration
during transportation, the weight of the units above them in the

wall, nonuniform distribution of loads between units, and the
tensile stresses imposed as a result of typical wall settlement.
Segmental retaining wall units will not fail in service due to
compressive forces since axial loads are only a result of selfweight. Due to the direct relationship between compressive
strength and tensile strength, this minimum requirement is
used to ensure overall performance.
Compressive strength testing of full size units is impractical
due to the large size and/or unusual shape of some segmental
retaining wall units. Therefore, compressive strength of these
units is determined from testing coupons cut from the units.
The results of tests on these smaller coupons will typically
yield lower strengths than if the larger, full-size specimen were
tested. The reason for the difference is size and aspect ratio.
However, it is important to keep in mind that the compression
test is not intended to determine the load carrying capacity of
the unit, since segmental retaining walls are not designed to
carry vertical structural loads. Compressive strength is used
solely to determine the quality of the concrete.
Because tested strengths are affected by size and shape
of the specimen tested, it is important that all retaining wall
units be tested using a similar size and shape. ASTM C 140,
Standard Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units (ref. 5) requires that specimens cut from full-size units
for compression testing shall be a coupon with a height to
thickness ratio of 2 to 1 before capping and a length to thickness ratio of 4 to 1. The coupon width is to be as close to
2 in. (51 mm) as possible based on the configuration of the
unit and the capacity of the testing machine, but not less than
1.5 in. (38 mm). The preferred size is 2 x 4 x 8 in. (51 x 102
x 203 mm) (width x height x length). The coupon height is
measured in the same direction as the unit height dimension.
If these procedures are followed, the compressive strength
of the coupon is considered to be the strength of the whole
unit.
Alignment of the specimen in the compression machine is
critical. Care should be taken in capping the test specimen to
assure that capping surfaces are perpendicular to the vertical
axis of the specimen.
Saw-cutting is the required method of extracting a test
specimen from a full size unit. Proper equipment and procedures are essential to prevent damaging the test specimen as
a result of saw-cutting. Water-cooled, diamond-tipped blades
Table 1Strength and Absorption Requirements (ref. 3)

Minimum required net
area compressive strength
psi (MPa)
Average of
three units
Individual
unit
3,000 (20.68)
2,500 (17.24)
Maximum water absorption requirements

lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
Weight classificationoven dry density of concrete
lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
Lightweight
Medium weight
Normal weight
less than
105 (1680) to
125 (2000)
105 (1680)
less than 125 (2000)
or more
18 (288)
15 (240)
13 (208)
32
on a masonry table saw are recommended. The blade should

have a diameter sufficient enough to make all cuts in a single
pass. Manufacturers of the unit (or licensors of proprietary
shapes) should be consulted about recommended locations
for obtaining the compression specimen.
Weight Classification
Weight classifications for segmental retaining wall units
are defined in Table 1. The three classifications, lightweight,
medium weight, and normal weight, are a function of the oven
dry density of the concrete. Most segmental retaining wall
units fall into the normal weight category.
Absorption
Absorption requirements are also included in Table 1. This
value is used to represent the volume of voids in a concrete
masonry unit, including voids inside the aggregate itself. The
void space is measured by determining the volume of water
that can be forced into the unit under the nominal head pressure that results from immersion in a tank of water.
Lightweight aggregates used in the production of lightweight and medium weight units contain voids within the
aggregate itself that also fill with water during the immersion
test. While reduced voids indicate a desired tightly compacted
unit, tightly compacted lightweight and medium weight units
will still have higher absorption due to the voids in the aggregates. For this reason the maximum allowable absorption
requirements vary according to weight classification.
Similar to compression testing, it generally is not practical
to test full-size retaining wall units in absorption tests due to
their size and weight. Therefore, ASTM C 140 permits the
testing of segments saw-cut from full-size units to determine
absorption and density. Sampling location typically has little
effect on tested results.
Absorption limits are typically expressed as mass (weight)
of water absorbed per concrete unit volume. This is preferred
to expressing by percentage which permits a denser unit to
absorb more water than a lighter weight unit. As previously
discussed, this relationship is opposite of the absorption characteristics of the material.
Testing larger specimens requires particular attention to
drying times, because it takes a greater length of time to remove all moisture from larger masses. ASTM C 140 requires
that specimens be dried for a period of not less than 24 hours
at a temperature of at least 212 F (100 C). The 24-hour
time period does not start until the oven reaches the specified
temperature. When placing larger specimens in an oven, it
may take several hours for the oven to reach the prescribed
temperature. ASTM C 140 then requires that specimen weights
be determined every two hours to make sure that the unit is not
still losing water weight (maximum weight loss in two hours
must be less than 0.2% of the previous specimen weight).
This will require 48 hours or more for some specimens. If
not dried adequately, reported absorptions will be lower than
the actual value.
Permissible Variations in Dimensions
Mortarless systems require consistent unit heights to
maintain vertical alignment and level of the wall. For this

reason permissible variation in dimensions is limited to not
more than + 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) from the specified standard dimensions. Regarding dimensions, width refers to the horizontal
dimension of the unit measured perpendicular to the face of
the wall. Height refers to the vertical dimension of the
unit as placed in the wall. Length refers to the horizontal
dimension of the unit measured parallel to the running length
of the wall.
Dimensional tolerance requirements for width are waived
for split faced and other architectural surfaces. The surface
is intended to be rough to satisfy the architectural features
desired and can not be held to a specific tolerance.
Finish and Appearance
Finish and appearance requirements are virtually the same
as those in ASTM C 90 for loadbearing concrete masonry
units. Minor cracks incidental to the usual method of manufacture or minor chipping resulting from customary methods
of handling in shipment and delivery, are not grounds for
rejection. Units used in exposed wall construction are not to
show chips or cracks or other imperfections in the exposed
face when viewed from a distance of not less that 20 ft (6.1
m) under diffused lighting. In addition, up to five percent
of a shipment are permitted to contain chips not larger than
1 in. (25.4 mm) in any dimension, or cracks not wider than
0.02 inches (0.5 mm) and not longer than 25% of the nominal
height of the unit.
Freeze-Thaw Durability
Segmental retaining wall units may be used in aggressive
freezing and thawing environments. However, freeze-thaw
damage can occur when units are saturated with water and then
undergo temperature cycles that range from above to below
the freezing point of water. Freezing and thawing cycles and a
constant source of moisture must both be present for potential
damage to occur.
Many variations can exist in exposure conditions, any
of which may affect the freeze-thaw durability performance
of the units. Such variations include: maximum and minimum temperatures, rate of temperature change, duration of
temperatures, sunlight exposure, directional facing, source
and amount of moisture, chemical exposure, deicing material
exposure, and others.
ASTM C 1372 includes three different methods of satisfying freeze-thaw durability requirements:
1. proven field performance,
2. five specimens shall each have less than 1% weight loss
after 100 cycles in water using ASTM C 1262 (ref. 6), or
3. four of five specimens shall have less than 1.5% weight
loss after 150 cycles in water using ASTM C 1262.
Segmental retaining wall units in many areas of the country
are not exposed to severe exposures. Therefore, the requirements above apply only to areas where repeated freezing and
thawing under saturated conditions occur.
Freeze-thaw durability tests can be conducted in accordance with ASTM C 1262 using water or saline as the media.
For most applications, tests in water are considered sufficient.
33
If the units are to be exposed to deicing salts on a regular

basis, consideration should be given to performing the tests
in saline. However, no pass/fail criteria has been adopted by
ASTM for saline testing.
Compliance
Guidance regarding compliance is also provided in
ASTM C 1372. If a sample fails, the manufacturer can then
remove or cull units from the shipment. Then, a new sample
is selected by the purchaser from the remaining units of the
shipment and tested, which is paid for by the manufacturer.
If the second sample passes then the remaining units of the
lot being sampled are accepted for use in the project. If the
second sample fails, however, the entire lot represented by the
sample is rejected.
The specification also provides guidance on responsibility for payment of the tests. Unless otherwise provided for
in the contract, the purchaser typically pays for the testing if
the units pass the test. However, if the units fail the test, the
seller bears the cost of the testing. See TEK 18-10 Sampling
and Testing Segmental Retaining Wall Units (ref. 7) for more
detailed information on SRW unit sampling, testing, and acceptance.
REFERENCES
1. Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls, 2nd edition. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
2. Segmental Retaining Wall Drainage Manual. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
3. Standard Specification for Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units, ASTM C 1372-04e2. ASTM International, 2004.
4. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-03. ASTM International, 2003.
5. Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units, ASTM C 140-03. ASTM International,
2003.
6. Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related
Concrete Units, ASTM C 1262-07. ASTM International, 2007.
7. Sampling and Testing Segmental Retaining Wall Units, TEK 18-10. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

34
NCMA TEK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE

MASONRY ROOF PAVERS
Keywords: ASTM Standards, absorption, ballasted roofs,
compressive strength, durability, flexural strength, interlocking roof pavers, roof ballast, roof pavers, testing
INTRODUCTION

Concrete roof pavers provide resistance to wind uplift
and surface protection for roofing membranes. Concrete roof
paver systems are installed over flat roofs and allow melting
snow and ice, or rain water to drain from below the roof paver
surface. Ballast weight of the concrete roof paver system is
designed to resist uplift forces from the entire range of design
wind speeds. Concrete roof pavers also provide a durable
wearing surface for roof maintenance and repair operations.

Specifications for concrete roof pavers included herein
specify the physical requirements to ensure field performance.
Also presented are methods of sampling and testing pavers to
demonstrate compliance with these requirements.
Concrete Roof Paver Systems

Concrete roof paver systems are categorized as interlocking or non-interlocking. Interlocking systems distribute
uplift forces to adjacent pavers by a tongue and groove edge
connection or by a mechanical interlock between units. Noninterlocking systems resist uplift by the ballast weight of
individual paver units.
Design and Execution

In addition to the physical characteristics of the roof paver
units themselves, parameters for design of concrete roof paver
systems include the following:

Basic wind speed at building site

Building height

Parapet height

Wind gust factors

Adjacent structures and terrain features to account

for obstructions in the area

Load capacity of the roof structure

Roof discontinuities

Roof slope

Weight of the units

Roof structures must be designed to support the dead
weight of roof paver systems. Where roof pavers are installed
over existing roofs, it is important to evaluate the structural
adequacy of the existing roof to support the roof pavers.

Since modern roof paver systems usually contain integral
drainage grooves, consideration should be given to their orientation parallel to the roof slope, min. 1/4" per foot (20 mm/m),
towards roof drains. See Figure 1 for a typical concrete paver
roof installation.
COUNTERFLASHING IN REGLET
Concrete Roof Paver Units

Roof pavers are exposed to severe weather conditions due
to their horizontal installation over flat or low slope roofs. In
cold weather regions, roof pavers can be routinely subjected
to freezing and thawing in a saturated condition. Typically
these units will also be required to support foot traffic, loaded
wheelbarrows, and other equipment without damaging the
roofing membrane and insulation. These conditions require
that concrete roof pavers be manufactured to specific criteria. The following specification is recommended to ensure a
product of consistent quality.
TEK 2-5A
Unit Properties
8" MAX.
CLEAT & ANGLE SECURED TO WALL

RETAINER ANGLE
BASE FLASHING
CONCRETE ROOF PAVER
MASTIC OR SEALANT
/ 8 " MIN.
PERIMETER
SPACE
DECK
MEMBRANE ROOFING
INSULATION
TREATED NAILER AS REQUIRED
Figure 1Typical Concrete Paver Roof Installation
35
(1999)
Specification for CONCRETE ROOF PAVERS
3.1.2.1 Limestone - Limestone, with a

minimum 85% calcium carbonate (CaCO3)
content, shall be permitted to be added to
the cement, provided the requirements of
Specification C 150 as modified are met:
(1) Limitation on Insoluble Residue
- 1.5%
(2) Limitation on Air Content of Mortar
- Volume percent, 22% max.
(3) Limitation on Loss on Ignition
- 7%.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers concrete roof pavers made
from portland cement, water, and mineral aggregates,
with or without the inclusion of other materials, for use
as roof ballast and protection of roof membranes.
Note 1 The design of roof ballast systems
for resisting wind uplift is beyond the scope
of this standard. Building codes and other
standards should be consulted in designing
for wind uplift resistance.
1.2 Concrete roof pavers covered by this specification
are made from lightweight or normal weight aggregates,
or both.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as the standard. The values given in parentheses
are for information only.
2. Referenced documents

2.1 ASTM Standards:

C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
C140 Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units
C150 Specification for Portland Cement
C331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for
C595/C595M Specification for Blended Hydraulic
Cements
C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland
Cement Concrete
C989 Specification for Ground Granulated BlastFurnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars
C1157/C1157M Performance Specification for
Blended Hydraulic Cement
C1262 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the
Freeze-Thaw Durability of Manufactured Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units
3. Materials
3.1 Cementitious Materials - Materials shall conform
to the following applicable specifications:
3.1.1
Portland Cement - specification C 150.
3.1.2 Modified Portland Cement - Portland Cement conforming to specification C 150 modified as
follows:
3.1.3 Blended Cements - Specification C 595/C

595M or C 1157/C 1157M.
3.1.4 Pozzolans - Specification C 618
3.1.5 Blast Furnace Slag - Specification C 989
3.2 Aggregates - Aggregates shall conform to the following specifications, except that grading requirements
shall not necessarily apply:
3.2.1
C 33.
Normal Weight Aggregates - Specification
3.2.2
331.
Lightweight Aggregates - Specification C
3.3 Other Constituents - Air-entraining agents, coloring

pigments, integral water repellents, finely ground silica,
and other constituents shall be previously established as
suitable for use and shall conform to applicable ASTM
Standards or, shall be shown by test or experience satisfactory to the purchaser to be not detrimental to the
durability of the units.
4. Physical Requirements
4.1 At the time of delivery to the purchaser, all units
shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1
and shall have a minimum net area average compression
strength (average of 3 units) of 3000 psi (20.68 MPa)
Table 1Absorption Requirements for Concrete
Roof Pavers

Concrete Density

lb/ft3/(kg/m3)

95 (1522) or less
over 95 to 115 (1522 to 1842)
115 (1842) or more
Maximum Water
Absorption
lb/ft3/(kg/m3)
(average of 3 units)
15 (240)
13 (208)
10 (160)
36
with no individual unit compressive strength less than

2600 psi (17.93 MPa) when tested in accordance with
Section 7.2
4.2 Resistance to Flexural Load - The average resistance
to flexural load for three paver units shall exceed 350 lb
(1557 N) and resistance to flexural load of each individual
unit shall exceed 280 lb (1246 N) when tested in accordance with Section 7.2.
4.3 Ballast WeightRequirements for ballast weight per
unit area shall be specified separately.
4.4 Freeze-Thaw DurabilityIn areas where repeated
freezing and thawing under saturated conditions occur,
freeze-thaw durability shall be demonstrated by test or
by proven field performance that the concrete roof paver
units have adequate durability for the intended use. When
testing is required by the specifier to demonstrate freezethaw durability, the units shall be tested in accordance
with the requirement of Section 7.3.
4.4.1 Specimens shall comply with either of the
following: (1) the weight loss of each of five test
specimens at the conclusion of 100 cycles shall not
exceed 1% of its initial weight; or (2) the weight loss
of each of four or five test specimens at the conclusion of 150 cycles shall not exceed 1.5% of its initial
weight.
Note 2 This standard does not include
criteria for large hail stone impact. Where
required, these criteria should be specified

by the purchaser.
5. Permissible Variations in Dimension and Weight

5.1 Overall dimensions for width, height, and length
shall not differ by more than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) from
the specified standard dimensions.

5.2 Ballast weight shall not differ by more than
2.0 lb/ft2 (9.7 kg/m2) from the specified weight.
Note 3 - Standard dimensions of units are the
manufacturers designated dimensions.
6. Finish and Appearance
6.1 All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other
defects that would interfere with the proper placement
of the unit or would significantly impair the strength or
permanence of the construction. Minor cracks incidental
to the usual method of manufacture or minor chipping
resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, are not grounds for rejection.
6.2 Five percent of a shipment containing chips not
larger than 1 in. (25.4 mm) in any dimension, or cracks
not wider than 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) and not longer than
25% of the nominal height of the unit is permitted.
6.3 The color and texture of units shall be specified
by the purchaser. The finished surfaces that will be
TEST FORCE DIRECTION

LOAD
CUT STRIP FROM FULL

PAVER
1.75" 1.75"
SPECIMEN HEIGHT
(EQUAL TO
SPECIMEN
WIDTH)
SP
EC
IM
EN
CAP THIS SURFACE
LE
NG
TH
SPECIMEN
WIDTH
NEOPRENE PAD
2 X 4 WOOD BLOCK
CUT TO WIDTH OF
ROOF PAVER UNIT
ROOF
PAVER
1" DIA. STEEL

ROD
.90 LENGTH UNIT
NEOPRENE
PAD
CAP THIS SURFACE
Figure 2Compressive Strength Test Set-up
Figure 3Flexural Strength Test Set-up
37
exposed in place shall conform to an approved sample

consisting of not less than four units, represetning the
range of texture and color permitted.
8. Compliance
7.2 Sample and test units for compressive strength,

flexural load, absorption, and dimensional tolerance
in accordance with Test Methods C 140.
8.1 If a sample fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer shall be permitted to remove
units from the shipment. A new sample shall be selected
by the purchaser from the remaining units from the shipment with a similar configuration and dimension and
tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second
sample meets the specified requirements, the remaining
portion of the shipment represented by the sample meets
the specified requirements. If the second sample fails to
meet the specified requirements, the remaining portion of
the shipment re[resented by the sample fails to meet the
specified requirements.
7.3 When required, sample and test five specimens

for freeze-thaw durability in water in accordance
with C 1262. Freeze-thaw durability shall be based
on tests of units made with the same materials,
concrete mix design, manufacturing process, and
curing method, conducted not more than 24 months
prior to delivery.
Note 4 - Unless otherwise spcified in the purchase order,

the cost of the test is typically borne as follows: (1) if the
results of the tests show that the units do not conform to
the requirements of this specification, the cost is typically
borne by the seller; (2) if the results of the tests show
that the units conform to the specification requirements,
the cost is typically borne by the purchaser.
7. Sampling and Testing

7.1 The purchaser or authorized representative shall
be accorded proper facilities to inspect and sample the
units at the place of manufacture from the lots ready
for delivery.
Provided by:
NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and liability
for the accuracy and the application of the information contained in this publication.

www.ncma.org

NCMA TEK
DENSITY-RELATED PROPERTIES OF
CONCRETE MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
Keywords: acoustics, aesthetics, compressive strength, concrete density, energy efficiency, fire resistance rating, movement control, productivity, water penetration resistance
INTRODUCTION
The versatility of concrete masonry as a construction
assembly is well established through the variety of applications and structures it is used to create. Concrete masonry
offers almost limitless combinations of color, shape, size,
strength, texture, and density. This TEK illustrates the
various physical and design properties influenced by the
density of concrete masonry units, and provides references
to guide the user towards a fuller discussion and more detailed information. Although most of the following discussions use lightweight and normal weight concrete masonry
as examples, the properties of medium weight masonry can
typically be expected to fall between the two.
Note that while some of these density-related properties, such as sound transmission loss, may be directly referenced in building codes such as the International Building Code (ref. 1), other properties or characteristics, such
as aesthetics and construction productivity fall outside the
scope of the building code.
BASICS OF CONCRETE MASONRY
UNIT DENSITY
The density of a concrete masonry unit is expressed as
the oven-dry density of concrete in pounds per cubic foot
(lb/ft3 [kg/m3]) as determined in accordance with ASTM C
140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units (ref. 2). In production, the density of a given concrete masonry unit is controlled in part by the methods used to manufacture the unit,
but largely by the type of aggregate used in production.
Through the use of lightweight aggregates, normal weight
aggregates, or blends of lightweight and normal weight aggregates, the resulting density of concrete masonry units
can be varied by the producer to achieve one or more desired physical properties.
ASTM C 90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing
TEK 2-6
Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 3) defines three density classes for concrete masonry units:
Lightweight units having an average density less than
105 lb/ft3 (1,680 kg/m3).
Medium Weight units having an average density of
105 lb/ft3 (1,680 kg/m3) or more, but less than 125 lb/ft3
(2,000 kg/m3).
Normal Weight units having an average density of 125
lb/ft3 (2,000 kg/m3) or more.
When a specific density classification or density range
is desired for a project, it should be specified in the project
documents along with the other physical properties of the
concrete masonry units such as size, strength, color, and
texture. Before specifying a specific density range, designers are encouraged to first consult with manufacturers local
to the project for availability. As with all physical properties of concrete masonry, minor variation in density from
unit to unit and from batch to batch should be expected.
In accordance with ASTM C 90, aggregates used to
manufacture concrete masonry units must conform to either
ASTM C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (ref. 4), or ASTM C 331, Standard Specification for
Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units (ref.
5). Whereas normal weight aggregates are typically mined
or quarried, lightweight aggregates may be manufactured,
mined or quarried from a natural source, or a by-product of
another process. Although not all aggregate types are produced in all areas of the country, non-local aggregates may
be available. If a concrete masonry unit of a specific aggregate type is desired, potential suppliers should be consulted
for availability prior to specifying them.
FIRE RESISTANCE
Fire resistance ratings of one to four hours can be
achieved with concrete masonry of various widths (or
thicknesses), configurations and densities. As outlined in
TEK 7-1A, Fire Resistance Rating of Concrete Masonry
Assemblies (ref. 6), the fire resistance rating of a concrete
masonry assembly can be determined by physical testing,
through a listing service, or by a standardized calculation
procedure. Whether through direct measurement or by cal39
culation, the fire resistance rating of a given concrete masonry assembly varies directly with the aggregate type and
with the volume of concrete in the unit, expressed as the
equivalent thickness. Through extensive testing and analysis, empirical relationships have been established between
the fire resistance rating of a concrete masonry assembly
and the corresponding type of aggregate and equivalent
thickness of the unit used to construct the assembly. These
relationships are summarized in Figure 1.
These relationships between aggregate type/equivalent
thickness and the corresponding fire resistance rating are
shown graphically in Figure 2. Note that equivalent thicknesses used in Figure 2 are for illustration only, and represent typical equivalent thicknesses for standard hollow
concrete masonry units. Actual units may have higher or
lower equivalent thicknesses than those shown, with corresponding higher or lower fire resistance ratings. In general,
8-in. (203-mm) and wider concrete masonry units can be
supplied with fire resistance ratings up to four hours. For
example, a typical hollow 8 in. (203 mm) concrete masonry unit with an equivalent (solid) thickness of 4.0 in. (102
mm), can have a calculated fire resistance rating from 1.8
hours to 3 hours, depending on the type of aggregate used
to produce the unit.
SOUND CONTROL
The control of sound between adjacent dwelling units
or between dwelling units and public areas is an important
design consideration for user comfort. Sound Transmission Class (STC), expressed in decibels (dB), is a single
number rating that provides a measure of the sound insulating properties of walls. The higher the STC rating, the
better the assembly can block or reduce the transmission of
sound across it. For concrete masonry construction, STC
can be calculated using the installed weight of the assembly, which is a function of the unit density, unit size and
configuration, presence of surface finishes, and presence of
grout or other cell-fill materials such as sand. See Sound
Transmission Class Ratings for Concrete Masonry Walls,
TEK 13-1B (ref. 7) for a full discussion. In accordance with
Standard Method for Determining the Sound Transmission
Class Rating for Masonry Walls (ref. 8), the STC rating
for single wythe concrete masonry assemblies without additional surface treatments is determined by the following
equation:
STC = 19.6W0.230
Eqn. 1.
SI STC = 13.6W0.230
Where W = the average wall weight based on the
weight of: the masonry units; the weight of mortar, grout
and loose fill material in the voids within the wall; and the
weight of surface treatments (excluding drywall) and other
wall components, lb/ft2 (kg/m2).
All other design variables being equal, the STC value
of masonry construction increases with increasing unit
density. Note that STC values determined by the calculation tend to be conservative. Generally, higher STC values
are obtained by referring to actual tests than by the calculation.
In addition to the STC rating, the value of the Noise
Reduction Coefficient (NRC) can also be influenced to
some extent by concrete unit density. NRC measures the
ability of a surface to absorb sound (based on a scale of
0 to 1), which can be an important characteristic in some
applications, such as concert halls and assembly areas. A
higher NRC value indicates that more sound is absorbed by
an assembly. NRC values for concrete masonry walls are
tabulated according to: the application of any coatings to
the wall, the surface texture (coarse, medium or fine) and
the density classification (lightweight or normal weight).
Aggregate type
in the concrete
masonry unit2
Calcareous or
siliceous gravel
the equi
.
4
) .0
5 in
thicknes Limestone, cin7 8 mm (103 4 in.
4
mm
particula ders or slag
(19
)
solid un Expanded clay,
The equivalent thickness of this particular unit (a shale or slate
solid unit with the same amount of material) is
Expanded slag or
4.04 in. (103 mm).
pumice
Minimum required equivalent thickness for fire

resistance rating, in. (mm)1
4 hr
3 hr 2 hr 1.5 hr 1 hr 0.75 hr 0.5 hr
6.2
(157)
5.9
(150)
5.0
(130)
4.7
(119)
5.3
(135)
5.0
(127)
4.4
(112)
4.0
(102)
4.2
(107)
4.0
(102)
3.6
(91)
3.2
(81)
3.6
(91)
3.4
(86)
3.3
(84)
2.7
(69)
2.8
(71)
2.7
(69)
2.6
(66)
2.1
(53)
2.4
(61)
2.3
(58)
2.2
(56)
1.9
(48)
2.0
(51)
1.9
(48)
1.8
(46)
1.5
(38)
Fire resistance ratings between the hourly fire resistance rating periods listed may be determined by linear interpolation
based on the equivalent thickness value of the concrete masonry assembly.
2
Minimum required equivalent thickness corresponding to the hourly fire resistance rating for units made with a combination of aggregates shall be determined by linear interpolation based on the percent by volume of each aggregate used in the
manufacture.
Figure 1 Calculated Fire Resistance Rating for Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls
40
180
160
Typical equivalent thickness of a hollow 16 in. (406 mm)

Typical equivalent thickness of a hollow 14 in. (356 mm) unit
140
120

4

100
Typical equivalent thickness of a
hollow 6 in. (152 mm) unit
80
3
Typical equivalent thickness of a
hollow 4 in. (102 mm) unit
60
Equivalent thickness, mm
Equivalent thickness, in.
2
40
1
20
0
0.5
0.75
Calcareous or siliceous gravel
1.5
Fire resistance, hr
Limestone, cinders, or slag
Expanded clay, shale, or slate
4
Expanded slag or pumice
Figure 2Calculated Fire Resistance Ratings

Assuming a similar surface texture and coating, a concrete
masonry wall constructed with lightweight units will have
a higher NRC than a companion wall constructed with normal weight units, due to the larger pore structure often associated with lower density units. Painting or coating the
surface of the concrete masonry assembly reduces the NRC
for both lightweight and normal weight concrete masonry.
See Noise Control with Concrete Masonry, TEK 13-2A
(ref. 9) for a full discussion.
Table 1Absorption Requirements for

Density
Maximum water absorption, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
classification
Average of 3 units Individual unit
Lightweight
18 (288)
20 (320)
Medium weight
15 (240)
17 (272)
Normal weight
13 (208)
15 (240)
WATER PENETRATION AND ABSORPTION
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Regardless of unit density, all loadbearing concrete
masonry units meeting the physical properties of ASTM
C 90 (ref. 3) must have a minimum average compressive
strength of 1,900 psi (13.1 MPa). It is possible to produce
concrete masonry units that meet or exceed the ASTM C 90
minimum strength in any density classification, although
not all combinations of physical properties may be commonly available in all regions. Therefore, local producers
should always be consulted for product availability before
specifying. In general, for a given concrete masonry unit
mix design, higher compressive strengths can be achieved
by increasing the unit density through adjustments to the
manufacturing methods. (ref. 16).
Concrete masonry unit specifications typically establish upper limits on the amount of water permitted to be
absorbed. Expressed in pounds of water per cubic foot of
concrete (kilograms of water per cubic meter of concrete),
these limits vary with the density classification of the unit,
as shown in Table 1.
While the absorption values are not directly related to
unit physical properties such as compressive strength and
resistance to mechanisms of deterioration such as freezethaw, they do provide a measurement of the void structure
within the concrete matrix of the unit. Several production
variables can affect the void structure, including degree of
compaction, water content of the plastic mix, and aggregate
gradation. Due to the vesicular structure of lower density
units, there is a potential for higher measured absorption
than is typical for most higher density units. Consequently,
41
ASTM C 90 permits lower density units to have a higher

maximum absorption value.
The higher absorption limits permitted by ASTM C
90 for lower density units do not necessarily correlate to
reduced water penetration resistance. One reason is that
water penetration resistance is known to be highly affected
by workmanship and dependent on detailing for water management. It is generally recognized that these two factors
more heavily influence the walls water penetration resistance than do other factors, such as unit density.
AESTHETIC CONSIDERATIONS
One of the most significant architectural benefits of designing with concrete masonry is the versatility afforded by
the layout and appearance of the finished assembly, which
can be varied with the unit size and shape, color of the units
and mortar, bond pattern, and surface finish of the units.
The term architectural concrete masonry unit (ref. 10)
is often used to generically describe units exhibiting any
number of surface finishes or colors. Loadbearing single
wythe masonry walls constructed with these units uniquely
offer the designer structural function, envelope enclosure
and the aesthetics of a finished wall surface without the
need for additional materials, components or assemblies.
In general, the many options available for architectural
concrete masonry units can be offered in any of the three
unit density classifications. However, with respect to unit
appearance, any change in aggregates (whether a change in
source or a change in aggregate type) used to manufacture a
concrete masonry unit may change its color or texture, particularly for units with mechanically altered features such
as split or ground-face surfaces. As a result, when aesthetics are an important consideration, sample units submitted for conceptual design should incorporate the specific
aggregate intended to be used in the actual production of
the units. Note that various degrees of surface smoothness (tight, fine, medium, coarse) can be obtained using
the same aggregate by varying the mix design (proportions
and moisture), aggregate gradation, aggregate shape, and
degree of compaction during manufacture.
In addition to production variables, the appearance of
the finished masonry is also affected by workmanship, and
the mortar color and jointing. Where color, texture and finish are of particular concern, the designer should specify
a special sample panel for review and approval during the
submittal process (ref. 1, 17).
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
When selecting masonry for its energy efficiency, two
material thermal properties should be considered:
R-valuea materials ability to resist the transfer of heat
under steady-state conditions; and
Thermal mass (heat capacity)a materials ability to
store and release heat (ref. 11).
These physical properties, in combination with a
buildings design, layout, location, climate, exposure, use,
or occupancy as required by building codes, influence the

energy efficiency and thermal characteristics of the building envelope and of the building.
Increasing the unit density, unit thickness, unit solid
content, and amount/extent of grout, increases the installed
weight of the masonry assembly, which is directly related
to its heat capacity. (ref. 11). Conversely, increasing the
density or amount of grout used in a concrete masonry
assembly decreases its R-value (ref. 12). Because of the
multitude of variables that determine the overall energy efficiency of a structure, some projects benefit more by increasing the thermal mass of an assembly while others see
more energy efficiency by increasing the R-value. As such,
the unique requirements of each project should be considered individually for maximum benefit.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN INFLUENCES
The structural design of masonry is based on the specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm, which is a function of the compressive strength of the unit and the type
of mortar used in construction. It is possible to produce
a wide range of compressive strengths within each of the
density classes. Therefore, for a given unit compressive
strength and mortar type, the strength of the masonry assembly is unaffected by the unit density. As such, the design flexural, shear, and bearing strengths of masonry, some
deformational properties such as elastic modulus, and the
structural behavior of the masonry assembly determined by
contemporary codes and standards are independent of the
density of the concrete masonry unit.
Unit density, however, can influence other structural
design considerations, aside from compressive strength.
Reducing the density of a concrete masonry unit can reduce
the overall weight of a structure, and potentially reduce the
required size of the supporting foundation, slab, or beam.
Reducing the weight of a structure or element also reduces
the seismic load a structure or element must be designed to
resist, because the magnitude of seismic loading is a direct
function of dead load.
As with thermal mass and sound control, there may be
circumstances where increasing the unit density is structurally beneficial. For example, the structural stability
against overturning and uplift is increased with increasing
structural weight. Hence, while increased structural dead
load increases seismic design forces, it also concurrently
helps to resist wind loads. Therefore, there may be some
structural advantage to using lightweight units in areas of
high seismic risk; and normal weight units in areas prone
to high winds, hurricanes and/or tornadoes. Structural design considerations, however, are often relatively minor
compared to other factors that may influence the choice of
unit density.
PRODUCTIVITY
For a given unit configuration, and with all other factors affecting production being equal, lower unit weights
42
typically enable a mason to lay more units within a given

timeframe (ref. 13). Other factors influencing the daily
productivity of a mason may include environmental conditions, unit size and shape, building size and configuration,
masonry bond pattern, and reinforcement and other detailing (ref. 13).
MOVEMENT CONTROL
Regardless of the density of a concrete masonry unit,
the established movement control recommendations for
concrete masonry construction are applicable. See Crack
Control in Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 10-1A, and Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls Empirical Method, TEK 10-2B (refs. 14, 15) for more detailed guidance.
ASTM C 90 requires that linear drying shrinkage of
all concrete masonry units, regardless of unit density, not
exceed 0.065% at the time of delivery to the jobsite. However, despite the fact that not all concrete masonry units
exhibit the same linear drying shrinkage within this limit,
established movement control recommendations (refs. 14,
15) are independent of the concrete masonry unit density.
SUMMARY
Issues of masonry design and construction can be influenced and addressed to varying extents through the choice
of concrete masonry unit density, but generally the resulting effects of varying unit density on masonry behavior and
performance are quite limited. Notwithstanding these effects, the designer can be assured that concrete masonry
constructed of any unit density offers sufficient flexibility
and alternatives in the choice of materials, design, and construction detailing to satisfy the structural and architectural
requirements of the project.
REFERENCES
1. International Building Code. International Code Council,
2003 and 2006.
2. Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Units, ASTM C 140-06,

3. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-06a, ASTM International,
2006.
4. Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM
C 33-03, ASTM International, 2006.
5. Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for
Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 331-05, ASTM
6. Fire Resistance Rating of Concrete Masonry Assemblies,
TEK 7-1A, National Concrete Masonry Association,
2006.
7. Sound Transmission Class Ratings for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 13-1B, National Concrete Masonry
Association, 2007.
8. Standard Method for Determining the Sound Transmission Class Rating for Masonry Walls, TMS 0302-07,
The Masonry Society, 2007.
9. Noise Control with Concrete Masonry, TEK 13-2A,
National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
10. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 2-3A,
11. Heat Capacity (HC) Values for Concrete Masonry Walls,
TEK 6-16, National Concrete Masonry Association,
1989.
12. R-Values for Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK
6-2A, National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
13. Productivity and Modular Coordination in Concrete
Masonry Construction, TEK 4-1A, National Concrete
14. Crack Control in Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 10-1A,
15. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls Empirical Method, TEK 10-2B. National Concrete Masonry
Association, 2005.
16. Holm, T. A. Engineered Masonry With High Strength
Lightweight Concrete Masonry Units. Concrete Facts,
Vol. 17, No. 2, 1972.
17. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1/ASCE
6/TMS 602. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, 2002 and 2005.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

43
NCMA TEK
ALL-WEATHER CONCRETE
MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
Keywords: cold weather construction, construction techniques, grout, hot weather construction, mortar, rain, snow,
storage of materials, wet weather construction, windy
weather construction
INTRODUCTION
Masonry construction can continue during hot, cold, and
wet weather conditions. The ability to continue masonry construction in adverse weather conditions requires consideration
of how environmental conditions may affect the quality of the
finished masonry. In some cases, environmental conditions
may warrant the use of special construction procedures to ensure
that the masonry work is not adversely affected.
One of the prerequisites of successful all-weather construction is advance knowledge of local conditions. Work stoppage
may be justified if a short period of very cold or very hot weather
is anticipated. The best source for this type of information is the
U.S. Weather Bureau, Environmental Science Services Administration (ESSA) of the U.S. Department of Commerce which
can be accessed at their web site http://www.ncdc.noaa.gov.
In the following discussion, ambient temperature refers to
the surrounding jobsite temperature when the preparation
activities and construction are in progress. Similarly the mean
daily temperature is the average of the hourly temperatures
forecast by the local weather bureau over a 24 hour period
following the onset of construction. Minimum daily temperature is the lowest temperature expected during the period.
Temperatures between 40 and 90oF (4.4 and 32.2oC) are
considered normal temperatures for masonry construction
and therefore do not require special procedures or protection
protocols.
COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
When ambient temperatures fall below 40oF (4.4oC), the
Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) requires consideration of special construction procedures to help ensure the final
construction is not adversely affected. Similarly when the
minimum daily temperature for grouted masonry or the mean
temperature for ungrouted masonry falls below 40oF (4.4oC)
during the first 48 or 24 hours after construction respectively,
special protection considerations are required.
TEK 3-1C
Construction
(2002)
Mortar and Grout Performance

Hydration and strength development in mortar and grout
generally occurs at temperatures above 40oF (4.4oC) and only
when sufficient water is available. However, masonry construction may proceed when temperatures are below 40oF (4.4oC)
provided cold weather construction and protection requirements of reference 3 are followed.
Mortars and grouts mixed at low temperatures have longer
setting and hardening times, and lower early strength than those
mixed at normal temperatures. However, mortars and grouts
produced with heated materials exhibit performance characteristics identical to those produced during warm weather.
Effects of Freezing
The initial water content of mortar can be a significant
contributing factor to the resulting properties and performance of mortar, affecting workability, bond, compressive
strength, and susceptibility to freezing. Research has shown
a resulting disruptive expansion effect on the cement-aggregate matrix when fresh mortars with water contents in excess
of 8 %mortar are frozen (ref. 2). This disruptive effect
increases as the water content increases. Therefore, mortar
should not be allowed to freeze until the mortar water content
is reduced from the initial 11% to 16% range to a value below
6%. Dry concrete masonry units have a demonstrated capacity to achieve this moisture reduction in a relatively short
time. It is for this reason that the specification requires
protection from freezing of mortar for only the first 24 hours
(ref. 3).
Grout is a close relative of mortar in composition and
performance characteristics. During cold weather, however,
more attention must be directed toward the protection of grout
because of the higher water content and resulting disruptive
expansion that can occur from freezing of that water. Therefore,
grouted masonry needs to be protected for longer periods to
allow the water content to be dissipated.
Cement
During cold weather masonry construction, Type III, highearly strength portland cement should be considered in lieu of
Type I portland cement in mortar or grout to accelerate setting.
The acceleration not only reduces the curing time but generates
more heat which is beneficial in cold weather.
44
TEK 3-1C 2002 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEK 3-1B)
Admixtures
The purpose of an accelerating type of admixture is to
hasten the hydration of the portland cement in mortar or grout.
However, admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.2%
chloride ions are not permitted to be used in mortar (ref. 3) due to
corrosion of embedded metals and contribution to efflorescence.
While specifically not addressed by the Specification, the use of
chloride admixtures in grout is generally discouraged.
Noncloride accelerators are available but they must be used in
addition to cold weather procedures and not as a replacement for
them. Antifreezes are not recommended for use in mortars and are
prohibited for use in grouts.
Material Storage
Construction materials should be protected from water by
covering. Bagged materials and masonry units should be protected
from precipitation and ground water by storage on pallets or other

acceptable means.
Coverings for materials include tarpaulins, reinforced paper,
polyethylene, or other water repellent sheet materials. If the weather
and size of the project warrant, a shelter may be provided for the
material storage and mortar mixing areas.
Material Heating
When the ambient temperature falls below 40F (4.4C)
during construction, or mean daily temperature is predicted to fall
below 40F (4.4C) during the first 24 hours following construction
of ungrouted masonry, or the minimum daily temperature is
predicted to fall below 40F (4.4C) during the first 48 hours for
grouted masonry, Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3)
requires specific construction and protection procedures to be
implemented as summarized in Tables 1a and 1b. As indicated in
Table 1aCold Weather Masonry Construction Requirements (ref. 3)

Ambient
temperature
o
32 to 40 F
(0 to 4.4oC)
Construction requirements
Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20oF (-6.7oC). Remove visible snow and ice
on masonry units before the unit is laid in the masonry. Remove snow and ice from foundation.
Heat existing foundation and masonry surfaces to receive new masonry above freezing. Heat
mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120oF (4.4 and 48.9oC).
Grout materials to be 32oF (0oC) minimum. Do not heat water or aggregates above 140oF (60oC).
25 to 32oF
(-3.9 to 0oC)
Same as above for mortar. Maintain mortar temperature above freezing until used in masonry.
Heat grout aggregates and mixing water to produce grout temperatures between 70 and 120oF (21.1
and 48.9oC). Maintain grout temperature above 70oF (21.1oC) at time of grout placement.
20 to 25oF
(-6.7 to -3.9oC)
Same as above, plus use heat masonry surfaces under construction to 40oF (4.4oC) and install wind
breaks or enclosures when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph (24 km/hr). Heat masonry to a minimum
of 40oF (4.4oC) prior to grouting.
20oF (-6.7oC)
and below
Same as above, plus provide an enclosure for the masonry under construction and use heat sources
to maintain temperatures above 32oF (0oC) within the enclosure.
Table 1bCold Weather Masonry Protection Requirements (ref. 3)

Mean daily temperature for
ungrouted masonry
Minimum daily temperature
for grouted masonry
Protection requirements
25 to 40oF
(-3.9 to 4.4oC)
Protect completed masonry from rain or snow by covering with a weather-resistive

membrane for 24 hours after construction.
20 to 25oF
(-6.7 to -3.9oC)
Completely cover the completed masonry with a weather-resistive insulating blanket

or equal for 24 hours after construction (48 hr for grouted masonry unless only Type
III portland cement used in grout).
20oF (-6.7oC)
and below
Maintain masonry temperature above 32oF (0oC) for 24 hours after construction by
enclosure with supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, by infrared heat
lamps, or by other acceptable methods. Extend time to 48 hours for grouted masonry
unless the only cement in the grout is Type III portland cement.
45
Table 1a, the temperature of dry masonry units may be as low as 20oF
(-6.7oC) at the time of placement. However, wet frozen masonry
units should be thawed before placement in the masonry. Also, even
when the temperature of dry units approaches the 20oF (-6.7oC)
threshold, it may be advantageous to heat the units for greater mason
productivity.
Masonry should never be placed on a snow or ice-covered
surface. Movement occurring when the base thaws will cause cracks
in the masonry. Furthermore, the bond between the mortar and the
supporting surface will be compromised.
Glass Unit Masonry
For glass unit masonry, both the ambient temperature and the unit
temperature must be above 40oF (4.4oC) and maintained above that
temperature for the first 48 hours (ref. 3).
Additional Recommendations
Store masonry materials in a shaded area. Use a water barrel
as water hoses exposed to direct sunlight can result in water with
highly elevated temperatures. The barrel may be filled with water
from a hose, but the hot water resulting from hose inactivity should
be flushed and discarded first. Additionally, mortar mixing times
should be no longer than 3 to 5 minutes and smaller batches will help
minimize drying time on the mortar boards.
To minimize mortar surface drying, past requirements contained within Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) were to
not spread mortar bed joints more than 4 feet (1.2 m) ahead of
masonry and to set masonry units within one minute of spreading
mortar. This is no longer a requirement in the current document but
the concept still merits consideration. If surface drying does occur,
the mortar can often be revitalized by wetting the wall but care should
be taken to avoid washout of fresh mortar joints.
HOT WEATHER CONSTRUCTION

WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
High temperatures, solar radiation, and ambient relative
humidity influence the absorption characteristics of the masonry
units and the setting time and drying rate for mortar. When mortar
gets too hot, it may lose water so rapidly that the cement does not fully
hydrate. Early surface drying of the mortar results in decreased bond
strength and less durable mortar. Hot weather construction procedures involve keeping masonry materials as cool as possible and
preventing excessive water loss from the mortar. Specific hot
weather requirements of the Specification for Masonry Structures
(ref. 3) are shown in Tables 2a and 2b.
Even when ambient temperatures are between 40 and 90F

(4.4 and 32.2C), the presence of rain, or the likelihood of rain,
should receive special consideration during masonry construction.
Unless protected, masonry construction should not continue during
heavy rains, as partially set or plastic mortar is susceptible to
washout, which could result in reduced strength or staining of the
wall. However, after approximately 8 to 24 hours of curing
(depending upon environmental conditions), mortar washout is no
Table 2aHot Weather Masonry Preparation and Construction Requirements (ref. 3)

Ambient
temperature
Preparation and construction requirements
Above 100oF (37.8oC) or

above 90oF (32.2oC)
with a wind speed greater
than 8 mph (12.9 km/hr)
Maintain sand piles in a damp, loose condition. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout
below 120oF (48.9oC). Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with
cool water before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar. Maintain
mortar consistency by retempering with cool water. Use mortar within 2 hours of initial
mixing.

above 105oF (40.6oC)
Same as above, plus materials and mixing equipment are to be shaded from direct sunlight.
Use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water as long as
it is melted when added to the other mortar or grout materials.
Table 2bHot Weather Masonry Protection Requirements (ref. 3)

Mean daily
temperature
above 90oF (32.2oC)
Protection requirements
Fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the
masonry is three days old.
46
longer of concern. Further, the wetting of masonry by rainwater

provides beneficial curing conditions for the mortar (ref. 2).
When rain is likely, all construction materials should be
covered. Newly constructed masonry should be protected from
rain by draping a weather-resistant covering over the assemblage.
The cover should extend over all mortar that is susceptible to
washout.
Recommended Maximum Unit Moisture Content
When the moisture content of a concrete masonry unit is
elevated to excessive levels due to wetting by rain or other sources,
several deleterious consequences can result including increased
shrinkage potential and possible cracking, decreased mason productivity, and decreased mortar/unit bond strength. While reinforced
masonry construction does not rely on mortar/unit bond for structural capacity, this is a design consideration with unreinforced
masonry. As such, the concerns associated with structural bond in
reinforced masonry construction are diminished.
As a means of determining if a unit has acceptable moisture
content at the time of installation, the following industry
recommended guidance should be used. This simple field
procedure can quickly ascertain whether a concrete masonry unit
has acceptable moisture content at the time of installation.
A concrete masonry unit for which 50% or more of the

surface area is observed to be wet is considered to have unacceptable moisture content for placement. If less than 50% of the
surface area is wet, the unit is acceptable for placement. Damp
surfaces are not considered wet surfaces.
For this application, a surface would be considered damp
if some moisture is observed, but the surface darkens when
additional free water is applied. Conversely, a surface would be
considered wet if moisture is observed and the surface does not
darken when free water is applied.
It should be noted that these limitations on maximum
permissible moisture content are not intended to apply to
intermittent masonry units that are wet cut as needed for special
fit.
WINDY WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
In addition to the effects of wind on hot and cold weather
construction, the danger of excessive wind resulting in structural failure of newly constructed masonry prior to the development of strength or before the installation of supports must be
considered. TEK 3-4B Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls
During Construction (ref. 1) provides guidance in this regard.
REFERENCES
1. Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction, TEK 3-4B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000
2. Hot & Cold Weather Masonry Construction. Masonry Industry Council, 1999.
Committee, 2002.
Provided by:
NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and
liability for the accuracy and the application of the information contained in this publication.

13750 Sunrise Valley Drive, Herndon, Virginia 20171-3499
www.ncma.org

NCMA TEK
GROUTING CONCRETE MASONRY WALLS
TEK 3-2A
Construction
Keywords: cleanouts, concrete masonry units, construction techniques, consolidation, demonstration panel,
grout, grouting, lift height, pour height, puddling,
reinforced concrete masonry, reinforcement
INTRODUCTION
Grouted concrete masonry construction offers design
flexibility through the use of partially or fully grouted walls,
whether plain or reinforced. The industry is experiencing
fast-paced advances in grouting procedures and materials as
building codes allow new opportunities to explore means and
methods for constructing grouted masonry walls.
Grout is a mixture of: cementitious material (usually
portland cement); aggregate; enough water to cause the mixture to flow readily and without segregation into cores or
cavities in the masonry; and sometimes admixtures. Grout is
used to give added strength to both reinforced and unreinforced concrete masonry walls by grouting either some or all
of the cores. It is also used to fill bond beams and occasionally
to fill the collar joint of a multi-wythe wall. Grout may also be
added to increase the wall's fire rating, acoustic effectiveness
termite resistance, blast resistance, heat capacity or anchor-
age capabilities. Grout may also be used to stabilize screen

walls and other landscape elements.
In reinforced masonry, grout bonds the masonry units
and reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist
imposed loads. In partially grouted walls, grout is placed
only in wall spaces containing steel reinforcement. When all
cores, with or without reinforcement, are grouted, the wall is
considered solidly grouted. If vertical reinforcement is
spaced close together and/or there are a significant number
of bond beams within the wall, it may be faster and more
economical to solidly grout the wall.
Specifications for grout, sampling and testing procedures, and information on admixtures are covered in Grout for
Concrete Masonry (ref. 1). This TEK covers methods for
laying the units, placing steel reinforcement and grouting.
WALL CONSTRUCTION
Figure 1 shows the basic components of a typical reinforced concrete masonry wall. When walls will be grouted,
concrete masonry units must be laid up so that vertical cores
are aligned to form an unobstructed, continuous series of
vertical spaces within the wall.
Place mesh or other grout

stop device under bond beam
to confine grout or use solid
bottom unit
Vertical reinforcement lap and secure as required
Reinforcement in
bond beams is set in
place as wall is laid up
Flashing
Leave this block out to
serve as a cleanout
until wall is laid up
Drip edge
Cells containing
reinforcement are filled
solidly with grout;
vertical cells should
provide a continuous
cavity, substantially free
of mortar droppings
Place mortar on cross
webs adjacent to cells
which will be grouted
Figure 1Typical Reinforced Concrete Masonry Wall Section

48
TEK 3-2A 2005 National Concrete Masonry Association (replaces TEKs 3-2 and 3-3A)
(2005)
Head and bed joints must be filled with mortar for the
full thickness of the face shell. If the wall will be partially
grouted, those webs adjacent to the cores to be grouted are
mortared to confine the grout flow. If the wall will be solidly
grouted, the cross webs need not be mortared since the grout
flows laterally, filling all spaces. In certain instances, full
head joint mortaring should also be considered when solid
grouting since it is unlikely that grout will fill the space
between head joints that are only mortared the width of the
face shell, i.e., when penetration resistance is a concern such
as torm shelters and prison walls. In cases such as those,
open end or open core units (see Figure 3) should be
considered as there is no space between end webs with these
types of units.
Care should be taken to prevent excess mortar from
extruding into the grout space. Mortar that projects more than
1
/2 in. (13 mm) into the grout space must be removed (ref. 3).
This is because large protrusions can restrict the flow of grout,
which will tend to bridge at these locations potentially causing
incomplete filling of the grout space. To prevent bridging,
grout slump is required to be between 8 and 11 in. (203 to 279
mm) (refs. 2, 3) at the time of placement. This slump may be
adjusted under certain conditions such as hot or cold weather
installation, low absorption units or other project specific
conditions. Approval should be obtained before adjusting the
slump outside the requirements. Using the grout demonstration panel option in Specification for Masonry Structures
(ref. 3) is an excellent way to demonstrate the acceptability of
an alternate grout slump. See the Grout Demonstration Panel
section of this TEK for further information.
At the footing, mortar bedding under the first course of
block to be grouted should permit grout to come into direct
contact with the foundation or bearing surface. If foundation
Vertical
reinforcement,
as required
dowels are present, they should align with the cores of the
masonry units. If a dowel interferes with the placement of the
units, it may be bent a maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) horizontally
for every 6 in. (152 mm) vertically (see Figure 2). When walls
will be solidly grouted, saw cutting or chipping away a portion
of the web to better accommodate the dowel may also be
acceptable. If there is a substantial dowel alignment problem,
the project engineer must be notified.
Vertical reinforcing steel may be placed before the
blocks are laid, or after laying is completed. If reinforcement
is placed prior to laying block, the use of open-end A or Hshaped units will allow the units to be easily placed around the
reinforcing steel (see Figure 3). When reinforcement is placed
after wall erection, reinforcing steel positioners or other
adequate devices to hold the reinforcement in place are
commonly used, but not required. However, it is required
that both horizontal and vertical reinforcement be located
within tolerances and secured to prevent displacement during
grouting (ref. 3). Laps are made at the end of grout pours and
any time the bar has to be spliced. The length of lap splices
should be shown on the project drawings. On occasion there
may be locations in the structure where splices are prohibited.
Those locations are to be clearly marked on the drawing.
Reinforcement can be spliced by either contact or
noncontact splices. Noncontact lap splices may be spaced as far
apart as one-fifth the required length of the lap but not more than
8 in. (203 mm) per Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (ref. 4). This provision accommodates construction
interference during installation as well as misplaced dowels.
Open end, or "A"

shaped unit
Double open end or

"H" shaped unit
Grout, as
required
Concrete
masonry wall
Dowels may be
bent up to 1 in.
(25 mm) laterally
per 6 in. (152 mm)
vertically
Concrete
foundation
Figure 2Foundation Dowel Clearance
Bond beam units
Lintel unit
Pilaster units
Open core unit
Figure 3Concrete Masonry Units for

Reinforced Construction
49
Splices are not required to be tied, however tying is often used

as a means to hold bars in place.
As the wall is constructed, horizontal reinforcement
can be placed in bond beam or lintel units. If the wall will not
be solidly grouted, the grout may be confined within the
desired grout area either by using solid bottom masonry
bond beam units or by placing plastic or metal screening,
expanded metal lath or other approved material in the
horizontal bed joint before laying the mortar and units being
used to construct the bond beam. Roofing felt or materials
that break the bond between the masonry units and mortar
should not be used for grout stops.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS AND
REINFORCING BARS
Standard two-core concrete masonry units can be
effectively reinforced when lap splices are not long, since the
mason must lift the units over any vertical reinforcing bars that
extend above the previously installed masonry. The concrete
masonry units illustrated in Figure 3 are examples of shapes
that have been developed specifically to accommodate
reinforcement. Open-ended units allow the units to be placed
2 ft 8 in. (813 mm)

pour and 2 ft 8 in.
(813 mm) lift
5 ft (1.5 m) pour
and 5 ft (1.5 m) lift
around reinforcing bars. This eliminates the need to thread

units over the top of the reinforcing bar. Horizontal
reinforcement in concrete masonry walls can be
accommodated either by saw-cutting webs out of a standard
unit or by using bond beam units. Bond beam units are
manufactured with either reduced webs or with knock-out
webs, which are removed prior to placement in the wall.
Pilaster and column units are used to accommodate a wallcolumn or wall-pilaster interface, allowing space for vertical
reinforcement and ties, if necessary, in the hollow center.
Concrete masonry units should meet applicable ASTM
standards and should typically be stored on pallets to prevent
excessive dirt and water from contaminating the units. The
units may also need to be covered to protect them from rain
and snow.
The primary structural reinforcement used in concrete
masonry is deformed steel bars. Reinforcing bars must be of
the specified diameter, type and grade to assure compliance
with the contract documents. See Steel Reinforcement for
Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-4C for more information (ref. 6).
Shop drawings may be required before installation can begin.
Light rust, mill scale or a combination of both need not
be removed from the reinforcement. Mud, oil, heavy rust and
2 ft 8 in.
(813 mm)
lift
5 ft (1.5 m)
lift
12 ft 8 in.
(3.9 m) pour
Lap
5 ft (1.5 m) pour
and 5 ft (1.5 m) lift
Lap
Grouting without cleanouts:

(Low-lift)
No cleanouts required
Wall built in 3 stages
Bars spliced at pour height
Three grout lifts
5 ft (1.5 m)
lift
Lap
Cleanout
12 ft 8 in.
(3.9 m)
pour
and
12 ft 8 in
(3.9 m) lift
Lap
Cleanout
Grouting with cleanouts:

Grouting with cleanouts per
(High-lift)
MSJC (2005) or grout demonstration panel:
Cleanouts required
Cleanouts required
Wall built full height
Wall built full height
Bars installed full length (no splicing)
Bars installed full length (no splicing)
Three grout lifts
One grout lift
Figure 4Comparison of Grouting Methods for a 12 ft-8 in. (3,860 mm) High Concrete Masonry Wall
50
other materials which adversely affect bond must be removed

however. The dimensions and weights (including heights of
deformations) of a cleaned bar cannot be less than those
required by the ASTM specification.
GROUT PLACEMENT
To understand grout placement, the difference between a
grout lift and a grout pour needs to be understood. A lift is the
amount of grout placed in a single continuous operation. A
pour is the entire height of masonry to be grouted prior to the
construction of additional masonry. A pour may be composed
of one lift or a number of successively placed grout lifts, as
illustrated in Figure 4.
Historically, only two grout placement procedures have
been in general use: (l) where the wall is constructed to pour
heights up to 5 ft (1,520 mm) without cleanoutsgenerally
termed low lift grouting; and (2) where the wall is
constructed to a maximum pour height of 24 ft (7,320 mm)
with required cleanouts and lifts are placed in increments of
5 ft (1,520 mm)generally termed high lift grouting.
With the advent of the 2002 Specification for Masonry
Structures (ref. 5), a third option became available grout
demonstration panels. The 2005 Specification for Masonry
Structures (ref. 3) offers an additional option: to increase
the grout lift height to 12 ft-8 in. (3,860 mm) under the
following conditions:
1. the masonry has cured for at least 4 hours,
2. grout slump is maintained between 10 and 11 in. (245 and
279 mm), and
3. no intermediate reinforced bond beams are placed between
the top and the bottom of the pour height.
Through the use of a grout demonstration panel, lift
heights in excess of the 12 ft-8 in. (3,860 mm) limitation may
be permitted if the results of the demonstration show that the
completed grout installation is not adversely affected. Written
approval is also required.
These advances permit more efficient installation and
construction options for grouted concrete masonry walls (see
Figure 4).
Grouting Without Cleanouts"Low-Lift Grouting
Grout installation without cleanouts is sometimes called
low-lift grouting. While the term is not found in codes or
standards, it is common industry language to describe the
process of constructing walls in shorter segments, without the
requirements for cleanout openings, special concrete block
shapes or equipment. The wall is built to scaffold height or to
a bond beam course, to a maximum of 5 ft (1,520 mm). Steel
reinforcing bars and other embedded items are then placed in
the designated locations and the cells are grouted. Although
not a code requirement, it is considered good practice (for all
lifts except the final) to stop the level of the grout being placed
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) below the top bed joint to help
provide some mechanical keying action and water penetration
resistance. Further, this is needed only when a cold joint is
formed between the lifts and only in areas that will be
receiving additional grout. Steel reinforcement should
project above the top of the pour for sufficient height to

provide for the minimum required lap splice, except at the
top of the finished wall.
Grout is to be placed within 11/2 hours from the initial
introduction of water and prior to initial set (ref. 3). Care
should be taken to minimize grout splatter on reinforcement,
on finished masonry unit faces or into cores not immediately
being grouted. Small amounts of grout can be placed by hand
with buckets. Larger quantities should be placed by grout
pumps, grout buckets equipped with chutes or other
mechanical means designed to move large volumes of grout
without segregation.
Grout must be consolidated either by vibration or puddling
immediately after placement to help ensure complete filling
of the grout space. Puddling is allowed for grout pours of 12
in. (305 mm) or less. For higher pour heights, mechanical
vibration is required and reconsolidation is also required. See the
section titled Consolidation and Reconsolidation in this TEK.
Grouting With Cleanouts"High-Lift Grouting
Many times it is advantageous to build the masonry wall
to full height before grouting rather than building it in 5 ft
(1,520 mm) increments as described above. With the
installation of cleanouts this can be done. Typically called
high-lift grouting within the industry, grouting with cleanouts
permits the wall to be laid up to story height or to the
maximum pour height shown in Table 1 prior to the installation
of reinforcement and grout. (Note that in Table 1, the
maximum area of vertical reinforcement does not include
the area at lap splices.) High lift grouting offers certain
advantages, especially on larger projects. One advantage is
that a larger volume of grout can be placed at one time,
thereby increasing the overall speed of construction. A
Table 1Grout Space Requirements (ref. 3)
Grout Max. grout
type1 pour height,
ft (m)
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Coarse
Coarse
Coarse
Coarse
1
2
3
1 (0.30)
5 (1.52)
12 (3.66)
24 (7.32)
1 (0.30)
5 (1.52)
12 (3.66)
24 (7.32)
Min. width
of grout
space 2,3,
in. (mm)
(19.1)
2 (50.8)
2 (63.5)
3 (76.2)
1 (38.1)
2 (50.8)
2 (63.5)
3 (76.2)
Min. grout space

dimensions for grouting
cells of hollow units 3,4
in. x in. (mm x mm)
1 x 2 (38.1 x 50.8)
2 x 3 (50.8 x 76.2)
2 x 3 (63.5 x 76.2)
3 x 3 (76.2 x 76.2)
1 x 3 (38.1 x 76.2)
2 x 3 (63.5 x 76.2)
3 x 3 (76.2 x 76.2)
3 x 4 (76.2 x 102)
Fine and coarse grouts are defined in ASTM C 476 (ref. 2).
For grouting between masonry wythes.
Grout space dimension is the clear dimension between
any masonry protrusion and shall be increased by the
diameters of the horizontal bars within the cross section of
the grout space.
Area of vertical reinforcement shall not exceed 6 percent
of the area of the grout space.
51
second advantage is that high-lift grouting can permit

constructing masonry to the full story height before placing
vertical reinforcement and grout. Less reinforcement is
used for splices and the location of the reinforcement can be
easily checked by the inspector prior to grouting. Bracing
may be required during construction. See Bracing Concrete
Masonry Walls During Construction, TEK 3-4B (ref. 7)
for further information.
Cleanout openings must be made in the face shells of the
bottom course of units at the location of the grout pour. The
openings must be large enough to allow debris to be removed
from the space to be grouted. For example, Specification for
Masonry Structures (ref. 3) requires a minimum opening
dimension of 3 in. (76 mm). Cleanouts must be located at the
bottom of all cores containing dowels or vertical reinforcement
and at a maximum of 32 in. (813 mm) on center (horizontal
measurement) for solidly grouted walls. Face shells are
removed either by cutting or use of special scored units
which permit easy removal of part of the face shell for
cleanout openings (see Figure 5). When the cleanout opening
is to be exposed in the finished wall, it may be desirable to
remove the entire face shell of the unit, so that it may be
replaced in whole to better conceal the opening. At flashing
where reduced thickness units are used as shown in Figure 1,
the exterior unit can be left out until after the masonry wall
is laid up. Then after cleaning the cell, the unit is mortared
in which allowed enough time to gain enough strength to
prevent blowout prior to placing the grout.
Proper preparation of the grout space before grouting is
very important. After laying masonry units, mortar droppings
and projections larger than 1/2 in. (13 mm) must be removed
from the masonry walls, reinforcement and foundation or
bearing surface. Debris may be removed using an air hose or
by sweeping out through the cleanouts. The grout spaces
should be checked by the inspector for cleanliness and
reinforcement position before the cleanouts are closed.
Cleanout openings may be sealed by mortaring the original
face shell or section of face shell, or by blocking the
openings to allow grouting to the finish plane of the wall.
Face shell plugs should be adequately braced to resist fluid
grout pressure.
It may be advisable to delay grouting until the mortar has
been allowed to cure, in order to prevent horizontal movement

(blowout) of the wall during grouting. When using the
increased grout lift height provided for in Article 3.5 D of
Specification for Masonry Structures (ref 3), the masonry
is required to cure for a minimum of 4 hours prior to
grouting for this reason.
Consolidation and Reconsolidation
An important factor mentioned in both grouting
procedures is consolidation. Consolidation eliminates voids,
helping to ensure complete grout fill and good bond in the
masonry system.
As the water from the grout mixture is absorbed into the
masonry, small voids may form and the grout column may
settle. Reconsolidation acts to remove these small voids and
should generally be done between 3 and 10 minutes after
grout placement. The timing depends on the water absorption
rate, which varies with such factors as temperature, absorptive
properties of the masonry units and the presence of water
repellent admixtures in the units. It is important to
reconsolidate after the initial absorption has taken place and
before the grout loses its plasticity. If conditions permit and
grout pours are so timed, consolidation of a lift and
reconsolidation of the lift below may be done at the same
time by extending the vibrator through the top lift and into the
one below. The top lift is reconsolidated after the required
waiting period and then filled with grout to replace any void
left by settlement.
A mechanical vibrator is normally used for consolidation
and reconsolidationgenerally low velocity with a 3/4 in. to
1 in. (19 to 25 mm) head. This pencil head vibrator is
activated for a few seconds in each grouted cell. Although
not addressed by the code, recent research (ref. 8) has
demonstrated adequate consolidation by vibrating the top 8
ft (2,440 mm) of a grout lift, relying on head pressure to
consolidate the grout below. The vibrator should be withdrawn
slowly enough while on to allow the grout to close up the
space that was occupied by the vibrator. When double openend units are used, one cell is considered to be formed by the
two open ends placed together. When grouting between
wythes, the vibrator is placed at points spaced 12 to 16 in.
(305 to 406 mm) apart. Excess vibration may blow out the
face shells or may separate wythes when grouting between
wythes and can also cause grout segregation.
GROUT DEMONSTRATION PANEL
Figure 5Unit Scored to Permit Removal of Part of

Face Shell for Cleanout
Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) contains

a provision for alternate grout placement procedures when
means and methods other than those prescribed in the
document are proposed. The most common of these include
increases in lift height, reduced or increased grout slumps,
minimization of reconsolidation, puddling and innovative
consolidation techniques. Grout demonstration panels have
been used to allow placement of a significant amount of a
relatively new product called self-consolidating grout to be
used in many parts of the country with outstanding results.
52
Research has demonstrated comparable or superior

performance when compared with consolidated and
reconsolidated conventional grout in regard to reduction of
voids, compressive strength and bond to masonry face shells.
Construction and approval of a grout demonstration
panel using the proposed grouting procedures, construction
techniques and grout space geometry is required. With the
advent of self-consolidating grouts and other innovative
consolidation techniques, this provision of the Specification
has been very useful in demonstrating the effectiveness of
alternate grouting procedures to the architect/engineer and
building official.
COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
Protection is required when the minimum daily
temperature during construction of grouted masonry is
expected to fall below 40oF (4.4oC). Grouted masonry requires
special consideration because of the higher water content and
potential disruptive expansion that can occur if that water
freezes. Therefore, grouted masonry requires protection for
longer periods than ungrouted masonry to allow the water to
dissipate. For more detailed information on cold, hot, and
wet weather protection, see All-Weather Concrete Masonry
Construction, TEK 3-1C (ref. 9).
REFERENCES
1. Grout for Concrete Masonry, TEK 9-4. National Concrete
2. Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry, ASTM C
476-02, ASTM International, 2005.
3. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-05/
ASCE 6-05/TMS 602-05. Reported by the Masonry
Standards Joint Committee, 2005.
4. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures,
ACI 530-05/ASCE 5-05/TMS 402-05. Reported by the
Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2005.
ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry
6. Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-4C.
7. Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction,
TEK 3-4B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
8. Investigation of Alternative Grouting Procedures in
Concrete Masonry Construction Through Physical
Evaluation and Quality Assessment, MR 25. National
Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
9. All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-1C.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

53
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
on
concrete
masonry
technology
Prepared in cooperation with the International Masonry Institute
HYBRID CONCRETE MASONRY

TEK 3-3B
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
Construction (2009)
INTRODUCTION
Hybrid masonry is a structural system that utilizes
reinforced masonry walls with a framed structure. While
the frame can be constructed of reinforced concrete
or structural steel, the discussion here includes steel
frames with reinforced concrete masonry walls. The
reinforced masonry infill participates structurally with the
frame and provides strength and stiffness to the system.
It can be used in single wythe or cavity wall construction provided the connections and joints are protected
against water penetration and corrosion. The hybrid
walls are constructed within the plane of the framing.
Depending on the type of hybrid wall used, the framing
supports some or all of the masonry wall weight.
Hybrid masonry/frame structures were first proposed in 2006 (ref. 1). There are several reasons for
its development but one primary reason is to simplify
the construction of framed buildings with masonry infill.
While many designers prefer masonry infill walls as the
backup for veneers in framed buildings, there is often
a conflict created when structural engineers design
steel bracing for the frame which interferes with the
masonry infill. This leads to detailing and construction interferences trying to fit masonry around braces.
One solution is to eliminate the steel bracing and use
reinforced masonry infill as the shear wall bracing to
create a hybrid structural system.
The concept of using masonry infill to resist lateral forces is not new; having been used successfully
throughout the world in different forms. While common
worldwide, U.S. based codes and standards have
lagged behind in the establishment of standardized
means of designing masonry infill.
The hybrid masonry system outlined in this TEK
is a unique method of utilizing masonry infill to resist
Related TEK:
14-9A
NCMA TEK 3-3B
lateral forces. The novelty of the hybrid masonry design

approach relative to other more established infill design
procedures is in the connection detailing between the
masonry and steel frame, which offers multiple alternative means of transferring loads into the masonryor
isolating the masonry infill from the frame.
Prior to implementing the design procedures outlined in this TEK, users are strongly urged to become
familiar with the hybrid masonry concept, its modeling
assumptions, and its limitations particularly in the way in
which inelastic loads are distributed during earthquakes
throughout the masonry and frame system. This system, or design methods, should not be used in Seismic
Design Category D and above until further studies and
tests have been performed; and additional design guidance is outlined in adopted codes and standards.
CLASSIFICATION OF WALLS
There are three hybrid wall types, Type I, Type II and
Type III. The masonry walls are constructed within the
plane of the framing. The classification is dependent
upon the degree of confinement of the masonry within
the frame.
Type I walls have soft joints (gaps that allow lateral
drift at the columns or vertical deflection at the top) at
the columns and the top of the wall. The framing supports the full weight of the masonry walls and other
gravity loads.
Type II walls have soft joints at the columns and
are built tight at the top of the wall.
Type III walls are built tight at the columns and the
top of the wall.
For Type II and III walls, the masonry walls share
the support of the vertical loads, including the wall
weight, with the framing.
Keywords: frame structures, infill, hybrid, shear

walls, tie-down, reinforced masonry
1
54
CONSTRUCTION
Type I Hybrid Walls
Practically speaking, the concept of Type I walls
is that the masonry wall is a nonloadbearing shear
wall built within the frame which also supports out-ofplane loads (see Figure 1). The details closely match
those for current cavity wall construction where the
infill masonry is within the plane of the frame, except
that the vertical reinforcement must be welded to the
perimeter framing at supported floors.
Since the walls are generally designed to span
vertically, the walls may not have to be anchored to
the columns. The engineers design should reflect
whether anchors are required but only for out-of-plane
loads. The masonry does have to be isolated from the
columns so the columns do not transmit loads to the
walls when the frame drifts.
In multi-story buildings, each wall is built independently. Walls can be constructed on multiple floors
simultaneously. Because the steel framing is supporting
the entire wall weight, Type 1 walls are more economical
for lower rise buildings. It is possible with Type 1 walls
to position the walls outside the framing so they are
foundation supported as in caged construction (ref. 1),
providing a more economical design for the framing.
Type II Hybrid Walls
With Type ll walls, the masonry wall is essentially a
loadbearing shear wall built within the frame: it supports
both gravity and out-of-plane loads (see Fig. 1).
There are two options: Type IIa and Type IIb. The
engineer must indicate which will be used. For Type
IIa walls, the vertical reinforcement (dowels) must be
welded to the perimeter framing to transfer tension tiedown forces into the frame. The vertical dowels also
transfer shear. For Type IIb walls, vertical reinforcement
only needs to be doweled to the concrete slab to transfer shear forces because tie-down is not required. This
simplifies the construction of multi-story buildings.
The top of the masonry wall must bear tight to
the framing. Options include grouting the top course,
using solid units, or casting the top of the wall. The
top connectors must extend down from the framing to
overlap with the vertical wall reinforcement.
Since the walls generally span vertically, the engineer must decide whether column anchors are needed
similar to Type I walls. These anchors only need to
transmit out-of-plane loads.
The design must take into account the construction phasing. In multi-story buildings, each wall may
be structurally dependent on a wall from the floor
below which is very similar to a loadbearing masonry
building.
Type III Hybrid Walls

This wall type is fully confined within the framingat
beams and columns. Currently, there are no standards in
the United States that govern Type III design. Standards
are under development and research is underway to help
determine structural and construction requirements.
Therefore, no details are provided at this time.
DETAILS
Sample construction details were developed in
conjunction with the National Concrete Masonry Association, International Masonry Institute (IMI), and
David Biggs. They are hosted on the NCMA web
site at www.ncma.org and the IMI web site at www.
imiweb.org. Alternate details for hybrid construction are
continually under development and will be posted on
the web sites. There are several key details that must
be considered, including: the wall base, the top of the
wall, at columns, and parapets.
Type I Hybrid Wall
Type II Hybrid Wall

Figure 1Hybrid Wall Types I and II
NCMA TEK 3-3B
55
Base of Wall
As previously noted for Type I and Type IIa walls,
vertical reinforcement must be anchored to either
foundation or frame to provide tension-tie downs for the
structure. Figure 2 shows the reinforcement anchored
to the foundation with a tension lap splice, and also
shows the reinforcement anchored at a floor level and
tension lap spliced.
For Type IIb walls, the vertical reinforcement does
not have to be anchored for tension forces because
it only transfers shear forces. Figure 3 shows the
reinforcement anchored to the foundation. Figure 4
shows the reinforcement anchored at a floor level. The
designer must determine if the dowel can be effectively
anchored to the slab for shear or if it must be welded to
the framing as shown for Type I and Type IIa walls.
connectors at the top of the wall. Since the top course

could be a solid unit, the connector should extend down
to a solid grouted bond beam.
Top of wall construction raises the most concern
by designers. Constructability testing by masons has
been successfully performed. The design concept for
the connectors is:
1. Determine the out-of-plane loads to the wall top.
2. Design the top bond beam to span horizontally between
connectors. Connector spacing is a designer's choice but
is generally between 2 and 4 ft (6.09 and 1.22 m) o. c.
3. Using the in-plane loading, analyze the connector
and design the bolts.
4. If the design does not work, repeat using a smaller
connector spacing.
Top of Wall
For all wall types, the top of the wall must be anchored to transfer in-plane shear loads from the framing
to the wall. It also accommodates out-of-plane forces.
This is accomplished by a connector. Figures 5 and 5A
show an example with bent plates and slotted holes.
For Type I walls, the gap at the top of the wall must
allow for the framing to deflect without bearing on the
wall or loading the bolts. For Type II walls, the gap is
filled tight so the framing bears on the wall.
The vertical reinforcement must overlap with the
Figure 3Type IIb Foundation Detail
Figure 2Type I and IIa

Foundation and Floor Detail
NCMA TEK 3-3B
Figure 4Type IIb Floor Detail

3
56
Note: For Type I walls, provide soft joint (gap to allow for movement. For Type II walls, fill gap tight.
Figure 5Top of Wall Details

4
NCMA TEK 3-3B
57
Figure 5Top of Wall Details (continued)
Figure 5AConnector Plate Detail

NCMA TEK 3-3B
58
Figure 6Column Details
Option 1
Figure 7Parapet Details
6
NCMA TEK 3-3B
59
Option 2
Option 3
Figure 7Parapet Details (continued)
NCMA TEK 3-3B
60
The steel framing is affected by out-of-plane load

transfer to the beam's bottom flange. Beam analysis
and flange bracing concerns for the steel are identical
to those for any infill wall.
Column
For Type I and IIa walls, the wall must be kept
separated from the columns so that when the frame
drifts it does not bear on the wall. Lightweight anchors
can be used to support out-of-plane loads if desired.
Figure 6 shows a possible anchor.
Parapet
Parapets can be constructed by cantilevering off
the roof framing. Details vary depending on the framing
used but are similar to Figure 2. Figure 7 shows three
variations for: concrete slab, wide flange framing, and bar
joist framing. There is a plate on the beam's top flange
for the bar joist and wide flange framing options.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
of the quality assurance plan. Besides verifying the

vertical reinforcement is properly installed as required
by Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ref. 2), the connector must be checked as well. If Type
I walls are used, the bolts from the connector to the
wall must allow for vertical deflection of the framing
without loading the wall.
CONCLUSIONS
Hybrid masonry offers many benefits and complements framed construction. By using the masonry as
a structural shear wall, the constructability of the masonry with the frames is improved, lateral stiffness is
increased, redundancy is improved, and opportunities
for improved construction cost are created.
For now, Type I and Type II hybrid systems can
be designed and constructed in the United States using existing codes and standards. Criteria for Type III
hybrid systems are under development.
Design issues for hybrid walls are discussed in
TEK 14-9A and IMI Tech Brief 02.13.01 (refs. 3, 4).
Special inspections should be an essential aspect

REFERENCES
1. Biggs, D.T., Hybrid Masonry Structures, Proceedings of the Tenth North American Masonry Conference. The
Masonry Society, June 2007.
2. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08/TMS 402-08. The Masonry Society,
2008.
3. Hybrid Concrete Masonry Design, TEK 14-9A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2009.
4. Hybrid Masonry Design, IMI Technology Brief 02.13.01. International Masonry Institute, 2009.
NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and liability
for the accuracy and the application of the information contained in this publication.

www.ncma.org
Provided by:
NCMA TEK 3-3B
61
NCMA TEK
BRACING CONCRETE MASONRY

WALLS DURING CONSTRUCTION
TEK 3-4B
Construction
(2005)
Keywords: backfilling, basement walls, bracing walls,

construction loads, lateral loads, plain concrete masonry,
restricted zone, unreinforced concrete masonry, wind loads
Figure 1. When the wind speeds exceed those allowed
during the Initial and Intermediate Periods, there is a chance
that the masonry wall could fail and the Restricted Zone
must be evacuated in order to ensure life safety.
INTRODUCTION
Various codes and regulations relating to buildings and
structures place responsibility on the erecting contractor for
providing a reasonable level of life safety for workers during
construction. Until the recent development of the Standard
Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls During Construction
(ref. 3) by the Council for Masonry Wall Bracing, there were
no uniform guidelines for masonry wall stability. The Standard
only addresses strategies to resist the lateral loading effects
of wind during construction. When other lateral loads such
as impact, seismic, scaffolding, and lateral earth pressure are
present, they need to be considered and evaluated separately.
A section is provided at the end of this TEK regarding bracing
and support of basement walls during backfilling operations.
Initial Period
The Initial Period is the time frame during which the
masonry is being laid above its base or highest line of bracing,
limited to a maximum of one working day. During this period,
the mortar is assumed to have no strength and wall stability
is accomplished from its self weight only. Based on this
assumption and a wind speed limit of 20 mph (32.2 km/hr), walls
can be built to the height shown in Table 1 without bracing
during the Initial Period. If wind speeds exceed 20 mph (32.2
km/hr) during the Initial Period, work on the wall must cease
WALLS SUBJECT TO WIND FORCES

Recognizing that it may be impracticable to prevent the collapse of a masonry
wall during construction when subjected to
extreme loading conditions and that life
safety is the primary concern, the Standard
includes a procedure whereby the wall and
the area around it is evacuated at prescribed
wind speeds. Wind speeds as defined in the
Standard are five-second gusts measured at
the job site. The critical wind speed resulting in evacuation is dependent on the age of
the wall being constructed and involves three
new terms. They are Restricted Zone,
Initial Period, and Intermediate Period.
Restricted Zone
The Restricted Zone is the area on each
side of a wall equal to the length of the wall
and extending a distance perpendicular to
the wall equal to the height of the constructed wall plus 4 ft. (1.22 m), as shown in
Restricted zone
h
ngt
Le
Height
He
igh
t+
4f
t (1
.22
Restricted zone
m)
He
igh
t+
4f
t (1
.22
m)
Le
h
ngt
Figure 1Restricted Zone for Masonry Walls

62
scaffolding and evacuate the restricted zone.

Table 3 lists bracing points determined by
the bracing method previously described and
Figure 2 shows a wood brace detail for support
Density of Masonry Units, , lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
Nominal wall Lightweight
Medium Weight
Normal Weight heights up to 14'-4" (4.37 m) maximum. Proprithickness,
Units
Units3
Units
etary pipe bracing systems and cable systems
in (mm)
95 < < 105 105 < < 115 115 < < 125
125 <
are also available for all heights shown in Table
(1522<<1682) (1682<<1842) (1842<<2002)
(2002< )
3 and are detailed in the Standard. Provisions
4 (102)
8.0(2.44)
8.0(2.44)
8.0(2.44)
8.0(2.44)
also are included in the Standard for strength
6(152)
8.0(2.44)
8.0(2.44)
8.0(2.44)
8.1(2.47)
design methods.
8(203)
10.8(3.29)
12.0(3.66)
13.1(3.99)
14.2(4.33)
Research has shown that properly designed
10(254)
17.0(5.18)
18.8(5.73)
20.0(6.10)
22.0(6.71)
and
constructed reinforcement splices can
12(305)
23.2(7.07)
25.7(7.84)
28.1(8.56)
30.6(9.33)
achieve up to 75% of the specified yield stress
Footnotes:
of the reinforcing steel at 12 hours and 100% at
1. Height of walls above grade or highest line of lateral support
24 hours (ref. 3). Therefore, the Standard al2. Adapted from ref. 3.
lows the full capacity of splices after grout has
3. For medium weight units, use 105 < < 115 (1682 < < 1842) category unless it is
known that units are 115 < < 125 (1842 < < 2002).
been in place 24 hours. Alternatively, the full
splice capacity can be used after only 12 hours
and the Restricted Zone on both sides of the wall must be
if the design lap length is increased by 1/3 (to 40 in. (1016
evacuated. Evacuation for walls up to 8 ft (2.44 m) above
mm) for No. 5 (No. 16M) bars).
grade is not necessary until wind speeds reach 35 mph (56.3
Connections to masonry can be designed using the prekm/hr) in keeping with a long-standing OSHA requirement.
viously quantified reduced masonry strengths and design
formulas included in the Standard. As an alternate, restricted
working loads for post-drilled anchors as reported in the
Intermediate Period
manufacturer's literature may be used.
The Intermediate Period is the time following the Initial
Period but before the wall is connected to the elements that
provide its final lateral stability. The design wind speed is 40
Design Example
mph (64.4 km/hr) 5 second gust for brace design. When the
Determine the bracing requirements for a 24 ft (7.32 m) tall
wind speed exceeds 35 mph (56.3 km/hr), the Restricted
wall constructed with 8 in. (203 mm) concrete masonry
Zone must be evacuated. The difference of 5 mph (8.0 km/hr)
having a density of 110 lb/ft3 (1762 kg/m3) and reinforceis to allow workers time to evacuate the area.
ment of No. 5 at 32 in. (No. 16M at 813 mm) on center using
During the Intermediate Period, the masonry is assumed
30 in. (762 mm) splice lengths. Mortar is masonry cement
to have one half of its design compressive strength and plain
Type S, control joints are spaced at 24'-8" (7.52 m), and
masonry allowable flexural stresses are taken as two-thirds
flashing is at the base of the wall only.
of the design value given in the Masonry Standards Joint
Committees Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Initial Period
Structures (ref. 1). The masonry structural capacity then can
From Table 1:
be designed using these reduced values in accordance with
Maximum unsupported height = 12'-0" (3.66 m). (These
the provisions of the Code.
initial period provisions apply to all of the options that
The Standard allows for several methods of providing an
follow).
acceptable level of life safety for masons and others working
on the construction site. They are: 1) an early warning and
Intermediate Period - Unbraced Option
evacuation program, 2) bracing to a design wind speed of 40
From Table 2:
mph (64.4 kph), 5 second gust and evacuating if the wind
Alternate 1: Evacuation wind speed of 15 mph (24.1 kph)
speed exceeds 35 mph (56.3 kph), 5 second gust, and 3)
Unreinforced wall:
alternative bracing designs and methods approved by a regisMaximum height, unbonded = 12'-8" (3.86 m)
tered professional engineer if supported by data representing
Maximum height, bonded = 13'-4" (4.06 m)
field conditions.
Reinforced wall:
Table 2 lists maximum unbraced wall heights when early
Maximum height, bonded or unbonded = 26'-0"
warning with an evacuation program is implemented. Maxi(7.92 m)
mum allowable heights are provided for evacuation for 5
second gust wind speeds of 15 mph (24.1 kph), 25 mph (40.2
Strategy:
Since reinforcement is No. 5 at 32 in. (No. 16M at 813
kph), and 35 mph (56.3 kph). The Standard also provides
mm) o.c., the table values for No. 5 at 48 in. (16M at 1.22
additional tables for 20 and 30 mph (32.2 and 48.3 kph) which
m) o.c. can conservatively be used. Build the wall to a
are not presented in this TEK. Design wind speeds for the
height of 12'-0" (3.66 m) the first day (Initial Period).
unbraced heights in Table 2 are 5 mph greater than the
The maximum unbonded height during the Intermediate
evacuation speed to allow time for the masons to get off the
Table 1Maximum Unbraced Height1 of Ungrouted Hollow
Concrete Masonry Walls During the Initial Period2, ft (m)
63
Table 2Intermediate Period Maximum Unbraced Heights, ft (m)1,2 (adapted from ref. 3)
Evacuation Wind Speed3
15 mph (24.1 kph)
Bracing Condition
PCL & MRC4

M/S
25 mph (40.2 kph)
MC 5
M/S
PCL & MRC4

M/S
35 mph (56.3 kph)
MC 5
M/S
PCL & MRC4
M/S
MC 5
M/S
Unreinforced 8 in. (203 mm) wall

Unbonded6
Bonded8
6'-0" (1.83)7
12'-8" (3.66)
8'-0"
3'-4" (1.02)7
16'-0"
14'-8"
13'-4" 12'-0"
10'-0"
8'-8"
6'-8"
6'-8"
6'-0"
5'-4"
4'-8"
(4.88)
(4.47)
(4.06) (3.66)
(3.05)
(2.64) (2.44) (2.03) (2.03) (1.83) (1.63) (1.42)
Unreinforced12 in. (305 mm) wall

Unbonded6
Bonded8
28'-0" (8.53)
7'-4" (2.24)7
12'-8" (3.86)
27'-4"
25'-4"
23'-8" 22'-0"
15'-4"
14'-0" 12'-8" 11'-4" 10'-8" 10'-0" 8'-8"
8'-0"
(8.33)
(7.72)
(7.21) (6.71)
(4.67)
(4.27) (3.86) (3.45) (3.25) (3.05) (2.64) (2.44)
Reinforced 8 in.(203 mm) wall9,10

Unbonded or bonded No. 5 at 10 ft (16M at 3.05 m) o.c.11
20'-8" (6.30)
16'-8" (5.08)
26'-0" (7.92)
25'-4" (7.72)
12'-0" (3.66)
19'-4" (5.89)
9,10
Reinforced 12 in. (305 mm) wall

28'-8" (8.74)
23'-4" (7.11)
20'-0" (6.10)
33'-4" (10.2)
33'-4" (10.2)
24'-0" (7.32)
Footnotes:
1. Maximum height above highest line of lateral support permitted without bracing at windspeed indicated.
2. These values can be applied to all hollow concrete masonry of 95 lb/ft3 (1522 kg/m3) and greater density and all solid concrete masonry.
3. Wall design wind speed is 5 mph (8.05 kph) greater than evacuation wind speed.
4. PCL indicates portland cement/lime. MRC indicates mortar cement.
5. MC indicates masonry cement mortar.
6. Assumes an unbonded condition between the wall and foundation such as at flashing.
7. Exception: Walls may extend up to a height of 8 ft (2.44 m) above the ground without bracing.
8. Assumes continuity of masonry at the base (i.e. no flashing).
9. Reinforced walls shall be considered unreinforced until grout is in place 12 hrs.
10. Reinforcement indicated is minimum vertical required and shall be continuous into the foundation. Minimum lap splice for grout between 12 and 24 hrs.
old is 40 in. (1016 mm) or 30 in. (762 mm) splice length for grout 24 hrs. old and over.
11. For reinforced walls not requiring bracing, check adequacy of foundation to prevent overturning.
Period is 12'-8" (3.86 m) for this wind speed, therefore

neither bracing nor grouting needs be done for the 12 ft
(3.86 m) height for the intermediate period. If the wall is
reinforced and grouted, it can support a total height of 26
ft (7.92 m), the top 13'-4" (4.06 m) of which can be
unreinforced, bonded masonry. Therefore if the first 12
ft (3.86 m) is reinforced and grouted, the remaining 12 ft
(3.86 m) could be built after 24 hours of placing the grout
if the standard 30 in. (1016 mm) reinforcement splice is
used (or 12 hours with a 40 in. (762 mm) splice). The

total height of 24'-0" (7.32 m) is less than the maximum
of 26'-0" (7.92 m) that the reinforced section can support
and the top 12'-0" (3.66 m) is less than 13'-4" maximum
that unreinforced bonded masonry can support. Therefore the wall can be built in this manner without bracing.
Note: This option requires early warning and evacuation
when wind speeds reach 15 mph (24.1 kph) 5 second gust.
This may not be practical in all areas.
64
Alternate 2: Design for an evacuation wind speed of 25 mph

(40.2 kph).
Unreinforced wall:
Maximum height, unbonded = 8'0" (2.44 m) at ground
level, 6'-0" (1.83 m) otherwise
Maximum height, bonded = 8'0" (2.44 m)
Reinforced wall:
Maximum height, bonded or unbonded = 25'-4"
(7.92 m)
Strategy:
Again, build the wall to a height of 12'-0" (3.66 m) the first day
(Initial Period). Since the maximum unbonded height above
grade during the Intermediate Period is 8'-0" (2.44 m) for this
wind speed, grouting must be done the first day. The
restricted zone must then be vacated for the first 24 hours
after placing the grout when using the standard 30 in. (762
mm) reinforcement splice (or 12 hours for 40 in. (1016 mm)
splices). After that continue building the wall up to the height
of 24'-0" (7.32 m) which is less than the maximum of 25'-4"
(7.72 m). The top 12'-0" (3.66 m) of this is bonded unreinforced

masonry which is more than 6'-0" (1.83 m) maximum. Therefore, it must also be grouted the same day and the restricted
zone vacated for the next 12 or 24 hours depending on the
splice length used.
Intermediate Period - Braced Option
From Table 3 ( for 35 mph, 56.3 kph):
Unreinforced wall:
Maximum unsupported height = 3'-4" (1.02 m)
Maximum height above top brace = 5'-4" (1.63 m)
Maximum vertical spacing of braces = 11'-4" (3.45
m) Reinforced wall:
Maximum height above top brace =10'-8" (3.25 m)
Maximum vertical spacing of braces = 21'-4" (6.50
m)
Strategy:
Build the wall to a height of 12'-0" (3.66 m) the first day (Initial
Period) and brace at a height of 11'-4" (3.45 m) by the end of
Table 3Intermediate Period Brace Locations, ft-in. (m)1,2

35 mph (56.3 kph) Evacuation Wind Speed, 40 mph (64.4 kph) Design Wind Speed
Hollow Concrete Masonry, 95 lb/ft3 (1522 kg/m3) Density, (adapted from ref. 3)
PCL & MRC3
MC4
Bracing Condition
M/S
N
M/S
N
Unreinforced 8" (203 mm) wall
Maximum unbraced height, unbonded condition5 (i.e. at flashing)5
3'-4"6(1.02)
7
Maximum height above top brace
6'-8"(2.03)
6'-0"(1.83)
5'-4"(1.62) 4'-8"(1.42)
Maximum vertical spacing between braces7
14'-0"(4.26) 12'-8"(3.85) 11'-4"(3.45) 10'-0"(3.04)
Unreinforced 12" (305 mm) wall
5
Maximum unbraced height, unbonded condition (i.e. at flashing)5
7'-4"6 (2.24)
7
Maximum height above top brace
10'-8"(3.25) 10'-0"(3.04) 8'-8"(2.64) 8'-0"(2.44)
Maximum vertical spacing between braces7
21'-4"(6.50) 19'-4"(5.89) 17'-4"(5.28) 16'-0"(4.88)
Reinforced 8" (203 mm) wall8,9
Maximum unbraced height, unbonded condition5 and
height above top brace7,11
10'-8"(3.25)
Maximum vertical spacing between braces
21'-4"(6.50)
8,10
Reinforced 12" (305 mm) wall
Maximum unbraced height, unbonded condition5 and
height above top brace7,11
19'-4"(5.89)
Maximum vertical spacing between braces
30'-0"(9.14)
Footnotes:
1.
Applies to panels up to 25' (7.62 m) wide with a brace located at 0.2 times the panel width from each end.
2.
These values can be applied to all concrete masonry units of 95 lb/ft3 (1522 kg/m3)density and greater and all solid concrete masonry.
3.
PCL indicates portland cement/lime. MRC indicates mortar cement mortar.
4.
MC indicates masonry cement mortar.
5.
Assumes an unbonded condition between the wall and foundation such as at flashing - affects only unreinforced walls.
6.
Exception: Walls 8' (2.44 m) tall and less above the ground do not need to be braced.
7.
Assumes continuity of masonry other than at the base (i.e. no flashing other than at base).
8.
Reinforced walls shall be considered unreinforced until grout is in place 12 hours.
9.
Minimum reinforcement for 8" (203 mm) reinforced walls is No. 5 (No. 16M) vertical bars at 48" (1219 mm) on center and 40" (1016 mm) minimum lap splice
for grout between 12 and 24 hours old or 30 inch (762 mm) splice length for grout 24 hours and over.
10.
Minimum reinforcement for 12" (305 mm) reinforced walls is No. 5 (No. 16M) vertical bars at 72" (1829 mm) on center and 40" (1016 mm) minimum lap
splice for grout between 12 and 24 hours old or 30 inch (762 mm) splice length for grout 24 hours and over.
11.
For reinforced walls not requiring bracing, check adequacy of foundation to prevent overturning.
12.
Cantilevered retaining walls must meet the bonded condition.
65
Wall height
6 in. (152 mm)

5 in. (127 mm)
5 in. (127 mm)
Wall
See top connection detail
Vertical
member
Wall plate typical each

side at each brace height
16 in. x 16 in. x 1 2 in.

(407 mm x 406 mm x
12.7 mm) plywood
plate
16 in.
(406 mm)
Brace height
1
2 max
4 in. x 4 in. x 16 ft
(102 mm x 102 mm x 4.88 m)
timber brace, No. 2 or better,
any species
2 in. (12.7 mm) thick plywood plate typ.

both sides-sandwich vertical member
Continuous 2 in. x 4 in. (51 mm x102

mm) bridging at midheight with (4) #8
screws, typ. at each timber space
2 in. x 4 in.
(51 mm x 102 mm)
vertical
member typ.
(2) 3 8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter A307 through

bolts, typ.
3
4 in. (19.0 mm) thick plywood gusset plate

with (12) no. 8 screws each at vertical and
timber brace member both sides
(1) 2 in. x 4 in. (51 mm x 102 mm)

knee brace with (4) # 8 screws typ. at
each brace end
Gusset plate-adjust
geometry to accomate
multiple braces-typ.
See footing
anchor detail
Timber brace member
Vertical member
Footing plate
2 in. x 4 in. (51 mm x 102 mm)

horizontal member typ.
Top Connection Detail
Concrete floor, augered anchor or concrete

dead man of the following min. dimensions:
Timber
brace
3 ft (0.91 m) diameter x 3 ft 6 in. (1.07 m)

deep for 32 ft (9.75 m) wall height
2 ft (0.61 m) diameter x 3 ft 6 in. (1.07 m)
deep for 24 ft (7.32 m) wall height
3 in. (19.0 mm) thick plywood

4
gusset with (12) No. 8 wood screws
each at vertical and timber brace
member, typ. both sides
(2) 3 4 in. (19.0 mm) diameter wedge

or epoxy set anchors spaced 6 in.
(152 mm) apart minimum at
standard embedment
1 ft 6 in. (0.46 m) diameter x 3 ft 6 in. (1.07

m) deep for 16 ft (4.88 m) wall height
Horizontal member
1
2 in. (127 mm) thick

plywood plate-sandwich
horizontal member
Note: This brace as detailed is adequate only for support heights of

14 ft 4 in. (4.37 m) or less. For greater support heights, the brace
must be redesigned or a pipe or cable brace used.
Concrete footing per

main drawing
Footing Anchor Detail

Figure 2Wood Brace Detail
the first working day. This leaves an extension of 8 in. (203

mm) above the top brace which is less than the 5'-4" (1.63 m)
allowed (OK). The next level of masonry could be built to a
height of 11'-4" + 12'-0" = 23'-4" (3.45 m + 3.66 m = 7.11 m).
At the end of that working day, place the second brace at 24'0" - 5'-4" = 18'-8" (7.32 m - 1.63 m = 5.69 m). Check the
vertical spacing between the braces: 18'-8" - 11'-4" = 7'-4" <
21'-4" (5.69 m - 3.45 m = 2.24 m < 6.50 m) (OK).
Then after installing the brace, place the remaining final
course for the total height of 24'-0" (7.32 m). Note: The
bottom brace could be removed after the 12 or 24 hour curing
period (depending on the splice length) as the reinforced wall
section can span 21'-4" (6.50 m) vertically and the height of
the top brace is only at 18'-8" (5.69 m).
WALLS SUBJECT TO BACKFILLING

Unless concrete masonry basement walls are designed and built to resist lateral earth pressure as cantilever walls, they should not be backfilled until the first
floor construction is in place and anchored to the wall or
until the walls are adequately braced. Figure 3 illustrates
one type of temporary lateral bracing being used in the
construction of concrete masonry basement walls. Heavy
equipment, such as bulldozers or cranes, should not be
operated over the backfill during construction unless the
basement walls are appropriately designed for the higher
resulting loads.
Ordinarily, earth pressures assumed in the design of
66
basement walls are selected on

the assumption that the backfill
material will be in a reasonably
dry condition when placed. Since
lateral earth pressures will increase as the moisture content of
the earth is increased, basement
walls should not be backfilled
with saturated materials nor
should backfill be placed when
any appreciable amount of water
is standing in the excavation.
Similarly, water jetting or soaking should never be used to expedite consolidation of the backfill. Care should be taken to avoid
subjecting the walls to impact
loads, as would be imparted by
earth sliding down a steep slope
and hitting the wall. This could
also damage waterproofing,
dampproofing, or insulation applied to the walls. Also if needed,
a unit can be left out at the bottom
of a wall to prevent an unbalanced
accumulation of water and replace before backfilling.
8f
Ensure waterproofing,
drainage systems, and
bracing are properly in
place prior to backfilling
8f
.4 m
t (2
.4 m
t (2
2 x 10 plank
2 x 4 cleat
2 x 4 brace
2 x 4 struct
brace
Two 2 x 6 stakes
driven into firm soil at
least 12 in. (305 mm)
Figure 3Typical Temporary Bracing for

Concrete Masonry Basement Walls (ref. 2)
REFERENCES
1. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry
2. NCMA Guide for Home Builders on Residential Concrete Masonry Walls, TR-134, National Concrete Masonry
Association, 1994.
3. Standard Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls Under Construction, Council for Masonry Wall Bracing, July 2001.
Provided by:
Disclaimer: Although care has been taken to ensure the enclosed information is as accurate and complete as possible,
NCMA does not assume responsibility for errors or omissions resulting from the use of this TEK.
www.ncma.org

67
NCMA TEK
SURFACE BONDED
CONCRETE MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
Keywords: construction techniques, mortar, surface bonding
TEK 3-5A
Structural
(1998)
periods of 8 hours.
Colored pigment can be incorporated into the surface
bonding mortar to produce a finished surface without the
need to paint.

Surface bonded concrete masonry construction offers
all of the benefits and advantages of conventional concrete
masonry construction, such as:
fire safety
acoustic insulation
energy efficiency
lasting durability and beauty

INTRODUCTION
SURFACE BONDED
GROUNDED CONCRETE MASONRY
SURFACE BONDED
UNGROUND CM UNITS
CONVENTIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY
SURFACE BONDED CONCRETE MASONRY
RELATIVE WALL STRENGTH, PERCENTAGE

Surface bonding is an economical construction technique
which was first introduced in the late sixties by the U. S. Department of Agriculture for use in low cost housing. In surface
bonded construction, concrete masonry units are laid dry and
stacked, without mortar, to form walls. Walls are constructed
with units that have been precision ground or honed to achieve
a uniform bearing surface, or with shims placed periodically to
maintain a level and plumb condition. Both sides of the wall
are then coated with a thin layer of reinforced surface bondDESIGN STRENGTH
ing mortar. The synthetic fibers which reinforce the surface
bonding mortar impart a tensile strength of about 1500 psi

Many structural and nonstructural tests have been per(10.3 MPa), producing a strong wall despite the relatively
formed on surface bonded walls to establish design parameters
thin thickness of material on each side. The surface coating
for the system.
on each side of the wall bonds the concrete masonry units

The nonstructural properties, such as sound transmission
together in a strong composite construction, and serves as a
class, fire resistance period, and energy efficiency, of surface
protective water resistant shield.
bonded concrete masonry can be considered equivalent to a
Surface bonded concrete masonry has a number of advanconventional mortared concrete masonry wall.
tages:

There are a few differences between the structural prop Less time and skill are required for wall construction.
erties of the two types of construction. These differences are
In a 1972 study of mason productivity sponsored by the
discussed in the following paragraphs, and are illustrated in
U. S. Department of Housing
NOTE: IN SOME COMPARISONS, THE STRENGTH OF SURFACE BONDED
and Urban Development and
WALLS IN VERTICAL SPAN HAS BEEN TWO TO THREE TIMES THAT OF
other interested organizations,
COMPANION WALLS OF CONVENTIONAL CONSTRUCTION.
it was found that surface bonded
100
100
concrete masonry construction
resulted in 70 percent greater
productivity than that achievable
with conventional construction.
The surface bonding mortar
50
50
provides excellent resistance to
water penetration in addition to
its function of holding the units
together. Tests of surface bonded
walls have repeatedly shown
their resistance to wind driven
SHEAR LOADS
FLEXURAL LOADS
COMPRESSIVE LOADS
rain to be excellent even with
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
SPANS
SPANS
wind velocities as great as 100
mph (161 km/h), and over test
68
Figure 1 for ungrouted, unreinforced walls. Although national

building codes, such as the BOCA National Building Code
and the Standard Building Code (refs. 1, 3) do not specifically
address reinforced or grouted surface bonded walls, manufacturers of surface bonding mortars may have code-approved
criteria for their products.
Compressive Loads

Resistance to vertical compressive loads depends primarily on the compressive strength of the concrete block used in
the wall construction. Stronger units make stronger walls.
With mortared construction, a rule of thumb is that the wall
strength will generally be about seventy percent of the unit
strength. In comparison, surface bonded walls built with unground concrete masonry units develop approximately thirty
percent of the strength of the individual block. This reduced
wall strength is depicted in Figure 1 for walls constructed with
unground concrete masonry units.

The lower value obtained with the unground units is due
to a lack of solid bearing contact between units, due to the
natural roughness of the concrete units. The mortar bed used
in conventional construction compensates for this roughness
and provides a uniform bearing between units. If the masonry
unit bearing surfaces are ground flat and smooth before the
wall is erected, results similar to those for a mortared wall can
be expected. In Figure 1, note that surface bonded walls built
with precision ground concrete masonry units are equally as
strong in compression as the conventional construction.
Flexural Resistance

The flexural strength of a surface bonded wall is about
the same as that of a conventional mortared wall, as shown
in Figure 1. When walls are tested in the vertical span (i.e.,
a horizontal force, such as wind, is applied to a wall that is
supported at the top and bottom) surfaced bonded walls and
mortared walls have about the same average strength; failure
occurs in the surface bonded coating due to tensile stress at or
near one of the horizontal joints. With mortared construction,
failure occurs at a horizontal joint with bond failure between
the mortar and the masonry units. The data from numerous
tests on surface bonded constructions led to an allowable stress
of 18 psi (0.12 MPa) based on the gross area.

When walls are laid in a running bond pattern, either
with mortar joints or with surface bonding, and tested in the
horizontal span, (i.e., a wall supported at each end is subjected
to a horizontal wind force) the strength in bending depends
primarily on the strength of the units. This is due to the interlocking of the masonry units laid when in a running bond
configuration. In such tests in the horizontal span, the wall
strength of the surface bonded wall is exactly the same as the
conventional construction. In Table 1, an allowable flexural
stress of 30 psi (0.21 MPa) is recommended for horizontal
span when the units have been laid in running bond.
Shear Strength

The shear resistance of surface bonded construction is the
same as that of conventional walls. With face shell mortar
bedding, conventional concrete masonry walls averaged 42
Table 1Allowable Stress, Gross Cross-Sectional Area,

Dry-Stacked, Surface-Bonded Concrete Masonry Wallsa
Compression:
45 psi (0.31 MPa)
Shear:
10 psi (0.07 MPa)
Flexural Tension:
Horizontal span: 30 psi (0.21 MPa)

Vertical span: 18 psi (0.12 MPa)
References 1 & 3
psi (0.29 MPa) shear resistance, based on gross area. Nine

surface bonded walls, 8 in. (203 mm) in thickness, had an
average shear resistance of 39 psi (0.27 MPa), and three 6
in. (152 mm) thick surface bonded walls averaged 40 psi
(0.28 MPa). These data are compared in Figure 1, and led to
a recommended allowable shear stress of 10 psi (0.07 MPa)
on the gross area (see Table 1).
CONSTRUCTION

The construction procedure for surface bonded walls is
similar to that of conventional, except that mortar is not placed
between the masonry units. Standard Practice for Construction of Dry-Stacked, Surface-Bonded Walls, ASTM C 946 (ref.
4), governs the construction methods. Care should be taken
to ensure uncoated walls are adequately braced.

Because the walls are constructed without mortar joints,
surface bonded wall dimensions do not conform to the standard
4 in. (102 mm) design module. Wall and opening dimensions
should be based on actual unit dimensions, which are typically
75/8 in. high by 155/8 in. long (194 by 397 mm).
Materials

Surface bonding mortar should comply with Standard
Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for
Surface Bonding Mortar, ASTM C 887 (ref. 6), which governs
flexural and compressive strength, sampling, and testing.

ASTM C 946 requires Type I, moisture-controlled, concrete masonry units be used for surface bonded construction.
Type I units must be in a dry condition when delivered to
the job site. Walls laid using dry units will undergo less drying shrinkage after construction, hence minimizing cracks.
Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry
Units, ASTM C 90 (ref. 5) governs these requirements.

As for mortared masonry construction, materials should
be properly stored on site to prevent contamination by rain,
ground water, mud, and other materials likely to cause staining
or to have other deleterious effects.

If the bearing surfaces of the concrete masonry units are
unground, metal or plastic shims or mortar may occasionally be required between units to maintain the wall level and
plumb. Shims must have a minimum compressive strength of
2000 psi (13.8 MPa) to ensure their long term durability after
the wall is loaded. Metal shims, if used, should be corrosion
resistant to reduce the possibility that they will corrode and
bleed through the finished masonry at a later time.
69
Leveling

Because the footing is not typically level enough to lay
up the dry units without additional leveling, the first course of
masonry units is laid in a mortar bed or set in the fresh footing
concrete to obtain a level base for the remainder of the wall.
Vertical head joints should not be mortared, even when the
first course is mortar bedded, since mortar in the head joints
will misalign the coursing along the wall length.

When required, additional leveling courses are constructed
in the wall. Leveling courses should be placed when:
the wall is out of level by more than 1/2 in. (13 mm) in 10
ft,
at each floor level, and
at a horizontal change in wall thickness (see Figure 2).

After the first course of masonry units is laid level in a
mortar bed, dry stacking proceeds with the remaining courses
beginning with the corners, and followed by stacking, in running bond, between the corners. As they are dry stacked, the
ends of the concrete masonry units should be butted together
tightly. Small burrs should be removed prior to placement.

After every fourth course, the wall should be checked for
plumb and level.
Crack Control

Temperature and moisture movements have the potential to cause small vertical cracks in a masonry wall. These
cracks are an aesthetic, rather than a structural, concern. In
exposed concrete masonry, where shrinkage cracks may be
objectionable, horizontal joint reinforcement, control joints,
or bond beams are used to control cracking. The absence of a
mortar bed joint in surface bonded walls means that there is
no space in the wall for joint reinforcement, so control joints
or bond beams are used for crack control.
Control joints should be placed:
1. at wall openings and at changes in wall height and thickness
2. at wall intersections, at pilasters, chases, and recesses
3. in walls without openings, at intervals of 20 ft (6.1 m)
when there are no bond beams in the construction, and
at intervals of 60 ft (18.3 m) when bond beams are in-
Figure 2Change in Wall Thickness
corporated every 4 ft (1.2 m) vertically.

Control joints for surface bonded walls are similar to those
for mortared concrete masonry. At the control joint location,
the surface bonding mortar should be raked out and the joint
caulked.
Placing Accessories & Utilities

The absence of a mortar bed joint in the construction also
requires that the face shell and/or the cross web of the concrete
masonry units be notched or depressed whenever wall ties
or anchors must be embedded in the wall. A coarse rasp is
typically used to make small notches, while deeper notches
are cut with a masonry saw. Cores containing anchors or wall
ties should be grouted, or other adequate anchorage should be
provided.

Electrical lines and plumbing are often located in the cores
of concrete masonry units. These lines should be placed before
the surface bonding mortar is applied, so that the masonry
units are visible.
Applying Surface Bonding Mortar

Manufacturers recommendations should be followed
for job site mixing of the premixed surface bonding mortar
and application to the dry stacked concrete masonry wall.

As with mortared masonry construction, clean water and
mixing equipment should be used to prevent foreign materials from being introduced into the mortar. Batches should
be mixed in full bag multiples only, to compensate for any
segregation of materials within a bag.

All materials should be mixed for 1 to 3 minutes, until
the mixture is creamy, smooth, and easy to apply. Note that
mixing time should be kept to a minimum, as overmixing can
damage the reinforcing fibers.

The stacked concrete masonry units should be clean and
free of any foreign matter which would inhibit bonding of the
plaster. Contrary to recommended practice with conventional
mortared walls, the dry stacked concrete masonry units should
be damp when the surface bonding plaster is applied to prevent
water loss from the mortar due to suction of the units. Care
should be taken to avoid saturating the units.

It is very important that the surface bonding mortar be
applied to both sides of the dry stacked wall since the wall
strength and stability depend entirely on this coating.

Premixed surface bonding mortars are smooth textured
and easily applied by hand with a trowel. The workability is
due to the short 1/2 in. (13 mm) glass fibers which reinforce
the mixture. The mortar should be troweled on smoothly with
a minimum thickness of 1/8 in. (3 mm).

Surface bonding mortar can also be sprayed on. On
large projects, use of a power sprayer greatly increases the
coverage rate of the mortar and further reduces wall costs. As
applied, the sprayed-on surface bonding mortar usually has
a rougher surface texture than a troweled finish, and possesses
slightly less tensile strength due to the lack of fiber orientation
in the plane of the mortar coating. This can be overcome by
troweling, hand or mechanical, following spray application
of the mortar. Hand or mechanical troweling of the sprayed
coating also assures that all gaps and crevices are filled.

When a second coat of surface bonding mortar is ap70
plied, either by trowel or spray, it should be applied after the

first coat is set, but before it is completely hardened or dried
out. The second coat may be textured to achieve a variety of
finishes.

Joints in surface bonding mortar are weaker than a continuous mortar surface, and, for this reason, should not align
with joints between masonry units. If application of the surface
bonding mortar is discontinued for more than one hour, the
first application should be stopped at least 11/4 in. (32 mm)
from the horizontal edge of the concrete masonry unit.

At the foundation, the surface bonding mortar should
either form a cove between the wall and the footer or, for a
slab on grade, should extend below the masonry onto the slab
edge, as shown in Figure 3. These details help prevent water
penetration at the wall/footer interface.
Curing

After surface bonding application, the wall must be
properly cured by providing sufficient water for full hydration of the mortar, to ensure full strength development. The
wall should be dampened with a water mist between 8 and 24
hours after surface bonding mortar application. In addition,
the wall should be fog sprayed twice within the first 24 hours,
although with pigmented mortar, this may be extended to 48
hours.

The recommendations above may need to be modified
for either cold or hot weather conditions. For example, dry,
warm, windy weather accelerates the water evaporation from
the mortarrequiring more frequent fog spraying.

At the end of the day, tops of walls should be covered to
prevent moisture from entering the wall until the top is permanently protected. Typically, a tarp is placed over the wall,
extending at least 2 ft (0.6 m) down both sides of the wall,
and weighted down with lumber or masonry units.
REFERENCES
1. BOCA National Building Code. Country Club Hills, IL:
Building Officials and Code Administrators International,
Inc. (BOCA), 1996.
2. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI
530-95/ASCE 5-95/TMS 402-95. Reported by the Masonry
3. Standard Building Code. Birmingham, AL: Southern Building
Code Congress International, Inc. (SBCCI), 1997.
4. Standard Practice for Construction for Dry-Stacked, SurfaceBonded Walls, ASTM C 946-91 (1996)e1. American Society
for Testing and Materials, 1996.
5. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry
Units, ASTM C 90-97. American Society for Testing and
Materials, 1997.
wall-footing
wall-slab on grade
Figure 3Wall/Footing Interface
Provided by:
Disclaimer: NCMA and the companies disseminating this technical information disclaim any and all responsibility and

www.ncma.org

71
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY VENEERS
TEK 3-6B
Construction
(2005)
Keywords: anchors, cavity walls, joint reinforcement, multiwythe walls, veneer, wall ties
INTRODUCTION
In addition to its structural use as through-the-wall
units, or as the exterior wythe of composite and
noncomposite walls, concrete brick and architectural facing units are also used as veneer over various backing
surfaces. The variety of surface textures, colors, and
patterns available makes concrete masonry a versatile and
popular exterior facing material. Architectural units such
as split-face, scored, fluted, ground face, and slump are
available in a variety of colors and sizes to complement
virtually any architectural style.
1 in. (25 mm)

weeps at 32 in. (813
mm) o.c., partially
open head joints
Flashing
VENEERGENERAL
Veneer is a nonstructural facing of brick, stone,
concrete masonry or other masonry material securely
attached to a wall or backing. Veneers provide the exterior
wall finish and transfer out-of-plane loads directly to the
backing, but they are not considered to add to the loadresisting capacity of the wall system. Backing material
may be masonry, concrete, wood studs or steel studs.
For the purposes of design, veneer is assumed to
support no load other than its own weight. The backing
must be designed to support the vertical and lateral loads
imposed by the veneer in addition to the design loads on
the wall since it is assumed the veneer does not add to the
strength of the wall.
Masonry veneers may be designed using engineered
design methods to proportion the stiffness properties of
the veneer and the backing to limit stresses in the veneer
and achieve compatibility (ref. 4). As an alternative, prescriptive code requirements have been developed based
on judgement and successful performance. The prescriptive requirements relate to size and spacing of anchors and
methods of attachment, and are described in the following
sections.
In addition to structural requirements, differential
movement between the veneer and its supports must be
accommodated. Movement may be caused by tempera-
Concrete
masonry
backing
1 in.
(25 mm)
min. air
space
Foundation
Anchored Veneer
Concrete masonry
backing
Type S mortar
Neat portland
cement paste
Veneer unit
with neat portland
cement paste
Type S mortar
applied to veneer
unit
to 1 1 2 in.
(9.5 to 38 mm)
8
Adhered Veneer
Figure 1Types of Veneer
Note: For clarity, not all construction elements are shown. See
TEK 5-1B (ref. 3) for full construction details
72
ture changes, moisture-volume changes, or deflection. In

concrete masonry, control joints and horizontal joint reinforcement effectively relieve stresses and accommodate small movements. Control joints should be placed in the veneer at the same
locations as those in the backing, or as required to prevent
excessive cracking. See Crack Control for Concrete Brick and
Other Concrete Masonry Veneers (ref. 6) for further information.
For exterior veneer, water penetration through the veneer
is anticipated. Therefore, the backing system must be designed
and detailed to resist water penetration and prevent water from
entering the building. Flashing and weep holes in the veneer
collect any water that penetrates the veneers and redirect it to
the exterior. Partially open head joints are one preferred type
of weep hole. They should be at least 1 in. (25 mm) high and
spaced not more than 32 in. (813 mm) on center. If necessary,
insects can be thwarted by inserting stainless steel wool into
the opening or by using proprietary screens. For anchored
veneer, open weep holes can also serve as vents, allowing air
circulation in the cavity to speed the rate of drying. Additional
vents may be installed at the tops of walls to further increase
air circulation. More detailed information is contained in Concrete Masonry Veneer Details and Flashing Details for
Concrete Masonry Walls (refs. 3, 5).
Two types of veneer are discussedanchored veneer
and adhered veneer, as illustrated in Figure 1. They differ by
the method used to attach the veneer to the backing. Unless
otherwise noted, veneer requirements are those contained in
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 2).
The height and length of the veneered area is typically not

limited by building code requirements. The exception is when
anchored veneer is applied over frame construction. For wood
stud backup, veneer height is limited to 30 ft (9.14 m) (height at
plate) or 38 ft (11.58 m) (height at gable). Similarly, masonry
veneer over steel stud backing must be supported by steel shelf
angles or other noncombustible construction for each story
above the first 30 ft (9.14 m) (height at plate) or 38 ft (11.58 m)
(height at gable) (ref. 2). This support does not necessarily
have to occur at the floor height, but instead can be provided
at a window head or other convenient location.
Where anchored veneers are not self-supporting, such as
over openings, the veneer must be supported by noncombustible lintels or supports attached to noncombustible framing.
Deflection of these horizontal supports is limited to 1/600 of the
span or 0.3 in. (7.6 mm), whichever is smaller. Floors that
support anchored veneers are subject to the same deflection
limit.
A 1 in. (25 mm) minimum air space must be maintained
between the anchored veneer and backing to facilitate drainage. A 1 in. (25 mm) air space is considered appropriate if special
precautions are taken to keep the air space clean (such as
beveling the mortar bed away from the cavity). Otherwise, a 2
in. (51 mm) air space is preferred. As an alternative, proprietary
insulating drainage products can be used.
The maximum distance between the inside face of the
veneer and the outside face of the backing is limited to 4 1/2
in. (114 mm), except for corrugated anchors used with wood
ANCHORED VENEER
Anchored veneer is veneer which is supported laterally
by the backing and supported vertically by the foundation
or other structural elements. Anchors are used to secure the
veneer and to transfer loads to the backing. Anchors and
supports must be noncombustible and corrosion-resistant.
In areas where the basic wind speed exceeds 110 mph (145
km/hr), the veneer must be designed using engineering
philosophies, and the following prescriptive requirements
may not be used. In areas where seismic activity is a factor,
anchored veneer and its attachments must meet additional
requirements to assure adequate performance in the event
of an earthquake.
Masonry units used for anchored veneer must be at
least 2 5/8 in. (67 mm) thick.
Max. 1 1 4 in. (32 mm)

Joint reinforcement
as required
Vertical Section
W2.8 (MW 18) wire, minimum
Max. clearance
16 in. (1.6 mm)
Pintle unit
Plan View
Eye unit
Figure 2Adjustable Anchors
g
len
av e
th
ude
plit
Am
Wid
th
Minimum width
Minimum thickness
Wavelength
=
=
=
Amplitude
Thickness
Minimum embedment, solid units =

Minimum cover from exterior
=
/ in. (22 mm)

0.03 in. (0.76 mm)
0.3 - 0.5 in.
(7.6 - 13 mm)
0.06 - 0.10 in.
(1.5 - 2.5 mm)
1 1/2 in. (38 mm)
5/8 in. (16 mm)
7 8
Figure 3Corrugated Sheet Metal Anchor Requirements (ref. 2)

73
backing, where the maximum distance is 1 in. (25 mm).

When anchored veneer is used as an interior finish supported on wood framing, the veneer weight is limited to 40 lb/
ft2 (195 kg/m2).
Anchors
Veneers may generally be anchored to the backing using
corrugated sheet metal anchors, sheet metal anchors, wire
anchors, joint reinforcement or adjustable anchors, although
building codes may restrict the use of some anchors. Requirements for the most common anchor types are summarized in
Figures 2 through 4.
Attachment to Backing
When masonry veneer is anchored to wood backing, each
anchor is attached to the backing with a corrosion-resistant 8d
W 1.7, (MW 11)

minimum
common nail, or a fastener with equivalent or greater pullout

strength. For proper fastening of corrugated sheet metal anchors, the nail or fastener must be located within 1/2 in. (13 mm)
of the 90 bend in the anchor. The exterior sheathing must be
either water repellent with taped joints or be protected with a
water repellent membrane, such as building paper ship lapped
a minimum of 6 in. (152 mm) at seams, to protect the backing from
any water which may penetrate the veneer.
When masonry veneer is anchored to steel backing,
adjustable anchors must be used to attach the veneer. Each
anchor is attached with corrosion-resistant screws that have a
minimum nominal shank diameter of 0.19 in. (4.8 mm). Coldformed steel framing must be corrosion resistant and should
have a minimum base metal thickness of 0.043 in. (1.1 mm).
Sheathing requirements are the same as those for wood stud
backing.
Masonry veneer anchored to masonry backing may be
attached using wire anchors, adjustable anchors or joint
reinforcement. Veneer anchored to a concrete backing must
be attached with adjustable anchors.
ADHERED VENEER
in. (16 mm)

minumum
8
16 in. (406 mm)

maximum
Figure 4Requirements for Joint Reinforcement Used to

Anchor Veneer (ref. 2)
Adhered veneer is veneer secured and supported through

adhesion to a bonding material applied over the backing.
Masonry units used in this application are limited to 25/8 in.
(67 mm) thickness, 36 in. (914 mm) in any face dimension, 5
ft2 (0.46 m2) in total face area and 15 lb/ft2 (73 kg/m2) weight
(ref. 2). In addition, the International Building Code (ref. 1)
includes requirements for adhered masonry veneers used
on interior walls. In this application, the code stipulates a
maximum weight of 20 lb/ft2 (97 kg/m2). When the interior
Table 1Anchor Spacing Requirements (ref. 2)
Maximum vertical spacing

Maximum wall surface
area per anchor
Anchor location
Maximum horizontal spacing
Backing
Masonry
Max. wall surface

area, ft2 (m2)a
Type of anchor
wire, adjustable, or
joint reinforcement
Concrete adjustable
Wood stud adjustable two-piece,
anchors of wire size W 1.7
(MW 11), or 22 gauge
(0.8 mm) corrugated
sheet metal
all other anchors
Steel stud adjustable
Anchor spacing
Max. vertical
Max. horizontal
spacing, in. (mm) spacing, in. (mm)
2.67 (0.25)
2.67 (0.25)
18 (457)
18 (457)
32 (813)
32 (813)
2.67 (0.25)
3.5 (0.33)
2.67 (0.25)
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
32 (813)
32 (813)
32 (813)
Additional requirements:
.
When anchored veneer is laid in other than running bond, the veneer shall have joint reinforcement of at least one W1.7 (MW
11) wire, spaced at a maximum of 18 in. (457 mm) on center vertically to increase the flexural strength of the veneer in the horizontal
span.
.
Around openings larger than 16 in. (406 mm) in either dimension, space anchors around perimeter of opening at a maximum
of 3 ft (0.91 m) on center, and place anchors within 12 in. (305 mm) of opening.
a
For Seismic Design Categories D, E and F, reduce maximum wall area supported by each anchor to 75% of values shown
.
74
veneer is supported by wood construction, the wood backup

must be designed for a maximum deflection of 1/600 of the span
of the supporting wood member.
Adhered veneer and its backing must also be designed to
either have sufficient bond to withstand a shearing stress of 50
psi (345 kPa) based on the gross unit surface area after curing
28 days (refs. 1, 2), or be installed according to the following.
A paste of neat portland cement is brushed on the backing
and on the back of the veneer unit immediately prior to applying
the mortar coat. This cement coating provides a good bonding
surface for the mortar. Type S mortar is then applied to the
backing and to each veneer unit in a layer slightly thicker than
3/8 in. (9.5 mm). Sufficient mortar should be used so that a slight
excess is forced out the edges of the units. The units are then
tapped into place to eliminate voids between the units and the
backing which could reduce bond. The resulting thickness of
mortar between the backing and veneer must be between 3/8 and
11/4 in. (9.5 and 32 mm). Mortar joints are tooled with a round
jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard.
Backing materials for adhered veneer must be continuous
and moisture-resistant (wood or steel frame backing with
adhered veneer must be backed with a solid water repellent
sheathing). Backing may be masonry, concrete, metal lath and
portland cement plaster applied to masonry, concrete, steel
framing or wood framing. Note that care must be taken when
adhered masonry veneer is used on steel frame or wood frame

backing to limit deflection of the backing, which can cause
veneer cracking or loss of adhesion. The surface of the backing
material must be capable of securing and supporting the
imposed loads of the veneer. Materials that may affect bond,
such as dirt, grease, oil, or paint (except portland cement paint)
should be cleaned off the backing surface prior to adhering the
veneer.
REFERENCES:
1. 2003 International Building Code. International Code
Council, 2003.
3. Concrete Masonry Veneer Details, TEK 5-1B.
4. Structural Backup Systems for Masonry Veneer, TEK
16-3A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1995.
5. Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 195A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
6. Crack Control for Concrete Brick and Other Concrete
Masonry Veneers, TEK 10-4. National Concrete Masonry
Association, 2001.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

75
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY FIREPLACES
TEK 3-7A
Construction
filled with masonry.

Immediately above the foundation walls, support for the
combustion chamber and the hearth extension are necessary. The
hearth extension may be supported by corbelling the masonry
foundation wall, but is usually provided by a poured concrete slab
that also supports the combustion chamber. Forming the concrete
Keywords: chimneys, combustion chamber, construction

details, corbels, fireplaces, fire protection, footings
INTRODUCTION
The fireplace is an American tradition
and remains today a central feature of the
home. Concrete masonry, due to its inherent
fire resistance and beauty, is a popular and
versatile building material for constructing
part or all of a fireplace.
Noncombustible concrete masonry effectively isolates the fireplace fire from nearby
combustible materials such as wood, plastic
and insulation. In addition, because of concrete masonry's thermal mass, heat is stored
in the concrete masonry itself. Thus, heat is
not only radiated to the room from the fire, but
also from the concrete masonry hours after
the fire dies.
Concrete masonry fireplaces are a safe
and efficient source of auxiliary heat when
properly designed and constructed. All
fireplaces contain essentially the same elements: a base, combustion chamber, smoke
chamber and chimney, as shown in Figure 1
for a single opening fireplace. Requirements
herein are based on the 2003 International
Residential Code (IRC) (ref. 1).
BASE
The fireplace base consists of the foundation and hearth extension support. The
foundation consists of a concrete footing
and concrete masonry foundation walls or a
thickened slab for slab-on-grade construction (see Figure 1). Local building codes
should be reviewed for design soil pressures
for foundations. Void areas are often provided in the base to form an air passage for
external combustion air, an ash pit or both.
Nonessential void areas should be solidly
Air space not to exceed

thickness of flue liner
Flue
Chimney block
or concrete brick
Chimney
Fire clay flue liner
Mantle
Smoke
dome
Parging
Throat
damper
Smoke
shelf
Lintel angle
8 in. (203 mm),
min.
Lintel
Fireplace
opening
height
4 in.
(102 mm),
min.
Slope 30 from
vertical, max.
20 in.
(508 mm) min.
External air
damper
Hearth
extension
Ash drop
Air
passageway
Double joists
Smoke chamber,
height inside
width of fireplace
opening
Parging
4 in. (102 mm)

concrete masonry
Combustion
chamber
10 in. (254 mm) min.

firebox thickness or 8
in. (203 mm) where fire
brick lining is used
External air
supply register
Non-combustible
forming
8 in. (203 mm),
min.
Reinforced
concrete slab, 4 in.
(102 mm) min.
thickness
Temporary forming
Flue liner support

8 in. (203 mm)
min. smoke dome
thickness if parged,
6 in. (152 mm) if
firebrick
Base
assembly
Ash dump
Cleanout door
6 in. (152 mm),

min.
Concrete footing
12 in.
(305 mm),
min.
Figure 1Single Opening Fireplace

76
(2003)
slab requires block outs for external combustion air dampers

and ash drops if there are air passageways or ash pits incorporated into the base of the fireplace. If permanent forming is
required at the top of the foundation walls, it must be a noncombustible material. Temporary wood forming is typically used to
pour the hearth extension support. The forming should be placed
so that the projected slab will meet a doubled wood floor joist, and
be such that it can be easily removed. The concrete slab must be
at least 4 in. (102 mm) thick, reinforced and capable of resisting
thermal stresses resulting from high temperatures.
The hearth extension must extend at least 16 in. (406 mm) in
front of the fireplace face and at least 8 in. (203 mm) beyond each
side of the fireplace opening for fireplaces with openings that are
less than 6 ft2 (0.56 m2). If the area of the fireplace opening is 6 ft2
(0.56 m2) or larger, the hearth extension must be 20 in. (508 mm) in
front of the fireplace face and at least 12 in. (305 mm) beyond each
side of the opening. Because the hearth extension must be
constructed of noncombustible materials, concrete brick or decorative concrete masonry units are often used to construct the
hearth extension.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
The fireplace opening should be based on the room size for

aesthetics and to prevent overheating the room. Suggested
fireplace opening widths are provided in Table 1. Once the
opening width is selected, the dimensions of the masonry combustion chamber may be determined using Table 2.
The steel angle lintel used above the fireplace opening
should not be solidly embedded in mortar. With the ends free to
move, lintel expansion due to high temperatures will not crack the
masonry. The use of noncombustible fibrous insulation at the
ends of the lintel angle will usually compensate for this expansion
and eliminate cracking problems.
The size and position of the throat is critical for proper
burning and draft. The fireplace throat should be as wide as the
firebox and should be not less than 8 in. (203 mm) above the
fireplace opening.
SMOKE CHAMBER
The smoke chamber consists of the damper, smoke shelf,
smoke dome and surrounding concrete masonry. The damper,
which is critical for proper performance, is placed directly over the
throat. The metal damper, like the lintel over the fireplace opening,
should not be solidly embedded in mortar. When the fireplace is
not in use, the damper should be closed to prevent heat loss.
When a fire is started, the damper should be wide open. Once the
The combustion chamber consists of the hearth extension,

the firebox and surrounding masonry and the throat. Fire brick,
if used, must conform to Standard Classification of
Table 1Suggested Width of Fireplace Openings Appropriate
Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory Brick, ASTM
to Size of Room (ref. 5)
C 27 or Standard Specification for Firebox Brick for
Residential Fireplaces, C 1261 (refs. 2, 3), laid to form
Size of room,
Width of fireplace opening, in. (mm)
a firebox wall thickness of at least 2 in. (51 mm). Fire brick
ft
x
ft
(m
x
m)
in short wall
in long wall
is laid using medium-duty refractory mortar conform10
x
14
(3.05
x
4.27)
24
(610)
24
to
32 (610-813)
ing to Standard Test Method for Pier Test for Refrac12
x
16
(3.66
x
4.88)
28
to
36
(711-914)
32
to
36 (813-914)
1
tory Mortars, ASTM C 199 (ref. 4), with /4 in. (6.35 mm)
12
x
20
(3.66
x
6.10)
32
to
36
(813-914)
36
to
40 (914-1,016)
mortar joints maximum. The total minimum thickness of
12
x
24
(3.66
x
7.32)
32
to
36
(813-914)
36
to
48 (914-1,219)
the back and side walls must be 8 in. (203 mm) of solid
14
x
28
(4.27
x
8.53)
32
to
40
(813-1,016)
40
to
48 (1,016-1,219)
masonry including the lining. When no lining is used,
16
x
30
(4.88
x
9.14)
36
to
40
(914-1,016)
48
to
60 (1,219-1,524)
this minimum thickness is 10 in. (254 mm).
20 x 36 (6.10 x 10.97) 40 to 48 (1,016-1,219) 48 to 72 (1,219-1,829)
Table 2Single-Opening Fireplace Dimensions, Inches (ref. 5)a
Opening
Width Height
24
26
28
30
32
36
40
42
48
54
60
60
72
a
24
24
24
29
29
29
29
32
32
37
37
40
40
Firebox
Throat
Rear wall
depth
Depth Width Vertical Splayed
height
height
16
11
14
18
83 / 4
16
13
14
18
83 / 4
16
15
14
18
83 / 4
16
17
14
23
83 / 4
16
19
14
23
83 / 4
16
23
14
23
83 / 4
16
27
14
23
83 / 4
16
29
16
24
83 / 4
18
33
16
24
83 / 4
20
37
16
29
13
22
42
16
29
13
22
42
18
30
13
22
54
18
30
13
Smoke chamber
Steel angles
Width Height Shelf Length

depth
32
19
12
36
34
21
12
36
36
21
12
36
38
24
12
42
40
24
12
42
44
27
12
48
48
29
12
48
50
32
12
54
56
37
14
60
68
45
12
66
72
45
14
72
72
45
14
72
84
56
14
84
Size
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
3 x 3 x 1/4
31/2 x 3 x 1/4
31/2 x 3 x 1/4
31/2 x 3 x 1/4
31/2 x 3 x 1/4
31/2 x 3 x 1/4
5 x 31/2 x 5/16
For millimeters, multiply inches by 25.4.

77
fire is burning readily, the damper should be adjusted to produce

more efficient combustion. Keeping the damper wide open reduces the fireplace efficiency. For convenience and safety, a
rotary controlled damper that is adjusted with a control on the face
of the fireplace is preferred, since adjusting a poker controlled
damper usually requires reaching into the firebox.
The masonry above the damper should be supported on a
second lintel angle (if required) and not on the damper. This lintel
must be allowed to expand independently and thus should not
be solidly embedded in the masonry.
Immediately behind the damper is the smoke shelf, which
checks down drafts. Any down drafts strike the smoke shelf and
are diverted upward by the damper assembly. The smoke shelf
may be curved to assist in checking down drafts, but flat smoke
shelves perform adequately.
The smoke dome should be constructed so that the side
walls and front wall taper inward to form the chimney support. The
walls of the smoke dome should be solid masonry or hollow unit
masonry grouted solid and should provide a minimum of 8 in. (203
mm) of solid masonry between the smoke dome and exterior
surfaces when no lining is used. When the smoke dome is lined
using fire brick at least 2 in. (51 mm) thick or vitrified clay at least
5
/8 in. (16 mm) thick, this minimum thickness is reduced to 6 in. (152
mm). The inside of the smoke dome should be parged to reduce
friction and help prevent gas and smoke leakage (when the inside
is formed by corbelling the masonry, this parging is required).
For ease of construction, a high form damper may be used.
High form dampers are constructed such that the damper, smoke
shelf and smoke dome are contained in one metal unit. Additionally, fireplace inserts may be used. Inserts include the elements
of the high form damper as well as the firebox. The inserts are
placed directly on the firebrick hearth.
FLUE AND CHIMNEY
The chimney should be positioned so that it is centered on
the width of the fireplace and the back of the flue liner aligns with
the vertical rear surface of the smoke dome. This configuration
funnels the smoke and gases from the fire into the chimney. The
chimney is constructed directly over the smoke shelf and consists of a flue liner and a chimney wall. For residential fireplaces,
theflueliningmaybeaclayflueliningcomplyingwithStandard
Specification for Clay Flue Linings, ASTM C 315 (ref. 6), a listed
chimney lining system complying with Standard for Safety for
Chimney Liners, UL 1777 (ref. 7) or other approved system or
material. Fireclay flue liners are laid in medium-duty refractory
mortar conforming to Standard Test Method for Pier Test for
Refractory Mortars, ASTM C 199 (ref. 4), with flush mortar joints
on the inside. Care should be taken to use only enough mortar to
make the joint. Flue lining installation should conform to Standard Practice for Installing Clay Flue Lining, ASTM C 1283 (ref.
8).
The chimney wall must be constructed of solid masonry
units or hollow units grouted solid, and be at least 4 in. (102 mm)
in nominal thickness. The chimney wall should be separated from
the flue lining by an airspace or insulation not thicker than the
thickness of the flue lining to permit the flue lining, when hot, to
expand freely without cracking the chimney wall. Note that in
Seismic Design Categories D and E, additional reinforcement and
anchorage requirements apply to masonry chimneys in accor-
dance with applicable building codes.

To ensure the fireplace draws adequately, flue size is determined by the shape of the flue and the size of the fireplace opening
(see Table 3). The International Residential Code ( ref. 1) has an
Option 2 where the flue size is based on chimney height as well
as the fireplace opening area.
The chimney must extend at least 3 ft (914 mm) above the
point where the chimney passes through the roof and at least 2
ft (610 mm) above any part of the building within 10 ft (3,048 mm)
of the chimney (see Figure 2). Higher chimneys may be required
for adequate draft. Good draft is normally achieved with 15 ft
(4,572 mm) high chimneys (measured from the top of the fireplace
opening to the top of the chimney).
The chimney must be capped to resist water penetration. A
mortar wash that is feathered to the edge of the chimney wall is
not an adequate cap. The cap should be either cast-in-place or
precast concrete, as shown in Figure 2. Metal pan flashing over
the top of the chimney will also perform adequately.
CLEARANCES AND FIREBLOCKING
A minimum 2 in. (51 mm) airspace must be maintained
between combustible framing and masonry fireplaces, or 4 in. (102
mm) from the back face, and any combustibles, excluding trim and
the edges of sheathing materials. The IRC (ref. 1) contains
minimum clearances between masonry fireplaces or chimneys
and exposed combustible trim and the edges of sheathing materials such as wood siding, flooring and drywall as well as mantles.
These air spaces should be firestopped using noncombustible
materials as precribed by the building code.
A 2 in. (51 mm) clearance is required around the perimeter of
the chimney wall. This clear space should be firestopped in the
same manner as described for fireplaces. If the entire perimeter of
the chimney wall is outside the building, including soffits or
cornices, the clearance between the chimney wall and combustibles may be reduced to 1 in. (25 mm).
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
Proper fireplace design and operation helps maximize the
efficiency. Maintaining efficient fuel consumption by properly
adjusting the damper is critical. There are several other ways to
significantly improve the performance of the concrete masonry
fireplace. For example, positioning the fireplace on interior rather
than exterior walls reduces heat loss when the fireplace is not in
operation, and increases the amount of usable radiant heat from
the concrete masonry.
Fireplace efficiency can also be improved by introducing
external air into the firebox for draft and combustion (not within
Table 3Minimum Flue Net Cross-Sectional Area
for Masonry Fireplaces
Flue shape
Net cross-sectional area of flue,

fraction of fireplace opening size
1
/12
1
/10
Round
Square
Rectangular:
aspect ratio < 2 to 1
aspect ratio > 2 to 1
/10
/8
78
the garage or basement. An external combustion air system requires a damper in the firebox,
adequate ducting or air passageways and a grill
or louver at the exterior opening. The external air
damper should permit the control of both the
direction and volume of the airflow for temperature control. The damper should be capable of
directing air flow towards the back of the firebox
so that when down drafts or negative pressures
occur, hot ashes or embers are not forced into
the room.
Cast-in-Place Cap:
Concrete cap 4 in.
(102 mm) thick, min.
Precast Cap:
Noncombustible
resilient sealant
Temporary forming
10 ft
(3,048 mm)
4 in. (102 mm) max.
Precast cap
2 in. (13 mm) min.

galvanized hardware
cloth reinforcement
24 in.
(610 mm) min.
2 in.
(51 mm)
min. typ.
36 in.
(914 mm) min.
REFERENCES
1. 2003 International Residential Code. International Code Council, 2003.
2. Standard Classification of Fireclay and HighAlumina Refractory Brick, ASTM C 27-98.
3. Standard Specification for Firebox Brick for
Residential Fireplaces, ASTM C 1261-98.
4. Standard Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortars, ASTM C 199-84 (2000). ASTM
5. Book of Successful Fireplaces, How to Build,
Decorate and Use Them, 20th Edition, by R. J.
and M.J. Lytle, Structures Publishing Company,
Farmington, Michigan, 1977.
6. Standard Specification for Clay Flue Linings,
7. Standard for Safety for Chimney Liners, UL
1777. Underwriters Laboratory, 1996.
8. Standard Practice for Installing Clay Flue Lining,
Counter flashing
Roof rafter
2 in. (51 mm)

clearance to
framing, min.
Base flashing
(fire stop)
Fire clay flue liner
Air space not to exceed
thickness of flue liner
Concrete brick or block
4 in. (102 mm) min.
1
2 in. (13 mm) non-combustible

wall board (fire stop)
Ceiling joist
Figure 2Chimney Roof Penetration
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

79
NCMA TEK
Provided by:
BetcoSupreme
TEK 3-8A
Construction
(2001)
INTRODUCTION

Concrete masonry is a popular building material because
of its strength, durability, economy, and its resistance to fire,
noise, and insects. To function as designed however, concrete
masonry buildings must be constructed properly.

This TEK provides a brief overview of the variety of
materials and construction methods currently applicable to
concrete masonry. In addition, a typical construction sequence
is described in detail.
a unit.

Grout is used to fill masonry cores or wall cavities to
improve the structural performance and/or fire resistance of
masonry. Grout is most commonly used in reinforced construction, to structurally bond the steel reinforcing bars to
the masonry, allowing the two elements to act as one unit in
resisting loads.

Reinforcement incorporated into concrete masonry
structures increases strength and ductility, providing increased
resistance to applied loads and, in the case of horizontal reinforcement, to shrinkage cracking.

Specifications governing material requirements are listed
in Table 1.
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
Keywords: ASTM specifications, bond patterns, cleaning,

construction techniques, construction tolerances, grout,

The constituent masonry materials: concrete block, morMortared Construction
tar, grout, and steel, each contribute to the performance of a

Most concrete masonry construction is mortared construcmasonry structure. Concrete masonry units provide strength,
tion, i.e., units are bonded together with mortar. Varying the
durability, fire resistance, energy efficiency, and sound attenubond or joint pattern of a concrete masonry wall can create a
ation to a wall system. In addition, concrete masonry units are
wide variety of interesting and attractive appearances. In admanufactured in a wide variety of sizes, shapes, colors,
and architectural finishes to
achieve any number of appearances and functions. The
Concrete Masonry Shapes
and Sizes Manual (ref. 4)
illustrates a broad sampling
of available units.

While mortar constitutes approximately 7% of a
typical masonry wall area, its
influence on the performance
of a wall is significant. Mortar
bonds the individual masonry
units together, allowing them
to act as a composite structural assembly. In addition,
mortar seals joints against
moisture and air leakage and
bonds to joint reinforcement,
anchors, and ties to help enPlacement of Concrete Masonry Units
sure all elements perform as
80
Table 1Masonry Material Specifications

Units
Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90
Concrete Building Brick, ASTM C 55
Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick), ASTM
C 73
Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C
129
Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units,
ASTM C 744
Mortar
Mortar for Unit Masonry, ASTM C 270
Grout
Grout for Masonry, ASTM C 476
Reinforcement
Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement, ASTM A 617
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars, ASTM A 775
Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, ASTM A 951
Ties & Anchors
dition, the strength of the masonry can be influenced by the
bond pattern. The most traditional bond pattern for concrete
masonry is running bond, where vertical head joints are offset
by half the unit length.

Excluding running bond construction, the most popular
bond pattern with concrete masonry units is stack bond.
Although stack bond typically refers to masonry constructed
so that the head joints are vertically aligned, it is defined as
masonry laid such that the head joints in successive courses
are horizontally offset less than one quarter the unit length
(ref. 2). Concrete Masonry Bond Patterns (ref. 3) shows a
variety of bond patterns and describes their characteristics.
Dry-Stacked Construction

The alternative to mortared construction is dry-stacked
(also called surface bonded) construction, where units are
placed without any mortar, then both surfaces of the wall are
coated with surface bonding material. Shims or ground units are
used to maintain elevations. This construction method results
in faster construction, and is less dependent on the skill of the
laborer than mortared construction. In addition, the surface
bonding coating provides excellent rain penetration resistance.
Surface Bonded Concrete Masonry Construction (ref. 9) con-
tains further information on this method of construction.

CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE
Mixing Mortar

To achieve consistent mortar from batch to batch, the
same quantities of materials should be added to the mixer,
and they should be added in the same order. Mortar mixing
times, placement methods, and tooling must also be consistent
to achieve uniform mortar for the entire job.

In concrete masonry construction, site-mixing of mortar
should ideally be performed in a mechanical mixer to ensure
proper uniformity throughout the batch. Mortar materials
should be placed in the mixer in a similar manner from batch
to batch to maintain consistent mortar properties. Typically,
about half the mixing water is added first into a mixer. Approximately half the sand is then added, followed by any lime.
The cement and the remainder of the sand are then added.
As the mortar is mixed and begins to stiffen, the rest of the
water is added. Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 7)
requires that these materials be mixed for 3 to 5 minutes. If the
mortar is not mixed long enough, the mortar mixture may not
attain the uniformity necessary for the desired performance. A
longer mixing time can increase workability, water retention,
and board life.

The mortar should stick to the trowel when it is picked up,
and slide off the trowel easily as it is spread. Mortar should
also hold enough water so that the mortar on the board will
not lose workability too quickly, and to allow the mason to
spread mortar bed joints ahead of the masonry construction.
The mortar must also be stiff enough to initially support the
weight of the concrete masonry units.

To help keep mortar moist, the mortarboard should be
moistened when a fresh batch is loaded. When mortar on the
board does start to dry out due to evaporation, it should be
retempered. To retemper, the mortar is mixed with a small
amount of additional water to improve the workability. After
a significant amount of the cement has hydrated, retempering will no longer be effective. For this reason, mortar can
be retempered for only 11/2 to 21/2 hours after initial mixing,
depending on the site conditions. For example, dry, hot, and
windy conditions will shorten the board life, and damp, cool,
calm conditions will increase the board life of the mortar.
Mortar should be discarded if it shows signs of hardening or
if 21/2 hours have passed since the original mixing.
Placing Mortar
Head and bed joints are typically 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick, except
at foundations. Mortar should extend fully across bedding
surfaces of hollow units for the thickness of the face shell, so
that joints will be completely filled. Solid units are required
to be fully bedded in mortar.

Although it is important to provide sufficient mortar to
properly bed concrete masonry units, excessive mortar should
not extend into drainage cavities or into cores to be grouted.
For grouted masonry, mortar protrusions extending more than
1
/2 in. (13 mm) into cells or cavities to be grouted should be
removed (ref. 7).
81
The Importance of Laying to the Line

Experienced masons state that they can lay about five
times as many masonry units when working to a mason line
than when using just their straightedge. The mason line gives
the mason a guide to lay the block straight, plumb, at the right
height, and level. The line is attached so that it gives a guide
in aligning the top of the course.

If a long course is to be laid, a trig may be placed at one
or more points along the line to keep the line from sagging.
Before work begins, the mason should check to see that the
line is level, tight, and will not pull out.

Each mason working to the same line needs to be careful
not to lay a unit so it touches the line. This will throw the line
off slightly and cause the rest of the course to be laid out of
alignment. The line should be checked from time to time to
be certain it has remained in position.
PLACING UNITS
The Foundation

Before building the block wall, the foundation must be
level, and clean so that mortar will properly adhere. It must
also be reasonably level. The foundation should be free of ice,
dirt, oil, mud, and other substances that would reduce bond.
Laying Out the Wall

Taking measurements from the foundation or floor plan
and transferring those measurements to the foundation, footing, or floor slab is the first step in laying out the wall.

Once two points of a measurement are established, corner
to corner, a chalk line is marked on the surface of the foundation to establish the line to which the face of the block will be
laid. Since a chalk line can be washed away by rain, a grease
crayon, line paint, nail or screwdriver can mark the surface for
key points along the chalk line, and a chalk line re-snapped
along these key points. After the entire surface is marked for
locations of walls, openings, and control joints, a final check
of all measurements should be made.
The Dry RunStringing Out The First Course

Starting with the corners, the mason lays the first course
without any mortar so a visual check can be made between
the dimensions on the floor or foundation plan and how the
first course actually fits the plan. During this dry layout, concrete blocks will be strung along the entire width and length
of the foundation, floor slab, and even across openings. This
will show the mason how bond will be maintained above the
opening. It is helpful to have 3/8 in. (10 mm) wide pieces of
wood to place between block as they are laid dry, to simulate
the mortar joints.

At this dry run the mason can check how the block will
space for openings which are above the first coursewindows,
etc., by taking away block from the first course and checking
the spacing for the block at the higher level. These checks
will show whether or not units will need to be cut. Window
and door openings should be double checked with the window
shop drawings prior to construction.

When this is done, the mason marks the exact location
and angle of the corners. It is essential that the corner be built

as shown on the foundation or floor plan, to maintain modular
dimensions.
Laying the Corner Units

Building the corners is the most precise job facing the
mason as corners will guide the construction of the rest of the
wall. A corner pole can make this job easier. A corner pole is
any type of post which can be braced into a true vertical position and which will hold a taut masons line without bending.
Corner poles for concrete block walls should be marked every
4 or 8 in. (102 to 203 mm), depending on the course height,
and the marks on both poles must be aligned such that the
masons line is level between them.

Once the corner poles are properly aligned, the first course
of masonry is laid in mortar. Typically, a mortar joint between
1
/4 and 3/4 in. (6.4 to 19 mm) is needed to make up for irregularities of the footing surface. The initial bed joint should be
a full bed joint on the foundation, footing, or slab. In some
areas, it is common practice to wet set the initial course of
masonry directly in the still damp concrete foundation.

Where reinforcing bars are projecting from the foundation footing or slab, the first course is not laid in a full mortar
bed. In this case, the mason leaves a space around the reinforcing bars so that the block will be seated in mortar but the
mortar will not cover the area adjacent to the dowels. This
permits the grout to bond directly to the foundation in these
locations.

After spreading the mortar on the marked foundation, the
first block of the corner is carefully positioned. It is essential
that this first course be plumb and level.

Once the corner block is in place, the lead blocks are
setthree or four blocks leading out from each side of the
corner. The head joints are buttered in advance and each block
is lightly shoved against the block in place. This shove will
help make a tighter fit of the head joint, but should not be so
strong as to move the block already in place. Care should be
taken to spread mortar for the full height of the head joint so
voids and gaps do not occur.

If the mason is not working with a corner pole, the first
course leads are checked for level, plumb, and alignment with
a level.

Corners and leads are usually built to scaffold height,
with each course being stepped back one half block from the
course below. The second course will be laid in either a full
mortar bed or with face shell bedding, as specified.
Laying the Wall

Each course between the corners can now be laid easily by
stretching a line between. It should be noted that a block has
thicker webs and face shells on top than it has on the bottom.
The thicker part of the webs should be laid facing up. This
provides a hand hold for the mason and more surface area for
mortar to be spread. The first course of block is thereafter laid
from corner to corner, allowing for openings, with a closure
block to complete the course. It is important that the mortar
for the closure block be spread so all edges of the opening
between blocks and all edges of the closure block are buttered
82
before the closure block is carefully set in place. Also, the

location of the closure block should be varied from course to
course so as not to build a weak spot into the wall.

The units are leveled and plumbed while the mortar is
still soft and pliable, to prevent a loss of mortar bond if the
units need to be adjusted.

As each block is put in place, the mortar which is squeezed
out should be cut off with the edge of the trowel and care
should be taken that the mortar doesnt fall off the trowel onto
the wall or smear the block as it is being taken off. Should
some mortar get on the wall, it is best to let it dry before taking it off.

All squeezed out mortar which is cut from the mortar
joints can either be thrown back onto the mortar board or used
to butter the head joints of block in place. Mortar which has
fallen onto the ground or scaffold should never be reused.

At this point, the mason should:

Use a straightedge to assure the wall is level, plumb
and aligned.

Be sure all mortar joints are cut flush with the wall,
awaiting tooling, if necessary.

Check the bond pattern to ensure it is correct and that the
spacing of the head joints is right. For running bond, this
is done by placing the straightedge diagonally across the
wall. If the spacing of head joints is correct, all the edges
of the block will be touched by the straightedge.

Check to see that there are no pinholes or gaps in the
mortar joints. If there are, and if the mortar has not yet
taken its first set, these mortar joint defects should be
repaired with fresh mortar. If the mortar has set, the only
way they can be repaired is to dig out the mortar joint
where it needs repairing, and tuckpoint fresh mortar in
its place.
Tooling Joints

When the mortar is thumbprint hard, the head joints
are tooled, then the horizontal joints are finished with a sled
runner and any burrs which develop are flicked off with the
blade of the trowel. When finishing joints, it is important to
press firmly, without digging into the joints. This compresses
the surface of the joint, increasing water resistance, and also
promotes bond between the mortar and the block. Unless
otherwise required, joints should be tooled with a rounded
jointer, producing a concave joint. Once the joints are tooled,
the wall is ready for cleaning.
Cleanup

Masonry surfaces should be cleaned of imperfections
that may detract from the final appearance of the masonry
structure including stains, efflorescence, mortar droppings,
grout droppings, and general debris.

Cleaning is most effective when performed during the
wall construction. Procedures such as skillfully cutting off
excess mortar and brushing the wall clean before scaffolding
is raised, help reduce the amount of cleaning required.

When mortar does fall on the block surface, it can often be
removed more effectively by letting it dry and then knocking
it off the surface. If there is some staining on the face of the
block, it can be rubbed off with a piece of broken block, or

brushed off with a stiff brush.

Masons will sometimes purposefully not spend extra
time to keep the surface of the masonry clean during construction because more aggressive cleaning methods may
have been specified once the wall is completed. This is
often the case for grouted masonry construction where grout
smears can be common and overall cleaning may be necessary.

The method of cleaning should be chosen carefully as
aggressive cleaning methods may alter the appearance of
the masonry. The method of cleaning can be tested on the
sample panel or in an inconspicuous location to verify that it
is acceptable.

Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 7) states that
all uncompleted masonry work should be covered at the top
for protection from the weather.
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

While maintaining tight construction tolerances is desirable to the appearance, and potentially to the structural
integrity of a building, it must be recognized that factors such
as the condition of previous construction and non-modularity of the project may require the mason to vary the masonry
construction slightly from the intended plans or specifications.
An example of this is when a mason must vary head or bed
joint thicknesses to fit within a frame or other preexisting
construction. The ease and flexibility with which masonry
construction accommodates such change is one advantage to
using masonry. However, masonry should still be constructed
within certain tolerances to ensure the strength and appearance
of the masonry is not compromised.

Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 7) contains
site tolerances for masonry construction which allow for deviations in the construction that do not significantly alter the
structural integrity of the structure. Tighter tolerances may be
required by the project documents to ensure the final overall
appearance of the masonry is acceptable. If site tolerances are
not being met or cannot be met due to previous construction,
the Architect/Engineer should be notified.
Mortar Joint Tolerances

Mortar joint tolerances are illustrated in Figure 1.
Although bed joints should be constructed level, they are
permitted to vary by 1/2 in. (13 mm) maximum from level
provided the joint does not slope more than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
in 10 ft (3.1 m).

Collar joints, grout spaces, and cavity widths are permitted to vary by -1/4 in. to + 3/8 in. (6.4 to 9.5 mm). Provisions for
cavity width are for the space between wythes of non-composite masonry. The provisions do not apply to situations where
the masonry extends past floor slabs or spandrel beams.
Dimensions of Masonry Elements

Figure 2 shows tolerances that apply to walls, columns,
and other masonry building elements. It is important to note
that the specified dimensions of concrete masonry units are
83
/8 in. (9.5 mm) less than the nominal dimensions. Thus a

wall specified to be constructed of 8 in. (203 mm) concrete
masonry units should not be rejected because it is 7 5/8 in. (194
mm) thick, less than the apparent minimum of 7 3/4 in. (197
mm) (8 in. (203 mm) minus the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) tolerance).
Instead the tolerance should be applied to the 7 5/8 in. (194
mm) specified dimension.
3
Location of Elements

Requirements for location of elements are shown in
Figures 4 and 5.
Plumb, Alignment, and Levelness of Masonry Elements

Tolerances for plumbness of masonry walls, columns,
and other building elements are shown in Figure 3. Masonry
building elements should also maintain true to a line within
the same tolerances as variations from plumb.

Columns and walls continuing from one story to another
may vary in alignment by 3/4 in. (19 mm) for nonloadbearing
walls or columns and by 1/2 in. (13 mm) for bearing walls
or columns.

The top surface of bearing walls should remain level
within a slope of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in 10 ft (3.1 m), but no
more than 1/2 in. (13 mm).
HEAD JOINT THICKNESS

- 1/4 IN., + 3/8 IN.
= 3/8 IN.
Figure 3Permissible Variations From Plumb

BED JOINT
THICKNESS=
3/8 IN. +_ 1/8 IN.
FOOTING
INITIAL BED JOINT

THICKNESS=
1/ IN. MIN.
4
3/4 IN. MAX.
Figure 1Mortar Joint Tolerances
Figure 4Location Tolerances in Plan
Figure 2Element Cross Section and Elevation

Tolerances
Figure 5Location Tolerances in Story Height

84
REFERENCES
1. Building Block Walls, VO 6. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1988.
3. Concrete Masonry Bond Patterns, TEK 14-6. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1999.
4. Concrete Masonry Shapes and Sizes Manual, CM 260A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1997.
5. Inspection of Concrete Masonry Construction, TR 156. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1996.
6. Nolan, K. J. Masonry & Concrete Construction. Craftsman Book Company, 1982.
Committee, 1999.
8. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-00. American Society for Testing and Materials, 2000.
9. Surface Bonded Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-5A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1998.
Provided by: BetcoSupreme


www.ncma.org

85
NCMA TEK
STRATEGIES FOR TERMITE RESISTANCE
TEK 3-9A
Construction
(2000)
Keywords: bond beams, capping concrete masonry walls,
crack control, Formosan termite, grouting procedures,

termites, termite entry, termite resistance
INTRODUCTION
very versatile with an almost endless array of architectural

Termites are distributed widely throughout the United
shapes, sizes textures and colors available. When wood is
States, causing substantial damage to unprotected wood buildused as a construction material, the further the food source is
ings. Although there are over forty species of termites in the
from the soil, the lower the likelihood of termite infestation
United States alone (over 2,500 species around the world),
such as the traditional wood roof framing.
most termite damage is attributed to subterranean termites.

Subterranean termites nest in the ground because they
Recently, much attention and concern has been directed to
require a moist, humid environment to survive. Entry into
the relative newcomer, the very aggressive Formosan termite,
a building must be gained through a sheltered path, such
found mainly in the southern states and Hawaii, but is dramatias a crack in a foundation wall or slab. If a sheltered path
cally increasing in numbers and spreading toward the northern
to the food source is not available, it is possible for termites
states. In Southern Louisiana the population is estimated to
have increased more than 3,000%
in the past ten years alone.

Concrete masonry is one of the
best products available for termite
resistance since it does not provide
a source of nutrition. Entire structures can be constructed of concrete
and masonry materials, virtually
eliminating the possibility of damage from termites. This includes a
composite block/steel bar joist floor
system that is immune to termite
attack (ref. 2).

This TEK focuses on measures
to reduce the possibility of subterranean termite entry into a building.
While termites do not cause any
Region I - Moderate to
Region III - No Hazard
damage to masonry materials, they
to Light Hazard.
Severe Hazard.
do feed on any products containing cellulose, most notably wood.
Region II - Light to
Region IV - No Hazard.
Moderate Hazard.
Buildings that do not use wood or
cellulose products as a construcNote: Local conditions may be more or less severe than indicated by
the region classification. Such known local conditions should take
tion material are not prone to terprecedence in determining the applicability of protective measures.
mite infestation making concrete
masonry the perfect application
for both above and below grade
Figure 1Termite Infestation Potential
construction. Concrete masonry is
86
to build their own access tunnels, which protect them from

sunlight and open air. Often, these access tunnels can be
the only direct sign of a termite infestation.

It is important to consider the potential for termite infestation during the construction phase since the building
construction practices themselves can help protect against
future infestation. Many of these measures focus on proper
design and quality construction to reduce possible entry
routes and to provide a hostile (that is, dry) environment
to ward off termites. These same methods may already be
employed for protection from water penetration or soil gas
entry.
Strategies for termite control include:

building out of all concrete masonry;

minimizing cracks in walls and slabs;

sealing around all wall and floor penetrations;

adequate drainage around the foundation and adjacent
soil;

providing access to inspect for termite tunnels;

installing barriers to prevent termite entry;

maintaining a minimum clearance between wood members and soil;

treating soil with chemicals to repel termites; and

utilizing termite resistant construction materials.

The level of termite control employed on a particular
job should be consistent with the expected severity of the
termite hazard. This level of severity for a particular location can be determined from local experience or from the
state entomological authorities. Where such information is
not available, Figure 1 may serve as a guide.
Site Conditions

While preparing the site prior to construction, all roots,
stumps, dead timber, and other wood debris should be removed from the site. Similarly, wood scraps from construction should be properly disposed. Leaving this material on
site or in the backfill provides additional food sources for
termites, attracting them and increasing the likelihood of
infestation. Similarly, wood grade stakes or bracing stakes
should be removed before or during a concrete placement
and not be cast into the concrete. Leaving them in place
attracts termites and provides a direct path for them through
the concrete. Refer to Figure 2 for a summary of critical
termite access areas.

Backfilling with a free draining soil, incorporating a
subgrade drainage system, and installing proper abovegrade water drainage will help keep the foundation and
adjacent soil dry, providing a less hospitable environment
for termites.

In extreme circumstances, subterranean termites may
not require constant access to and from the adjacent soil.
Where conditions exist such that wood remains continuously wet, termites do not need to return to the soil to obtain
water. However, such conditions are rare if proper design
and construction for water penetration resistance are adhered
to.
Key Notes
1 Ensure that the soil directly adjacent to the foundation is dry
and free of scrap lumber or decaying wood.
2 All utility penetrations through foundation walls should be
sealed for both termite and water penetration resistance.
3 Remove any dead or decaying wood from the area. All trees
and plants should be healthy.
4 Any wood in direct contact with the ground should be rated for
such use. Otherwise untreated or not naturally termite resistant
wood provides a direct path for termite passage.
5 Inspect the foundation at regular intervals for signs of termite
activity or the development of cracks.
Figure 2Concerns Regarding Termite Protection

Reducing Entry Routes

Once the termites have established a path, they have
unimpeded access to the entire structure. Therefore, keeping
termites out of the structure should always be the paramount
objective. In addition to the obvious points of entry, such as
wood in direct contact with the soil, other obscure (but critical) termite entry routes include:

through cracks in exposed wall faces or slabs. Termites
are capable of moving through a crack only 1/32 inch (0.79
mm) wide;

direct access from soil under porches or patio slabs;

along the outside of pipes penetrating slabs or foundation
walls; and

access tunnels on the interior or exterior of walls.
Minimum Clearance to Soil

It is desirable to keep wood elements as far as possible
from the soil to minimize termite access. Nonstructural wood
elements, such as wood siding and trim, should be kept a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) from the soil surface. Structural
wood framing, sill plates, and sheathing should be kept at least
8 inches (203 mm) above the soil, or as otherwise required by
local building codes. However, if the nonstructural wood is in
contact with the structural wood (which is generally the case),
the 6 inch (152 mm) minimum clearance should be increased
to 8 inches (203 mm). These general clearances do not apply
87
to pressure-treated wood or other termite and decay resistant

woods.
Minimizing Cracks

Proper structural design of foundation walls, footings,
and slabs will help prevent structural cracking that may allow termite entry. In addition to preventing cracks due to
structural overload, cracking due to concrete shrinkage also
needs to be addressed. Due to fluctuations in the temperature
and moisture content, all materials have a tendency to expand
and contract over time. With concrete masonry foundations, the primary concern focuses on shrinkage resulting
in the development of tensile stresses. This is because the
tensile strength of concrete is relatively small compared to
the compressive strength; therefore shrinkage may result in
small cracks within the masonry.

It is normally not necessary to provide control joints in
below grade residential concrete masonry basement walls.
A control joint is a planned joint in a concrete masonry wall
at regular intervals that accommodates shrinkage movement
without unsightly, random cracking. The lack of a need for
control joints is attributed to the relatively low range of thermal and moisture fluctuations occurring in below grade walls
afforded by the soil adjacent to the walls and to the water
resistant systems applied to basement walls. In most below
grade basement wall construction, it is possible to provide
a reinforced bond beam at or near the top of the wall in lieu
of control joints to minimize crack development. The bond
beam also provides a cap, preventing termites from coming
up through the empty cores of ungrouted block and gaining
entry into the building. Joint reinforcement embedded in
the horizontal bed joints, usually at 16 inches on center, also
provides additional tensile strength for the masonry and aids
in crack control. It should be pointed out that horizontal
reinforcement will not completely eliminate cracking, but
it will hold the cracks so tightly together that the termites
cannot get through.

Additional measures to reduce the shrinkage cracking
potential of concrete masonry include keeping the walls dry
during construction. Because drying shrinkage is a primary
cause of cracking in concrete masonry walls, it is important
to minimize the potential for wetting concrete masonry during the construction process. At the jobsite, concrete block
should be stored so as to protect the units from absorbing
ground water or precipitation. This includes storing block
on pallets (or otherwise isolating block from direct contact
with the ground) and covering the units with plastic or other
water-repellent materials.

Concrete masonry units should be dry when laid. Some
surface moisture is acceptable; however, saturated units
should be allowed to dry out before placement in the wall.
Concrete masonry units should never be wetted before or
during placement in the wall, as may be customary with
other types of masonry units.

At the end of each workday, a weatherproof membrane
should be placed over uncompleted walls to protect the units
from rain or snow. Placing a board on top of the membrane
will help hold it in place and will prevent the membrane

from sagging into the masonry cores and allowing water to
collect. To limit concrete slab cracking, the recommendations of the American Concrete Institute (ref. 5) for quality
concrete placement should be followed.

In basement walls, the dampproofing and waterproofing
measures employed to reduce water penetration aid in the
prevention of termite entry. Waterproofing and dampproofing systems require that the barrier be continuous to prevent
water penetration into voids or open seams. Similarly, the
barrier is typically carried above the finished grade level to
prevent water entry between the barrier and the foundation
wall. Cracks exceeding 0.02 inches (0.5 mm) should be
repaired before applying a waterproof or damp-proof barrier. However, the repair of hairline cracks is typically not
required, as most barriers will either fill or span these small
openings. In addition, waterproofing and dampproofing
systems should be applied to clean dry walls. In all cases,
manufacturers directions should be carefully followed for
proper installation.

Particular attention should be paid to reentrant corners
at garages, porches, and fireplaces and to wall penetrations.
Because stress concentrations develop at these intersections,
pliable membranes and/or additional reinforcement are often
recommended at these locations to span any potential cracks
or hold them tightly together.

Typical water penetration measures include coatings,
sheet membranes, and drainage boards. Coatings are sprayed,
trowelled, or brushed onto below-grade walls, providing a
continuous barrier to water entry. Coatings should be applied
to clean, structurally sound walls. Walls should be brushed
or washed to remove dirt, oil, efflorescence, or other materials that may reduce the bond between the coating and the
wall.

Sheet membranes and panels (drainage boards) are less
dependent on workmanship and on surface preparation than
coatings. Many of the membrane systems are better able to
remain intact in the event of settlement or other movement
of the foundation wall. All seams, terminations, and penetrations must be properly sealed. Care must also be exercised
during the backfilling process to ensure that the barrier is
not damaged.

In crawl space and stem walls, which typically are not
treated on the exterior to prevent water entry as basement
walls are, crack control measures become more important. In
these cases, termites can enter the block through small cracks
and move unseen up ungrouted cores. In these instances,
solid grouting or capping of the walls is recommended.
Capping Concrete Masonry Walls

Various methods are used to seal the tops of masonry
foundation walls. Should termites penetrate the face shell
of a concrete masonry wall below, the cap prevents them
from direct access to the wood superstructure. In reinforced
construction, the masonry bond beam at the top of the wall
serves as an effective cap, as shown in Figure 3.

Bond beam units are specifically designed to accommo88
The Specification also requires enough water in

the grout mixture to achieve a slump of 8 to 11
inches (203 to 279 mm) (ref. 6, 4) when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 143 Standard Test
FLOOR SHEATHING
Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
(ref. 9). See Figure 5.
EXPOSEd WOOd
FLOOR JOIST

This high slump is contrary to the principles
SHEATHING
of cast-in-place concrete where high slump levels
lead to reduced strengths and higher shrinkage.

WOOd SILL
Many engineers mistakenly try to apply this same
CONTINUOUS REINFORCEMENT
analogy to masonry lowering the water content
AS REQUIREd
8 in. (203 mm)
in an effort to reduce shrinkage potential. HowMINIMUM
FINISH
BONd BEAM COURSE
ever, in masonry construction, the high slump
GRADE
is critical as it allows the grout to be fluid enough
GROUT STOP
to flow around reinforcement and completely fill
MATERIAL
all the voids (ref. 3, 4, and 6). The initial high
water-to-cement ratio is reduced significantly as
the masonry units absorb the excess water, resulting
in higher strengths and low shrinkage properties
despite the high initial water-to-cement ratio. Additionally, as the excess water is absorbed into the
masonry units, some of the cement is drawn into
the unit with the water creating excellent bond and
reducing the formation of voids.
Figure 3Masonry Bond Beam Cap

Grout should also be placed in lifts not
exceeding 5 ft. (ref. 6). A lift is the layer of grout
date horizontal reinforcement and grout as shown in Figure 4.
placed in a single continuous operation. AdditionBond beam units can be either solid bottom or open bottom.
ally, each lift should be consolidated with either a 3/4 in. (19
The latter requires a screen grout stop or expanded metal
mm) diameter low velocity vibrator. Consolidation eliminates
to contain the grout within the unit. A reinforced bond beam
voids, helping to ensure complete grout fill and good bond
is preferred to solid units or solid bottom units with solid
with the masonry units. After the water is absorbed from the
head joints since the reinforcement in bond beams will hold
grout mixture into the masonry (normally 3 to 10 minutes
any cracks that form tightly together to prevent termite entry
after placement, depending on the absorption characteristics
through the cracks.
of the unit and weather conditions), the grout should be re
Proper grouting procedures are important to ensure bond
consolidated to close the space left by the excess water that
with the masonry units and void free areas in bond beams and
was absorbed (ref. 3). In any case, reconsolidation must be
cells to be filled. Grout should conform to the Specification
completed before the grout loses its plasticity.
for Grout for Masonry, ASTM C 476 (ref. 7) or be specified

Metal termite shields may be installed as a continuous
to have a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi (13.8
barrier directly below the sill plate. If infestation occurs, terMPa) at 28 days in accordance with the Specification for
mites are forced to build conspicuous access tunnels around
Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 402 (ref. 6).
the shield, making detection easy. Because termites require
only a 1/32 inch (0.79 mm) gap for penetration,
termite shields must be installed with great care
to be effective. All seams must be soldered and
all openings around anchor bolts and service
lead-ins must be sealed. Because of the extreme
care required to provide an impenetrable metal
termite shield, they generally are not to be relied
on for termite protection.
CLOSEd
BOTTOM
Closed bottom
OPEN
BOTTOM
Open bottom
Figure 4Bond Beam Units for Reinforced Construction
Exterior Insulation
The rigid plastic foams that are often used to insulate crawl space and the exterior side of basement
walls can allow termites to create undetectable
tunnels and is prohibited for such use by some
codes (ref. 7). An advantage of concrete masonry
foundation walls is their ability to accommodate
89
4 in. (102 mm)
Additional Considerations for Crawl Spaces

Figure 6 illustrates termite control measures for crawl space
foundations. Crawl space floors should be kept at or above
the exterior finished grade to facilitate drainage in the crawl
space. Where this is not possible, or on sites where water
flows toward the building due to the site slope, area drains
should be installed. Unless specified otherwise by local codes,
wood girders should be at least 12 inches (305 mm) above
the crawl space floor, and wood joists should be no closer
than 18 inches (457 mm) to the soil. In all cases, enough
clearance should be maintained to allow access to the crawl
space for inspection.
8 TO 11 in. (203
TO 279 mm) SLUMP
12 in. (305 mm) CONE
Chemical Treatments
8 in. (203 mm)
Figure 5Masonry Requires a Fluid Grout;

Slump to be between 8 and 11 in. (ref. 6)
insulation within the cores of the masonry units where it is

protected from direct contact with the soil. Either rigid foam
insulation inserts, granular fill insulation, or foamed-in-place
insulation can be used for this purpose.
Numerous methods are available to create a pesticide barrier

within the soil adjacent to a structure to prevent termite entry.
Soil treatment before or during construction is often most
effective as there is better access to the subgrade soil. If a
slab-on-grade is also going to be used, the soil under the slab
can also be pretreated. While post-construction treatment is
far more common, it is also more difficult. Limited access to
some areas may not allow for an effective chemical barrier
to be established.
FLOOR SHEATHING
EXPOSEd WOOd
SHEATHING
FINISH
GRADE
8 in. (203 mm)

MINIMUM
FLOOR JOIST
WOOD GIRDER
18 in. (457 mm) MINIMUM
24 in. (610 mm) dESIRABLE
12 in. (305 mm)
MININUM
DESIRED GRADE LEVEL

OPTIONAL FOOTING DRAIN
WHERE CRAWL SPACE GRADE IS
BELOW EXTERIOR GROUND LEVEL
REINFORCING STEEL
AS REQUIREd
OPTIONAL AREA dRAIN
AT LOW POINT
Figure 6Termite Control Measures for Crawl Space Foundations

90
Conclusion
Concrete masonry is an ideal construction material to resist
termites. It does not provide food to attract them, and provides
a barrier to prevent termite entry. It is also very versatile
with an almost endless amount of architectural shapes, sizes,

textures, and colors available. An innovative, totally termite
proof concrete masonry floor system utilizing a hidden steel
bar joist supporting system is also available.
References
1. Basement Manual, TR-68B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000
2. Concrete Masonry Homes: Recommended Practices. U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Office of
Policy Development and Research, 1999.
3. Grouting Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 3-2. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1997.
4. Grout for Concrete Masonry, NCMA TEK 9-4. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1998.
5. Guide to Residential Cast-In-Place Concrete Construction, ACI 332-84. American Concrete Institute, 1984.
Committee, 1999.
7. Standard Building Code. Southern Building Code Congress International, 1999: 2304.1.4.
8. Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry, ASTM C 476-99. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1999.
9. Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Concrete, ASTM C 143/C 143M. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1998
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

91
NCMA TEK
METRIC CONCRETE MASONRY

CONSTRUCTION
TEK 3-10A
Construction
Keywords: construction, dimensions, hard metric, metric, metric conversion, modular coordination, soft metric
METRIC UNITS
INTRODUCTION
The metric system (Systeme Internationale or SI system)
is the standard international system of measurement, and the
system that has been mandated by the Metric Conversion Act
(ref. 1) for use in the construction of all United States Federal
buildings. Essentially, the Metric Conversion Act requires
building designs and construction drawings to be submitted in
metric units and constructed according to metric specifications.
The subsequent Savings in Construction Act of 1996 (ref. 5)
places strong limitations for Federal agencies requiring hard
metric concrete masonry units and allows conventional concrete masonry units to be used in metric construction projects.
Economical adjustments that have virtually no impact on the
configuration of the final project can be made to accommodate
inch-pound units on a job where the plans and specifications are
in metric, as described here and in Metric Design Guidelines
for Concrete Masonry Construction (ref. 3).
Complying with these government mandates requires
a knowledge of the metric system of measurement and its
conventions as well as an understanding of how construction
materials, such as concrete masonry, are best incorporated
into a metric building design.
Table 1Metric Decimal Prefixes
Prefix
milli
centi
deci
deca
hecto
kilo
mega
Symbol
m
c
d
da
h
k
M
Order of
magnitude
10-3
10-2
10-1
10
102
103
106
Expression
one thousandth, 0.001
one hundredth, 0.01
one tenth, 0.1
ten, 10
one hundred, 100
one thousand, 1000
one million, 1,000,000
The metric system uses several base units of measurement

with various prefixes that indicate magnitude. For example,
the base unit for length is the meter. When combined with the
prefix kilomeaning one thousandthe unit of measurement
is kilometer (km), meaning one thousand meters. Table 1 lists
the metric decimal prefixes and their magnitudes.
Just as the inch-pound system has preferred units of
measurement (i.e., building dimensions are measured in feet,
not in yards), the metric system also conforms to a preferred
set of units. For design and construction in the United States,
typically only the prefixes milli and kilo are used. For example,
lengths are given in millimeters, meters, or kilometers, not in
centimeters or hectometers.
Table 2 lists common inch-pound units used in building
design and construction, their standard metric unit equivalents,
and conversion factors. The metric units listed in Table 2 are
the preferred units.
As with any form of communication, there are some
basic rules that apply to the use of the metric system so that
the meaning is consistent and clear, thereby minimizing the
potential for errors during construction. The following sections
summarize common metric conventions.
Abbreviations
The third column of Table 2 indicates the proper abbreviations for metric units. Note the use of capital and lower case
letters. For example, megapascal is abbreviated MPa. If mPa
were written instead, it would indicate millipascals rather than
megapascals.
Symbols
When using inch-pound units, the use of symbols to represent feet (') and inches (") is second nature. No such symbols
are used in the metric system; only the abbreviations listed in
Table 2.
Stating Metric Units
While mixing feet and inches is common practice, a similar
practice is not used in the metric system. For example, if dual
units are shown on a set of plans, the metric equivalent of 8'
92
(2008)
- 8" would be 2.64 m, not 2.4 m - 203 mm.

In addition, fractions are never used in the metric system,
decimals are used instead. For example, a length of nine and
one-half meters is written as 9.5 m, not as 9 1/2 m.
Rounding
Dimensions on building plans are rarely shown to less
than 1/8 in. (3 mm) because it is impractical to build to a tighter
tolerance. Similarly, it is meaningless to state dimensions in
decimals of millimeters. For example, a required tolerance of
+3/8 in. thick becomes +10 mm, rather than + 9.5 mm.
SOFT VERSUS HARD METRIC CONVERSION
The most common consequence of the metric conversion
effort has been a simple relabeling of products with equivalent
metric dimensions, with no physical change to the product
dimensions. This is commonly called soft metric conversion.
From a practical standpoint, soft metric conversion is easily

accomplished.
For soft metric conversion of concrete masonry, the metric
equivalents of concrete masonry unit dimensions are simply the
exact metric conversions of the inch-pound unit dimensions.
Table 3 lists the inch-pound and metric equivalent dimensions
for typical concrete masonry units of various sizes.
Hard metric conversion means the product is resized
to metric modular dimensioning. Hard metric conversion is
principally applied to modular products where dimensional
tolerances are critical. Hard metric concrete masonry units are
manufactured to nominal widths of 100, 150, 200, 250, and
300 mm, nominal heights of 100 and 200 mm, and nominal
lengths of 200 and 400 mm. Specified dimensions are 10
mm smaller than nominal to provide space for vertical and
horizontal mortar joints.
The difference between soft and hard metric concrete
masonry units is shown in Figure 1.
Table 2Inch-Pound To Metric Conversions

Quantity
Length
Area
Volume
Mass
Mass density
Force
Force per
unit length
Force per
unit area
Bending
moment
Thermal
resistance
(R-Value)
Thermal
conductance
(U-Factor)
Temperature
to convert from these

inch-pound units. . .
mile (mi)
foot (ft)
foot (ft)
inch (in.)
square yard (yd2)
square foot (ft2)
square inch (in.2)
cubic yard (yd3)
cubic foot (ft3)
cubic inch (in.3)
pound (lb)
kip (k)
pounds/cubic foot (lb/ft3 or pcf)
pound (lb)
kip (k)
pound/foot (lb/ft or plf)
kip/foot (k/ft)
pound/square inch (lb/in.2 or psi)
kip/square inch (k/in.2 or ksi)
pound/square foot (lb/ft2 or psf)
foot-pound (ft-lb)
foot-kip (ft-k)
inch-pound per foot (in.-lb/ft)
square foot-hourdegree Fahrenheit/British thermal
unit (ft2-h-oF/Btu)
British thermal unit/square foothour-degree Fahrenheit
(Btu/h-ft2-oF)
degrees Fahrenheit (oF)
degrees Fahrenheit (oF)
to these
metric units. . .
kilometer (km)
meter (m)
millimeter (mm)
millimeter (mm)
square meter (m2)
square meter (m2)
square millimeter (mm2)
cubic meter (m3)
cubic meter (m3)
cubic millimeter (mm3)
kilogram (kg)
metric ton (t)
kilogram/cubic meter (kg/m3)
newton (N)
kilonewton (kN)
newton/meter (N/m)
kilonewton/meter (kN/m)
megapascal (MPa)
megapascal (MPa)
pascal (Pa)
newton . meter (N. m)
kilonewton . meter (kN. m)
newton . meter per meter (N.m/m)
square meter . degree Kelvin/
Watt (m2 . K/W)
Watt/square meter .
degree Kelvin (W/m2 . K)
degrees Celsius (oC)
degrees Kelvin (K)
multiply the
inch-pound units by:
1.609344
0.3048
304.8
25.4
0.83612736
0.09290304
645.16
0.764555
0.0283168
16,367.064
0.453592
0.453592
16.0185
4.44822
4.44822
14.5939
14.5939
0.00689476
6.89476
47.8803
1.35582
1.35582
0.370686
0.176
5.678
o
C = (oF - 32)/1.8
K = (oF + 459.67)/1.8
Example: The specified length of a concrete masonry unit is typically 155/8 in. To convert this length to millimeters, use the
conversion factor 25.4. The converted actual length = 15.625 x 25.4 = 397 mm.
93
Table 3Typical Concrete Masonry Unit Dimensions

Nominal unit size
Inch-pound
Soft metric
(in.)
(mm)
4 x 8 x 16 102 x 203 x 406
6 x 8 x 16 152 x 203 x 406
8 x 8 x 16 203 x 203 x 406
10 x 8 x 16 254 x 203 x 406
12 x 8 x 16 305 x 203 x 406
(a)
Specified unit size

Faceshell thickness(a)
Web thickness(a)
Inch-pound
Soft metric
Inch-pound Soft metric Inch-pound Soft metric
(in.)
(mm)
(in.)
(mm)
(in.)
(mm)
3
3
3 5/8 x 7 5/8 x 15 5/8
92 x 194 x 397
/4
19
/4
19
5 5/8 x 7 5/8 x 15 5/8
143 x 194 x 397
1
25
1
25
7 5/8 x 7 5/8 x 15 5/8
194 x 194 x 397
1 1/4
32
1
25
9 5/8 x 7 5/8 x 15 5/8
244 x 194 x 397
1 3/8
35
1 1/8
29
11 5/8 x 7 5/8 x 15 5/8 295 x 194 x 397
1 1/2
38
1 1/8
29
Dimensions are minimums required by Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 4).
7 5/8 in.
(194 mm)
7 5/8 in.
(194 mm)
15 5/8 in.
(397 mm)
"Soft Metric" CMU
190 mm
(7.5 in.)
190 mm
(7.5 in.)
390 mm
(15.4 in.)
"Hard Metric" CMU
Figure 1Specified Dimensions of Soft and Hard

Metric Concrete Masonry Units
MODULAR COORDINATION
Modular design is based on the use of standardized
components, which helps increase the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of construction. Modular components are massproduced to exacting physical properties and dimensions.
Modular products are based on a 4-in. (102-mm) module
in the inch-pound system and a 100-mm (3.9-in.) module in
the metric system. Since 4 inches equals 101.6 mm, the inchpound module is 1.6 percent larger than the 100 mm metric
module. This seemingly small difference (about 1/16 in. or 1.5
mm), however is cumulative, becoming 1/4 in. in 16 in. and
3
/4 in. in 4 ft (6 mm in 406 mm and 19 mm in 1.2 m), making
the two modules incompatible.
When modular units are placed, they produce wall lengths,
heights and thicknesses that are multiples of the given module. This allows building dimensions and wall openings to be
placed and sized to minimize cutting on site.
However, when units of different modular dimensions are
incorporated into the same wall, such as an 8-in. (203-mm)
concrete masonry unit in a wall laid out on a 100-mm module,
significant coordination and adjustment is needed.
When hard metric concrete masonry units are available

for a metric project, modular coordination is straightforward,
as the building is laid out on a 100-mm module, which corresponds to the nominal dimensions of the hard metric masonry
units.
When hard metric concrete masonry units are not available
for a metric job, two options are available: lay out the building using inch-pound modules, which are then converted to
their metric equivalents, or use soft metric concrete masonry
units in a building laid out using a 100-mm module. These
are described in more detail below.
Metric Design Based on Soft Metric Building Modules
This option essentially applies a soft metric conversion
to the project plans and specifications. From the beginning
of the project, a module of 101.6 mm, rather than 100 mm, is
used. In this case, soft metric concrete masonry units can be
used without further adjustment. Structures designed based
on soft metric conversions should incorporate windows and
doors sized to the inch-pound module as well.
The width of an opening in a concrete masonry wall should
be a multiple of 8 in. (203 mm) plus the width of one mortar
joint ( 3/8 in. or 10 mm). The height of the opening should be
a multiple of 8 in. (203 mm). For example, a nominal 4 ft x
4 ft (1,219 x 1,219 mm) opening should have actual dimensions of 4 ft - 3/8 in. x 4 ft (1,229 x 1,219 mm). Similarly, the
width of piers should be a multiple of 8 in. (203 mm) minus
the width of one mortar joint ( 3/8 in. or 10 mm).
Soft Metric Units Used With Hard Metric Building
Modules
This option uses soft metric concrete masonry units in a
project laid out using 100-mm modules. Because soft metric
units are approximately 2% larger in height and length than hard
metric units, complications arise when they are incorporated
into a structure designed according to the 100 mm module,
or when other modular metric components, such as windows
and doors, are not readily available.
Because soft metric units are longer, cutting around
openings will be required. Cutting around door and window
openings can be avoided by substituting soft metric door and
window units in the masonry. Cutting can also be minimized
by moving one side of the opening to the nearest inch-pound
modular dimension, eliminating the need to cut units on both
sides of the opening.
Vertical coursing can be adjusted by either of the two
94
methods illustrated in Figure 2. The first method

(Case A) is to use soft metric concrete masonry units
with a 3/8 in. (10 mm) mortar joint and allow each
story to be slightly taller than specified. For example,
consider a specified story height of 13 courses (2600
mm, 8 ft - 6 3/8 in.). Using soft metric units, the story
height would increase to 2641 mm (8 ft - 8 in.), an
increase of 1 5/8 in. (41 mm) per story height.
The second method (Case B) uses custom soft
metric concrete masonry units manufactured to an
actual height of 7 1/2 in. (191 mm) rather than 7 5/8 in.
(194 mm) (unit height is more easily adjusted during
manufacture than is unit length). In the example given
above, the metric module is maintained for the entire
wall height when 7 1/2 in. (191 mm) high units are
used with standard 3/8 in. (10 mm) horizontal mortar
joints.
For more information on using soft metric
units in 100-mm module construction, see Metric
Design Guidelines for Concrete Masonry Construction (ref. 3).
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
193.7
Case A
Story Height = 2,641 mm

= 8 ft - 8 in. 190.5
190.5
190.5
Standard
190.5
soft metric units
190.5
190.5
3
Joints = / 8 in. (9.5 mm) 190.5
190.5
190.5
190.5
190.5
190.5
190.5
Story Height = 2,600 mm

= 8 ft - 6 3 /8 in.
Custom 7 1/ 2 in. high
soft metric units
Joints = /8 in. (9.5 mm)
Case B
Figure 2Vertical Coursing With Inch-Pound

Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 3)
REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Metric Usage in Federal Government Programs, Executive Order 12770, 1991.

Metric Guide for Federal Construction, First Edition. Washington, DC: National Institute of Building Sciences, 1991.
Metric Design Guidelines for Concrete Masonry Construction, TR 172. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000.
Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-03. ASTM International, 2003.
Savings in Construction Act of 1996, Public Law 104-298, 1996.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

95
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY BASEMENT

WALL CONSTRUCTION
Keywords: basements, basement wall, bracing, construction details, construction techniques, corners, details, foundation walls, grout, insulation, mortar, plain concrete
masonry, reinforced concrete masonry, surface bonding,
unreinforced concrete masonry, waterproofing
INTRODUCTION
Basements allow a building owner to significantly increase
usable living, working, or storage space at a relatively low cost.
Old perceptions of basements have proven outdated by stateof-the-art waterproofing, improved drainage systems, and natural lighting features such as window wells. Other potential benefits of basements include room for expansion of usable space,
increased resale value, and safe haven during storms.
Historically, plain (unreinforced) concrete masonry walls have
been used to effectively resist soil loads. Currently, however, reinforced walls are becoming more popular as a way to use thinner
walls to resist large backfill pressures. Regardless of whether the
wall is plain or reinforced, successful performance of a basement
wall relies on quality construction in accordance with the structural
design and the project specifications.
TEK 3-11
Construction
(2001)
MATERIALS
Concrete masonry units should comply with Standard
ASTM C 90 (ref. 8). Specific colors and textures may be
specified to provide a finished interior to the basement. Drywall can also be installed on furring strips, if desired. A rule
of thumb for estimating the number of concrete masonry
units to order is 113 units for every 100 ft2 (9.3 m2) of wall
area. This estimate assumes the use of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) mortar joints.
Mortar
Mortar serves several important functions in a concrete
masonry wall; it bonds the units together, seals joints against
air and moisture penetration, and bonds to joint reinforcement, ties, and anchors so that all components perform as a
structural element.
Mortar should comply with Standard Specification for
Mortar for Unit Masonry, ASTM C 270 (ref. 9). In addi-
Table 1Mortar Proportions by Volume (Ref. 12)

Proportions by volume (cementitious materials)
Portland cement or Masonry cement
Mortar cement
Mortar Type blended cementa
M
S N
M
S
N
Cement- M
1

lime
S
1

N
1

O
1

Mortar
M
1

1
cement
M
---
1

1/2
S

1
S

1
Masonry M
1
1

cement
M
1

1/2
S
1

S
1

N
1

O
1

1
Hydrated lime
or lime puttya
1/4
over 1/4 to 1/2
over 1/2 to 11/4
over 11/4 to 21/2
Aggregate measured
in a damp,
loose condition
Not less than 21/4
and not more than
3 times the sum
of the separate
volumes of
cementitious
materials.
When plastic cement is used in lieu of portland cement, hydrated lime or putty may be added, but not in excess of one
tenth of the volume of cement.
96
tion, most building codes require the use of Type M or S

mortar for construction of basement walls (refs. 2, 4, 5, 9,
13), because Type M and S mortars provide higher compressive strengths. Table 1 lists mortar proportions.
Typical concrete masonry construction uses about 8.5 ft3
(0.24 m3) of mortar for every 100 ft2 (9.3 m2) of masonry wall
area. This figure assumes 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) thick mortar joints,
face shell mortar bedding, and a 10% allowance for waste.
Grout
In reinforced concrete masonry construction, grout is
used to bond the reinforcement and the masonry together.
Grout should conform to Standard Specification for Grout
for Masonry, ASTM C 476 (ref. 10), with the proportions
listed in Table 2. As an alternative to complying with the
proportion requirements in Table 2, grout can be specified to
have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa)
at 28 days. Enough water should be added to the grout so
that it will have a slump of 8 to 11 in. (203 to 279 mm). The
high slump allows the grout to be fluid enough to flow around
reinforcing bars and into small voids. This initially high
water-to-cement ratio is reduced significantly as the masonry
units absorb excess mix water. Thus, grout gains high
strengths despite the initially high water-to-cement ratio.
Table 2Grout Proportions by Volume (Ref. 10)
Type
Fine
Grout
Coarse
Grout
Proportions by volume
(cementitious materials)
portland
hydrated
cement or
lime or
blended cement lime putty
1
0 to 1/10
0 to 1/10
Aggregate
measured in
a damp,
loose condition
Fine
Coarse
2 to 3 times
the sum of the
volumes of the
cementitious
materials
2 to 3 times
the sum of the
volumes of
cementitious
materials
1 to 2 times
the sum of the
volumes of
cementitious
materials
CONSTRUCTION
Prior to laying the first course of masonry, the top of the
footing must be cleaned of mud, dirt, ice or other materials
which reduce the bond between the mortar and the footing.
This can usually be accomplished using brushes or brooms,
although excessive oil or dirt may require sand blasting.
Masons typically lay the corners of a basement first so
that alignment is easily maintained. This also allows the mason to plan where cuts are necessary for window openings or
to fit the buildings plan.
To make up for surface irregularities in the footing, the
first course of masonry is set on a mortar bed joint which can
range from 1/4 to 3/4 in. (6.4 to 19 mm) in thickness. This
initial bed joint should fully bed the first course of masonry
units, although mortar should not excessively protrude into
cells that will be grouted.
All other mortar joints should be approximately 3/8 in.

(9.5 mm) thick and, except for partially grouted masonry,
need only provide face shell bedding for the masonry units.
In partially grouted construction, webs adjacent to the grouted
cells are mortared to restrict grout from flowing into ungrouted cores. Head joints must be filled solidly for a thickness equal to a face shell thickness of the units.
Tooled concave joints provide the greatest resistance to
water penetration. On the exterior face of the wall, mortar
joints may be cut flush if parging coats are to be applied.
When joint reinforcement is used, it should be placed directly on the block with mortar placed over the reinforcement
in the usual method. A mortar cover of at least 5/8 in. (15.9
mm) should be provided between the exterior face of the wall
and the joint reinforcement. A mortar cover of 1/2 in. (12.7
mm) is needed on the interior face of the wall. For added safety
against corrosion, hot dipped galvanized joint reinforcement is
recommended.
See Figures 1-4 for construction details.
Reinforced Masonry
For reinforced masonry construction, the reinforcing bars
must be properly located to be fully functional. In most cases,
vertical bars are positioned towards the interior face of
basement walls to provide the greatest resistance to soil
pressures. Bar positioners at the top and bottom of the wall
prevent the bars from moving out of position during grouting.
A space of at least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) for coarse grout and 1/4
in. (6.4 mm) for fine grout should be maintained between
the bar and the face shell of the block so that grout can flow
completely around the reinforcing bars.
As mix water is absorbed by the units, voids can form in
the grout. Accordingly, grout must be puddled or consolidated after placement to eliminate these voids and to increase
the bond between the grout and the masonry units. Most codes
permit puddling of grout when it is placed in lifts less than
about 12 in. (305 mm). Lifts over 12 inches (305 mm) should
be mechanically consolidated and then reconsolidated after
about 3 to 10 minutes.
Surface Bonding
Another method of constructing concrete masonry walls
is to dry stack units (without mortar) and then apply surface
bonding mortar to both faces of the wall. The surface bonding mortar contains thousands of small glass fibers. When
the mortar is applied properly to the required thickness, these
fibers, along with the strength of the mortar itself, help produce walls of comparable strength to conventionally laid plain
masonry walls. Surface bonded walls offer the benefits of
excellent dampproof coatings on each face of the wall and
ease of construction.
Dry-stacked walls should be laid in an initial full mortar bed to level the first course. Level coursing is maintained
by using a rubbing stone to smooth small protrusions on the
block surfaces and by inserting shims every two to four
courses.
Water Penetration Resistance
Protecting below grade walls from water entry involves
installation of a barrier to water and water vapor. An imper97
19
18
17
12
7
5 6
1
4
3
9
15
11
14
10
13
8
16
1. Concrete masonry units, typically 8-in. units. Larger sizes may be required in for some soil and backfill height conditions.
2. Mortar, generally Type S. Joints should be tooled for improved impermeability unless the exterior side is parged.
3. Vertical reinforcing bars, if required. Reinforcement should be placed adjacent to openings, in corners and at a maximum
spacing determined from a structural analysis. Positioners hold the vertical bars in proper position.
4. Joint reinforcement or horizontal reinforcing bars to aid in control of shrinkage cracking and in Seismic Design Categories C,
D, E, and F. See TEK 14-18 (ref. 7) for more information on seismic reinforcement requirements.
5. Grout of 2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) minimum compressive strength in cores containing reinforcement. Consolidate grout by
puddling or vibration to reduce voids.
6. Solid grouted and reinforced top course to distribute loads from the walls above and increase soil gas and insect resistance.
7. Anchor bolts. Typically 7 in. (178 mm) long, 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) diameter anchor bolts are spaced no more than 4 ft (1.2 m)
on center. Anchor bolts significantly increase earthquake and high wind resistance.
8. Concrete footing. Footings distribute loads to the supporting soil. Concrete should have a minimum strength of 2500 psi
(17.2 MPa) and be at least 6 in. (152 mm) thick, although many designers prefer footings to be as thick as the wall thickness
and twice as wide as the wall thickness. Incorporating two #4 bars (or larger) increases the ability to span weak spots.
9. Concrete slab, typically minimum 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), 4 in. (101 mm) thick. Contraction joint spacing should not exceed
about 15 ft (4.6 m). Welded wire fabric located near the center of the slab increases strength and holds unplanned shrinkage
cracks tightly together. Welded wire fabric should be cut at contraction joints.
10. Aggregate base. A 4 to 6 in. (102 to 152 mm) base of washed aggregate (3/4 to 11/2 in. (19 to 38 mm) diameter) distributes slab
loads evenly to the underlying soil, provides a level, clean surface for slab placement, and allows for inclusion of a soil gas
depressurization system.
11. Vapor retarder. Continuous or lapped sheets of 6 mil (152 mm) polyethylene, PVC or equivalent reduce rising dampness and
block soil gas infiltration through the slab. Vapor retarders can be placed on top of the aggregate base to increase the
effectiveness of the soil gas barrier system, or under the aggregate to reduce concrete placement and curing difficulties.
12. Waterproof or dampproof membrane. Dampproof where hydrostatic pressure will not occur. Where ground water levels are
high, soil drainage is slow, or where radon gas levels are high, consideration of waterproof membranes such as rubberized
asphalt, polymer-modified asphalt, butyl rubber and/or drainage boards should be considered.
13. Foundation drain. Perforated pipe collects and transports ground water away from the basement. Drains should be located
below the top of the slab and should be sloped away from the building to natural drainage, a storm water sewer, or a sump.
14. Free draining backfill. At least 12 in. (305 mm) of washed gravel or other free draining backfill material should be placed
around drains to facilitate drainage. Cover the top of the gravel with a filtering geotextile to prevent clogging.
15. Backfill. Backfill should be placed after wall has gained sufficient strength and is properly braced or supported.
16. Undisturbed soil. Soil beneath footings and slabs should be undisturbed or compacted.
17. Top of grade. Surrounding soil should slope away from building to drain water away from walls. The top 4 to 8 in. (102 to 203
mm) of soil should be of low permeability so that water is absorbed slowly into the soil.
18. Floor diaphragm. A floor diaphragm supports the tops of masonry walls and distributes loads from the superstructure to them.
19. Flashing. Flashing should be installed at the top of basement walls to prevent water from entering the wall.
Figure 1 Basement/Foundation Wall (Ref. 1)
98
1
3
4
5
12
15
9
10
Alternate
Courses
14
13
2
8
11
16
Figure 2Typical Footing Detail (Ref. 1)
(A) 8-in. to 8-in. (203 to 203 mm)

Wall Corner Detail
Alternate
Courses
18
19
Solid 2 x 6 x 8 in.
(51 x 153 x 203 mm)
7
17
1
2
5
(B) 10-in. to 10-in. (254 to 254 mm)

Wall Corner Detail
4
15
Figure 3Typical Floor Connection (Ref. 1)
vious barrier on the exterior wall surface can prevent

moisture entry. The barrier is part of a comprehensive
system to prevent water penetration, which includes proper
wall construction and the installation of drains, gutters,
and proper grading.
Building codes (refs. 2, 4 , 5, 9, 13) typically require
that basement walls be dampproofed for conditions where
hydrostatic pressure will not occur, and waterproofed where
hydrostatic pressures may exist. Dampproofing is appropriate where groundwater drainage is good, for example
where granular backfill and a subsoil drainage system are
present. Hydrostatic pressure may exist due to a high water
table, or due to poorly draining backfill, such as heavy clay
soils. Materials used for waterproofing are generally elastic, allowing them to span small cracks and accommodate
minor movements.
When choosing a waterproof or dampproof system,
consideration should be given to the degree of resistance
to hydrostatic head of water, absorption characteristics,
elasticity, stability in moist soil, resistance to mildew and
algae, impact or puncture resistance, and abrasion resistance. A complete discussion of waterproofing, dampproofing, and drainage systems is included in TEK 19-3A
(ref. 6).
All dampproofing and waterproofing systems should
be applied to walls that are clean and free from dirt, mud
Alternate
Courses
Solid 4 x 4 x 8 in.
(102 x 102 x 203 mm)
(C) 12-in. to 12 in. (305 to 305 mm)

Wall Corner Detail
Figure 4Standard Corner Layout Details
and other materials which may reduce bond between

the coating and the concrete masonry wall.
Draining water away from basement walls significantly reduces the pressure the walls must resist and
reduces the possibility of water infiltration into the basement if the waterproofing (or dampproofing) system
fails. Perforated pipe has historically proven satisfactory
when properly installed. When placed on the exterior side
of basement walls, perforated pipes are usually laid in
crushed stone to facilitate drainage. To prevent migration
of fine soil into the drains, filter fabrics are often placed
99
over the gravel.

Drainage pipes can also be placed beneath the slab and connected into a sump.
Pipes through the footing or the wall drain
water from the exterior side of the basement
wall.
The drainage and waterproofing systems
should always be inspected prior to backfilling to ensure they are adequately placed. Any
questionable workmanship or materials
should be repaired at this stage since repairs
are difficult and expensive after backfilling.
Ensure water/dampproofing
or drainage systems and bracing
are properly in place prior to
backfilling
2x10 in. (51x254 mm)
plank vertical brace
2x4 in.
(51x102 mm)
cleat
2x4 in.
Two 2x6 in.

(51x152 mm)
stakes driven into
firm soil at least
Backfilling
(51x102 mm)
brace strut
One of the most crucial aspects of basement construction is how and when to properly backfill. Walls should be properly braced
Figure 5Typical Bracing for Concrete Masonry Basement
or have the first floor in place prior to backfilling. Otherwise, a wall which is designed to
a. Variation from level: bed joints.................................
be supported at the top may crack or even fail from the
+1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in 10 ft (3.1 m), +1/2 in. (12.7 mm) max
large soil pressures. Figure 5 shows one bracing scheme
top surface of bearing walls....................................
which has been widely used for residential basement walls.
+1/4 in.(6.4 mm), +3/8 in.(9.5 mm), +1/2 in.(12.7mm) max
More substantial bracing may be required for high walls
b. Variation from plumb...........+1/4 in. (6.4 mm) 10 ft (3.1 m)
or large backfill pressures.
...........................+3/8 in. (9.5 mm) in 20 ft (6.1 m)
The backfill material should be free-draining soil with.................................+1/2 in. (12.7 mm) maximum
out large stones, construction debris, organic materials,
c. True to a line..............+1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in 10 ft (3.1 m)
and frozen earth. Saturated soils, especially saturated clays,
...........................+3/8 in. (9.5 mm) in 20 ft (6.1 m)
should generally not be used as backfill materials since
.................................+1/2 in. (12.7 mm) maximum
wet materials significantly increase the hydrostatic presd. Alignment of columns and bearing walls (bottom versure on the walls.
sus top)......................................+1/2 in (12.7 mm)
Backfill materials should be placed in several lifts
4. Location of elements
and each layer should be compacted with small mechania. Indicated in plan...........+1/2 in (12.7 mm) in 20 ft (6.1 m)
cal tampers. Care should be taken when placing the back...................................+3/4 in. (19.1 mm) maximum
fill materials to avoid damaging the drainage, waterb. Indicated in elevation
proofing or exterior insulation systems. Sliding boul.............................+1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in story height
ders and soil down steep slopes should thus be avoided
.................................+3/4 in. (19.1 mm) maximum
since the high impact loads generated can damage not
only the drainage and waterproofing systems but the wall
Insulation
as well. Likewise, heavy equipment should not be operThe thermal performance of a masonry wall depends
ated within about 3 feet (0.9 m) of any basement wall
on its R-value as well as the thermal mass of the wall. Rsystem.
value describes the ability to resist heat flow; higher R-values
The top 4 to 8 in. (102 to 203 mm) of backfill mategive better insulating performance. The R-value is
rials should be low permeability soil so rain water is
determined by the size and type of masonry unit, type and
absorbed into the backfill slowly. Grade should be sloped
amount of insulation, and finish materials. Depending on
away from the basement at least 6 in. (152 mm) within
the particular site conditions and owners preference,
10 feet (3.1 m) of the building. If the ground naturally
insulation may be placed on the outside of block walls, in
slopes toward the building, a shallow swale can be inthe cores of hollow units, or on the interior of the walls.
stalled to redirect runoff.
Thermal mass describes the ability of materials like concrete masonry to store heat. Masonry walls remain warm or
Construction Tolerances
cool long after the heat or air-conditioning has shut off, keepSpecifications for Masonry Structures (ref. 8) speciing the interior comfortable. Thermal mass is most effective
fies tolerances for concrete masonry construction. These
when insulation is placed on the exterior or in the cores of
tolerances were developed to avoid structurally impairthe block, where the masonry is in direct contact with the
ing a wall because of improper placement.
interior conditioned air.
1. Dimension of elements in cross section or elevation
Exterior insulated masonry walls typically use rigid board
......................-1/4 in. (6.4 mm), +1/2 in. (12.7 mm)
insulation adhered to the soil side of the wall. The insula2. Mortar joint thickness: bed............+1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
tion requires a protective finish where it is exposed above
head...................-1/4 in (6.4 mm), +3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
grade to maintain durability, integrity, and effectiveness.
3. Elements
100
Concrete masonry cores may be insulated with molded

polystyrene inserts, expanded perlite or vermiculite granular fills, or foamed-in-place insulation. Inserts may be placed
in the cores of conventional masonry units, or they may be
used in block specifically designed to provide higher R-values.
Interior insulation typically consists of insulation installed between furring strips, finished with gypsum wall
board or panelling. The insulation may be fibrous batt, rigid
board, or fibrous blown-in insulation.
DESIGN FEATURES
Interior Finishes
Split faced, scored, burnished, and fluted block give
owners and designers added options to standard block

surfaces. Colored units can be used in the entire wall or in
sections to achieve specific patterns.
Although construction with staggered vertical mortar
joints (running bond) is standard for basement construction,
the appearance of continuous vertical mortar joints (stacked
bond pattern) can be achieved by using of scored units or
reinforced masonry construction.
Natural Lighting
Because of the modular nature of concrete masonry,
windows and window wells of a variety of shapes and sizes
can be easily accommodated, giving basements warm, natural
lighting. For additional protection and privacy, glass blocks
can be incorporated in lieu of traditional glass windows.
REFERENCES
1. Basement Manual-Design and Construction Using Concrete Masonry, TR-68A, National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
2. BOCA National Building Code. Country Club Hills, IL: Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA), 1999.
4. International Residential Code. Falls Church, VA: International Code Council, 2000.
5. International Building Code. Falls Church, VA: International Code Council, 2000.
6. Preventing Water Penetration in Below-Grade Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-3A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
7. Seismic Design Provisions for Masonry Structures, TEK 14-18, National Concrete Masonry Association, 1996.
8. Specifications for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, 2002.
9. Standard Building Code. Birmingham, AL: Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (SBCCI), 1999.
10.Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry, ASTM C 476-01. American Society for Testing and Materials, 2001.
11.Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-01. American Society for Testing and
Materials, 2001.
12.Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry, ASTM C 270-00. American Society for Testing and Materials, 2000.
13.Uniform Building Code. Whittier, CA: International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO), 1997.
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

NCMA TEK
Provided by:
Nitterhouse Masonry Products, LLC
CONSTRUCTION OF HIGH-RISE
CONCRETE MASONRY BUILDINGS
TEK 3-12
Construction
(1998)
Keywords: construction techniques, economical construction,

high-rise, inspection, load-bearing masonry, scaffolding, specified
compressive strength of masonry (f'm)
INTRODUCTION
Masonry structures have been used for centuries throughout the world. Concrete masonry units, however, are a
relatively recent innovation. Initially, these units were made
with hand-operated equipment, although by the 1940s, block
production had developed to incorporate automated mixing,
molding, and curing methods, resulting in consistent quality
of materials. These new manufacturing processes allowed
concrete masonry to be used in engineered structural systems
such as multistory load-bearing structures.
In the late 1940s, one of the first examples of engineered
multistory construction was used by Professor Paul Haller in
Switzerland. Today there are many examples of loadbearing
masonry buildings up to 15 to 28 stories high.
The modular nature of concrete masonry units makes
construction straightforward and the small unit size makes
changes in plan or elevation easy. Special unit shapes are
manufactured to accommodate reinforcement. Open end
units, with one or both end webs removed, permit the place-
ment of units around vertical reinforcing bars. Slots manufactured into the webs of units (termed bond beam units) are used
to position horizontal reinforcement within the wall.
Concrete masonry is widely used because of the strength,
durability, economy, architectural appeal, and versatility of the
masonry system. A major milestone in the advancement of
engineered concrete masonry was the establishment of the
Specifications for Design and Construction of Load Bearing
Concrete Masonry by NCMA in the late 1960's (ref. 1). This
served as the building code for engineered concrete masonry
structures and was adopted by the Southern Building Code
Congress and other model codes. It has evolved into our
present-day Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 2) and Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3).
One of the earliest wall bearing concrete masonry structures
using this new technology was a nine story senior citizens
building in Cleveland, Tennessee which was built in 1969
utilizing partially reinforced concrete masonry walls.
Excalibur Hotel and Casino
(photo)
Figure 1The four towers of the 28-story Excalibur Hotel in Las Vegas are load-bearing masonry.
102
In our world of economics, the bottom line is still a deciding

factor in determining a building's construction type. The real
economy of concrete masonry lies in utilizing the strength of
the masonry units (making them load-bearing) and minimizing
the cutting of the modular building unit by utilizing multiples
of 8 in. for building dimensions and openings. Regarding
finish, the most economical one of course is normally plain,
painted block. However, if the owner's budget permits enhancements, a wide variety of architectural units are available
(i.e. colored, split-face, scored, fluted, burnished, and slump
block). Prefaced units with a glazed finish, vibrant colors and
graffiti resistance are also available. Architectural units not
only provide pleasing aesthetics but also greatly reduce maintenance and upkeep costs. Additionally, stucco or a variety of
proprietary finishing systems also can be applied.
BUILDING TYPES
Most concrete masonry multistory buildings fall into two
main types; loadbearing shear wall-type buildings and infilled
walls. The Uniform Building Code (ref. 4) has also recently
approved a design method for moment-resisting masonry wall
frames.
Loadbearing/Shear Wall Buildings
Loadbearing concrete masonry shear wall buildings make
the most effective use of concrete masonry by relying on both
the economy and the structural capacitycompressive
strength and shear resistanceof the concrete masonry. The
most common application uses concrete masonry walls with
concrete floor and roof diaphragms. The concrete diaphragms
can be poured in place, although precast hollow core slabs are
the most common.
Concrete masonry/precast slab buildings provide a fast,
economical construction method that has allowed some builders to construct one story each week. Floors are enclosed
quickly, so that mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other
contractors can begin working on one floor while masonry wall
and plank construction continues on floors above them.
Concrete Masonry Infill
Infilled concrete masonry walls utilize the concrete masonry as cladding and interior partitions between concrete or
steel frames, which form the structural load-resisting system.
Concrete masonry walls are often used in this application
because of the cost effectiveness and ease of construction.
Historically, most of these walls have been constructed using
standard concrete masonry units which were painted or plastered. More recently, however, architectural units are being
used to eliminate the need for finishing the walls.
Construction of infilled masonry walls is usually straightforward since the main building system is in place prior to the
masonry construction. The most important consideration is
whether gapped or ungapped infilled walls will be provided. Gapped infilled walls are constructed with a predetermined space between the masonry and the building frame.
These gaps act as isolation joints, allowing the building frame
to drift and sway under lateral loads. Ungapped infilled walls,
by contrast, are constructed tightly against the building frame

so that the infilled walls serve as shear walls.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The typical specified compressive strength of concrete
masonry, f'm, is 1500 psi (10.3 MPa). However, using high
strength concrete masonry units, f'm values up to 4000 psi (27.6
MPa) are achievable. These high strength units are often
specified on high-rise loadbearing projects to minimize wall
thickness. For further economy, some designers specify lower
f'm values in the upper stories, where the higher compressive
strength is not needed, since high strength units may cost more
than standard units. For example, the four, fast-track, 28-story
towers of the $300 million, 4,000 room Excalibur hotel in Las
Vegas, Nevada, used an f'm of 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) for the loadbearing walls on the first thirteen floors (ref. 5). The specified
compressive strength decreased in successive stories, until
the top floors where standard block with an f'm of 1500 psi (10.3
MPa) was used.
Contractors prefer repetitive floor plans for high-rise construction. This important design feature allows similar construction and provides structural continuity from floor to floor
both of which lend to economy in construction. The same
holds true for architectural details. Designs which facilitate
scheduling repetitive, assembly-line construction procedures improve productivity and reduce construction costs.
Obviously, aesthetic and functional constraints must also be
considered, so that buildings are useful and attractive as well
as economical.
Connections between building elements is key to the
performance of the structures and should therefore be considered carefully during the design process. Connections
should be simple and easy to construct and, where necessary,
should accommodate building movements from expansion
and/or contraction of building materials.
Differential movement deserves particular attention on
high-rises where concrete masonry is clad with clay brick.
Concrete materials tend to shrink, while clay tends to expand.
Over the height of many stories, these opposing movements
can be significant. In one case, the seventeen story Crittenden
Court in Cleveland, Ohio, these movements were accommodated by designing the exterior brick as a reinforced curtain wall
supported on the foundation (ref. 6). The brick was tied to the
precast concrete floor planks using slotted anchors that allow
vertical but not horizontal movement. This accommodates the
differential movement, and also provides enough lateral stiffness to transfer wind and seismic loads from the brick to the
floor diaphragms.
Because of the large size of most multistory buildings, a
predefined quality control/quality assurance plan is recommended. Inspection, to ensure that key building elements
have been installed properly, is essential to assure that the
building was constructed as designed. Material testing may be
required by the Specifications for Masonry Structures or the
contract documents to verify that supplied materials meet the
project specifications. As with all construction, tolerances
should be carefully monitored. Steel or concrete frames con103
structed out of tolerance make the mason's job difficult and

slow. Proper alignment of these elements will facilitate the
construction process and provide a more appealing completed
structure.
CONSTRUCTION
Construction Materials
For construction to proceed smoothly and quickly, it is
necessary to carefully schedule construction procedures and
supply of materials. Where space allows, it is preferable to
stockpile materials on site so that they are readily available
when needed. For small sites, material delivery must be timed
so that the materials can be moved quickly to the place they are
needed.
Materials are delivered to the masons on upper stories via
crane or hoist. Materials can either be stocked from the building
floors, or can be placed on the work platform, if the platform is
large enough and can support the weight. Coordination with
crane and elevator schedules should also be considered so that
they are available when materials arrive on site.
An adequate supply of concrete masonry units for the
entire story should be supplied at one time. Mortar materials
can be mixed using traditional techniques, although silo mix
mortar systems have become increasingly popular. These
systems deliver 14 to 28 yd3 (10.7 to 21.4 m3) of mortar ingredients, and produce consistent mortar from batch to batch.
Additional advantages include ability to be lifted easily from
floor to floor, mortar containment, and easy cleanup.
Reinforcement cut to proper length and provided in bundles
for each story level also facilitates construction. Grout is
typically supplied via ready-mix trucks and is pumped to the top
of the wall or is lifted using cubic yard buckets. Silo mixed grout
is also supplied on some jobs. Also, as with all grouted
masonry, it is vitally important that the grout has a slump
between 8 and 11 in. per the Specification for Masonry Structures for proper placement and final performance of the building.
Placing the Masonry
Concrete masonry can either be laid from the inside of the
building with the masons working on the interior floor area or
from the outside of the building with the masons working on
scaffolds or work platforms. The choice depends on the size
of the job, type of construction, and mason's preferences.
Laying Units from Inside the Building
For load-bearing and infilled exterior walls, concrete masonry can often be laid from the inside of the building. This
normally is the most efficient and cost effective method as this
allows the masons to work on the building's floor area providing ample room for units, mortar, and other building materials.
Since the mason's work is confined to the perimeter of the floor,
other trades can also work at the same time. Laying from the
interior may also be an advantage in windy conditions, when
work on exterior platforms may be limited.
Block for the next story are normally stacked on the
concrete floor as soon as it has hardened enough to prevent
damaging the surface, usually a couple of hours after the steel

troweling is completed. An example of this is a hotel structure
where the wall between each room is a bearing wall and the floor
system is a concrete, one-way, continuous slab. To ensure
structural adequacy and maximum economy, two practices
must be observed: 1) no shoring can be removed until the next
story of walls has been laid up, and 2) sand must be spread over
the new slab to facilitate cleanup of any dropped mortar.
For masonry veneers laid from the interior, the building
design and construction must accommodate the construction
technique. For example, if the walls are masonry veneer with
concrete masonry backup, both masonry wythes can easily be
laid at the same time. If, on the other hand, the interior wythe
is steel studs with sheathing, the veneer would have to be
placed from the exterior. Similarly, large columns and deep
beams may interfere with masonry veneer placement from the
interior.
One drawback to laying units from the inside of the
building is that more time is typically required to place the units
to assure they align on the exterior since the masons are facing
the interior, unexposed, side of the wall. However, this decrease
in productivity is often offset by large reductions in scaffolding
costs, which can be substantial. Although some scaffolding is
needed to lay the top portion of each wall, only one level of
scaffold is required.
Laying Units from Work Platforms
Scaffolds and other temporary work platforms allow the
masons to work facing the exposed side of the masonry, making
it easier to ensure the exposed side is laid plumb and level. Most
mason contractors own a supply of scaffolding, but often must
rent supplemental scaffolds for high-rise construction. Time
should be allotted for placing, dismantling, and moving scaffolds on the job.
Two alternatives to traditional scaffolding for high-rise
construction are powered mast-climbing platforms and suspended scaffolds. Both eliminate the labor required to construct multiple levels of conventional scaffolding.
Powered mast-climbing work platforms are erected on the
ground and use electric or hydraulic power to move the
platform up and down the supporting mast or masts (ref. 7). The
masts are attached to the building using adjustable ties or
anchors.
One advantage of these systems is that the platform can
be easily moved in small increments. This means the platform
can be adjusted as the wall is laid to keep it at the mason's
optimum working height. This reduces the amount of lifting of
individual units and improves productivity. Powered mastclimbing platforms have maximum heights ranging from 300 to
almost 700 ft (91 to 213 m), depending on the type chosen. Other
variables include maximum safe wind exposure, attachment
requirements, speed, and optional equipment such as overhead protection.
Suspended scaffolds (ref. 8) are work platforms that are
suspended from either the roof of the building or from an
intermediate floor and therefore would mainly be limited to use
on infill projects where the structural frame precedes the wall.
Like the mast-climbing platforms, the suspended scaffolds are
104
adjustable in small increments to keep the platform at the

optimum working height for the masons. Most suspended
scaffolds are raised and lowered by hand, rather than by a
powered system. The attachment requirements for suspended
scaffolds are fairly complex, and are typically designed for each
project and installed by the scaffold supplier.
Suspended scaffolds have the advantage of keeping the
lower floors of the building accessible once the work has
progressed above this point. They may also be preferable on
sloping sites where erection of frame scaffolding would be
difficult.
Suspended scaffolds typically become cost effective at
building heights of seven to ten stories. Below this height,
traditional or power mast scaffolding is probably more cost
effective.
CONCLUSION
Many economical concrete masonry structures have been
built around the country ranging from buildings to over twenty
stories in height to fifteen foot high retaining walls. Rapid
growth in areas like that of Orlando, Florida, spurred by the
arrival of Disney World produced a market for quality, economical building systems. Concrete masonry construction
and the early NCMA Specification for Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry were ready with the
technology to allow engineers and architects to design economical and aesthetically pleasing structures. High-rise buildings have seen an unprecedented growth with modern, innovative construction methods, proper engineering design and
use of concrete masonry materials.
REFERENCES
1. Specification for Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry, National Concrete Masonry Association,
1970.
3. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-95/ASCE 6-95/ TMS 602-95. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, 1995.
4. Uniform Building Code. Whittier, CA: International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO), 1997.
5. Keating, Elizabeth. "A Floor a Week per Tower." Masonry Construction, November 1989.
6. Keating, Elizabeth. "Powered Mast-Climbing Work Platforms." Masonry Construction, May 1997.
7. Wallace, Mark A. "Loadbearing Masonry Rises High in Cleveland." Masonry Construction, May 1997.
8. Hooker, Kenneth A. "Suspended Scaffolds Cut High-Rise Masonry Costs." Masonry Construction, March 1991.
Provided by: Nitterhouse Masonry Products, LLC


www.ncma.org

105
NCMA TEK
Provided by:
Quik-Brik
CONSTRUCTION OF LOW-RISE
CONCRETE MASONRY BUILDINGS
TEK 3-13
Construction (2005)
Keywords: architectural details, bond beams, composite wall,

construction details, construction techniques, flashing, joint
reinforcement, construction techniques, lintels, water repellents, weep holes.
INTRODUCTION
The current trend of urban renewal and infill has sparked a
high volume of new low-rise masonry residences. These structures
come in many forms, but quite often they employ the use of load
bearing concrete masonry walls supporting a wood floor system.
These new buildings are largely derivative of the historic loadbearing masonry brownstone or three flat structures of old. This
guide is intended to assist contractors and architects to give this
building type a modern approach to detailing.
FLOOR SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
When designing low-rise loadbearing structures, the connection detail between the floor system and the wall system is critical for
achieving a watertight structure. Much of this TEK will deal with
which strategy should be utilized in connecting a wood floor system
to a masonry load-bearing wall. Connection methods covered are
joist hangers, beam pockets and ledger beam details. Other floor systems are used in low-rise construction that are not addressed here see TEK 5-7A for further information (ref. 2).
BRICK AND BLOCK COMPOSITE WALL DETAILS
Quite often, the front facade of these structures is composed
of brick to give the building a more residential, more human scale.
One way to construct a brick and block wall is to separate the two
wythes with an airspace, creating a cavity wall. Another is to use
a composite wall design. The composite wall consists of an exterior wythe of brick directly mortared or grouted and tied to an inner
wythe of CMU. The collar joint between the two wythes should be
100% solid as it is the only defense against water penetration. Minimum tie requirements are one tie per 22/3ft2 of wall area for W1.7
(MW11)(9 gauge) wire or one tie per 41/2ft2 of wall area using W2.8
(MW19)(3/16 in.)wire (ref. 2). A W1.7 (MW11)(9 gauge) joint reinforcement @16 in. (406 mm) on center would meet this requirement
and is often used. Details covered for this system are base flashing,
window head and window sill details.
EXTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY
The use of water repellent admixtures in concrete masonry
and mortars can greatly reduce the amount of water entering the
masonry. In addition, they inhibit any water that penetrates the face
from wicking to the back of the wall.
Figure 1Exterior Concrete Masonry in a Residence

Proper selection and application of integral water repellents
and surface treatments can greatly enhance the water resistive properties of masonry, but they should not be considered as substitutes for
good fundamental design including flashing details and crack control
measures. See TEKs 19-1, 19-2A and 19-4A (refs. 6, 3, & 5) for more
information on water resistant concrete masonry construction.
Because a 4 in. (102 mm) concrete masonry veneer will
shrink over time, a 4 in. (102 mm) hot-dipped galvanized ladder type
joint reinforcement should be placed in bed joints spaced 16 in. (406
mm) vertically.
Compared to type N or O, type S mortar tends to be less
workable in the field and should only be specified when dictated
by structural requirements. Sills, copings and chimney caps of
solid masonry units, reinforced concrete, stone, or corrosion resistant
metal should be used. Copings, sills and chimney caps should project beyond the face of the wall at least 1 in. (25 mm) and should have
functional flashing and weep holes. In addition, all sills, copings and
chimney caps should have a minimum slope of 1:4, be mechanically
anchored to the wall, and should have properly sized, sealed, and
located movement joints when necessary.
Flashing should be installed at locations shown on the plans
and in strict accordance with the details and industry standard flashing procedures. Functional, unpunctured flashing and weep holes
are to be used at the base of wall above grade, above openings, at
shelf angles, lintels, wall-roofing intersections, chimneys, bay windows, and below sills and copings. The flashing should be extended
past the face of the wall. The flashing should have end dams at discontinuous ends, and properly sealed splices at laps.
106
JOIST HANGER DETAILS
BEAM POCKET DETAILS
The use of a joist hanger system can greatly simplify the

bearing detail. The floor system does not interrupt the continuity of
the bearing wall. Installation is quicker and easier resulting in a
more economical installation.
The traditional beam pocket detail still can be effective.

Stepped flashing above the bearing line is critical to the performance of this system. Without the flashing, any water present in
the wall has an unobstructed path inside the building and has the
potential to deteriorate the floor structure.
Block & mortar

treated with integral
water repellent (where
required)
Stepped Through wall
flashing
Block & mortar

water repellent
(where required)
2 wythes of
4 in. (102 mm) CMU
Inner wythe cut
to form pocket
Through Wall
Flashing
Drip Edge
Drip Edge
Joist Hanger
Grouted Bond Beam
Grouted Bond Beam
Figure 2Joist Hanger Bearing Detail
Figure 4Beam Pocket Bearing Detail
2 Wythes of
4 in. (102 mm) CMU
Stepped through
wall flashing
Stepped Through
Wall Flashing
Strap anchor in
head joint.
Strap Anchor
2 wythes of
4 (102 mm) CMU
Drip Edge
Drip Edge
Grouted Bond Beam
Figure 3
Joist Hanger Non-Bearing Detail
Grouted Bond Beam
Figure 5
Beam Pocket Non-Bearing Detail
107
LEDGER BEAM DETAILS
PARAPETS AND WINDOW SILLS
The use of a ledger beam which is bolted to a bond beam is

also a good option for this bearing condition. Through wall flashing
is still required to maintain a watertight wall. Any water that penetrates the block with run down the inner cores of the block until it
hits the flashing. The flashing and weep holes will allow the water
to exit without damaging the structure.
Below are details for a parapet condition and a window sill

condition. The parapet is reinforced with No. 4 bars at 48 in.
(No.13M @1219 mm) on center or as required for wind resistance.
If a metal cap is used, it should extend down the face of the wall at
least 3 in. (76 mm) with continuous sealant at the joint on both sides
of the wall. The sill detail shows the arrangement of flashing, end
dam, weep holes and drip edge and how they all form a watertight
Optional: Counterflashing or waterproofing adhered to CMU

Block & mortar
water repellent
(where required)
Through wall
flashing
Block & mortar

water repellent
(where required)
Metal coping
Drip edge
Continuous sealant
(both sides)
Anchor bolts grouted

into bond beam
Flashing
Ledger Beam
Bond Beam
Reinforcement if
required for wind
resistance.
Grouted Bond Beam
Figure 6Ledger Beam Bearing Detail
Figure 8Parapet Detail
Joint reinforcement
as required
Flashing
Flashing end dam
Through wall
flashing
Cotton sash weep
Drip edge
Grouted cell
(under flashing)
Anchor bolts grouted

into bond beam
Drip edge
Ledger Beam
Grouted Bond Beam
Figure 7Ledger Beam Non-Bearing Detail
Figure 9Window Sill Detail
108
WINDOW HEAD DETAILS
CONTROL JOINT DETAILS
These two window head details show the relationship

between the steel lintel, drip edge, flashing, end dams, and weep
holes. The first option shows the use of a concrete masonry lintel
which is grouted solid and reinforced. The second detail shows
two steel lintels used for spanning the opening.
Control joints simply are weakened planes placed at

approximately 20 ft. (6 m) on center in concrete masonry walls
and at changes in wall elevation/thickness. Notice that the joint
reinforcement is discontinuous at the joint. Cores are shown
grouted adjacent to the joints as well to ensure structural stability
in taller walls and/or high load situations.
Joint Reinforcing
Rebar / Grout
Mortar
Backer Rod
Sealant
Joint reinforcing as
required
Flashing
Joint Reinforcing
Cotton weep
Rebar / Grout
Drip edge
Mortar
Bond beam
Backer Rod
Sealant
Figure 10Masonry Lintel Detail
Figure 12Control Joint Details
Control joint
location using
masonry lintel
Control joint
location when
using steel lintel
Flashing with
end dams
Joint reinforcing as
required
Control joint
Steel lintels
Cotton weep
Drip edge
Figure 11Double Angle Lintel Detail
Additional control
joint [if opening
is more than 6 ft.
(1.8 m)wide]
Figure 13Control Joint at Opening
109
COMPOSITE WALL BASE FLASHING DETAILS
COMPOSITE WALL WINDOW DETAILS
Figure 14 shows a stair-stepped flashing detail with the

exposed drip edge and weep holes. Figure 15 shows a straight
through wall flashing detail. The flashing must be set in mastic on
top of the concrete foundation, or the flashing must be self adhesive. The flashing should be turned up on the inner side of the
wall to direct water to the outside of the wall.
Here steel lintels back-to-back create the above window

span. Stepped flashing turned up on the inside, and folded to form
an end dam protects the head condition from moisture. The sill
detail also uses flashing, end dams and weep holes to keep moisture
out of the wall. The use of a precast concrete or stone sill is highly
suggested over using brick rowlock sills.
Flashing support angle

Stepped through wall
flashing
Continuous
collar joint
Cotton sash weep
@16 in. (406 mm) o.c.
Drip Edge
Continuous
collar joint
Flashing End Dam

Cotton sash weep
Stepped flashing
Drip Edge
Steel Lintel
Figure 14Stepped Flashing at Base
Figure 16Window Head Detail
Joint reinforcement
as required
Collar joint
Sealant and backer
rod
Flashing end dam
Continuous
collar joint
Flashing support
angle
Through wall
flashing
Cotton sash weep
Flashing
Drip Edge
Grouted solid
Cotton weep 16 in.

(406 mm) o.c.
Drip Edge
Figure 15Level Flashing and Angle
Figure 17Window Sill Detail
110
* All joint reinforcement should be

hot-dipped galvanized (minimum)
8 in. (203 mm) CMU

1 in. (25 mm) Rigid
insulation
SECTION
Figure 18 shows the detailing of a 4 in. (102 mm) concrete

masonry veneer used in conjunction with a 8 in. (205 mm) CMU
backup wall.
Three types of joint reinforcement are shown including
tri-rod, tab and adjustable types.
It is imperative that the veneer
have a continuous wire embedded in every other course to control movement. With the tri-rod
system, the joint reinforcement
satisfies this requirement. With
the other two systems, an additional ladder type joint reinforcement is used to provide this
movement control for the veneer.
PLAN
CONCRETE MASONRY
VENEER DETAILING
Tri-rod joint reinforcement @ 16in.

(406 mm) o.c.
vertically*
Tab type reinforcement@ 16 in. (406

mm) o.c. vertically*
1 in. (25 mm)

airspace
Adjustable joint reinforcement@ 16 in.

(406 mm) o.c.
4 in. (102 mm)
2 wire ladder joint
reinforcement @
alternate 16 in.
(406 mm) o.c.
4 in. (102 mm)

2 wire ladder joint
reinforcement@
alternate16 in. (406
mm) o.c. vertically
4 in. (102 mm) CMU

Flashing
Tri-rod
Tab type
Adjustable
Figure 18Concrete Masonry Veneer Detailing
REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-05/ASCE 6-05/TMS-402-05. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2005.
Floor and Roof Connections to Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 5-7A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 19-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 19-5A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 19-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
Water Repellents for Concrete Masonry Walls, NCMA TEK 19-1. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
Provided by: Quik-Brik

Disclaimer: Although care has been taken to ensure the enclosed information is as accurate and complete as possible, NCMA does not assume any responsibility
for errors or ommisions resulting from the use of this TEK

13750 Sunrise Valley Drive, Herndon, Virginia 20171-4662
www.ncma.org
To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK111

Index,
NCMA TEK
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE MASONRY

WALL CONSTRUCTION
Keywords: construction techniques, post-tensioned
masonry, prestressed masonry, quality assurance,
prestressing tendons, tensioning
INTRODUCTION
Prestressing is the general term used when a structural
element is compressed prior to being subjected to building
loads. This initial state of compression offsets tensile stresses
from applied loads. Post-tensioning is a specific method of
prestressing where tendons are stressed after the wall has
been placed. The other type of prestressing, called pretensioning, involves tensioning the tendon prior to construction of the masonry. Because virtually all prestressed masonry built to date has been post-tensioned, the two terms are
often used interchangeably as they apply to this form of
masonry design and construction.
Post-tensioned concrete masonry walls have been built for
schools, retail, manufacturing, highway sound barriers, warehouses and other types of structures. In addition, post-tensioning
has been used to strengthen and repair existing masonry walls.
This TEK addresses new concrete masonry walls laid in
running bond and built with unbonded vertical post-tensioning
tendons. Post-Tensioned Concrete Masonry Wall Design,
TEK 14-20A (ref. 1) addresses the structural design of
vertically post-tensioned walls.
POST-TENSIONING
In post-tensioned construction, hollow concrete masonry units are laid conventionally and prestressing tendons
are either placed in the concrete masonry cells or in the cavity
between multiple wythes. Current design codes (ref. 3) typically address post-tensioning of masonry walls laid in running bond. The cells or cavity containing the tendons may or
may not be grouted. Grouting helps increase cross-sectional
area for shear and compressive resistance, but increases
construction cost and time.
Prestressing tendons are either installed during wall
construction, or access ports are left in the walls so the
tendons can be slipped in after the walls are completed. In
either case, the tendons are tensioned only after the walls
have cured for approximately three to seven days.
TEK 3-14
Construction
MATERIALS
Construction of a post-tensioned wall proceeds similarly to that of conventional masonry. The materials are the
same, with the addition of hardware to develop the posttensioning forces, steel prestressing tendons which can be
wires, bars or strands, and sometimes prestressing grout.
Open-ended (A- and H-shaped) concrete masonry units
(Figure 1) are particularly suited to post-tensioned masonry
, as these units can be placed around the tendons without
having to lift the units over the tendons. While these two-core
units are commonly used, proprietary units are also being
developed that are specifically intended for use with tendons.
The net area strength of concrete masonry units must be
at least 1,900 psi (13.1 MPa) per Standard Specification for
Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units (ref. 2). However,
stronger units are often specified for post-tensioned walls to
utilize the higher compressive strength.
Mortar and Grout
Type S mortar is commonly used for conventional loadbearing masonry, and Type S is a good choice for posttensioned masonry as well. Higher early strength mortars can
accommodate earlier stressing.
Because mortar must be placed on concrete masonry
webs adjacent to grouted cores to contain the fluid grout, full
mortar bedding is sometimes specified when grout is used.
Mortar bedding is a design issue as well, as the section
properties of a wall with face shell mortar bedding are
different from those of a fully bedded wall.
Because this TEK addresses unbonded tendons only, the
Figure 1Open -Ended Concrete Masonry Units

112
(2002)
grout discussed here is conventional grout (ASTM C 476, ref.

6), not prestressing grout. Prestressing grout is only used
with bonded tendons. Encasing tendons in conventional grout
restrains the tendons, but they are still considered unbonded.
Tendons
In the United States, tendons are usually high-strength
bars joined by couplers, although Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) also allows steel
strands or wires to be used. Couplers allow the use of shorter
bars which minimizes the height of lifting. To date, there are
no code provisions for tendons which are not steel.
Important features of the tendons are their size, strength,
and relaxation characteristics. Most tendons currently available in the United States are bars between 7/16 and 1 in. (11 and
25 mm) in diameter, with strengths between 60,000 and
100,000 psi (413 and 690 MPa), depending on the supplier.
Steel strand tendons are generally 270,000 psi (1,860 MPa).
Tendons are usually placed in hollow cells of masonry
units with little or no grouting, except for certain shear walls
(these must be identified on the design drawings). In addition,
the open-ended units shown in Figure 1 must be grouted to
meet minimum web requirements in ASTM C 90 (ref. 2).
Tendon Corrosion Protection
Tendons must be protected from moisture deterioration,
and the design documents should indicate the type of protection
required. Tendons in walls with a likelihood of high moisture
levels (single wythe exterior walls in areas of high humidity and
interior walls around swimming pools, locker rooms, etc.) must
have corrosion protection in addition to that provided by the
masonry cover, such as hot-dipped galvanizing (ref. 3). In
practice, most prestressing tendons are supplied with a hotdipped galvanized coating. It is considered good practice to use
additional corrosion protection, such as flexible epoxy-type
coatings, for tendons in moist environments.
Grouting
While the need for grouting is minimized compared to
conventionally reinforced walls, grout is still needed for
mild reinforcement, anchorages for the tendons, such as in
bond beams, and tendon restraints.
Concrete
masonry
unit
Foundation
or support
Tendon
Continuous
bond beam
(inverted)
Foundation
or support
Cast-in-place
anchor
2aCast-in-place anchor
Anchorages
Each tendon is anchored at the foundation and extends to
the top of the wall. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) requires that tendons be anchored
by mechanical embedments or bearing devices or by bond
development in concrete. Tendons can not be anchored by
bond development into the masonry. The foundation anchorage is embedded in the wall or footing while the top anchorage utilizes a special block, a precast concrete spreader beam
or a grouted bond beam.
Unless the design documents call out specific bottom
anchors, the contractor must select the anchor appropriate to
the conditions. The cast-in-place bottom anchor (Figure 2a)
is preferred for shear walls and for fire walls. While they are
the best anchors for capacity, cast-in-place anchors are the
most difficult to align. Cast-in-place anchors are often set by
the foundation contractor, not the mason. Thus, quality control is a concern with these anchors.
The mason controls bottom anchor placement when
either adhesive anchors are installed in the foundation (Figure 2c), or when an anchor is used which does not rely on the
foundation for support (Figure 2b). If the anchor in Figure 2b
is used, foundation dowels are grouted into the wall to lock it
in place. In some instances, tendons can also begin at an upper
floor and not at the foundation. In this case, the foundationless
anchor is used with a bond beam, similar to Figure 2b.
The mechanical post-installed anchors can be used for
nearly all applications, while the adhesive type should not be
used for fire walls.
CONSTRUCTION
Key steps of post-tensioning concrete masonry walls
include: selecting and setting the bottom anchorages; installing the tendons; selecting and setting the top anchorages; and
tensioning the tendons.
Bottom Anchors
Bottom anchors are most critical to the proper construction of post-tensioned walls. Alignment is essential to ensure
that the tendons are placed exactly as intended.
Tendon
Bond breaker tape
(2) No. 4 (M #13)
continuous
Foundationless
threaded floor
slab anchor
Concrete
masonry unit
Tendon
Foundation
or support
Dowel into slab or

wall (locate minimum
8 in. (203 mm) from tendon)
2bFoundationless anchor
Adhesive
anchor
2cAdhesive anchor
Figure 2Bottom Anchors for Use in Post-Tensioned Masonry

113
Tendons
Tendons are usually placed concentric with the wall.
However, they may be placed off-center to counteract bending moments due to eccentric vertical forces or lateral forces
from a single direction. However, tendons should not be
placed such that tensile stresses develop in the wall due to the
combination of prestressing force and dead load.
Laterally-unrestrained tendons are free to move within
the cell or cavity and are the simplest to construct. Laterally
restrained tendons are not free to move within a cell or cavity.
Restraint is accomplished by grouting the full height of the
tendon or by providing intermittent restraintseither grout
plugs or mechanical restraintsat the quarter points of the
wall height.
Placing tendons is much like that of mild reinforcement.
They may be installed after the masonry is constructed
provided the design allows laterally-unrestrained tendons. If
laterally-restrained tendons are required, the tendon placement should proceed simultaneously with the masonry to
allow the restraints to be installed unless the cells will be
grouted.
Tendon positioners (see Figure 3) are useful to maintain
the tendon location within the wall during construction of the
masonry. Positioners may also function as restraints if their
capacity is determined by testing.
In all details, the tendons must be able to slip freely. If
grout encases the tendon either totally or at restraints or bond
beams, a bond breaker such as poly tape should be used to
allow the tendon to slip.
Tendons can also be either bonded or unbonded. Bonded
tendons are encapsulated by prestressing grout in a corrugated duct which is bonded to the surrounding masonry by
grout. Both the prestressing grout inside the duct and the
grout around the duct must be cured before the tendons are
stressed. Thus, bonded tendons are also laterally-restrained. All
other tendons are unbonded. However, unbonded tendons may
be either laterally-restrained or unrestrained. Walls with laterally-unrestrained and unbonded tendons do not require grouting
Grouted cell
Mesh grout
stop
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Locate couplers
to avoid
lateral restraints
Bond breaker
tape
Tendon
Positioner
t
/2
Top Anchors
The top anchor must be placed on solid masonry, a
grouted bond beam or a precast concrete unit. The anchor
should not be supported by mortar.
Figure 4 shows a means for supporting the top of a wall
when the top anchor is placed on a bond beam in a lower
course. This detail can also be used for interior partitions.
Tensioning
At the time the tendons are stressed, the masonry is
considered to have its initial strength (f 'mi). The project
specification should include either the minimum f 'mi and
minimum specified compressive strength of masonry ( f 'm),
or the amount of curing required before stressing can occur.
The sequence of tensioning, whether it is accomplished
by fully stressing each tendon sequentially or by stressing the
tendons in stages, is a function of the design specifications.
Prestressed masonry design, and therefore the structural
integrity of these walls, relies on an accurate measure of the
prestress in the tendons. To ensure the required level of
accuracy, Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 4)
requires that the following two methods be used to evaluate
the tendon prestressing force:
1. measure the tendon elongation and compare it with
required elongation based on average load-elongation
curves for the prestressing tendons, and either:
2a. use a calibrated dynamometer to measure the jacking
force on a calibrated gage, or
2b.for prestressing tendons using bars of less than 150 ksi
(1,034 MPa) tensile strength, use load-indicating washers complying with Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for
Use with Structural Fasteners, ASTM F 959 (ref. 5).
If the two values determined by methods 1 and 2 are not
within 7 percent of each other, the cause of the difference
must be corrected.
Remove and
replace face
shell for
access to
coupler
and are generally the most economical to construct. However,

the wall performance will not be as good as with laterally
restrained tendons. The designer must specify which system
will be used.
For some conditions, primarily seismic, grouted conventional reinforcement is used in addition to post-tensioning
tendons to provide minimum requirements of bonded reinforcement. However, post-tensioned walls are most economical when the grouting is minimized or eliminated totally
in comparison to a conventionally reinforced wall. The higher
cost of the post-tensioning materials is more than offset by
the savings of placing fewer tendons compared to reinforcing
bars and eliminating most of the grouting.
/2
Figure 3Tendon Coupler and Positioner
Post-tensioned walls must be constructed in conformance with masonry standards applicable to conventionally
reinforced masonry. In addition to these, Specification for
Masonry Structures (ref. 4) requires the following for posttensioned masonry:
114
1. In the out-of-plane direction, the tolerance for the tendon

placement shall be + 1/4 in. (6 mm) for masonry beams,
columns, walls, and pilasters with cross-sectional dimensions less than 8 in. (203 mm). For cross-sectional
dimensions greater than 8 in. (203 mm), the tolerance
increases to + 3/8 in. (10 mm).
2. In the in-plane direction, the tolerance for tendon placement is +1 in. (25 mm).
3. If tolerances exceed these amounts, the Architect/Engi-
Soft joint, fire-rated

as required
Lateral tendon
restraint anchor
bolted or welded
to bottom flange
of beam to provide
simple support
at top of wall
Veneer
Continuous
bond beam
Extend tendon
such that it is
properly engaged
with projected
tabs of restraint
anchor
neer should evaluate the effect on the structure.

REFERENCES:
1. Post-Tensioned Concrete Masonry Wall Design, TEK
2. Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 90-01a. ASTM International, 2001.
4. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS
602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
5. Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct TenSteel structure
sion Indicators for Use with StrucRemove and replace
tural Fasteners, ASTM F 959-01a.
face shell for access
to bearing plate
6. Standard Specification for Grout
Nut, hardened washer
for Masonry, ASTM C 476-01. ASTM
and load-indicating
washer
Bearing plate
(2) No. 4 (M #13)
continuous
Grout cell solid
Bond breaker tape
Mesh grout stop
Figure 4Top Anchor
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

115
NCMA TEK
PRODUCTIVITY AND MODULAR

COORDINATION IN CONCRETE MASONRY
CONSTRUCTION
TEK 4-1A
Construction
sonry unit weight greatly impacts masonry productivity, with

lighter weight units resulting in higher productivity rates
(other factors being equal). Based on typical hollow concrete
masonry units, the use of lightweight concrete masonry units
(less than 105 pcf (1,680 kg/m3) concrete) can increase
productivity 10% to 18% over heavyweight units (125 pcf
(2,000 kg/m3) or denser concrete) 8-in. (203-mm) units, and
20% to 54% for 12-in. (305-mm) units (refs. 3, 4).
Bond pattern can also affect productivity. Because masonry crews are accustomed to laying concrete masonry
Keywords: construction techniques, economics, modular

coordination, productivity
INTRODUCTION
For masonry construction, productivity is typically

thought of as the number of concrete masonry units placed
per unit of time. This production rate is influenced by many
factors, some of which can be controlled by the
mason and others which are beyond the mason's
Figure 1Estimated Production Rates Based on
control.
Concrete Masonry Unit Weight (ref. 4)
PRODUCTIVITY RATES
Ideally, concrete masonry productivity rates
should be compiled by masonry estimators,
based on records of completed jobs. Published
productivity rates, such as those shown in Figure 1 and Table 1, should be used as guidelines
only.
The following sections discuss some of
the various factors that can impact masonry
productivity. In addition to these, productivity
rates can vary with unit size and concrete density, mortar workability, masonry bond pattern,
number and type of wall openings, amount of
reinforcement and wall size.
As illustrated in Figure 1, concrete ma-
Production, units per mason

per day
250
200
150
100
50
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Weight of unit, lb
Table 1Typical Concrete Masonry Productivity Ratesa

Unit nominal size and description:
4 x 2 x 8 concrete brick units
8 x 8 x 16 standard concrete masonry units
8 x 8 x 16 split face concrete masonry units
Productivity, number of units per mason per dayb

550 to 650
135 to 190
80 to 160
Notes:
a
Values assume: walls are constructed in running bond with standard 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick mortar joints and are of
convenient height; adequate masonry labor is available; and walls incorporate modular layout to minimize cutting.
b
To obtain square feet of wall per day, multiply the values in the table by 0.89 (multiply by 0.083 to obtain m2/day).
116
TEK 4-1A 2002 National Concrete Masonry Association
(2002)
primarily in running bond, other bond patterns often require

more time to lay. For example, stack bond has been estimated
to decrease productivity by about 8% over comparable running bond productivity rates (ref. 4).
IMPACT OF QUALITY ON PRODUCTIVITY
The overall quality of the project can influence the masonry
productivity. Quality construction includes:
1. pre-bid and pre-construction conferences,
2. proper design,
3. attention to planning and layout,
4. quality materials,
5. adequate jobsite and
6 proper installation.
A project with these ingredients will also be conducive to a
very productive jobsite.
Pre-Bid and Pre-Construction Conferences
Pre-bid and pre-construction conferences should be
held and attended by all parties involved in the masonry work
including the owners representative, the architect/engineer,
the contractor, the construction manager, the masonry material suppliers and the mason contractor. This facilitates good
communication prior to the commencement of work and
prior to the development of any misunderstandings. Clear
communication minimizes delays due to factors such as lastminute changes and errors.
Proper Design
Quality design means that the designer has:
designed and detailed a project that is constructible,
developed plans and specifications that are sufficient for
construction and are complete with the proper code and
standards referenced,
reviewed the plans, specifications and structural drawings
to eliminate conflicting words and conflicting details,
included the input of a quality mason contractor, and
incorporated all masonry materials into CSI Division 4.
(Often, some mason materials are found in division 7. If
all of the masons work is placed into Division 4, it
enhances communication with the masonry team and has
a better chance of being properly incorporated into the job.)
Similar to the pre-bid and pre-construction conferences,
a comprehensive set of plans and specifications will help
enhance productivity because it will reduce or eliminate time
spent correcting misunderstandings and errors.
A complete set of plans and specifications will include
a copy of Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and Specification for Masonry Structures (refs. 1, 2),
the national consensus standards for masonry design and
construction. In addition, applicable ASTM standards should
be included for specifying masonry materials.
Planning and Layout
Attention to planning of the building itself and of construction sequencing and scheduling can impact masonry
productivity.
Concrete masonry structures can be constructed using

virtually any layout dimension. However, for maximum construction efficiency and economy, concrete masonry elements should be designed and constructed with modular
coordination in mind. Modular coordination is the practice
of laying out and dimensioning structures to standard lengths
and heights to accommodate modular sized building materials. Standard concrete masonry modules are typically 8 in.
(203 mm) vertically and horizontally, but may also include 4in. (102-mm) modules for some applications. These modules provide the best overall design flexibility and coordination with other building products such as windows and doors.
Typically, masonry opening widths for doors and windows should be 4 in. (102 mm) larger than the door or window
width. This allows for 2 in. (51 mm) on each side of the
opening for framing. Masonry opening heights for windows
typically are 8 in. (203 mm) greater than the window height.
This opening size allows for 2 in. (51 mm) above and below
for framing and 4 in. (102 mm) for installing a sill at the
bottom of the window. Masonry opening door heights are 2
in. (51 mm) greater than the door height, which leaves 2 in.
(51 mm) for the door framing. Figure 2 illustrates these
opening sizes.
Thus, door and window widths of 28 in., 36 in., 44 in., and
52 in. (711, 914, 1118 and 1,321 mm), and so on in 8 in. (203
mm) increments, are modular and would not require cutting
of the masonry. Modular window heights are any multiple of
8 in. (203 mm), with a masonry window opening 8 in. (203
mm) greater than the height of the window if a 4 in. (102 mm)
sill will be used. Similarly, a modular door height is 2 in. (51
mm) less than any multiple of eight. Thus, an 86 in. (2,184
mm) high door, which fits into an 88-in. (2,235 mm) high
masonry opening, has a modular height.
Note that products are available in some locations to
accommodate 6' - 8" (2,032 mm) doors in masonry walls
without the need for cutting the masonry units. These include
precast lintels with a 2 in. (51 mm) notch which provides the
necessary 6' - 10" (2,083 mm) masonry opening to accommodate the door and frame. In other areas, door frames are
available with a 4 in. (101.6 mm) header which would allow
a 6' - 8" (2,032 mm) door to fit into 7' - 4" or 88 in. (2,235 mm)
high masonry opening.
Nonmodular layouts may require additional considerations for items such as using nonstandard units or saw
cutting masonry units and maintaining bond patterns. Additionally, other construction issues may arise, such as placement of jamb reinforcement and adequate grout consolidation within small core spaces. The end product typically is
more difficult to construct, produces more waste and is more
costly.
Similarly, coordinating the placement of pipes, ducts,
chases and conduits to align them with hollow masonry cores
can reduce the need to saw-cut masonry units.
Steel congestion in reinforced masonry can slow productivity. Placing too many reinforcing bars in too small a
space makes it difficult to place the steel and to provide
adequate grout coverage. Specification for Masonry Structures (ref. 3) requires 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) clear space between the
117
reinforcing bar and the masonry for

fine grout and 1/2 in. (13 mm) clear
space for coarse grout.
Sample panels reduce misunderstandings and provide an objective indicator of the intended construction
practices. They help ensure all parties
understand the range of materials,
methods and workmanship acceptable
on the job. Sample panels are typically
at least 4 ft by 4 ft (1.22 x 1.22 m) and
should contain the full range of unit
and mortar colors. Selecting units of
all one shade for the sample panel will
not accurately reflect the completed
work. Instead, units should be randomly
selected as they would in the project
construction. Cleaning procedures,
sealant application and all other procedures should be performed on the
sample panel so that their acceptability can be judged as well. The sample
panel should remain in place throughout construction as a point of reference.
For maximum productivity, timely
delivery of the units, mortar, grout and
other masonry materials will help expedite the job. In addition, schedule
masonry work to avoid times of the
year particularly subject to freezing
temperatures or prolonged rains whenever possible. Although masonry construction can take place during hot,
cold and wet weather conditions, special construction procedures may be
warranted in some cases to ensure the
masonry quality is not impacted by the
weather. More detailed information
on these construction procedures can
be found in All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction (ref. 4).
Quality Materials
Masonry materials have a successful history of meeting applicable
specifications and project requirements. Ensuring that the materials used
are as specified helps keep the masonry construction on track. ASTM
standards for masonry units, for example, specify dimensional tolerances
for the units. Units meeting the ASTM
tolerances will be easier to place, and
allow the mason to more easily maintain level and alignment. Similarly, units
without excessive chippage (a characteristic also governed by ASTM stan-
Masonry opening
width = window
opening width +
4 in. (102 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)

framing
2 in. (51 mm)

framing
2 in. (51 mm)
framing
Masonry opening
height = window
opening height +
8 in. (203 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
framing
4 in.
(102 mm)
sill height
Window Openings
Masonry opening
width = door
opening width +
4 in. (102 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
framing
Masonry opening
height = door
opening height +
2 in. (51 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)

framing
2 in. (51 mm)
framing
Door Openings
Figure 2Modular Wall Openings
118
dards) allow placement without the need for sorting the product
for qualityan activity that reduces overall productivity.
Jobsite
A quality jobsite helps productivity by including ample
space for the mason subcontractor to work and having easy
access to the masonry supplies. This includes having:
undisturbed space for building the sample panel(s),
a defined and ample-sized area for materials and supplies,
and
a defined and ample-sized area for sampling and testing
procedures as required for the project.
Proper Installation
In addition to the factors cited above, quality installation
requires:
an ample number of qualified craftsmen,
qualified and sufficient supervision, and
the right equipment for the job.
There have been some marvelous developments in products and equipment to assist masons and hence increase
masonry productivity. For example, newer fork lifts often
have increased capacity, a single boom which increases
visibility, are more maneuverable, have higher load ratings
and higher extensions. Other equipment advances that can
enhance productivity include portable hand-held lasers that
work in numerous directions simultaneously, electric portable winches and power (crank-up or hydraulic) scaffolding.
Products that are easier for the mason to install, such as
self-adhesive flashings and pre-formed flashing end dams,

can also impact masonry productivity.
Choice of mortar can also impact productivity. Masonry
and mortar cements provide more consistency because all of
the cementitious ingredients are premixed. Premixed mortars, which include the sand mixed with the appropriate
cement, are also available in silos or in mixers or blenders.
Premixed mortars can improve mortar quality control and
uniformity and can also increase productivity by eliminating
the need for job site mixing.
In some cases, work by other trades can also impact
masonry productivity. For example, poured concrete foundations or footings which do not meet their tolerances may
require the mason to saw-cut the first course of block, or take
some other measure, to compensate.
REFERENCES
ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
3. All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 31C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
4. Kolkoski, R. V. Masonry Estimating. Craftsman Book
Company, 1988.
5. Research Investigation of Mason Productivity. National
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

119
NCMA TEK
ESTIMATING CONCRETE MASONRY

MATERIALS
TEK 4-2A
Costs/Estimating
Keywords: concrete masonry units, construction, estimating, grout, mortar
INTRODUCTION
Estimating the quantity or volume of materials used in a
typical masonry project can range from the relatively simple
task associated with an unreinforced single wythe garden
wall, to the comparatively difficult undertaking of a partially
grouted multiwythe wall coliseum constructed of varying unit
sizes, shapes, and configurations.
Large projects, due to their complexity in layout and
detailing, often require detailed computer estimating programs
or an intimate knowledge of the project to achieve a reasonable
estimate of the materials required for construction. However,
for smaller projects, or as a general means of obtaining
ballpark estimates, the rule of thumb methods described in
this TEK provide a practical means of determining the quantity
of materials required for a specific masonry construction
project.
It should be stressed that the information for estimating
materials quantities in this section should be used with caution
and checked against rational judgment. Design issues such as
non-modular layouts or numerous returns and corners can
significantly increase the number of units and the volume of
mortar or grout required. Often, material estimating is best
left to an experienced professional who has developed a
second hand disposition for estimating masonry material
requirements.
(203 mm) and nominal lengths of 16 in. (406 mm), the

exposed surface area of a single unit in the wall is 8/9 ft 2 (0.083
m 2). Including a 5 percent allowance for waste and breakage,
this translates to 119 units per 100 ft 2 (9.29 m2) of wall area.
(See Table 1 for these and other values.) Because this method
of determining the necessary number of concrete masonry
units for a given project is independent of the unit width, it can
be applied to estimating the number of units required regardless
of their width.
When using this estimating method, the area of windows,
doors and other wall openings needs to be subtracted from the
total wall area to yield the net masonry surface. Similarly, if
varying unit configurations, such as pilaster units, corner units
or bond beam units are to be incorporated into the project, the
number of units used in these applications need to be calculated
separately and subtracted from the total number of units
required.
ESTIMATING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Unit
Unit face
Number of units per
type
size, in. (mm) 100 ft2 (100 m2) of wall area
conventional 8 x 16 (203 x 406)
119 (1,275)
half-high
4 x 16 (102 x 406)
238 (2,550)
half-length
8 x 8 (203 x 203)
238 (2,550)
brick
22/3 x 8 (68 x 203)
710 (7,610)
Probably the most straightforward material to estimate

for most masonry construction projects is the units themselves.
The most direct means of determining the number of concrete
masonry units needed for any project is to simply determine
the total square footage of each wall and divide by the surface
area provided by a single unit specified for the project.
For conventional units having nominal heights of 8 in.
ESTIMATING MORTAR MATERIALS

Next to grout, mortar is probably the most commonly
Table 1Approximate Number of Concrete Masonry
Units Required for Single Wythe Constructiona
based on net area of masonry wall, includes about 5%

waste
120
(2004)
Table 2Mortar Estimation for Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls
Mortar type & batch proportions

Masonry cement:
8-70 lb (31.8 kg) bags masonry cement, 1 ton (907 kg) sandb
Preblended mortar:
1-80 lb (36.3 kg) bag
1-3,000 lb (1,361 kg) bag
Site-mixed mortarc :
Portland cement-lime:
Type M
1 ft 3 portland cement, 1/4 ft 3 hydrated lime, 33/4 ft 3 sand
Type S
1 ft 3 portland cement, 1/2 ft 3 hydrated lime, 41/2 ft 3 sand
Type N
1 ft 3 portland cement, 1 ft 3 hydrated lime, 6 ft 3 sand
Type O
1 ft 3 portland cement, 2 ft 3 hydrated lime, 9 ft 3 sand
Mortar cement:
Type M
1 ft 3 portland cement, 1 ft 3 Type N mortar cement, 6 ft 3 sand, or
1 ft 3 Type M mortar cement, 3 ft 3 sand
Type S
1/ 2 ft 3 portland cement, 1 ft 3 Type N mortar cement, 41/ 2 ft 3 sand, or
1 ft 3 Type S mortar cement, 3 ft 3 sand
Type N or O
1 ft 3 Type N mortar cement, 3 ft 3 sand
Masonry cement:
Type M
1 ft 3 portland cement, 1 ft 3 Type N masonry cement, 6 ft 3 sand, or
1 ft 3 Type M masonry cement, 3 ft 3 sand
Type S
1/ 2 ft 3 portland cement, 1 ft 3 Type N masonry cement, 41/ 2 ft 3 sand, or
1 ft 3 Type S masonry cement, 3 ft 3 sand
Type N or O
1 ft 3 Type N masonry cement, 3 ft 3 sand
a
b
c
Approximate number of units that can be

laid using one batch of mortar
Conventional CMU: Brick-sized CMU:
240
1,000
16
420
50
1,550
38
187
46
225
62
300
93
450
62
31
300
150
46
31
225
150
31
150
62
31
300
150
46
31
225
150
31
150
Number of units can vary from those listed in the table, based on factors such as the skill level of the mason, nonmodular layouts, numerous returns and corners, etc. Values include nominal amounts for waste. Assumes face shell
mortar bedding for conventional concrete masonry units and full bedding for brick-sized concrete masonry units. 1 ft 3
= 0.0283 m3.
1 ton (907 kg) damp loose sand = 25 ft 3 (0.71 m3)
For conversion purposes, the following can be used:
Portland cement: typical bag volume = 1 ft 3 (0.028 m3); typical bag weight 94 lb (42.6 kg); typical density 94 lb/ft 3
(1,506 kg/m3 )
Hydrated mason's lime: typical bag volume = 11/4 ft 3 (0.035 m3); typical bag weight 50 lb (22.7 kg); typical density
40 lb/ft 3 (641 kg/m3)
Sand: 1 ft 3 is equivalent to about 7 shovelfuls; typical density of damp loose sand 80 lb/ft 3 (1,281 kg/m3)
Masonry and mortar cement bag weights vary, although commonly: Type N masonry cements and mortar cements
are packaged in 70 lb (31.8 kg) bags; Type S masonry cements and mortar cements are packaged in 75 lb (34.0
kg) bags; Type M masonry cements and mortar cements are packaged in 80 lb (36.3 kg) bags.
121
misestimated masonry construction material. Variables such

as site batching versus pre-bagged mortar, mortar proportions,
construction conditions, unit tolerances and work stoppages,
combined with numerous other variables can lead to large
deviations in the quantity of mortar required for comparable
jobs.
As such, masons have developed general rules of thumb
for estimating the quantity of mortar required to lay concrete
masonry units. These general guidelines are as follows for
various mortar types. Note that the following estimates assume
the concrete masonry units are laid with face shell mortar
bedding; hence, the estimates are independent of the concrete
masonry unit width.
Masonry cement mortar
Masonry cement is typically available in bag weights of 70, 75
or 80 lb (31.8, 34.0 and 36.3 kg), although other weights may
be available as well. One 70 lb (31.8 kg) bag of masonry
cement will generally lay approximately 30 hollow units if
face shell bedding is used. For common batching proportions,
1 ton (2,000 lb, 907 kg) of masonry sand is required for every
8 bags of masonry cement. If more than 3 tons (2,721 kg) of
sand is used, add 1/2 ton (454 kg) to account for waste. For
smaller sand amounts, simply round up to account for waste.
This equates to about 240 concrete masonry units per ton of sand.
Portland cement lime mortar

One 94 lb (42.6 kg) bag of portland cement, mixed in proportion
with sand and lime to yield a lean Type S or rich Type N
mortar, will lay approximately 62 hollow units if face shell
bedding is used. This assumes a proportion of one 94 lb (42.6
kg) bag of portland cement to approximately one-half of a 50
lb (22.7 kg) bag hydrated lime to 4 1/4 ft 3 (0.12 m3) of sand. For
ease of measuring in the field, sand volumes are often correlated
to an equivalent number of shovels using a cubic foot (0.03
m3) box, as shown in Figure 1.
ESTIMATING GROUT
The quantity of grout required on a specific job can vary
greatly depending upon the specific circumstances of the
project. The properties and configuration of the units used in
construction can have a huge impact alone. For example,
Preblended mortar
Preblended mortar mixes may contain portland cement and
lime, masonry cement or mortar cement, and will always
include dried masonry sand. Packaged dry, the mortars typically
are available in 60 to 80 lb (27.2 to 36.3 kg) bags or in bulk
volumes of 2,000 and 3,000 lb (907 and 1,361 kg).
Figure 1Measuring Mortar Sand Volume
Table 3Grout Volume Estimation for Hollow Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls
Volume of grout, ft3 per 100 ft2 of wall (m3 per 100 m2)a
Grout spacing,
in. (mm)
8 (203)
16 (406)
24 (610)
32 (813)
40 (1,016)
48 (1,219)
56 (1,422)
64 (1,626)
72 (1,829)
80 (2,032)
88 (2,235)
96 (2,438)
104 (2,642)
112 (2,845)
120 (3,048)
a
6 in. (152 mm)

25.6 (7.8)
12.8 (3.9)
8.6 (2.6)
6.4 (2.0)
5.2 (1.6)
4.3 (1.3)
3.7 (1.1)
3.2 (1.0)
2.9 (0.9)
2.6 (0.8)
2.4 (0.7)
2.2 (0.7)
2.0 (0.6)
1.9 (0.6)
1.8 (0.5)
8 in. (203 mm)

36.1 (11.0)
18.1 (5.5)
12.1 (3.7)
9.1 (2.8)
7.3 (2.2)
6.1 (1.9)
5.2 (1.6)
4.6 (1.4)
4.1 (1.2)
3.7 (1.1)
3.3 (1.0)
3.1 (0.9)
2.8 (0.9)
2.6 (0.8)
2.5 (0.8)
Wall width:
10 in. (254 mm)
47.0 (14.3)
23.5 (7.2)
15.7 (4.8)
11.8 (3.6)
9.4 (2.9)
7.9 (2.4)
6.8 (2.1)
5.9 (1.8)
5.3 (1.6)
4.7 (1.4)
4.3 (1.3)
4.0 (1.2)
3.7 (1.1)
3.4 (1.0)
3.2 (1.0)
12 in. (305 mm)

58.9 (18.0)
29.5 (9.0)
19.7 (6.0)
14.8 (4.5)
11.8 (3.6)
9.9 (3.0)
8.5 (2.6)
7.4 (2.3)
6.6 (2.0)
5.9 (1.8)
5.4 (1.6)
5.0 (1.5)
4.6 (1.4)
4.3 (1.3)
4.0 (1.2)
14 in. (356 mm)

74.5 (22.7)
37.3 (11.4)
24.8 (7.6)
18.6 (5.7)
14.9 (4.5)
12.4 (3.8)
10.6 (3.2)
9.3 (2.8)
8.3 (2.5)
7.5 (2.3)
6.8 (2.1)
6.2 (1.9)
5.7 (1.7)
5.3 (1.6)
4.9 (1.5)
Assumes two-core hollow concrete masonry units and 3% waste.

122
units of low density concrete tend to absorb more water from

the mix than comparable units of higher density. Further, the
method of delivering grout to a masonry wall (pumping versus
bucketing) can introduce different amounts of waste. Although
the absolute volume of grout waste seen on a large project may
be larger than a comparable small project, smaller projects
may experience a larger percentage of grout waste.
Table 3 provides guidance for the required volume of
grout necessary to fill the vertical cells of walls of varying
thickness. Additional grout may be necessary for horizontally
grouting discrete courses of masonry. Note that walls
constructed of 4-in. (102-mm) masonry units are not included
in Table 3. Due to the small cell size and difficulty in
adequately placing and consolidating the grout, it is not
recommended to grout conventional 4-in. (102-mm) units.
Tables 4 and 5 contain estimated yields for bagged
preblended grouts for vertical and horizontal grouting,
respectively.
REFERENCES
1 . Kreh, D. Building With Masonry, Brick, Block and
Concrete . The Taunton Press, 1998.
2 . Annotated Design and Construction Details for
Concrete Masonry, TR 90B. National Concrete
Table 4Grout Estimation for Hollow Single Wythe

Concrete Masonry Walls, Vertical Grouting with
Preblended Grouta
CMU size,
in. (mm)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)
a
Yield, number of cores

80 lb (36.3 kg) bag 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) bag
3.6
150
2.7
110
2.2
95
1.8
80
80 lb (36.3 kg) bag yields approximately 0.66 ft 3 (0.019

m3); 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) bag yields approximately 25 ft 3
(0.71 m3 )
Table 5Grout Estimation for Hollow Single Wythe
Concrete Masonry Walls, Horizontal (Bond Beam)
Grouting with Preblended Grouta
CMU size,
in. (mm)
6 (152)
8 (203)
12 (305)
a
Yield, linear ft (m)

80 lb (36.3 kg) bag 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) bag
2.7 (0.823)
100 (30.48)
2.0 (0.609)
80 (24.38)
1.6 (0.488)
60 (18.29)
80 lb (36.3 kg) bag yields approximately 0.66 ft 3 (0.019

m3); 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) bag yields approximately 25 ft 3
(0.71 m3 )
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

123
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
VENEER DETAILS
Keywords: architectural details, cavity walls, connectors,
construction details, flashing, parapets, wall openings, wall
ties, weep holes
INTRODUCTION
A wall constructed with two or more wythes of masonry
can technically be classified in one of three ways, depending
on how each individual wythe is designed and detailed. These
three wall systems are composite, noncomposite or veneer
walls. A true veneer is nonstructuralany contribution of the
veneer to the walls out-of-plane load resistance is neglected.
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ref. 1) defines veneer as a masonry wythe which provides the
exterior finish of a wall system and transfers out-of-plane
loads directly to the backing, but is not considered to add load
resisting capacity to the wall system.
Noncomposite walls, on the other hand, are designed
such that each wythe individually resists the loads imposed on
it. Bending moments (flexure) due to wind or gravity loads
are distributed to each wythe in proportion to its relative
stiffness.
Composite walls are designed so that the wythes act
together as a single member to resist structural loads. This
requires that the two masonry wythes be connected by masonry
headers or by a mortar or grout filled collar joint and wall ties
to help ensure adequate load transfer between the two wythes.
The primary function of anchored veneers is to provide
an architectural facade and to prevent water penetration into
the building. As such, the structural properties of veneers are
neglected in veneer design. The veneer is assumed to transfer
out-of-plane loads through the anchors to the backup system.
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures Chapter
6 (ref. 1) includes requirements for design and detailing
anchored masonry veneer.
A masonry veneer with masonry backup and an air space
between the masonry wythes is commonly referred to as a
cavity wall. The continuous air space, or cavity, provides the
wall with excellent resistance to moisture penetration and
wind driven rain as well as a convenient location for insulation.
This TEK addresses concrete masonry veneer with concrete
masonry backup.
TEK 5-1B
Details
(2003)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Masonry veneers are typically composed of architectural
units such as: concrete or clay facing brick; split, fluted,
glazed, ground face or scored block; or stone veneer. Most
commonly, anchored masonry veneers have a nominal
thickness of 4 in. (102 mm), although 3 in. (76 mm) veneer
units may be available as well.
Although structural requirements for veneers are minimal,
the following design considerations should be accounted for:
crack control in the veneer, including deflection of the backup
and any horizontal supports; adequate anchor strength to
transfer applied loads; differential movement between the
veneer and backup; and water penetration resistance.
The continuous airspace behind the veneer, along with
flashing and weeps, must be detailed to collect any moisture
that may penetrate the veneer and direct it to the outside. A
minimum 1 in. (25 mm) air space between wythes is required
(ref. 1), and is considered appropriate if special precautions
are taken to keep the air space clean (such as by beveling the
mortar bed away from the cavity or by placing a board in the
cavity to catch and remove mortar droppings and fins while
they are still plastic). Otherwise, a 2 in. (51 mm) air space is
preferred. As an alternative, proprietary insulating drainage
products can be used.
Although veneer crack control measures are similar to
those for other concrete masonry wall constructions, specific
crack control recommendations have been developed for
concrete masonry veneers. These include: locating control
joints to achieve a maximum panel length to height ratio of 11/2
and a maximum spacing of 20 ft (6,100 mm), as well as where
stress concentrations occur; incorporating joint reinforcement
at 16 in. (406 mm) on center; and using Type N mortar for
maximum flexibility. See Crack Control for Concrete Brick
and Other Concrete Masonry Veneers for more detailed
information (ref. 3).
Because the two wythes in a veneer wall are designed to
be relatively independent, crack control measures should be
employed as required for each wythe. It is generally not
necessary for the vertical movement joints in the veneer wythe
to exactly align with those in the backup wythe, provided that
the ties allow differential in-plane lateral movement.
Wall ties may be joint reinforcement or wire wall ties.
124
Wall ties for veneers transfer lateral loads to the

Slope to roof
Wood nailer
structural wythe and also allow differential inwith anchor bolt
plane movement between wythes. This second
Anchor bolt
Fill solid at anchor
feature is particularly important when the two
bolt locations
wythes are of materials with different thermal
Sealant
and moisture expansion characteristics (such as
Sealant
Concrete
concrete masonry and clay brick), or in an
Cant
masonry veneer
insulated cavity wall which tends to have
Roofing membrane
differential thermal movement between the
Mesh or other
Sealant
wythes. When horizontal joint reinforcement is
grout stop device
Roofing membrane
used to tie the two wythes together, hot-dipped
Structural wythe as
ladder type reinforcement is preferred over
required by design
Notch/pocket
truss type, because the ladder shape
Joint reinforcement
accommodates differential in-plane
and wall ties at
movement and facilitates placing vertical
16 in. (406 mm)
o.c., typ.
reinforcement, grout and loose fill insulation.
Because veneers rely on the backup for
Insulation,
Steel bar joist welded or
as required
support, wall ties must be placed within 12 in.
bolted to bearing plate
(305 mm) of control joints and wall openings
to ensure the free ends of the veneer are
Bond beam
Mesh or other grout
stop device
adequately supported. More information on
ties for veneers can be found in TEK 3-6B,
Notes: Structural wythe of parapet must be a minimum of 8 in. (203 mm)
Concrete Masonry Veneers (ref. 4).
thick when empirical design is used (ref. 1). Rational design may allow a
The distance between the inside face of the
thinner wythe. Extending insulation up the full height of the parapet helps
veneer and the outside face of the masonry
prevent thermal losses through the parapet.
backup must be a minimum of 1 in. (25 mm) and
Figure 1Parapet
a maximum of 4 1/2 in.
Sealant at top of
Vapor retarder,
(114 mm). For glazed
flashing unless
per local practice
masonry veneer, beself-adhering
cause of their imperInsulation,
flashing is used or
meable nature, a 2 in.
as required
tuck flashing into
(51 mm) wide airmortar joint
space is recomAirspace, 1 in.
mended with air vents
Finish varies
(25 mm), min.
at the top and bottom
Concrete masonry
Concrete masonry
of the wall to enhance
veneer
backup
drainage and help
1 in. (25 mm) weeps at
Cavity filter or other
equalize air pressure
32 in. (813 mm) o.c.,
mortar collection
between the cavity
partially open "L"
device
and the exterior of the
shaped head joints
wall. Vents can also
be installed at the top
Drip edge
of other masonry veGrade
neer walls to provide
natural convective air
Fill solid
flow within the cavbelow flashing
ity to facilitate drying. For vented caviConcrete slab
ties, it is prudent to
create baffles in the
Waterproofing or
Protective metal
cavity at the building
dampproofing
on
flashing
foundation
corners to isolate the
cavities from each
Insulation,
Reinforcement, as
other. This helps preas required
required
Grout
vent suction being
Note: Local codes may restrict the use of foam plastic insulation below grade in areas where the
formed in the
hazard of termite damage is very heavy.
leeeward cavities.
Figure 2Foundation
125
Airspace, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.
Vapor retarder, per

local practice
Insulation, as required
Horizontal joint reinforcement at

16 in. (406 mm) o.c., typ.
Flashing
Concrete masonry backup

Concrete masonry
veneer
1 in. (25 mm) weeps at
32 in. (813 mm) o.c.,
partially open "L" shaped
head joint
Concrete masonry lintel

Finish varies
Drip edge
Ceiling support
Cavity filter or other
mortar collection device
Sealant
Backer material
Lateral support
Window frame
Finish varies
Insulated glass
Sealant and backer material

(a) Head
Window frame
Min. slope 15
Sealant
Upside down lintel
unit or solid unit
Concrete masonry
sill unit or precast
concrete sill
Flashing
Weeps 24 in.
(610 mm) o.c.
Drip edge
1 1 2 in. (38 mm) min.
Concrete masonry
veneer
Airspace, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.
Concrete masonry
backup
Vapor retarder,
per local practice
Horizontal joint
reinforcement at 16 in.
(406 mm) o.c., typ.
Insulation,
as required
(b) Sill
Figure 3Window Opening

126
Concrete
masonry veneer
Notes: In the backup wythe, the

cell adjacent to the door should
be filled solid. This is typically
accomplished by slushing
mortar into the cell as the wall is
erected. A form board, or
similar, is used at the edge of
the cavity to confine the mortar
or grout fill to the hollow metal
jamb. For larger cavities where
part of the cavity will not be
covered by the door jamb,
masonry units may be cut and
mortared into place to provide a
solid backing for the door jamb.
Insulation, as
required
Vapor retarder,
per local practice
Airspace, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.
Anchor, shape
varies in
mortar joint
Form return-cut
masonry or
pressure treated
wood blocking
Caulk
Concrete
masonry
backup
Fill solid
adjacent
to door
Caulk
Fill solid with
mortar or grout
Figure 4Metal Door Jamb

REFERENCES
1. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, 2002.
2. Annotated Design and Construction Details for Concrete Masonry, TR 90B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
3. Crack Control for Concrete Brick and Other Concrete Masonry Veneers, TEK 10-4. National Concrete Masonry Association,
2001.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

127
NCMA TEK
CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY

BANDING DETAILS
TEK 5-2A
Details
(2002)
Keywords: architectural bands, architectural details,

banding, clay brick, crack control, control joints, joint
reinforcement, veneer, wall ties
INTRODUCTION
BANDING DETAILS
Masonry is often specified because of its aesthetic

versatility. Combining masonry units of different size, color
and finish provides a virtually limitless palette. Often, exterior concrete masonry walls incorporate clay brick, or concrete masonry is used in clay brick walls as accent bands. The
bands add architectural interest to the wall and can also help
hide horizontal elements such as flashing and expansion
joints. However, combining these two materials within one
wythe of masonry requires special detailing due to their
different material properties.
In general, all masonry walls should be designed and
detailed to accommodate anticipated movement resulting
from volume changes in the masonry materials themselves.
For example, vertical control joints and horizontal joint
reinforcement can be incorporated into concrete masonry
walls to control cracking and still allow horizontal shrinkage
of the concrete masonry units to occur without introducing
undue stress into the wall. Similarly, clay masonry walls
incorporate vertical and horizontal expansion joints to allow
the clay to expand without distress. When both clay and
concrete masonry units are used in the same masonry wythe,
detailing is required to accommodate concrete masonry
shrinkage and clay masonry expansion occurring side by side.
Concrete masonry is a hydraulic cement product and as
such requires water for cement hydration, which hardens the
concrete. Therefore, concrete masonry units are relatively
wet at the time of manufacture and from that time on tend to
shrink as the units dry. Conversely, clay masonry units are
very dry subsequent to firing during the manufacturing process and then tend to expand as they pick up moisture from the
atmosphere and from mortar as they are laid. Without due
consideration of these opposing movements, cracking can
result. In veneers, the cracking is primarily an aesthetic issue,
as any water that penetrates the veneer through cracks between the two materials drains down the cavity and is directed
out of the wall via flashing and weep holes.
When detailing a wall to accommodate movement, the

design goal is to allow the movement to occur (as restraint
will cause cracking) while providing appropriate support. The
recommendations that follow are based on a record of successful performance in many locations across the United
States. These can be adjusted as needed to suit local conditions and/or experience.
In general, several strategies are used to accommodate
movement. These include movement joints (control joints in
concrete masonry and expansion joints in clay masonry);
horizontal joint reinforcement to take tension due to concrete masonry shrinkage and help keep any cracks that occur
closed; and sometimes horizontal joints to allow longitudinal
movement. In veneers, it is particularly important that the
band, as well as the wall panel above and below the band be
supported by wall ties. Wall ties should be installed within 12
in. (305 mm) of the top and bottom of the band to help ensure
the surrounding masonry is adequately supported.
In addition, using a lower compressive strength mortar
helps ensure that if cracks do occur, they occur in the mortar
joint rather than through the unit. Type N mortar is often
specified for veneers, because it tends to be more flexible
than other mortar Types.
Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Wall
Figure 1a shows a two-course high concrete masonry
band in a clay brick exterior wythe of a cavity wall. With this
type of construction, the following practices are employed to
minimize the potential for cracking.
Horizontal joint reinforcement is placed in the mortar
joints above and below the band to take stress from the
differential movement in that plane. For bands higher than
two courses, joint reinforcement should also be placed within
the band itself at a spacing of 16 in. (406 mm) on center
vertically. Ideally, the joint reinforcement and ties should be
placed in alternate joints so that one does not interfere with
128
placement of the other. Some designers,

Wall tie, within
however, prefer placing joint reinforceVapor retarder, per
12 in. (305 mm)
ment in every bed joint in the concrete
local
practice
of band
masonry band, particularly if the aspect
ratio of the band is high. In this case, a tie
Adjustable ladder
Clay brick
which accommodates both tie and wire
wall tie (hot dipped
galvanized) @ 16 in.
in the same mortar joint should be used,
(406 mm) o.c. vertical
such as a seismic clip type wall tie.
Joint reinforcement,
Although the detail in Figure 1a has
W1.7 (9 gage)
demonstrated good performance in
(MW 11) at
Closed cell rigid
many areas of the United States, there
16 in. (406 mm)
insulation, as
are locations where use of bond breaks
o.c. or equivalent
required
at the top and bottom of the band is
preferred (see Figure 1b) A local maConcrete masonry
sonry industry representative should be
Air space, 1 in.
accent band
(25 mm), min.,
contacted for further information on
2 in. (51 mm)
which detail has been more successful in
preferred
a given location.
Wall tie, within
Figure 1b shows a slip plane incor12 in. (305 mm)
porated into the interfaces between the
of band
concrete and clay masonry to allow unrestrained longitudinal movement be1awith joint reinforcement at top and bottom of band
tween the two materials. This can be
accomplished by placing building paper,
polyethylene, flashing or a similar mateWall tie, within
Vapor retarder, per
rial in the horizontal bed joints above and
12 in. (305 mm)
local
practice
below the band. When hollow masonry
of band
units are used for the band, the slip plane
Seismic clip-type
Clay brick
below the band should incorporate flashwall tie
ing, so that any water draining down the
Sealant and building
cores of the band can be directed out of
Closed cell rigid
paper or other
the wall at that point.
insulation,
as
bond
break
material
When slip planes are used, joint
required
Joint
reinforcement
reinforcement should be incorporated
into the concrete masonry band. The
Air space, 1 in.
Concrete masonry
exposed mortar joint at the top and bot(25 mm), min.,
accent
band
2 in. (51 mm),
tom of the band should be raked back and
preferred
sealed with an appropriate sealant to
prevent water penetration at these joints.
Note that this construction is typically
Wall tie, within
12 in. (305 mm)
more expensive than the detail shown in
of band
Figure 1a.
In addition to joint reinforcement,
1bwith slip planes at top and bottom of band
reduced spacing of expansion joints in
the wall is recommended to reduce the
Figure 1Multi-Course Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer
potential for cracking. Experience has
shown that vertical expansion joints in the clay masonry
reinforcement continuous through that joint. The continuous
should extend through the concrete masonry band as well, and
joint reinforcement in this location helps keep the clay brick
be placed at a maximum of 20 ft (6.1 m) along the length of
above and below the band from cracking as the concrete
the wall. Although concrete masonry construction typically
masonry shrinks.
requires control joints rather than expansion joints, control
Bands only one course high must be detailed to incorjoints should not be used in the concrete masonry band at the
porate joint reinforcement and wall ties in the joints above
expansion joint locations.
and below the band (see Figure 2).
Note that local experience may require reducing the
When concrete masonry banding is used over a wood
expansion joint spacing to 16 ft (4.9 m). If brick vertical
stud backup, similar provisions apply (see Figure 3). It is
expansion joint spacing does exceed 20 ft (6.1 m), consider
imperative that joint reinforcement be used in the concrete
placing an additional vertical movement joint through the
masonry band, even if it is not used in the surrounding clay
concrete masonry accent band near mid-panel with joint
brick masonry.
129
Wall tie, within

12 in. (305 mm)
Vapor retarder, per

local practice
Seismic clip-type
wall tie
Clay brick
of band
Concrete masonry
accent band
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at
16 in. (406 mm)
o.c. or equivalent
Wall tie, within
12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Closed cell rigid

insulation, as
required
Air space, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.,
2 in. (51 mm),
preferred
Figure 2Single-Course Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer

Wall tie, within
12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Vapor retarder, per

local practice
Clay brick
Interior finish
Sheathing
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at
16 in. (406 mm)
o.c. or equivalent
Concrete masonry
accent band
Wall tie, within

12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Building paper,
6 in. (152 mm)
min. lap
Air space, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.
Corrosion resistant
8d common nail,
or one with
equivalent pull-out
strength
Figure 3Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer Over

Wood Stud Backup
Wall tie, within
12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Concrete
masonry
Joint
reinforcement,
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at
16 in. (406 mm)
o.c. or equivalent
Clay brick
accent band
Wall tie, within
12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Vapor retarder, per

local practice
Adjustable ladder
at 16 in. (406 mm) o.c.,
as required
Closed cell rigid
insulation, as
required
Air space, 1 in.
(25 mm), min.,
2 in. (51 mm),
preferred
Clay Brick Band in

Concrete Masonry Wall
The recommendations to control
differential movement for clay brick
masonry bands in concrete masonry are
very similar to those for a concrete
masonry band in clay brick veneer: joint
reinforcement above and below the band
and wall ties within the band. Seismic
clip-type wall ties are recommended,
as they provide an adjustable wall tie and
joint reinforcement in one assembly.
With this construction, it is imperative that the veneer control joint
not contain mortar as it goes through
the clay brick band (see Figure 4). Mortar in this joint will restrict brick expansion, reducing the movement joint's
effectiveness. Note that although control joints in structural masonry walls
must permit free longitudinal movement while resisting lateral or out-ofplane shear loads, veneers are laterally
supported by the backup and do not
require a shear key.
In single wythe construction as
shown in Figure 5, flashing and weep
holes are used above the accent band to
facilitate removal of any water that may
accumulate in the wall. The use of two
reduced thickness concrete masonry
units allows flashing to be placed within
the wall without causing a complete
horizontal bond break at the flashing.
In reinforced walls (Figure 5b),
flashing and weeps are also used. On the
wall interior, rather than using reduced
thickness units, a full size unit is cut to
fit to allow adequate space for the reinforcement and grout.
Vapor retarder, per
local practice
Closed cell
rigid insulation
Air space, 1 in.
(25 mm) min.,
2 in. (51 mm),
preferred
Expansion joint
Adjustable tie
Sealant and
No mortar
backer rod
in joint
Expansion Joint Plan View for Clay Brick
(Control joint in concrete masonry is similar,
except it may contain a raked out mortar joint)
Figure 4Multi-Course Clay Brick Band in Concrete Masonry Veneer
130
Cavity filter or
other mortar
collection
device
Vertical
reinforcement,
as required
4 in. (102 mm)

thick concrete
masonry unit
4 in. (102 mm)

thick concrete
masonry unit
Flashing and
weeps at 32 in.
(813 mm) o.c.,
max.
Concrete
masonry unit,
nominal
thickness = wall
thickness - 4 in.
(102 mm)
Flashing and
weeps at 32 in.
(813 mm), max.,
between
grouted cells
Joint
reinforcement
Clay brick
accent band
Concrete
masonry unit
with one
faceshell and
part of webs
cut off to fit
Joint
reinforcement
Clay brick
accent band
(a) unreinforced wall
(b) reinforced wall
Figure 5Multi-Course Clay Brick Band in Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Wall
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

131
NCMA TEK
an information series from the authority on concrete masonry technology
CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY

BANDING DETAILS
CAN/TEK 5-2A
Details
(2003)
Addresses Canadian construction
practices, codes and standards
Keywords: architectural bands, architectural details,

banding, clay brick, crack control, control joints, joint
reinforcement, veneer, wall ties
INTRODUCTION
BANDING DETAILS
Masonry is often specified because of its aesthetic

versatility. Combining masonry units of different size, color
and finish provides a virtually limitless palette. Often, exterior concrete masonry walls incorporate clay brick, or concrete masonry is used in clay brick walls as accent bands. The
bands add architectural interest to the wall and can also help
hide horizontal elements such as flashing and expansion
joints. However, combining these two materials within one
wythe of masonry requires special detailing due to their
different material properties.
In general, all masonry walls should be designed and
detailed to accommodate anticipated movement resulting
from volume changes in the masonry materials themselves.
For example, vertical control joints and horizontal joint
reinforcement can be incorporated into concrete masonry
walls to control cracking and still allow horizontal shrinkage
of the concrete masonry units to occur without introducing
undue stress into the wall. Similarly, clay masonry walls
incorporate vertical and horizontal expansion joints to allow
the clay to expand without distress. When both clay and
concrete masonry units are used in the same masonry wythe,
detailing is required to accommodate concrete masonry
shrinkage and clay masonry expansion occurring side by side.
Concrete masonry is a hydraulic cement product and as
such requires water for cement hydration, which hardens the
concrete. Therefore, concrete masonry units are relatively
wet at the time of manufacture and from that time on tend to
shrink as the units dry. Conversely, clay masonry units are
very dry subsequent to firing during the manufacturing process and then tend to expand as they pick up moisture from the
atmosphere and from mortar as they are laid. Without due
consideration of these opposing movements, cracking can
result. In veneers, the cracking is primarily an aesthetic issue,
as any water that penetrates the veneer through cracks between the two materials drains down the cavity and is directed
out of the wall via flashing and weep holes.
When detailing a wall to accommodate movement, the

design goal is to allow the movement to occur (as restraint
will cause cracking) while providing appropriate support. The
recommendations that follow are based on a record of successful performance in many locations across the United
States and typical Canadian conditions. These can be adjusted
as needed to suit local conditions and/or experience.
In general, several strategies are used to accommodate
movement. These include movement joints (control joints in
concrete masonry and expansion joints in clay masonry);
horizontal joint reinforcement to take tension due to concrete masonry shrinkage and help keep any cracks that occur
closed; and sometimes horizontal joints to allow longitudinal
movement. In veneers, it is particularly important that the
band, as well as the wall panel above and below the band be
supported by wall ties. Wall ties should be installed within 300
mm (12 in.) of the top and bottom of the band to help ensure the
surrounding masonry is adequately supported.
In addition, using a lower compressive strength mortar
helps ensure that if cracks do occur, they occur in the mortar
joint rather than through the unit. Type N mortar is often
specified for veneers, because it tends to be more flexible
than other mortar Types.
Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Wall
Figure 1a shows a two-course high concrete masonry
band in a clay brick exterior wythe of a cavity wall. With this
type of construction, the following practices are employed to
minimize the potential for cracking.
Horizontal joint reinforcement is placed in the mortar
joints above and below the band to take stress from the
differential movement in that plane. For bands higher than
two courses, joint reinforcement should also be placed
within the band itself at a spacing of 400 mm (16 in.) on
center vertically. Ideally, the joint reinforcement and ties
should be placed in alternate joints so that one does not
132
CAN/TEK 5-2A 2003 National Concrete Masonry Association
interfere with placement of the other.

Vapor barrier, per
Wall tie, within
Some designers, however, prefer placlocal practice
300 mm (12 in.)
ing joint reinforcement in every bed
of band
Air barrier, (typical)
joint in the concrete masonry band,
particularly if the aspect ratio of the
Clay brick
band is high. In this case, a tie which
accommodates both tie and wire in the
Adjustable ladder
same mortar joint should be used, such
as a seismic clip type wall tie.
galvanized
@ 400
W1.7 (9 gage)
Although the detail in Figure 1a has
mm (16 in.) o.c.
(MW 11) at
vertical
demonstrated good performance in
400 mm (16 in.)
many areas, there are locations where use
o.c. or equivalent
Closed cell rigid
of bond breaks at the top and bottom of
insulation as
the band is preferred (see Figure 1b) A
required
Concrete masonry
local masonry industry representative
accent band
should be contacted for further informaAir space, 25 mm
tion on which detail has been more suc(1
in.), min.
cessful in a given location.
Wall tie, within
Figure 1b shows a slip plane incorpo300 mm (12 in.)
rated into the interfaces between the conof band
crete and clay masonry to allow unrestrained longitudinal movement between
1awith joint reinforcement at top and bottom of band
the two materials. This can be accomplished by placing building paper, polyethylene, flashing or a similar material in
Wall tie, within
Vapor barrier, per
the horizontal bed joints above and below
300 mm (12 in.)
local practice
of band
the band. When hollow masonry units are
Air barrier,
used for the band, the slip plane below the
Clay brick
(typical)
band should incorporate flashing, so that
any water draining down the cores of the
Sealant and building
Seismic clip-type
band can be directed out of the wall at that
paper or other bond
wall tie
point.
break material
When slip planes are used, joint
Joint reinforcement
Closed cell rigid
reinforcement should be incorporated
insulation as
into the concrete masonry band. The
required
Concrete
masonry
exposed mortar joint at the top and botaccent band
tom of the band should be raked back and
Air space, 25 mm
sealed with an appropriate sealant to
(1 in.), min.
prevent water penetration at these joints.
Wall tie, within
Note that this construction is typically
300
mm (12 in.)
more expensive than the detail shown in
of
band
Figure 1a.
In addition to joint reinforcement,
1bwith slip planes at top and bottom of band
reduced spacing of expansion joints in
the wall is recommended to reduce the
Figure 1Multi-Course Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer
potential for cracking. Experience has
shown that vertical expansion joints in the clay masonry
reinforcement continuous through that joint. The continushould extend through the concrete masonry band as well,
ous joint reinforcement in this location helps keep the clay
and be placed at a maximum of 6.1 m (20 ft) along the length
brick above and below the band from cracking as the
of the wall. Although concrete masonry construction typiconcrete masonry shrinks.
cally requires control joints rather than expansion joints,
Bands only one course high must be detailed to incorpocontrol joints should not be used in the concrete masonry
rate joint reinforcement and wall ties in the joints above and
band at the expansion joint locations.
below the band (see Figure 2).
Note that local experience may require reducing the
When concrete masonry banding is used over a wood
expansion joint spacing to 4.9 m (16 ft). If brick vertical
stud backup, similar provisions apply (see Figure 3). It is
expansion joint spacing does exceed 6.1 m (20 ft), consider
imperative that joint reinforcement be used in the concrete
placing an additional vertical movement joint through the
masonry band, even if it is not used in the surrounding clay
concrete masonry accent band near mid-panel with joint
brick masonry.
133
Wall tie, within

300 mm (12 in.)
of band
Vapor barrier, per

local practice
Clay brick
Concrete masonry
accent band
W1.7 (9 gage)
MW 11) at 400 mm
(16 in.) o.c. or
equivalent
Seismic clip-type
wall tie
Closed cell rigid
insulation as
required
Air space, 25 mm
(1 in.), min.
Wall tie, within

300 mm (12 in.)
of band
Figure 2Single-Course Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer

Sealed air/vapor
barrier, per local
practice
Wall tie, within

300 mm (12 in.)
of band
Interior finish
Clay brick
Sheathing
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at 400 mm
(16 in.) o.c. or
equivalent
Building paper,
150 mm (6 in.)
min. lap
Air space, 25 mm
(1 in.), min.
Concrete masonry
accent band
Wall tie, within
300 mm (12 in.)
of band
Corrosion resistant
8d common nail, or
one with equivalent
pull-out strength
Figure 3Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer Over

Wood Stud Backup
Wall tie, within
300 mm (12in.)
of band
Concrete masonry
Clay Brick Band in

Concrete Masonry Wall
The recommendations to control differential movement for clay brick masonry bands in concrete masonry are
very similar to those for a concrete
masonry band in clay brick veneer: joint
reinforcement above and below the band
and wall ties within the band. Seismic
clip-type wall ties are recommended,
as they provide an adjustable wall tie and
joint reinforcement in one assembly.
With this construction, it is imperative that the veneer control joint
not contain mortar as it goes through
the clay brick band (see Figure 4). Mortar in this joint will restrict brick expansion, reducing the movement joint's
effectiveness. Note that although control joints in structural masonry walls
must permit free longitudinal movement while resisting lateral or out-ofplane shear loads, veneers are laterally
supported by the backup and do not
require a shear key.
In single wythe construction as
shown in Figure 5, flashing and weep
holes are used above the accent band to
facilitate removal of any water that may
accumulate in the wall. The use of two
reduced thickness concrete masonry
units allows flashing to be placed within
the wall without causing a complete
horizontal bond break at the flashing.
In reinforced walls (Figure 5b),
flashing and weeps are also used. On the
wall interior, rather than using reduced
thickness units, a full size unit is cut to
fit to allow adequate space for the reinforcement and grout.
Vapor barrier, per

local practice
Joint
reinforcement,
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at
400 mm (16 in.)
o.c. or equivalent
Adjustable ladder
galvanized @ 400 mm
(16 in.) o.c.vertical at
400 mm (16 in.)
o.c., as required
Clay brick
accent band
Closed cell rigid

insulation as required
Wall tie, within

300 mm (12 in.)
of band
Air space, 25 mm
(1 in.), min.
Vapor barrier, per

local practice
Closed cell rigid
insulation
Air space, 25 mm
(1 in.), min.
Expansion joint
Adjustable tie
Sealant and
No mortar in joint
backer rod
Expansion Joint Plan View for Clay Brick
(Control joint in concrete masonry is similar,
except it may contain a raked out mortar joint)
Figure 4Multi-Course Clay Brick Band in Concrete Masonry Veneer

134
Cavity filter or
other mortar
collection device
Concrete masonry
unit, nominal
thickness = wall
thickness - 100 mm
(4in.)
100 mm (4in.)
thick concrete
masonry unit
Flashing and
weeps at 800
mm (32 in.)
o.c., max.
Joint
reinforcement
Vertical
reinforcement,
as required
100 mm (4 in.)
thick concrete
masonry unit
Concrete
masonry unit
with one
faceshell and
part of webs
cut off to fit
Flashing and
weeps at 800
mm (32 in.)
max., between
grouted cells
Clay brick
accent band
Joint
reinforcement
Clay brick
accent band
(a) unreinforced wall
(b) reinforced wall
Figure 5Multi-Course Clay Brick Band in Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Wall
ACKNOWLEDGMENT:
The following assisted in the development of NCMA CAN/TEK for consistency with the National Building Code of Canada.
Masonry Canada, 4628 10th Line, RR 2, Beeton, Ontario, Canada, L0G 1A0 (705) 458-9630. www.masonrycanada.ca
For additional copies of CAN/TEK contact MC or NCMA at (705) 458-9630 or (703) 713-1900, respectively
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

135
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
FOUNDATION WALL DETAILS
TEK 5-3A
Details
(2003)
Keywords: architectural details, basement wall, crawlspace

wall, foundation wall, pier, plain concrete masonry,
reinforced concrete masonry, residential details, stemwall
INTRODUCTION
Concrete masonry is used to construct various foundasulting from heaving caused by freezing of water in the soil.
tion wall types, including full basement walls, crawlspace walls,
Footings should be placed on undisturbed native soil,
stem walls and piers. Concrete masonry is well suited for below
unless this soil is unsuitable, weak or soft. In this case, the soil
grade applications, because of its strength, durability, economy,
should be removed and replaced with compacted soil, gravel or
and resistance to fire, insects and noise. The modular nature of
concrete. Similarly, tree roots, construction debris and ice
concrete masonry allows floor
plan and wall height changes
Building paper
to be easily accommodated as
Sheathing
well. Concrete masonry can be
Flashing
Floor sheathing
used to provide a strong, duDrip
edge
rable, energy efficient and inSill, pressure treated
or use moisture barrier
sect resistant foundation for all
Sealant
building types.
Anchor bolt
Fill all voids
This TEK contains details
Concrete
under flashing
masonry wall
for various types of concrete
with mortar
Grade
masonry foundation walls, with
Mesh or other
accompanying text as approgrout stop
device
priate. The reader is referred to
TEK 3-11, Concrete Masonry
Waterproof or dampproof
Basement Wall Construction,
Insulation
membrane
Concrete masony wall
TEK 19-3A, Preventing Water
Horizontal joint
Backfill
Penetration in Below-Grade
reinforcement, as
Concrete Masonry Walls and
required
Free draining
NCMA's Basement Manual for
1
2 in. (13 mm) isolation
backfill
more detailed design and conjoint
Concrete slab
struction information (refs. 2, 3,
4, respectively).
Undisturbed
Footings
Footings lie under the
basement, crawlspace or stem
wall and transfer structural
loads from the building to the
supporting soil. Footings are
typically cast-in-place concrete, placed beneath the frost
depth to prevent damage re-
Vapor retarder
soil
Aggregate base
Optional
foundation drain
Foundation
drain
Full bed joint

Concrete footing
Optional footing
drain
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 1Plain Basement Wall

136
should be removed prior to placing footings.

Unless otherwise required, footings should be carefully
aligned so that the concrete masonry wall will be near the center
line of the footing. Although the top surface of poured concrete
footings should be relatively level, it should generally not be
troweled smooth, as a slightly roughened surface enhances the
bond between the mortar and concrete. Concrete footing
design is governed by Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318 (ref. 5), and concrete foundations are
constructed with tolerances conforming to the requirements of
Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI 117 (ref. 9).
BASEMENT WALLS
Basements are typically built as conditioned space so that
they can be used for storage, work or living space. Because of
this, water penetration resistance is of paramount importance
to basement wall design and construction.
Following recommended backfill procedures will help prevent basement wall cracking during this operation. Walls
should always be properly braced to resist backfill soil loads
or have the first floor diaphragm in place prior to backfilling.
Otherwise, a wall designed to be supported at the top may crack
or even fail from overstressing the wall. Similarly, heavy equipment, such as bulldozers or cranes, should not be operated over
Flashing
Drip edge
Sealant
Fill all voids
under flashing
with mortar
Grade
the backfill during construction unless the basement walls are

appropriately designed for the higher resulting loads.
The top 4 to 8 in. (102 to 203 mm) of backfill should be low
permeability soil so rain water absorption into the backfill is
minimized. Finished grade should be sloped away from the
building.
Control joints are not typically used in foundation walls
due to concerns with waterproofing the joint and the fact that
shrinkage is less significant in below grade walls due to
relatively constant temperature and moisture conditions. If
warranted, horizontal joint reinforcement can be installed as a
crack control measure.
The foundation drain shown in Figures 1 and 2 can also be
located on the interior side of the footing, or on both sides if
necessary. The drain should be placed below the top of the
footing. The optional footing drain shown, such as 2 in. (51 mm)
PVC pipe at 8 ft (2400 mm) on center, allows water on the interior
to reach the foundation drain. Footing drains can either be cast
into the footing or constructed using plastic pipes through the
bottom of the first course of masonry, directly on top of the
footing.
For reinforced construction (Figure 2), reinforcing bars
must be properly located to be fully functional. In most cases,
vertical reinforcement is positioned towards the interior face of
below grade walls to provide the greatest resistance to soil
pressures.
A solid top course on the below grade concrete masonry wall
Building paper
spreads loads from the building
Sheathing
above and also improves soil gas
and termite resistance. Where only
Floor sheathing
the top course is to be grouted,
Sill, pressure treated or
wire mesh or another equivalent
use moisture barrier
grout stop material can be used to
contain the grout to the top course.
Anchor bolt
Note that local codes may reReinforced bond
strict
the use of foam plastic insubeam
lation
below grade in areas where
Vertical reinforcement,
the
hazard
of termite damage is high.
as required
Grout
Backfill
Concrete masonry wall
Waterproof
or dampproof
membrane
Vertical reinforcement, as required

Horizontal joint reinforcement, as
required
Isolation joint
Concrete slab
Vapor retarder
Optional foundation
drain
Foundation drain
Free draining
backfill
Undisturbed soil
Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 2Reinforced Basement Wall
Optional footing
drain
STEMWALLS FOR
CRAWLSPACES
Unlike basements, crawlspaces
are typically designed as unconditioned spaces, either vented or
unvented. Several alternate
crawlspace constructions are
shown in Figures 3 and 4.
Although most building
codes require operable louvered
vents near each corner of a crawl
space to reduce moisture buildup,
research has shown that the use
of a moisture retardant ground
cover eliminates the need for
vents in many locations (ref. 6). If
the crawlspace is vented, the
137
as required
Horizontal joint
reinforcement, as
required
Continuous band joist or

blocking, pressure treated
or use moisture barrier
Finish varies
Floor joist
Concrete masonry
wall
Reinforced bond
beam, as required
Grade
Bottom of footing
minimum 12 in.
(305 mm) below
grade or below
frost line,
whichever is
greater
Floor sheathing

Termite shield required when no
bond beam is provided below sill
Anchor bolt
Concrete masonry
stem wall
Install drain for water

removal if not higher
than adjacent exterior
grade for majority of
perimeter
Vapor retarder
Concrete footing
Bottom of footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 3Crawlspace Stemwall with Masonry Above Grade

floor, exposed pipes and ducts are typically insulated. If
unvented, either the walls or the floor above can be insulated. Unvented crawlspaces must have a floor covering to
minimize moisture and, where applicable, soil gas entry. A
vapor retarder (typically 6-mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene, PVC
or equivalent) is good practice to minimize water migration
and soil gas infiltration. A 2 1/2 in. (64 mm) concrete mud slab
is generally used when a more durable surface is desired for
access to utilities. A thicker concrete slab may be desirable,
particularly if the crawlspace will be used for storage. A
dampproof coating on the exterior crawlspace wall will also
help prevent water entry into the crawlspace.
STEMWALLS FOR SLAB ON GRADE
A stemwall with slab on gradesupports the wall above and
often also provides a brick ledge to support an exterior masonry
veneer. Figures 5 and 6 show concrete masonry stemwalls with
masonry and with frame above grade walls, respectively.
Because the wall is exposed to soil on both sides, waterproofing or dampproofing coatings are generally not required.
Stemwalls are typically insulated on the exterior of the masonry.
If insulated on the interior, it is important to place insulation in
the joint between the slab edge and the foundation wall to avoid
thermal bridging.
A stemwall with brick ledge is shown in Figure 6. For this
case, note that masonry design codes typically require a

minimum 1 in. (25 mm) clear air space between the masonry and
backup to ensure an open drainage cavity. A 1 in. (25 mm) air
space is considered appropriate if special precautions are taken
to keep the air space clean (such as by beveling the mortar bed
away from the cavity or by drawing a piece of wood up the
cavity to collect mortar droppings). Otherwise, a 2 in. (51 mm)
air space is preferred.
FOUNDATION PIERS
Foundation piers (see Figure 7) are isolated structural
elements used to support the building above. Structural design
ensures the piers are sized and spaced to carry the necessary
building loads. Piers typically are in enclosed crawlspaces, so
recommendations for moisture and soil gas resistance for
crawlspaces should be followed for piers as well. Building
Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 7) requires a
foundation pier to have a minimum nominal thickness of 8 in.
(203 mm), with a nominal height not exceeding four times its
nominal thickness and a nominal length not exceeding three
times its nominal thickness. Note that the International Building Code, (ref. 8) allows foundation piers to have a nominal
height up to ten times the nominal thickness if the pier is solidly
grouted, or four times the nominal thickness if it is not solidly
grouted.
138
Stud
Water resistant sheathing
Finish varies
Brick veneer
Wall tie
Floor sheathing
Continuous plate
Sill, pressure
treated or use
moisture barrier
1 in. (25 mm) air space, min. for drainage (note:

1 in. (25 mm) is maximum when corrugated
ties are used)
Joist
Continuous band joist or blocking

Building paper
Anchor bolt
Flashing, adhered to sheathing
Weeps at 32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
Fill solid below flashing
Termite shield,
as required
18 in. (457 mm) min.

Drain to daylight or
install drain for water
removal when below
exterior grade
Grade
Concrete masonry
Vapor retarder
Bottom of footing
minimum 12 in.
(305 mm) below
grade or below
frost line,
whichever is
greater
Bottom of footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Concrete footing
Finish varies
Exterior sheathing and

finish
Stud
Floor sheathing
Joist

Termite shield,
as required
Anchor bolt
Mesh or other grout
stop device
Grade
Isolation joint
18 in.
(457 mm)
min.
2 1 2 in. (64 mm)
concrete mud slab
Install drain for
water removal if not
higher than adjacent
exterior grade
Optional
foundation
drain
Vapor
retarder
Concrete
footing
Waterproof or dampproof
membrane
Bottom of footing
minimum 12 in.
(305 mm) below
grade or below frost
line, whichever is
greater
Bottom of footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 4Crawlspace Stemwalls with Wood Frame Above Grade

139
Concrete masonry
wall

Concrete masonry header unit
Isolation joint
Concrete slab on
grade with WWF
Concrete slab on grade with

WWF
Control joint, as required
in concrete slab
Vapor retarder
Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Bottom of footing
minumum 12 in.
(305 mm) below
grade or below
frost line,
whichever is
greater
Vapor retarder
Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 5Slab on Grade Stemwalls with Masonry Above Grade
Building paper
Flashing
Concrete slab on vapor retarder
on 4 in. (102 mm) gravel
Perimeter insulation,
as required
6 in. (152 mm)

concrete masonry
Concrete footing
Sheathing
1 in. (25 mm) air space, min. for drainage,
(note: 1 in. (25 mm) is maximum when
corrugated ties are used)
Wall ties
Drip edge
Sealant
Sill, pressure treated or use moisture barrier
Anchor bolt
Flashing (top adhered to backup)
Weeps at 32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
10 in. (254 mm)

solid concrete
masonry top course,
or grouted
Bottom of footing
minimum 12 in. (305
mm) below grade or
below frost line,
whichever is greater
Figure 6Slab on Grade Stemwall with Wood Frame Above Grade

140
Sill plate
Finish varies
Strap anchor nailed to

girder and embedded
in masonry
Sheathing
Joist hanger
Joist
Girder
Grout at strap
anchor locations
Sill, pressure
treated or use
moisture barrier
8 in. (203 mm)
nominal, min.
18 in. (457 mm)

min.
Bottom of footing
12 in. (305 mm)
below grade or
below frost line,
whichever is greater
Figure 7Concrete Masonry Foundation Pier

REFERENCES
1. Annotated Design and Construction Details for Concrete Masonry, TR 90A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
2. Concrete Masonry Basement Wall Construction, TEK 3-11. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
3. Preventing Water Penetration in Below-Grade Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-3A. National Concrete Masonry Association,
2001.
4. Basement Manual, Design and Construction Using Concrete Masonry, TR 149. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
5. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318 -02. American Concrete Institute, 2002.
6. 2001 ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.,
2001.
7. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards
8. International Building Code. International Code Council, 2000.
9. Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI 117-90. American Concrete
Institute, 1990.
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

141
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
RESIDENTIAL DETAILS
TEK 5-4B
Details
(2002)
Keywords: architectural details, energy conservation,

residential, roof/wall connections, water penetration
resistance
INTRODUCTION
Concrete masonry homes reflect the beauty and durability of
concrete masonry materials. Masonry housing provides a high standard of structural strength, design
versatility, energy efficiency, termite resistance, economy and aesthetic appeal.
A wide range of architectural
styles can be created using both
architectural concrete masonry
units and conventional units. Architectural units are available with
many finishes, ranging from the
rough-hewn look of split-face to
the polished appearance of groundface units, and can be produced in
many colors and a variety of sizes.
Concrete masonry can also be finished with brick, stucco or any number of other finish systems if desired.
Concrete masonry's mass provides many consumer benefits. It
has a high sound dampening ability, is energy efficient, fire and insect proof, durable and can easily
be designed to resist hurricaneforce winds and earthquakes.
Insulation, as
required
Roof deck
+
+
+
+
o
o
Exterior grade
sheathing (vent
as required)
Moisture barrier
Embedded strap anchor
(alternate: anchor bolt
and top plate)
Bond beam
Standard window system
Sill
Finish varies
See TEK 19-5A

for flashing details
Solid unit to support flashing
Wood backing, as required
Flashing with drip edge

Insulation
Horizontal joint reinforcement,

as required
Drainage layer
Vertical reinforcement
as required
Concrete masonry
wall
Stucco
Isolation joint
Concrete slab
Moisture barrier
Positive slope
Vapor retarder
Perimeter
insulation, as
required
WALLTYPES
Figures 1 through 3 illustrate a
few of the construction options
available for concrete masonry
home construction, some of which
are described in more detail below.
Both top plate/anchor bolt and
Concrete masonry
foundation
Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 1Stucco Exterior Finish

142
Roof system
Roof insulation
Top plate, pressure

treated or use
moisture barrier
(alternate: embedded
strap anchor)
Finish varies
Soffit
Wood backing,
as required
Furring and insulation,
as required
Sill
Vapor retarder,
as required
Solid unit to support flashing
See TEK 19-5A

for flashing details
Solid or filled unit

to support flashing
1 in. (25 mm) partially open

head joints for weeps at 32 in.
(813 mm) o.c., max. between
grouted cores
Sheathing
Wood joist
See TEK 19-2A for

flashing details
Joist hanger

Ledger, pressure treated or
Bond beam
Anchor bolt
Grade
as required
Insulation, as required
as required
Backfill
Grout, as required
Waterproof or
dampproof membrane
Isolation joint
Foundation drain
Concrete slab
Vapor retarder
Free draining
backfill
Optional foundation drain
Undisturbed soil
Optional footing drain

Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 2Exposed Concrete Masonry Exterior

143
Roof system
Roof insulation
Top plate, pressure

treated or use
moisture barrier
(alternate: embedded
strap anchor)
Finish varies
Soffit

Wood backing,
as required
Furring and insulation,

as required

as required
Vapor retarder,
as required
as required
Subfloor
Siding
Positive slope
Floor joist
Anchor bolt
Bond beam
12 in. (305 mm)

concrete
masonry wall

Install drain for water
Vapor retarder
removal if not higher
than adjacent exterior
grade for majority of
perimeter
Concrete footing
Reinforcement,
as required
Figure 3Wood or Vinyl Siding Exterior Finish

144
embedded strap anchor roof connections are shown and can

be used interchangeably, along with several foundation types.
See also TEK 5-7A Floor and Roof Connections to Concrete
Masonry Walls and TEK 5-3A Concrete Masonry Foundation
Wall Details (refs. 2, 3) for additional alternatives.
Single wythe walls offer the economy of providing structure and an architectural facade in a single building element.
They supply all of the attributes of concrete masonry construction with the thinnest possible wall section. To enhance the
performance of this wall system, two areas in particular need
careful consideration during design and constructionwater
penetration resistance and energy efficiency. Design for water
resistance is discussed in detail in References 4 through 6. A
full discussion of options for energy efficient concrete masonry walls is contained in Insulating Concrete Masonry
Walls (ref. 7).
The use of exterior finish systems lends itself to exterior
insulation. Figure 1 shows an exterior insulation system, including a water drainage plane and stucco. Stucco can also be
applied directly to the exterior block surface and used in
conjunction with integral or interior insulation. Note that local
codes may restrict the use of foam plastic insulation below
grade in areas where the hazard of termite damage is high.
Figure 2 shows a residential wall section with exposed
concrete masonry on the exterior and a furred-out and insulated
interior. Concrete masonry can be exposed on the interior as
well. In this case, integral insulation (placed in the masonry

cores) can be used as required.
Figure 3 shows exterior siding with insulation installed
between furring. Wood or vinyl siding, as shown, is typically
attached using exterior wood furring strips which have been
nailed to the masonry.
Cavity wall details are shown in TEK 5-1A Concrete
Masonry Cavity Wall Details (ref. 8).
REFERENCES
1. Annotated Design and Construction Details for Concrete
Masonry, TR 90A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
2. Floor and Roof Connections to Concrete Masonry Walls,
TEK 5-7A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
3. Concrete Masonry Foundation Wall Details, TEK 5-3A.
4. Water Repellents for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-1.
5. Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls,
TEK 19-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
6. Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-5A.
7. Insulating Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 6-11. National
8. Concrete Masonry Cavity Wall Details, TEK 5-1A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 1995.
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

145
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
on
concrete
INTEGRATING
CONCRETE MASONRY WALLS
WITH METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
masonry
technology
TEK 5-5B
Details (2011)
typical details used for exterior concrete masonry cladding on a

metal building. These details may need to be modified to meet
individual design conditions.

Because of the inherent material differences between steel
and masonry, careful consideration must be given to accommodating differential movement between the two materials
and their assemblies. In Serviceability Design Considerations
for Low-Rise Buildings (ref. 2), a lateral drift limit of H/100 for
a ten year recurrence wind loading based on main wind force
resisting system loads is suggested for low rise buildings with
exterior masonry walls reinforced vertically. See Table 12.12.1
of ASCE 7 (ref. 4) for the allowable story drift for seismic
loading. Most reinforced masonry walls for metal buildings
are designed to span vertically, supported by a steel spandrel
at the top and by the foundation at the bottom.
INTRODUCTION
Roof purlin
Eave
height

Metal buildings are used extensively for warehouses and
other structures requiring large, open floor spaces. Part of their
design flexibility comes from the ability to clad metal buildings
with a variety of materials to provide different appearances or
functions to the buildings. Concrete masonry walls are popular
enclosure systems for metal buildings because of masonry's
aesthetic appeal, impact resistance, strength, and fire resistance.
The durability of concrete masonry resists incidental impacts
from hand carts and forklifts, provides maximum protection in
disasters such as earthquakes and hurricanes, as well as superior
security, fire resistance, and noise control.

Concrete masonry walls used for metal buildings can include: exterior full-height walls, either with or without a parapet;
exterior partial-height or wainscot walls; and interior loadbearing walls or nonloadbearing walls or partitions.
Ridge
Architectural concrete masonry units, such as
colored, split faced, burnished, or scored units,
Roof System
can be used to provide an almost limitless array
Gutter
of textures and patterns to the walls. These units
can be used for the entire facade or for banding
courses to achieve specific patterns or highlight
certain design aspects of the building.

A more detailed discussion of the system,
along with structural design and construction
considerations, is included in Concrete Masonry
Walls for Metal Building Systems (ref. 1). The
CMU wall
manual is intended to bridge the gap between the Spandrel
engineer who designs the metal building system
Bracing
and the engineer who designs the concrete masonry walls to unify their respective knowledge.
DETAILS

A typical metal building clad with masonry
is shown in Figure 1. Figures 2 - 6 show some
Eave strut
Rigid frame
column
Rigid frame
an
sp
ar
e
l
C
Ba
ys
pac
ing
Sidewall
End wall frame

End wall column
End wall roof beam
End wall
End wall corner column
Figure 1Schematic of Metal Building Clad with

Concrete Masonry Walls
Keywords: anchorage, architectural details, cladding, connectors,

construction details, deflection, drift, lateral loads, lateral support,
metal building, shear walls, veneer, wall movement
NCMA TEK 5-5B
146
1
Wall Base

Because of stiffness and deforRigid frame column
Concrete masonry
mation incompatibilities between
wall
flexible steel and rigid masonry
Flashing adhered to
Extend foundation dowel 2 in.
assemblies, and consequently, to
concrete masonry
(51 mm) into grouted cell of
control the location of cracking in
wall. Tape bar above flashing
the masonry walls that may result
"Hairpin" reinforcement
to reduce bond to grout
from relatively larger steel frame
as required by design
deflections at the top of the strucMastic seal around
reinforcing bar
ture, a hinge can be incorporated
at the base of the masonry assembly
to allow out-of-plane rotation.
Continuous flashing

Two such hinge connections
with drip
are shown in Figures 2 and 3. The
construction shown in Figure 2
Column footing as
Concrete column
uses through-wall flashing to
required by design
break the bond at the base of the
wall providing a simply supported
Wall strip footing
condition allowing shear transfer
beyond
but no moment for out-of-plane
Footing
loading. In many cases the shear
reinforcement as
force can be adequately transferred
required by design
by friction through the flashed bed
joint. However, it is recommended
Figure 2Vertically Spanning Reinforced Concrete Masonry Side Wall at that a positive shear connection be
provided by extending foundaFoundation for Other than Shear Wall Segment
tion dowels across the joint. It is
recommended that the number of
bars extended across the horizontal
joint be minimized, and that the
extension be limited to 2 in.
(51 mm), to ensure that the
Rigid frame column
joint will behave as assumed.
Therefore, every vertical
Lap splice per design
bar otherwise required for
Flashing adhered to
strength at critical sections
concrete masonry
Continuous flashing
does not necessarily need to
with drip
"Hairpin" reinforcement
be extended through the joint.
as required by design
Masonry shear walls
are very strong and stiff
Foundation dowel-extend past
and are often used to resist
flashing and lap with vertical
reinforcement in masonry shear
lateral loads. However,
wall segment where required by
masonry wall sections used
design to maintain continuity and
as shear wall segments must
resist in-plane overturning forces
have vertical reinforcement
continuous into the foundaColumn footing as
tion as shown in Figure 3.
required by design
Concrete column
Flashing is also incorporated
Wall strip footing
at the floor level to allow
beyond
the wall some out-of-plane
rotation due to building drift.
Footing
Design aids are included in
reinforcement as
Concrete Masonry Walls for
required by design
Metal Building Systems (ref.
1) for in-plane and out-ofplane reinforced masonry
walls as well as for lintels
Figure 3Vertically Spanning Reinforced Concrete Masonry
and anchor bolts. Appendix
Side Wall Shear Wall Segment Detail at Foundation
C also presents design ex2
147
NCMA TEK 5-5B
amples using NCMAs popular, easy to use

Structural Masonry Design System Software
(ref. 3). As shown in Figure 4, these walls
normally span vertically and are laterally
supported by a spandrel at the top of the
masonry portion of the wall.

When the masonry is designed with a
base hinge, it is important to properly detail
the building corners to accommodate the
movements. A vertical isolation joint should
be placed near the building corner and proper
consideration should be given to the masonry
and steel connections at corner columns.
Flexible anchors and/or slotted connections
should be used.
Wainscot Walls

Although full height masonry walls
provide the most benefit particularly when the
masonry is used for shear walls, partial-height
walls, or wainscots, are sometimes used. These
walls are commonly 4 to 10 ft (1.2 to 3.0 m)
high with metal panel walls extending from the
top of the masonry to the roof. The masonry
provides strength and impact resistance for the
portion of the wall most susceptible to damage.
Rigid frame
Bond beam
Anchor bolts at 17 in.
(432 mm) o.c., or 34 in.
(864 mm) o.c. max.
Reinforced bond
beam at spandrel
Grout cell at anchor
bolt locations
Mesh to confine grout
Reinforced concrete
masonry wall
(reinforcement not
shown for clarity)
Spandrel
Note: A standardized punching of 9/16 in. (14 mm) diameter holes at 17 in.
(432 mm) centers for in. (13 mm) masonry anchors is recommended
The masonry engineer may choose to place the anchors farther apart than
17 in. (432 mm) o.c.; however, anchors should not be spaced more than 34
in. (864 mm) as this could affect lateral stability of the steel member being
connected to prevent torsional buckling (ref. 1).
Column Detail

Figure 5 shows the connection of a rigid
frame column to concrete masonry sidewalls
with a coincident vertical control joint. The
Figure 4Single Wythe Wall Without Parapet at
details show vertically adjustable column
anchors connecting the wall to the column.
Low Side Wall or Eave (see also Figure 6)
For walls designed to span vertically, it is good
practice to provide a nominal number of
anchors connecting the wall to the colRigid frame column
umn to add stiffness and strength to the
edge of the wall. If rigid enough, these
Inside flange brace as
as required by wall
anchors can assist in laterally bracing
required by metal
design
the outside column flange. For larger
building manufacturer
lateral loads, more substantial connec(typ.)
tions may be required. Anchorage to
Anchor bolt (typ.)
end wall columns is very similar.
Spandrel Detail

A typical spandrel detail is shown
in Figure 6. Spandrels should be placed
as high as possible to reduce the masonry span above the spandrel, especially
on walls with parapets. Depending on
the rigid frame configuration used, rigid
frame connection plates and diagonal
stiffeners may restrict the spandrel
location. The spandrel is designed by
the metal building manufacturer. If the
inner flange of the spandrel needs to be
braced, the metal building manufacturer
will show on the drawings where the
braces are required along with the inNCMA TEK 5-5B
Shim as
required (typ.)
Contol joint
Sash unit
Preformed gasket
Rake joint, fill with sealant
on closed-cell backer rod
Grout cell at anchor

location (typ.)
Adjustable anchors
Figure 5Adjustable Anchor Connection to Rigid Frame Column

and Control Joint Detail
148
3
formation needed for the masonry engineer to design them and

their anchorage to the wall.

Shim plates should be used at spandrel/masonry connections to allow for camber in the spandrel and other construction
tolerances (see Figure 6). The steel spandrel should never be
pulled to the masonry wall by tightening the anchor bolts.
placement; concrete masonry foundation wall construction to

grade; concrete slab placement; steel erection; and concrete
masonry wall construction. Note, however, that this sequence
may need to be modified to meet the needs of a particular
project. For example, this construction sequence changes when
loadbearing end walls are used. In this case, the steel supported
by the masonry is erected after the masonry wall is in place.

Coordination between the various trades is essential for
efficient construction. Preconstruction conferences are an excellent way for contractors and subcontractors to coordinate
construction scheduling and to avoid conflicts and delays.
CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Typically, construction of metal buildings with concrete
masonry walls proceeds as follows: concrete footing and column
Anchor bolt
Spandrel flange
21 2 in.
(64 mm)
min.

Reinforced bond beam at
spandrel. 6 in.(152 mm) min.
grout on all sides of anchor which
may require a two or more course
high bond beam as shown
Anchor bolt
Spandrel
Brace if required by metal
building manufacturer (may be
under spandrel or on top of
spandrel)
Section A-A
A
Shim plates as required

Grout cell at anchor bolt for
brace
Figure 6Structural Spandrel for Lateral Load Detail

REFERENCES
1. Concrete Masonry Walls for Metal Building Systems, TR 149A. National Concrete Masonry Association, Metal Building Manufacturers Association, International Code Council, 2011.
2. Serviceability Design Considerations for Steel Buildings, AISC Steel Design Guide #3. American Institute of Steel Construction, 2003.
3. Structural Masonry Design System Software. National Concrete Masonry Association, Western States Clay Products Association,
The Brick Industry Association, and the International Code Council, 2010.
4. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7-05. American Society for Civil Engineers, 2005.

www.ncma.org
Provided by:
149
NCMA TEK 5-5B
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
CURTAIN AND PANEL WALL DETAILS
TEK 5-6A
Details
(2001)
Keywords: architectural details, construction details, curtain

walls, high rise construction, nonbearing walls, panel walls, wall
movement, veneer
INTRODUCTION
Steel and concrete structural frames often rely on nonloadbearing masonry curtain or panel walls to enclose the structure.
Panel and curtain walls are distinguished by the fact that a panel
wall is wholly supported at each story, while a curtain wall is
supported only at its base, or at prescribed interims. Both are
designed to resist lateral wind or seismic loads and transfer
these lateral loads to the structural frame. They typically do not
carry any vertical loads other than their own weight. Curtain
and panel walls differ from anchored masonry veneer in that
veneer is continuously supported by a backup material.
Curtain and panel walls must be isolated from the frame to
prevent the unintentional transfer of structural loads and to
allow differential movement between the frame and the masonry. Anchorage between the concrete masonry and structural frame must also account for different construction tolerances for each building material.
Concrete masonry curtain and panel walls should incorporate flashing and weep holes as for other concrete masonry
construction. Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry
Walls, Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls and
Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls (refs. 3, 4 & 5)
provide detailed information.
however, to ensure proper bolt tension to avoid slipping once

positioned.
For high-rise construction, allowance should be made for
differential movement between the shelf angle and the panel
wall below due to creep of the frame and/or masonry thermal
expansion. This is accomplished by leaving an open (mortarless) space between the bottom of the shelf angle and the
masonry below or by filling the space with compressible
Anchor
bolt
Cavity filter or
other mortar
collection device
Weep holes at
32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
Shelf
angle
Rigid insulation
board
Horizontal joint
reinforcement as
required
Rigid
insulation
board
PANEL WALLS
Concrete masonry panel walls are supported at each
building story by means of concrete beams, concrete slabs or
steel members.
Supports must take into account the strains and deformations in both the concrete masonry panel wall and the structural
frame. Steel supports, often in the form of shelf angles, can be
attached to the frame either by welding or bolting, although
bolting is often preferred because slotted bolt holes permit
adjustments to be made for proper alignment with the masonry.
In addition, bolted connections are inherently more flexible
than welded connections, allowing a limited amount of movement between the masonry and the frame. Care should be taken,
Air space
Flashing
Sealant and
backer
Clearance
Vapor retarder,
per local
practice
Air space
Flashing
Cavity filter or
other mortar
collection device
Steel anchor
plate
Shelf
angle
Horizontal joint
reinforcement
as required
Weep holes at
32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
Sealant and
backer
Clearance
Vapor retarder, per
local practice
Figure 1Shelf Angle Connections to Concrete

150
Rigid
insulation
board
Concrete
column
Air space
Flashing
Dovetail
slot
Cavity filter or
other mortar
collection device
Bolted anchor,
welded to
steel beam
Dovetail
anchor
Weep holes at
32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
Adjustable
channel slot
anchor
Sealant and
backer
Shelf
angle
Clearance
Horizontal joint
reinforcement as
required
Concrete
column
Vapor retarder,
per local
practice
Figure 2Shelf Angle Connection to Steel Members

material. The joint is then sealed with caulking to prevent
moisture intrusion. The horizontal movement joint below the
shelf angle also helps prevent vertical loads from inadvertently
being transferred to the concrete masonry panel wall below the
shelf angle.
Flashing and weep holes should be installed immediately
above all shelf angles to drain moisture. In multi-wythe panel
walls, wall ties between the exterior and interior masonry
wythes should be located as close to the shelf angle as
possible. Figures 1 and 2 show steel shelf angle attachments
to concrete and steel, respectively.
CURTAIN WALLS
Concrete masonry curtain walls can be designed to span
either vertically or horizontally between supports. They can
also incorporate reinforcement to increase lateral load resistance and the required distance between lateral supports.
Anchors used to provide lateral support must be sufficiently stiff in the out-of-plane direction to transfer lateral loads
to the frame and be flexible enough in-plane to allow differential
movement between the curtain wall and the frame. In addition,
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ref. 1)
includes specific corrosion-resistance requirements to ensure
long-term integrity of the anchors, consisting of AISI Type 304
stainless steel or galvanized or epoxy coatings.
Anchors are required to be embedded at least 11/2 in. (38.1
mm) into the mortar bed when solid masonry units are used (ref.
1) to prevent failure due to mortar pullout or pushout. Because
of the magnitude of anchor loads, it is also recommended that
they be embedded in filled cores when using hollow units. As
an alternative to completely filling the masonry core, this can
be accomplished by placing a screen under the anchor and
building up 1 to 2 in. (25 to 51 mm) of mortar into the core of the
block above the anchor.
For both concrete and steel frames, the space between the
column and the masonry should be kept clear of mortar to avoid
rigidly bonding the two elements together.
Figure 3Curtain Wall Connections to

Concrete Frames
Figures 3 through 5 show curtain wall attachments to
concrete and steel frames.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
Tolerances are allowable variations, either in individual
component dimensions or in building elements such as walls
or roofs. Construction tolerances recognize that building elements cannot always be placed exactly as specified, but establish limits on how far they can vary to help ensure the finished
building will function as designed.
When using masonry with another structural system,
such as steel or concrete, construction tolerances for each
material need to be accommodated, since construction tolerances vary for different building materials.
In general, masonry must be constructed to tighter tolerances than those applicable to steel or concrete frames (refs.
2, 7). Particularly in high-rise buildings, tolerances can potentially affect anchor embedment, flashing details and available
support at the shelf angle. To help accommodate these variations in the field, the following recommendations should be
considered.
Use bolted connections with slotted holes for steel shelf
angles to allow the shelf angle location to be adjusted to meet
field conditions. Steel shims can be used to make horizontal
adjustments to the shelf angle location. Figure 6 shows an
example of a shelf angle connection which is adjustable in all
three directions. For connections like this, the bottom flange
needs to be evaluated for adequate load carrying capability
as does the beam for torsion.
When shimming shelf angles, use shims that are the full
height of the vertical leg of the shelf angle for stability.
Shimming is limited to a maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) (ref. 7).
Provide a variety of anchor lengths to allow proper embedment over the range of construction tolerances.
Use two-piece flashing to accommodate varying cavity widths.
Cut masonry units only with the permission of the architect
or engineer (this may be proposed when the frame cants
151
Fill cells of
CMU solid with
grout or mortar
Horizontal
joint reinforcement
as required
Fill cells of
CMU solid with
grout or mortar
Horizontal
joint reinforcement
as required
Steel column
Adjustable
anchor
1 in. (25 mm)
min. clearance
Steel column
Adjustable
anchor
1 in. (25 mm)
min. clearance
Notched steel
adjustable
anchor (typ)
1 in. (25 mm)
min. clearance
Preformed
rubber control
joint
Steel column
Fill cells of CMU solid

with grout or mortar
1 in. (25 mm)
min. clearance
Horizontal
joint reinforcement
as required
Fill cells of
CMU solid with
grout or mortar
Horizontal joint
reinforcement
as required
(discontinue at
control joint)
Steel column
Adjustable
anchor
Figure 4Curtain Wall Connections to Steel Columns
Horizontal joint
reinforcement
as required
1 in. (25 mm)
min. clearance
Steel angle
welded to
beam
Concrete slab
on metal decking
Steel beam
Sleeve
1 in. (25 mm)

min. clearance
Concrete slab
Horizontal joint
reinforcement
as required
Adjustable
anchor
Adjustable
anchor
Fill cell of
CMU solid with
grout or mortar
Fill cells of
CMU solid with
grout or mortar
Steel beam
1 in. (25 mm) min.

clearance
Concrete slab
Horizontal joint
reinforcement
as required
Steel angle
welded to
beam
Concrete slab
on metal decking
Steel beam
Fill head joint
solid with mortar
Strip anchor installed

in masonry head joint
(spot weld where
anchor engages beam
flange)
Figure 5Curtain Wall Connections to Steel Beams

152
towards the masonry, making the cavity between the two

materials too small).
Include instructions for handling building element misalignment in the construction documents.
Clip angle
adjustability to
maintain plumb
Adjustability
for initial
alignment
Adjustability to level
shelf angle
Fig 6Connection Adjustable in Three Directions
REFERENCES
ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 1999.
3. Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls,
TEK 19-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association,
2001.
4. Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls , TEK
5. Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 195A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000.
6. Laska, W. Masonry and Steel Detailing Handbook.
The Aberdeen Group, 1993.
7. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.,
2000.
(ref. 6, z Hanley-Wood, reproduced with permission from Hanley-Wood, LLC)
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

153
NCMA TEK
DETAILING CONCRETE MASONRY

FIRE WALLS
TEK 5-8B
Details
(2005)
Keywords: architectural details, cantilevered fire wall, construction details, double fire wall, fire walls, fire-resistance
rating, International Building Code, protected openings
INTRODUCTION
FIRE WALLS
Concrete masonry, due to its inherent durability,

reliability and superior fire resistance characteristics, is
well suited to a range of fire protection applications.
The International Building Code (IBC) (ref. 1) defines
three wall types for fire protection fire wall, fire barrier
and fire partitiondepending on the level of protection
provided for the type of occupancy and intended use. Of
the three defined fire-rated assemblies, a fire wall is
generally considered to provide the highest level of
robustness and fire safety. As such, it is intended to
provide complete separation and must be structurally stable
under fire conditions.
Generally, fire barriers and fire partitions are required
to provide the minimum protection necessary to assure that
building occupants can evacuate a structure without
suffering personal injury or loss of life. In addition to these
requirements, fire walls reduce the likelihood of fire spread
into the adjoining space, thus minimizing major property
loss. Potentially significant architectural and economic
advantages can be gained from using fire walls since each
portion of a building separated by fire walls is considered
a separate building for code compliance purposes.
Designing and detailing fire walls is a complex task with
many facets, including structural criteria, fire resistance, vertical and horizontal continuity, and criteria for protecting
openings and joints. It is beyond the scope of this TEK to
include every code provision and exception for fire wall
design for all project conditions. While much of the information in this TEK is applicable to both the IBC and the NFPA
5000 (ref. 2) building codes, the provisions are based on the
2003 IBC, so certain provisions may be different from NFPA
5000 requirements. Hence, the information may or may not
conform to local building code requirements and should be
carefully reviewed to ensure compliance. In addition, the
details shown here are not the only ones that will comply, but
are included as examples. Project-specific needs will dictate
the final detailing decisions.
By Code (ref. 1), fire walls are required to have the

minimum fire-resistance rating acceptable for the particular
occupancy or use group which they separate and must also
have protected openings and penetrations. A fire wall must
have both vertical and horizontal continuity to ensure that
the fire does not travel over, under or around the fire wall.
In addition, the wall must have sufficient structural stability
under fire conditions to remain standing for the duration of
time indicated by the fire-resistance rating even with the
collapse of construction on either side of the fire wall.
Fire-Resistance Rating
Because fire walls provide a complete separation
between adjoining spaces, each portion of the structure
separated by fire walls is considered to be a separate
building. Fire walls in all but Type V construction must be
constructed of approved noncombustible materials. Table
1 shows minimum required fire-resistance ratings.
Information on determining the fire-resistance ratings of
concrete masonry assemblies is contained in Fire Resistance
Rating of Concrete Masonry Assemblies, TEK 7-1A and
Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete
and Masonry Construction Assemblies (refs. 3, 4).
Table 1Required Fire Wall
Fire-Resistance Ratings (ref. 1)
Group
Fire-resistance rating, hr
A, B, E, H-4, I, R-1, R-2, U
3A
B
F-1, H-3 , H-5, M, S-1
3
H-1, H-2
4B
F-2, S-2, R-3, R-4
2
A
Walls shall not be less than 2-hour fire-resistance rated
where separating buildings of Type II or V construction.
B
For Group H-1, H-2 or H-3 buildings, also see IBC
Sections 415.4 and 415.5
154
Protected Openings and Penetrations

The IBC states that fire walls must have closures such
as fire doors or shutters which automatically activate to
secure the opening in the event of a fire. Further, openings
in fire walls are restricted to a maximum size of 120 ft2
(11.2 m2). An exception permits larger openings provided
both buildings separated by the fire wall are equipped
throughout with automatic sprinkler systems. In all cases,
the aggregate width of all openings at any floor level is
limited to 25 percent of the wall length.
Through-penetrations in fire walls must utilize either
fire-resistance-rated assemblies or a firestop system which
is tested in accordance with either ASTM E 814 (ref. 5) or
UL 1479 (ref. 6). The annular space between steel, iron or
copper pipes or steel conduits and surrounding concrete
masonry fire walls may be filled with concrete, grout or
mortar for the thickness required to provide a fire-resistance
rating equivalent to the fire-resistance rating of the wall
penetrated. In addition, the penetrating item is limited to a
6-in. (152-mm) nominal diameter and the opening is limited
to 144 in.2 (92,900 mm2). Openings for steel electrical
outlet boxes are permitted provided they meet the Codespecified requirements.
Combustible members, such as wood, are permitted to
be framed into concrete masonry fire walls provided that,
when framed on both sides of the wall, there is at least 4 in.
(102 mm) between the embedded ends of the wood framing.
The full thickness of the fire wall 4 in. (102 mm) above and
below, as well as in between, the combustible member
must be filled with noncombustible materials approved for
fireblocking.
Voids created at the junction of walls and floor/ceiling/
roof assemblies must be protected from fire passage by
using fire-resistant joint systems tested in accordance with
ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 (refs. 7, 8). Control joints in fire
walls must have fire-resistance ratings equal to or exceeding
the required rating of the wall. Recommendations for
locating and spacing control joints in concrete masonry
walls also apply to concrete masonry fire walls. Control
Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 10-2B (ref. 9)
includes control joint spacing criteria and illustrates control
joint details for various fire-resistance ratings.
Vertical and Horizontal Continuity
The IBC mandates vertical continuity of a fire wall by
requiring that the wall extend continuously from the
foundation to a termination point at least 30 in. (762 mm)
above both adjacent roofs. Exceptions permitting the fire
wall termination at the underside of the roof deck or slab
are listed in the Code. These exceptions require the use of
Class B roof coverings (minimum), no openings within 4 ft
(1.22 m) of the fire wall and other criteria for roof assembly
protection. Buildings located over parking garages and
stepped buildings are subject to additional requirements
and permitted exceptions.
Horizontal continuity limits the spread of fire around
the ends of a fire wall. The IBC requires that fire walls be
continuous from exterior wall to exterior wall and that they
extend at least 18 in. (457 mm) beyond the exterior surface

of exterior walls. As with the vertical continuity
requirements, there are criteria for terminating the fire wall
at the interior surface of an exterior wall based on the types
and fire-resistance ratings of the intersecting wall
constructions and on the presence of an automatic sprinkler
system installed per Code requirements.
Structural Stability Under Fire Conditions
While concrete masonry remains structurally stable
during the extreme temperatures experienced under fire
conditions, steel framing undergoes a reduction in strength
as the surrounding temperature and duration of exposure
are increased. This decreased structural capacity is
evidenced by a dramatic increase in the deflection and
twisting of steel members. Wood framing may burn,
collapse, shrink and/or deform under fire exposure and it
too loses its load-carrying capability. For these reasons,
concrete masonry fire walls should be designed and detailed
to withstand any loading imposed by fire-compromised
framing systems or detailed so that those loads are not
imparted to the fire wall during a fire. This is perhaps the
most difficult detailing provision in fire wall design.
DETAILING CONSIDERATIONS FOR
STRUCTURAL STABILITY
Because most fire wall criteria relating to fire-resistance
rating, protected openings and penetrations, and vertical
and horizontal continuity are prescriptive, the designers
primary challenge when engineering and detailing a concrete
masonry fire wall relates to maintaining the structural
Grout
Vertical
reinforcement
anchored
in
foundation
Joint
reinforcement,
as required
Concrete
masonry
fire
wall
Concrete
masonry
pilaster
Figure 1Freestanding or Cantilevered

Fire Wall with Pilaster
155
stability of the wall under fire conditions.

There are various methods of designing, detailing and
constructing fire walls for structural stability during a fire.
Among the systems recommended for use as fire walls are:
(a) cantilevered or freestanding walls, (b) laterally supported
and tied walls, and (c) double wall construction.
Cantilevered or Freestanding Walls
Cantilevered walls (Figure 1) do not depend on the
roof framing for structural support. The wall is cantilevered
from the foundation by grouting and reinforcing, or by
prestressing. Freestanding walls may also be designed to
span horizontally between pilasters or masonry columns
integral to the wall.
It can be difficult to design a cantilevered single wythe
loadbearing fire wall. Thermal stresses may cause
deformation in steel or wood joists or framing systems
which can eccentrically load the top of the fire wall.
Designing the wall to remain stable under that loading
condition may be difficult especially for tall or slender
walls. For this reason, cantilevered single wythe fire walls
are often designed as nonbearing walls with the primary
roof framing system running parallel to the fire wall.
Column lines on either side of the wall support the roof
framing. Details for cantilevered/freestanding fire walls
are similar to those for laterally supported walls (shown in
Figures 2, 3 and 4) with the
exception that cantilevered walls
do not include through-wall ties or
break-away connectors.
due to the collapse of the structure on one side of the fire

wall are resisted by the structural framework on the other
side of the wall. Adequate clearance, as listed in Table 2,
between the framing and the concrete masonry fire wall is
necessary to allow framing expansion or deformation without exerting undue pressure on the wall.
Laterally supported fire walls may utilize break-away
connectors manufactured with metals having melting points
lower than structural steel (generally about 800 F (427
C)), so that, in the event of fire, the connectors on the fire
side of the wall will give way before those on the non-fire
side. In Figures 2 and 3, the structural diaphragm on the
side of the wall opposite the fire provides the stability. The
connections between the roof and wall must be designed to
resist these forces. If the diaphragms occur at different
elevations, the wall must be designed to withstand the
anticipated flexural forces that will be generated as well.
Figure 4 shows a laterally supported fire wall with
combustible framing supported by metal joist hangers.
Joist hanger manufacturers may have alternate details as
well. Note that there may be code limitations on the use of
combustible framing.
Figure 5 shows design and detailing options for tied
fire walls. Tied fire walls are a type of laterally supported
fire wall where the roof structure is not supported by the
fire wall, but rather by the roof structure on the other side
Parapet
Fire stop material
(not shown for
clarity) between and
around ends of joists
Laterally Supported or Tied

Walls
Laterally supported or tied
walls rely on the building frame for
lateral stability. The fire wall is
laterally supported on each side by
the framing system. As such, forces
Noncombustible
roof deck with
Class B roof
covering 2
Bond beam
Table 2Minimum Clearance

Between Structural Steel and
Fire Wall (ref . 10)
Length of bay
perpendicular
to fire wall
ft. (m)
2 0 (6.1)
2 5 (7.6)
3 0 (9.1)
3 5 (10.7)
4 0 (12.2)
4 5 (13.7)
5 0 (15.2)
5 5 (16.8)
> 60 (18.3)
Minimum
clearance X
between wall
and steel,
in. (cm)
2 1/2 (6.4)
3 1/4 (8.3)
3 3/4 (9.5)
4 1/2 (11.4)
5 (12.7)
5 3/4 (14.6)
6 1/4 (15.9)
7 (17.8)
7 1/2 (19.1)
Concrete masonry
unit rated for fire
exposure reinforced
as required
Steel bar joist each side
Notes:
1. Joists may be aligned if bond beam width permits proper installation of firestop
material between joist ends. Stagger joists (as shown) as necessary.
2. 30 in. (762 mm) parapet is required unless all conditions are met: a) roof deck is
noncombustible; b) roof covering is Class B (minimum); and c) no openings
within 4 ft (1.22 m) of fire wall.
3. Top chord bearing wood joists similar.
Figure 2Laterally Supported Loadbearing Fire Wall
156
of the fire wall, thus the two roof

structures are tied together across the
fire wall. Figure 5a illustrates one
choice for a double column detail
which uses a through-wall tie to
connect the primary steel on both sides
of the fire wall. In this detail, the
primary roof framing steel is parallel
to the fire wall and supported on
fireproofed columns. One column is
used on each side of the fire wall to
support the roof system for that
building. Both steel columns and
primary support beams/trusses should
be aligned vertically and horizontally
with the columns and beams/trusses
on the opposite side of the wall and
should be fireproofed. If the primary
steel is not parallel to the fire wall
Figure 5b shows a through-wall tie
which can be used.
As an alternative to using two steel
columns, Figure 5c shows one steel
support column encased entirely within
the concrete masonry fire wall. Fire
protection requirements for steel
columns are included in Steel Column
Fire Protection, TEK 7-6 (ref. 11).
This system creates a single column
line tied at the top of the wall to
horizontal roof framing. Detailing the
connection of the steel beams to the
concrete masonry fire wall varies based
on the framing layout, but the wall
must be supported at the top and the
connection must be fire protected.
Double Wall Fire Wall
Double wall construction (Figure
6) is generally easy to design and detail
for loadbearing conditions, especially
for taller walls. It utilizes two
independent concrete masonry walls
side by side, each meeting the required
fire-resistance rating. In the event one
wall is pulled down due to fire, the
other wall remains intact, preventing
fire spread. Floor and roof connections
to each fire wall are the same as for
conventional concrete masonry
construction. These walls are often
cantilevered or freestanding but may
be tied or laterally supported as well if
so detailed and designed. This system
is also easy to use when a building
addition requires a fire wall between
the existing structure and the new
construction.
Grout, as
required
Break-away
connector each side
"X" each side

see Table 2
Vertical
reinforcement,
as required
Steel bar joist
Steel column
each side
Concrete masonry
fire wall
Note: If detailed without breakaway connectors, fire wall would be nonloadbearing

freestanding or cantilevered.
Figure 3Laterally Supported Nonloadbearing Fire Wall
Parapet
Fill full thickness of
fire wall 4 in. (102
mm) above, below
and between wood
members with
noncombustible fire
blocking
Concrete masonry
rated for fire
exposure, reinforced
as required
Joist hangers bolted
to concrete masonry
Note: Fire proofing (if required) not shown for clarity. Check with local building
codes for fire rating requirements on wood truss and hanger assemblies.
Figure 4Laterally Supported Loadbearing Fire Wall: Wood Framing
157
Secondary steel
Primary steel
"X" both sides,

see Table 2
Concrete masonry
fire wall
Note: Beams and columns

require fireproofing, not
shown for clarity.
Figure 5aDouble Column Method, Through-Wall Tie Detail: Primary Steel Parallel to Fire Wall
Concrete masonry
fire wall
"X" both sides,

see Table 2
Steel beam
Angle clip, weld

to beam
Angle clip,
weld to beam
Steel beam
A
Section A - A
Provide
clearance
Note: Beams and columns require fireproofing, not shown for clarity.
Figure 5bDouble Column Method, Through-Wall Tie Detail: Primary Steel Perpendicular to Fire Wall
Masonry encases
steel per building
code
30 in. (762 mm) min.

concrete masonry parapet
Steel beam framing into

cross beam supported on
steel column
Steel column
encased in fire
wall
Section A - A
Concrete slab
Concrete masonry fire wall
Figure 5cSingle Column Method

Figure 5Tied Fire Walls (ref. 10)
158
REFERENCES
Sheet metal coping cap with
1. International Building Code 2003.
continous cleat each side
International Code Council, 2003.
Attachment strip
2. Building Construction and Safety Code
Wood nailer
2003 Edition, NFPA 5000. National Fire
Counter flashing
anchored to
one wall
Protection Association, 2003.
Grout cores solid at anchor
3. Fire Resistance Rating of Concrete
bolts and reinforcement
Masonry Assemblies, NCMA TEK 7-1A.
National Concrete Masonry Association,
Sealant
2003.
Bond
Cant
4. Standard Method for Determining Fire
beam
Parapet flashing
Resistance of Concrete and Masonry
Construction Assemblies, ACI 216.1-97/
TMS 0216-97. American Concrete Institute
and The Masonry Society, 1997.
5. Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of
90 hook
Through-Penetration Fire Stops, ASTM E
814-02. ASTM International, 2002.
6. Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Firestops, UL 1479. Underwriters
Steel bar joist welded
Grout stop if wall
Laboratory, 2003.
or bolted to bearing
below not grouted
plate
7. Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive
Joint Systems, ASTM E 1966-01. ASTM
Figure 6Double Fire Wall
8. Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint
Systems, UL 2079. Underwriters Laboratory, 2004
9. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsEmpirical Method, NCMA TEK 10-2B. National Concrete Masonry
Association, 2005.
10. Criteria for Maximum Foreseeable Loss Fire Walls and Space Separation, Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-22.
Factory Mutual Insurance Company, 2000.
11. Steel Column Fire Protection, NCMA TEK 7-6. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

159
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
CORNER DETAILS
TEK 5-9A
Details
(2004)
Keywords: architectural details, construction details,

corners, modular coordination, unit shapes
INTRODUCTION
A building's corners are typically constructed first, then
the remaining wall section is filled in. Because they guide the
construction of the rest of the wall, building the corners
requires special care. It is essential that the corner be built as
shown on the foundation or floor plan to maintain modular
dimensions.
For maximum construction efficiency and economy,
concrete masonry elements should be designed and constructed
with modular coordination in mind. Corners, however, present
unique situations, because the actual widths of standard units
are 3 5/8, 5 5/8, 7 5/8, 9 5/8 and 115/8 in. (92, 143, 194, 244 and
295 mm). In order to maintain an 8-in. (203-mm) module,
special corner details have been developed to accommodate
most typical situations.
Bay window or 8 in.

(203 mm) 45 angle
45 Outside corner unit
Figures 2 through 6 show how corners can be constructed

to minimize cutting of units while maintaining modularity of
the construction. Vertical steel, while not always required, is
often used at corner intersections.
UNITS
Unlike stretcher units, units used in corner construction
have square ends (see Figure 1). In addition, all-purpose or
kerf units are available, with two closely spaced webs in the
center that allow the unit to be easily split on the jobsite,
facilitating corner construction. Other special units may also
be available, such as bevelled-end units, forming a 45 angle
with the face of the unit, which are used to form walls
Double corner or
plain-end unit
45 Inside corner unit
All-purpose, kerf
or splitter unit
Single corner unit
Bevelled or mitered unit
Return corner unit
Figure 1Concrete Masonry Units Used for Corner Construction

160
12 in.
(305 mm)
15 5
(39 / 8in.
7m
m)
.
5 8in )
3 / mm
(92
8 in.
(203 mm)
.
5/ 8in
11 mm)
5
(29
3 5
(92 /8in
mm .
)
5/ 8in
35
(92 /8in
mm .
)
15 mm)
7
(39
35
(92 /8in
mm .
)
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
.
5 8in
7 / mm)
4
(19
15 5
(39 / 8in.
7m
m)
it to
t un
Cu
12 in.
(305 mm)
Corner return
unit
75
(19 /8in
4m .
m)
.
5 8in
3 / mm)
(92
11 5
(29 / 8in.
5m
m)
.
5 8in )
3 / mm
(92
fit
.
5 8in
7 / mm)
4
(19
15 5
(39 / 8in.
7m
m)
7 5
(19 / 8in
4m .
m)
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
Bevelled unit
Figure 2Corner Details, 4 Inch (102 mm) Walls
Cut unit to fit or use nominal

14 in. (356 mm) units
8 in.
(203 mm)
5 5
(14 / 8in
3m .
m)
13 5
(34 / 8in.
6m
m)
.
5/ 8in
)
3
1
mm
6
4
(3
.
5 8in
5 / mm)
3
(14
8 in.
(203 mm)
15
(39 /58in
7m .
(19 7 /58in m)
4m .
m)
.
5 8in
7 / mm)
4
(19
.
5/ 8in
)
15 7 mm
9
3
(
8 in. (203 mm) Wall to 8 in. (203 mm) Wall

Using Standard Units
Cut unit to fit or use nominal 14 in. (356 mm) units

15
(39 /58in.
7m
m)
10 in.
(254 mm)
7 5
(19 / 8in
4m .
m)
15 5
(39 / 8in.
7m
m)
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
.
(39
5 8in
7 / mm)
4
(19
Corner return
unit
Figure 3Corner Details, 6 Inch

(152 mm) Walls
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
7 5
(19 / 8in.
4m
m)
4 in. (102 mm)
thick half-length
unit
15 5
(39 / 8in.
7m
m)
Alternate
courses
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
.
5 in
7 / 8 m)
m
4
(19
8 in. (203 mm) Wall to 12 in. (305 mm) Wall

161
6 in.
(152 mm)
15
(39 /58in
.
7m .
5 / 8 in
m)
11 mm)
5
11
(29 5 in.
/8
(29 /5 8in.
15 mm)
5m
7
m)
(39
n.
5 8i
9 / mm)
4
(24
15
(39 /58in
.
7
9
(24 /58 in mm)
4m .
m)
.
5/ 8 in
11 mm)
5
(29
4 in.
(102 mm)
.
5 8in
/
15 mm)
7
(39
(for unreinforced corners only)

6 in.
(152 mm)
15
(39 /58in
n.
7m .
5 8i
Cut unit to fit
9 / m)
m)
or use nominal
m
4
9 /5 (24 5 8in.
14
in. (356
/
8 in
(24 .
15 mm)
Cut unit to fit
mm) units
4m
7
9
m) (3
or use nominal
14 in. (356 mm)
units
11
(29 /5 8in
5m .
m)
3 /5
(92 8in.
mm
)
6 in.
(152 mm)
15
(39 /58 in
7m .
m)
(19 7 /58in
4m .
m)
.
5 8in
/
15 mm)
7
(39
1 5 8 x 5 5 8 x 7 5 8 in.
(41 x 143 x 194 mm)
15
(39 /5 8in
7m .
m)
15
n.
5 8i
7 / mm)
4
(19
5
8 x 5 8 x 7 8 in.
(41 x 143 x 194 mm)
15
(39 /58in
7m .
m)
15
(39 /58 in
7m .
m)
Alternate
courses
.
/ in
15 mm)
7
(39
5 8
(19 7 /58in
4m .
m)
.
5 / 8 in )
11 5 mm
(29
n.
5 8i
7 / mm)
4
(19
.
5 8in
/
15 mm)
7
(39
3 5/8 x 3 5/8 x 7 5/8 in.

(92 x 92 x 194 mm)
.
5 8in
/
15 mm)
7
(39
.
5 / 8 in
)
11 5 mm
9
(2
4 in.
(102 mm)
n.
5 8i
7 / mm)
4
(19
15
(39 /58in.
7m
(19 7 /58in m)
4m .
m)
.
5 8in
3 / mm)
2
(9
15
(39 /5 8in.
7m
m)
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
(19 7 /58in
4m .
m)
Alternate
courses
.
5/ 8in
15 mm)
7
(39
.
5 8in
7 / mm)
4
(19

162
intersecting at 135 angles. The Concrete Masonry Shapes

and Sizes Directory (ref. 2) contains illustrations of additional
corner units, including those with architectural surfaces. Units
in adjacent courses overlap to form a running bond pattern at
the corner. Architectural units, such as those with split or
scored faces, are often available with the architectural finish
on two sides to accommodate corner construction.
Local manufacturers should be contacted for information
on unit availability.
CODE PROVISIONS FOR INTERSECTING WALLS

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ref. 4) stipulates three options to transfer stresses from one
wall to another at wall intersections, each requiring the
masonry to be laid in running bond. These three options are
via: running bond; steel connectors; and bond beams. Corner
construction lends itself to providing shear transfer by relying

on running bond. Running bond (defined as the placement of
masonry units such that head joints in successive courses are
horizontally offset at least one-quarter the unit length) ensures
there is sufficient unit interlock at the corner to transfer shear.
When any of these conditions are not met, the transfer of shear
forces between walls is required to be prevented.
REFERENCES
1 . Annotated Design and Construction Details for
Concrete Masonry, TR 90B. National Concrete
2 . Concrete Masonry Shapes and Sizes Directory, CM260A.
3 . Reinforced Concrete Masonry Inspector's Handbook, 4th
edition. Masonry Institute of America, 2002.
4 . Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures,ACI
530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2002.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

163
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
RADIAL WALL DETAILS
TEK 5-10A
Details
(2006)
Keywords: construction details, curved walls, projection,

radial walls, radius
Concrete masonry units are uniquely suited to distinctive aesthetically-pleasing architectural features. The almost
limitless variety of sizes, shapes, textures, colors and surface
treatments has made concrete masonry one of the most versatile and sought after building materials today. In addition, the
relatively small unit size lends itself to unique applications,
such as radial walls.
The use of concrete masonry in the design and construction
of radial walls presents a unique challenge to the design
professional. Where curved walls once were formed from
hand-hewn stone carved to fit a predetermined radius, radial
walls of concrete masonry are usually formed from rectangular
units of fixed shape and dimension. The end result is a series of
short chords rather than a smooth arc. The greater the radius,
the more closely the surface formed by the chords approaches
that of a true arc.
The curvature of these walls depends on variables such
as the length and thickness of the concrete masonry unit, the
width of the vertical head joints at the interior and exterior
wall faces and whether the units will be used as is, beveled
at the ends, or cut to conform to the desired radius.
The bond pattern also impacts the overall appearance
of a curved wall section. Curved walls laid up in stack bond
(i.e., with vertical head joints aligned) possess the geometric
properties of a regular polygon (Figure 1). Walls laid up in
running bond (with offset head joints), on the other hand,
exhibit a similar geometric configuration at the individual
courses with the exception that the ends of units in alternating
courses project out beyond the faces of the units immediately
above and below (Figure 2). These projections create a basketweave effect which may or may not contribute to the aesthetic
value of the wall.
This TEK contains information to help the designer
determine the best way to construct a curved concrete masonry
wall, based on factors such as: desired radius, unit size, mortar
joint size, projection size for running bond and the effect of
cutting the units. Note that these recommendations apply to
INTRODUCTION
A
B
Figure 1Plan View of Radial Wall Laid in

Stack Bond (Regular Polygon)
p
Figure 2Plan View of Projections in Radial Wall as a

Result of Running Bond
164
the physical limitations and geometry of constructing radial

walls. The designer must ensure any radial wall design complies
with all applicable building code requirements.
Although this TEK focuses on the construction of radial
walls using conventional concrete masonry units, note that
beveled units or other special shapes may be available to
facilitate masonry radial wall construction as well.
MINIMUM WALL RADIUS
The minimum radii for curved or circular walls constructed
of concrete masonry units is determined through iterations of
the plane rectilinear geometric formulae for regular polygons.
These equations are:
= 2 (Tan -1 [(S1 - S2)/2t])
Eqn. 1
n = /
Eqn. 2
r = Sl /(2 Tan /2)
Eqn. 3
Example
Nominal 8 x 8 x 16-in. (203 x 203 x 406-mm) concrete
masonry units are being considered for use in a circular wall.
Actual unit dimensions are 155/8 in. (397 mm) length and
75/8 in. (194 mm) width, and the exterior mortar joint is to be
3
/8 in. (9.5 mm). The width of the interior mortar joint is to be
1
/8 in. (3.2 mm). What is the smallest radius the circular wall
can be constructed to without cutting the units?
Step 1: Use Equation 1 to determine the angle .
Sl = 155/8 in. + 3/8 in. = 16 in. (406 mm)
S2 = 155/8 in. + 1/8 in. = 153/4 in. (400 mm)
t = 75/8 in. (194 mm)
= 2 (Tan -1 [(S1 - S2)/2t])
Eqn. 1
= 2 (Tan-1 [(16 - 15.75)/(2 x 7.625)])
= 2 Tan-l (0.0164)
= 1.879o
Step 2: Use Equation 2 to determine the number of units
required.
n = /
Eqn. 2
= 360/1.879o
= 191.6 units
Step 3: Adjusting n to be equal to a whole number, determine
the required angle.
n = /
Eqn. 2
192 = 360/
= 360/192
= 1.875o
Step 4: Use Equation 3 to determine the minimum wall
radius.
r = Sl /(2 Tan /2)
Eqn. 3
= 16/(2 Tan 0.9375)
= 16/0.0327
= 489 in.
= 40 ft.-9 in. (12.42 m)
Although the equations remain the same, there are several
practical methods to vary the minimum radii of curved or
circular concrete masonry walls:
Reduce the length of the units. Changing from a 16-in.
(406-mm) long unit to an 8-in. (203-mm) long unit will reduce
the minimum radius by half.
Vary the mortar joint width. An increase in the mortar

joint width at the exterior wall face, with or without a decrease
in mortar joint width at the interior wall face, reduces the
radius as well as the number of units required. Although it is
generally recommended that the width of the mortar joint at
the interior face not be less than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm), this may be
acceptable under certain circumstances.
Shorten the length of the units at the interior face. Cutting
the units is practical if stretcher units with flanged ends are
used. Cutting is less practical for double corner units with
plain ends (see Figure 3).
Projections
For a curved masonry wall laid in running bond, it may be
desirable to limit the projections of the unit corners beyond
the unit faces in the courses above and below for reasons of
aesthetics. Generally, projections of approximately 1/8 in. (3.2
mm) for nominal 8 in. (203 mm) long units and 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) for nominal 16 in. (406 mm) long units are considered
acceptable. If the wall surface is to be stuccoed or otherwise
covered, projections of 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. (13 to 19 mm) may be
acceptable. Minimizing projections to less than 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
is usually not practical because of construction tolerances.
The projection of the unit corners for the previous example
is found by using Equation 4.
p = (S1/4) Sin /2
Eqn. 4
= (16/4) Sin (0.9375)
= 0.065 in.
= 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
DESIGN TABLES
Tables 1 through 6 list the minimum radii, number of
units and length of projection for circular concrete masonry
walls, based on using either a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) or 1/2 in. (13
Stretcher unit - flanged ends
Double corner unit - plain ends

Both ends are shown cut, although cutting only one end of
each unit is also an option.
Figure 3Concrete Masonry Unit Cuts to Facilitate

Radial Wall Construction
165
Table 1Minimum Radii: 8 in. (203 mm) Long Units (Uncut)

Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1
8 in. (3.2 mm)
8 in. (203 mm), nominal
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)
/8 in. (9.5 mm) Ext. mortar joint

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
1
9.75 (2.97) 92
/16 (1.6)
15.08 (4.59) 142 1/16 (1.6)
20.33 (6.20) 192 1/32 (0.79)
25.67 (7.83) 242 1/32 (0.79)
31.08 (9.48) 293 1/32 (0.79)
in. (25 mm) Ext. mortar joint

r, ft. (m) nA
p, in. (mm)
3
6.50 (1.98) 61
/32 (2.4)
1
10.08 (3.07) 95
/16 (1.6)
13.58 (4.14) 128 1/16 (1.6)
17.17 (5.24) 162 1/32 (0.79)
20.67 (6.30) 195 1/32 (0.79)
Table 2Minimum Radii: 16 in. (406 mm) Long Units (Uncut)

Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1
in. (3.2 mm)

8
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
1
19.50 (5.95) 92
/8 (3.2)
3
30.17 (9.20) 142
/32 (2.4)
40.75(12.43) 192 1/16 (1.6)
51.33(15.66) 242 1/16 (1.6)
62.17(18.96) 293 1/16 (1.6)

r, ft. (m)
nA p, in. (mm)
7
13.08 (3.99) 61
/32 (5.6)
1
20.33 (6.20) 95
/8 (3.2)
27.42 (8.36) 128 3/32 (2.4)
34.67(10.57) 162 3/32 (2.4)
41.75(12.73) 195 1/16 (1.6)
Table 3Minimum Radii: 8 in. (203 mm) Long Cut Units (3/4 in. (19 mm) Cuts on Interior Face, One End Only)
Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1 in. (3.2 mm)
8
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
9
2.42 (0.74) 23
/32 (7.1)
3
3.83 (1.17) 36
/16 (4.8)
1
5.08 (1.55) 48
/8 (3.2)
3
6.50 (1.98) 61
/32 (2.4)
3
7.83 (2.39) 74
/32 (2.4)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
5
2.25 (0.69) 21
/16 (7.9)
3
3.42 (1.04) 32
/16 (4.8)
5
4.58 (1.40) 43
/32 (4.0)
1
5.75 (1.75) 54
/8 (3.2)
3
6.08 (1.85) 65
/32 (2.4)
Table 4Minimum Radii: 16 in. (406 mm) Long Cut Units (3/4 in. (19 mm) Cuts on Interior Face, One End Only)
Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1 in. (3.2 mm)
8
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
9
4.83 (1.47) 23
/16 (14)
7.67 (2.34) 36 11/32 (8.7)
1
10.17 (3.10) 48
/4 (6.4)
3
12.92 (3.94) 61
/16 (4.8)
3
15.67 (4.73) 74
/16 (4.8)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
4.50 (1.37) 21 19/32 (15)
6.83 (2.08) 32 13/32 (10)
5
9.17 (2.80) 43
/16 (7.9)
1
11.58 (3.53) 54
/4 (6.4)
3
13.92 (4.25) 65
/16 (4.8)
Table 5Minimum Radii: 8 in. (203 mm) Long Cut Units (3/4 in. (19 mm) Cuts Interior Face, Both Ends)
Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1 in. (3.2 mm)
8
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
7
1.50 (0.46) 14
/16 (11)
5
1.25 (0.38) 21
/16 (7.9)
7
3.00 (0.92) 28
/32 (5.6)
3
3.75 (1.14) 35
/16 (4.8)
5
4.50 (1.37) 42
/32 (4.0)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
1
1.33 (0.41) 13
/2 (13)
5
2.08 (0.63) 20
/16 (7.9)
1
2.75 (0.84) 26
/4 (6.4)
3
3.50 (1.07) 33
/16 (4.8)
5
4.25 (1.30) 40
/32 (4.0)
Table 6Minimum Radii: 16 in. (406 mm) Long Cut Units (3/4 in. (19 mm) Cuts Interior Face, Both Ends)
Ext. mortar joint
Nominal
width
1 in. (3.2 mm)
8
Nominal unit
width, in. (mm)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
12 (305)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
7
2.92 (0.89) 14
/8 (22)
19
4.42 (1.35) 21
/32 (15)
7
5.92 (1.81) 28
/16 (11)
3
7.42 (2.26) 35
/8 (9.5)
5
8.92 (2.72) 42
/16 (4.0)

r, ft. (m)
nA
p, in. (mm)
2.75 (0.84) 13 15/16 (24)
5
4.25 (1.30) 20
/8 (16)
1
5.58 (1.70) 26
/2 (13)
3
7.00 (2.14) 33
/8 (9.5)
5
8.50 (2.59) 40
/16 (4.0)
The value of n listed is for a full circle ( = 360o). For < 360o, multiply n by /360.
166
mm) wide exterior head joint. Using the larger exterior head
joint width allows for smaller radii. All tables assume that
the interior head joint width is 1/8 in. (3.2 mm). Tables 1 and
2 present this data for 8 in. (203 mm) and 16 in. (406 mm)
long units which have not been cut (as shown in Figure 3),
respectively.
Similar data for units cut as shown in Figure 3 are listed
in Tables 3 through 6.
Table 7 should be consulted when the size of the projection
is a prime consideration. These tables list the minimum radii
and number of units required to limit projections to 1/8 in. (3.2
mm) and 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) for nominal 8-in. (203 mm) and 16
in. (406 mm) long units.
Construction and unit manufacturing tolerances are such
Table 7Minimum Radii for Curved Concrete Masonry
Walls to Limit Projections
1
/8 in. (3.2 mm)

Nominal unit maximum projection
length, in. (mm) r, ft-in. (m) nA
8 (203)
5'-4" (1.63) 50
16 (406)
21'-4" (6.50) 101
A
/4 in. (6.4 mm)

maximum projection
r, ft-in. (m) nA
2'-9" (0.84) 25
10'-10" (3.30) 51
The value of n listed is for a full circle ( = 360o). For

< 360o, multiply n by /360.
that the radii provided in the Tables may vary by + 1 in. (25
mm).
NOTATIONS
n = Number of concrete masonry units to complete the arc
for the central angle . The number of units for the arc
should be a whole number.
p = for masonry laid in running bond, projection of masonry
unit corners beyond the faces of the units in the courses
above and below (see also Figure 2), in. (mm)
r = radius to the exterior face of the wall, measured to the
midpoint of a unit, in. (mm)
S1 = length of each side of the polygon forming the exterior
face of the wall (length of the unit plus the width of one
exterior mortar joint), in. (mm)
S2 = length of each side of the polygon forming the interior
face of the wall (length of the unit plus the width of one
interior mortar joint), in. (mm)
t = actual unit thickness, in. (mm)
= the angle subtended by one side of a polygon (length
of one concrete masonry unit), see AOB in Figure 1,
degrees
= central angle subtended for the complete arc of the curved
wall (equals 360o for a complete circle), degrees
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

167
NCMA TEK
RESIDENTIAL DETAILS FOR

HIGH WIND AREAS
TEK 5-11
Details
(2003)
Keywords: architectural details, construction details,

continuous load path, high winds, reinforced concrete
masonry, residential
INTRODUCTION
High winds subject buildings to large horizontal forces as
well as to significant uplift. Reinforced concrete masonry is
well suited to resist the large uplift and overturning forces due
to its relatively large mass.
High wind provisions generally apply to areas where the
design wind speed is over 100 mph (161 km/hr) and over three
second gust as defined by ASCE 7 (ref. 10). The enclosed
details represent prescriptive minimum requirements for concrete masonry buildings, based on Standard for Hurricane
Resistant Residential Construction (ref. 3).
CONTINUOUS LOAD PATH
Connections between individual building elementsroof,
walls, floors and foundationare critical to maintaining
structural continuity during a high wind event. The critical
1 No. 5 (M #16) min. at each side of opening having a

horizontal dimension greater than 6 ft (1,829 mm)
1 No. 5 (M # 16) min. at

each end of shear segments
Beams spanning
openings
1 No. 5 (M #16) min.

at each corner and at
each change in wall
direction
damage to buildings in such events typically occurs due to

uplift on the roof, resulting in the loss of crucial diaphragm
support at the top of the wall. A primary goal for buildings
subjected to high winds is to maintain a continuous load path
from the roof to the foundation. This allows wind uplift forces
on the roof to be safely distributed through the walls to the
foundation. If one part of the load path fails or is discontinuous,
building failure may occur.
Proper detailing and installation of mechanical connectors
is necessary for maintaining continuous load paths. Note that
in order for connectors to provide their rated load capacity,
they must be installed according to the manufacturers or
building code specifications. In coastal areas, corrosion
protection is especially important due to the corrosive
environment. Note that water penetration details are not
specifically highlighted in the following details. The reader is
Shear segment
2 ft (610 mm)
min.
Top course reinforced

bond beam continuous
around perimeter
Vertical wall reinforcement at 4 to 32 ft

(1,219 to 9,745 mm) o.c. depending on
wall height, design wind speed and roof
span. Footing dowel not always required.
Standard 90 hook at
each vertical bar, typ.
Footing dowels at
corners, openings wider than
6 ft (1,829 mm) and ends of
shear segments, min.
Figure 1Typical Reinforcement for High Wind Areas

168
Engineered wood roof trusses or rafters

at 24 in. (610 mm) o.c., max.
Roof sheathing
Bond beam
Standard hook extended
6 in. (152 mm) into bond beam
(min.) at each vertical wall
reinforcement, typ.
1
4 in. (6 mm) expansion joint

material and sealant
Concrete slab
Truss anchor rated for vertical

uplift and horizontal loads
perpendicular and parallel to the
wall
24 in. (610 mm)

max. overhang
Concrete masonry
wall
as required
40 bar diameter lap,
min. for Grade 40,
48 bar diameters for
Grade 60.
Grout,
as required
Reinforced concrete
footing
Ceiling height
12 max.
3 ft
(914 mm),
max. 8 ft (2,438 mm)
when top of stem wall is
tied to slab (see Figure 3)
12
Figure 2Exterior Loadbearing Wall

Horizontal reinforcement,
as required
Concrete masonry
bond beam unit with
part of interior face
shell removed

Concrete slab with 6 x 6, W 1.4 x W
1.4 (152 x 152 mm, MW 9 x MW 9)
WWF*, extending at least 10 ft (3,050
mm) into slab and at least 6 in. (152
mm) into masonry bond beam
referred to references 7 through 9 for

more information on preventing water
penetration in concrete masonry walls.
In addition to a continuously
reinforced bond beam at the top of the
wall around the entire perimeter of the
building, vertical reinforcement must
be placed throughout a wall to resist
the high uplift loads and provide
continuity, including: at corners and
wall intersections; on each side of
openings wider than 6 ft (1,829 mm); at
the ends of shear segments; and where
girders or girder trusses bear on the
concrete masonry wall (refs. 3, 4). Each
of the exterior walls on all four sides of
the building and all interior walls
designed as shear walls must have at
least one 2 ft (610 mm) minimum section
of wall identified as a shear segment to
resist the high lateral loads. Longer
shear segments are more effective and
are recommended where possible or
required by design. See Figure 1 for a
summary
of
reinforcement
requirements (ref. 3).
Reinforcement must be properly
spliced to provide load path continuity.
Using allowable stress design, a splice
length of 40 bar diameters is required
by Building Code Requirements for
Masonry Structures (ref. 1) for Grade
40 reinforcement and 48 bar diameters
for Grade 60 reinforcement. If the wall
was designed assuming Grade 40 and
Grade 60 was used for construction,
however, the 40 bar diameter lap splice
may still be used. See Steel
Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry,
TEK 12-4C (ref. 5) for standard hook
requirements.
DETAILS
8 ft (2,438 mm),
max.
Vapor retarder
* Alternate: use No. 3 minimum

at 4 ft (M# 10 at 1,219 mm) o.c.
maximum extending into slab
10 ft (3,050 mm) min. and
hooked into bond beam
Concrete footing
Reinforcement, as required
Figure 3Slab Connection for Foundation Wall 3 to 8 ft (914-2,440 mm) Above Grade
Exterior Loadbearing Wall

Figure 2 shows a typical
loadbearing wall with a floating floor
slab. Vertical reinforcement should be
placed in the center of the concrete
masonry cores to adequately resist both
positive and negative wind pressures.
Bond beam depth and minimum
horizontal reinforcement varies with
design wind velocity, ceiling height,
roof truss span and spacing of vertical
wall reinforcement.
Since wind suction forces on the
leeward side of a building can be
169
essentially as high as the pressure forces on the

windward side, limitations are placed on the
height above grade. However, if the slab is
laterally supported and tied to the concrete
masonry foundation wall as shown in Figure 3,
the foundation wall may be extended to 8 ft
(2,440 mm) above grade (ref. 3).
Roof Truss Anchor
Figure 4 shows a typical roof truss anchor
cast into the bond beam of a concrete masonry
bearing wall. The required anchor load capacity
depends on the design wind speed as well as
the roof truss span. In addition to being rated
for uplift, the anchor must be rated for horizontal
forces parallel to the wall (in-plane) and
perpendicular to the wall (out-of-plane).
Often, the direct embedded roof truss
anchor method of connecting the roof to walls
is preferred over the bolted top plate and
hurricane clip method, as it generally has greater
capacity and fewer connections. Additionally,
the nail area available for the hurricane clip is
limited by the thickness of the top plate.
Bolted Top Plate
As an alternate to the roof truss anchor, a
bolted top plate may be used for the roof to wall
connection (see Figure 5); however, anchor
bolt spacing must be reduced (24 in. (610 mm)
maximum) because the top plate is loaded in its
weak direction. The detail illustrates several
different connector types that are commonly
used to connect the truss to the top plate.
Gable End Walls
Because of their exposure, gable end walls
are more prone to damage than are hipped
roofs unless the joint at the top of the end wall and
the bottom of the gable (see Figure 6b) is laterally
supported for both inward and outward forces.
Figure 6a shows a continuous masonry
gable end wall using either a raked concrete
bond beam or a cut masonry bond beam along
the top of full height reinforced concrete
masonry gable end walls.
As an alternative, a braced gable end wall
can be constructed as shown in Figure 6b by
stopping the masonry of the gable end at the eave
height and then using conventional wood framing
to the roof diaphragm. However, unless the end
wall is properly braced to provide the necessary
lateral support as shown in Figure 6b, this results
in a weak point at the juncture of the two materials
with little capacity to resist the high lateral loads
produced by high winds. The number and
spacing of braces depends on design wind
speed, roof slope and roof span (ref. 2, 3, 6).
Direct embedded roof truss

anchor installed per
manufacturers specifications
F1
F2
Roof truss at 24 in.

(610 mm) o.c., max.
Moisture barrier
F3
Bond beam
Grout stop
Horizontal
reinforcement,
as required
Concrete
masonry wall
Note: F1, F2 and F3 are forces that must be accommodated in the design of the
roof/wall connection.
Figure 4Roof Truss Anchor
Connector (typ.)
F2
F1
F3
Oversized washer
per design, typ.
Bond beam
Connector may
be bent and
prenailed on
bottom side if
additional
nailing area is
required
Pressure treated
Southern pine
#2 or better top
plate, as
required (2 x 4
min.)
2 in. (13 mm)

anchor bolt at 18 to
24 in. (457 to 610
mm) o.c., or as
required
Note: F1, F2 and F3 are forces that must be accommodated in the design of the
roof/wall connection.
Figure 5Bolted Top Plate
170
Standard 90 hook
with lap
Maintain minimum cover
4 in. (102
mm) min.
Reinforced
cast-in-place or
cut masonry
rake beam at
roof line
2 x 4 in.
(38 x 89 mm)
min. wood
nailer with 1 2
in. (13 mm)
anchor bolts
Foundation at one-story building

or bond beam at multistory
6aContinuous Gable End Wall Reinforcement

12 in.
(305 mm) max.
8d nails at 6 in.
(152 mm) o.c.
2 x 4 (38 x 89 mm) at
32 in. (813 mm) o.c., or
as required
Facia
Soffit
Uplift strap, 100 lb.

(0.44 kN) at each
stud or per design
2 (38 mm) x ladder

framing at 24 in. (610
mm) o.c. max.
7
16 in. (11 mm) rated

structural panels, 8d
nails 6 in. ( 152 mm)
o.c. at edges, 12 in.
(305 mm) o.c. in field
1
Oversized washer
2 x 6 (38 x 140 mm),
pressure treated or use
moisture barrier
8d nails at 6 in.
(152 mm) o.c.
8 in.
(203 mm)
5 - 8d nails each
side or 5 8 in.
(16 mm) diameter
thru-bolt
2 x 6 (38 x 140 mm)

at 16 in.
(406 mm)
2 - 8d toenails into brace
o.c.
2 x 4 (38 x 89 mm) continuous nailed
1
to truss webs (one per truss)
Double 2 x 4 (38 x 89 mm) at 32 in. (813 mm)
o.c. (1 each side of stud) or as required
5 - 8d nails each side or 5 8 in.
(16 mm) diameter thru-bolt
Uplift strap, 100 lb (0.44 kN) at
each stud or as required
1
2 in. (13 mm) anchor bolt at

48 in. (1,219 mm) o.c. or
proprietary anchor
Bond beam
Note: brace can be similarly

used with a sloped beam at
the top of a masonry end
wall that terminates at the
bottom of a vaulted ceiling
(i.e., scissors truss)
Mesh or other grout

stop device
Concrete masonry wall with
vertical reinforcement as
required
Joint in gable end

wall
6bBraced Gable End Wall

Figure 6Gable End Wall Construction
171
Pressure treated 2 x 4 (38 x 89

mm) at 24 in. (610 mm) o.c., max.
Facia
Soffit
24 in. (610 mm),
max. overhang
Roof sheathing
Wood roof truss

8 in. (203 mm)
concrete rake
beam with 1 No. 5
(M #16) bar min. (4 in. (102
mm) minimum depth)
90 standard
hook

Vertical wall
reinforcement,
as required
Grout, as
required
Grout
stop location
7aSection A-A, Concrete Rake Beam With Outlooker Type Overhang
12 in. (305 mm)

max. overhang
Facia
Soffit
2 x 4 (38 x 89 mm)
at 24 in. (610 mm)
o.c. max.
2 x 4 (38 x 89 mm)
(min.) pressure
treated wood nailer
Standard hook
with lap, typ.
2 in. (13 mm) anchor bolt at 3 ft.

(1,829 mm) o.c. max or per design
Moisture barrier
Cut concrete
masonry units to match slope. Beam
height varies, 4 in. (102 mm) min.
Notch webs 2 3 4 in. (70 mm) for
reinforcement
Continuous reinforcement, 1 No. 5
(M #16) or as required
Mesh or other grout stop device
for cells not reinforced
as required
Grout, as required
A
A
Cut
masonry
rake beam
7bSection A-A, Cut Concrete Masonry Rake Beam With Ladder Type Overhang
Figure 7Gable End Wall
Gable End Wall Overhangs
Figure 7a shows a continuously reinforced cast-in-place
concrete rake beam along the top of the gable end wall. The
beam is formed over uncut block in courses successively
shortened to match the slope of the roof. A minimum of 4 in.
(102 mm) is needed from the highest projected corner of block
to the top of the beam. Reinforcement that is continuous with
the bond beam reinforcement in the side walls is placed in the
top of the beam. In this detail, an outlooker type overhang is
shown where the rake beam is constructed 31/2 in. (89 mm)
lower than the trusses so that a pressure treated 2 x 4 (38 x 89
mm) can pass over it. A ladder type overhang detail also can
be used with the concrete rake beam where the beam is
constructed to the same height as the trusses similar to that

shown for the cut masonry rake beam in Figure 7b.
Figure 7b shows a continuously reinforced cut masonry
rake beam along the top of the gable end wall. Masonry units
are cut to conform to the roof slope at the same height as the
roof trusses. A 2 3/4 in. (70 mm) deep notch is cut into the tops
of the concrete masonry webs to allow placement of
reinforcement that is continuous with the bond beam
reinforcement in the side walls. A minimum of height of 4 in.
(102 mm) is needed for the cut masonry bond beam. In this
figure, a ladder type overhang is shown. However, an outlooker
type overhang detail can be used similar to that shown for the
cast-in-place concrete rake beam in Figure 7a.
172
REFERENCES
2. The Guide to Concrete Masonry Residential Construction in High Wind Areas. Florida Concrete & Products Association, Inc.,
1997.
3. Standard for Hurricane Resistant Residential Construction, SSTD 10-99. Southern Building Code Congress International,
Inc., 1999.
4. 2000 International Building Code. International Code Council, 2000.
5. Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-4C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
6. Annotated Design and Construction Details for Concrete Masonry, TR 90B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
7. Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
8. Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
9. Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-5A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
10.Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures , ASCE 7-02. American Society of Civil Engineers,
2002.
Provided by:

www.ncma.org

173
NCMA TEK
MODULAR LAYOUT OF
CONCRETE MASONRY
Keywords: construction, construction details, dimensions,
metric, modular coordination, wall openings
TEK 5-12
Details
(2008)
(203 mm) vertically and horizontally, but may also include 4in. (102 mm) modules for some applications. These modules
provide overall design flexibility and coordination with other
building products such as windows, doors, and other similar
elements as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
INTRODUCTION
Although concrete masonry structures can be constructed
using virtually any layout dimension, for maximum construction
efficiency and economy, concrete masonry elements should
be designed and constructed with modular coordination in
mind. Modular coordination is the practice of laying out and
dimensioning structures and elements to standard lengths and
heights to accommodate modular-sized building materials.
When modular coordination is not considered during the design
phase, jobsite decisions must be madeoften in haste and
at a cost. This TEK provides recommendations for planning
masonry construction to minimize cutting of masonry units
or using nonstandard unit sizes.
When a project does require non-modular layout,
further design and construction issues need to be addressed,
including:
Placement of vertical reinforcementIn construction
containing vertical reinforcing steel, the laying of units in other
than running (half) bond or stack bond interrupts the vertical
alignment of unit cells. As a result, reinforcement placement
and adequate consolidation of grout becomes difficult, and
partial grouting of walls is virtually impossible.
Interruption of bond patternIn addition to the aesthetic
impact a change in bond pattern can create, building codes
often contain different design assumptions for masonry
constructed in running bond versus other bond patterns. Walls
incorporating more than a single bond pattern may present a
unique design situation.
Locating control jointsIn running bond, control joint
construction can be accomplished using only full and halfsize units. Similarly, stack bond construction only requires
full-size units when control joints are properly spaced and
detailed. However, with other bond patterns units may need
to be cut if specially dimensioned units are not used or are
not available.
Modular Wall Elevations
Standard concrete masonry modules are typically 8 in.
Modular Wall Openings

The rough opening dimensions illustrated in Figure 1
apply to the layout and construction of the masonry. To allow
for fastening windows and doors to the masonry, however,
the nominal heights and widths of these elements are slightly
less.
For conventional construction methods, the widths of
masonry openings for doors and windows should generally
be 4 in. (102 mm) larger than the door or window width.
This allows for 2 in. (51 mm) on each side of the opening for
framing. The heights of masonry openings to accommodate
windows are typically 8 in. (203 mm) greater than the window
height. This opening size allows for 2 in. (51 mm) above and
below for framing and 4 in. (102 mm) for installation of a sill
at the bottom of the window. Masonry openings for doors are
commonly either 2 or 4 in. (51 or 102 mm) greater than the
door height, allowing for the door framing as well as the use
of a standard-sized door.
Thus, door and window widths of 28, 36, 44, and 52 in.
(711, 914, 1,118 and 1,321 mm) (and so on in 8 in. (203 mm)
increments) do not require the masonry to be cut. Modular
window heights are any multiple of 8 in. (203 mm), with a
masonry window opening 8 in. (203 mm) greater than the
height of the window if a 4-in. (102 mm) sill will be used.
Similarly, door heights 2 in. (51 mm) less than any even
multiple of eight can be installed without the need for cutting
the masonry. For the commonly available 84-in. (2,134 mm)
high door, a 4-in. (102 mm) door buck can be placed at the
top of the opening. In addition, precast lintels are available in
some areas containing a 2 in. (51 mm) notch to accommodate
80-in. (2,032 mm) doors.
Hollow metal frames for doors should be ordered and
delivered for the masonry before the other door frames in the
project are scheduled for delivery. For economy, the frames
should be set before the walls are built. If the walls are built
before the frames are set, additional costs are incurred to set
special knock down door frames and attachments.
174
Not Recommended Construction:

Utilizing non-modular layouts or
openings results in unnecessary cutting
of the masonry units (shown here as
shaded). The end product is more
difficult to construct, produces more
waste, and is more costly compared to
a similar structure employing a modular
layout.
A d d i t i o n a l l y, p l a c i n g a n d
consolidating grout in the reduced-size
cores of the field-cut units may prove
difficult.
52 in.
(1,321 mm)
116 in.
(2,946 mm)
84 in.
(2,134 mm)
44 in.
(1,118 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
40 in.
(1,016 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
40 in.
(1,016 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
= Nonstandard or
field-cut units
In this example, it is obvious the aesthetic impact non-modular layouts have on the final appearance of a structure. Not so
obvious is the additional cost of construction. To further illustrate this concept, consider the following comparison of the
modular and non-modular layouts shown here:
Total area of non-modular layout = 122.4 ft2 (11.38 m2); 84.7 ft2 (7.87 m2) net
Total area of modular layout = 126.7 ft2 (11.77 m2); 88.9 ft2 (8.26 m2) net
Number of units used in non-modular layout = 122
Number of units used in modular layout = 110
Recommended Construction:
The wall elevation shown here
reduces the need to cut units by
utilizing modular openings and opening
locations (i.e., each dimension shown
is evenly divisible by 8 in. (203 mm).
By coordinating opening sizes and
locations, the cells of hollow masonry 48 in.
units align (which facilitates the (1,219 mm)
placement of vertical reinforcement and
consolidation of grout), labor time is
reduced and materials are not wasted.
48 in.
(1,219 mm)
120 in.
(3,048 mm)
88 in.
(2,235 mm)
32 in.
(813 mm)
40 in.
(1,016 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
40 in.
(1,016 mm)
16 in.
(406 mm)
Figure 1 Modular Wall Elevations

Modular Wall Sections
For door and window openings, the module size for
bond patterns and layout are nominal dimensions. Actual
dimensions of concrete masonry units are typically 3/8 in.
(9.5 mm) less than nominal dimensions, so that the 4 or 8-in.
(102 or 203 mm) module is maintained with 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
mortar joints. Where mortar joint thicknesses differ from 3/8
in. (9.5 mm) (as may be specified for aesthetic purposes or
with brick construction), special consideration is required to
maintain modular design. Figure 3 illustrates this concept.

Typically, concrete masonry units have nominal face
dimensions of (height by length) 8 by 16 in. (203 by 406 mm),
and are available in nominal widths ranging from 4 in. to 16
in. (102 to 406 mm) in 2-in. (51 mm) increments. In addition
to these standard sizes, other unit widths, heights and lengths
may be available from concrete masonry producers. The
designer should always check local availability of specialty
units prior to design.
175
Masonry Opening
Width = Window
Opening Width +
4 in. (102 mm)
2 in. (51 mm)

Framing
2 in. (51 mm)

Framing
2 in. (51 mm)
Framing
Masonry Opening
Height = Window
Opening Height +
8 in. (203 mm)
Masonry Opening
Width = Door
Opening Width +
4 in. (102 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
Framing
4 in.
(102 mm)
Sill Height
2 in.
(51 mm)
Framing
Masonry Opening
Height = Door
Opening Height +
2 in. (51 mm)
Window Openings
2 in. (51 mm)

Framing
2 in. (51 mm)
Framing
Door Openings
Figure 2Modular Wall Openings
8 in.
(203 mm)
8 in.
7 7 8 in.
(203 mm) (197 mm)
Wall tie
5
8 in.
(203 mm)
Wall tie
3
in.
(11 mm)
8 in.
(9.5 mm)
12
2 1 4 in.
(57 mm)
2 1 4 in.
(57 mm)
Recommended Construction:
Vertical coursing of bed joints of each wythe align.
Appropriate joint thickness selected.
Not Recommended Construction:

Misalignment of bed joints makes installation of wall ties
difficult and reduces their effectiveness in transferring
loads.
Inappropriate joint thickness selected.
May be partially compensated for by the use of adjustable
wall ties, 11/4 in. (32 mm) max. misalignment (refs. 1, 2, 3)
Figure 3Modular Wall Sections

176
Incorporating brick into a project, either as a structural

component or as a veneer, can present unique modular
coordination considerations in addition to those present with
single wythe construction. Brick most commonly have a
nominal width of 4 in. (102 mm), length varying from 8 to 16
in. (203 to 406 mm) and height from 2 1/2 to 6 in. (64 to 152
mm). The specified dimensions of modular concrete and clay
brick are typically 3 5/8 by 2 1/4 by 7 5/8 in. (92 by 57 by 194
mm), but may be available in a wide range of dimensions.
Because of their unique dimensions, concrete and clay
brick are usually laid with bed joints that are slightly larger
(or sometimes smaller depending upon the actual size of the
brick) than the standard 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) mortar joint thickness.
For example, common modular brick are laid with a 5/12 in. (11
mm) thick bed joint, thereby providing a constructed height
of 2 2/3 in. (68 mm) for one brick and one mortar joint. (Note
that a 5/12 in. (11 mm) thick bed joint is within allowable mortar
joint tolerances (refs. 1, 2).) The result is that three courses of
brick (including the mortar joints) equals one 8-in. (203 mm)
high module, thereby maintaining modular coordination (see
Figure 3).
Modular Building Layouts and Horizontal Coursing
In addition to wall elevations, sections and openings,
the overall plan dimensions of a structure also need to be
considered, especially when using units having nominal widths
other than 8 in. (203 mm).
Ideally, the nominal plan dimensions of masonry structures
should be evenly divisible by 8 in. (203 mm). This allows

constructing each course of a wall using only full-length or
half-length units, which in turn reduces labor and material
costs. In addition, maintaining an 8-in. (203 mm) module
over the length of a wall facilitates the turning of corners,
whereby half of the units from one wall interlock with half of
the units from the intersecting wall. As an alternative to cutting
units or changing building dimensions, corner block can be
used if available. These units are specifically manufactured
to turn corners without interrupting bond patterns. Concrete
Masonry Corner Details, TEK 5-9A (ref. 4) contains a variety
of alternatives for efficiently constructing corners.
Metric Coordination
One additional consideration for some projects is the
use of standard sized (inch-pound) masonry units in a metric
project. Similar to inch-pound units, masonry units produced
to metric dimensions are 10 mm (13/32 in.) less than the nominal
dimensions to provide for the mortar joints. Thus, the nominal
metric equivalent of an 8 by 8 by 16 in. unit is 200 by 200
by 400 mm (190 by 190 by 390 mm net unit dimensions).
Since inch-pound dimensioned concrete masonry units are
approximately 2% larger than hard metric units, complications
can arise if they are incorporated into a structure designed on a
100 mm (3.9 in.) metric module, or vice versa. Metric Design
Guide for Concrete Masonry Construction and TEK 3-10A,
Metric Concrete Masonry Construction (refs. 5, 6) provide
detailed guidance for incorporating soft metric units (standard
inch-pound units) into a hard metric design project.
REFERENCES
1. International Building Code. International Code Council, 2003 and 2006.
Committee, 2005.
4. Concrete Masonry Corner Details, TEK 5-9A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2004.
5. Metric Design Guide for Concrete Masonry Construction, TR-172. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000.
6. Metric Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-10A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

177
NCMA TEK
ROLLING DOOR DETAILS FOR

TEK 5-13
Details
(2007)
Keywords: construction details, door jambs, fasteners,

fire resistance, lateral loads, reinforcement, wall openings,
wind loads
INTRODUCTION
Openings in concrete masonry walls utilize lintels and
beams to carry loads above the openings. When openings incorporate rolling doors (also referred to as overhead coiling doors
or coiling doors), wind loads on the door are transferred to the
surrounding masonry through the door guides and fasteners.
In some instances, the rolling doors have been designed
for specific wind load applications, and are heavily dependent
on the structural integrity of the door jamb members as they
are attached to building walls at jamb locations. This TEK discusses the forces imposed on a surrounding concrete masonry
wall by rolling doors, and includes recommended details for
jamb construction. Lintel design, to carry the loads imposed
on the top of the opening, are covered in Allowable Stress
Design of Concrete Masonry Lintels and Precast Concrete
Lintels for Concrete Masonry Construction (refs. 1, 2).
LOADS EXERTED BY ROLLING DOORS
Architects and building designers should determine the
loads that rolling doors exert on the wall around the opening.
Dead loads include the weight of the door curtain, counterbalance, hood, operator, etc., that is supported by the wall
above the opening. Live loads result from wind that acts on
the door curtain. Rolling doors are available with windlocks,
which prevent the door curtain from leaving the guides due
to wind loading. On doors without windlocks, the only wind
load force that the curtain exerts on the guides is normal to
the opening. For doors with windlocks, there is an additional
load parallel to the opening (see Figures 1 and 2 for facemounted and jamb-mounted doors, respectively). This load
is the catenary tension that results when the curtain deflects
sufficiently to allow the windlocks to engage the windbar in
the guide. This force acts to pull the guides toward the center
of the opening. The door is exposed to a additive wind loads,
from both inside and outside the building.
Calculating the parallel force involves several variables,
the most prominent of which are the width of the opening and
the design wind load. It is also important to note that the door
must withstand both positive and negative wind loads. Including these forces in the design of the jamb and its supporting
structure can help prevent a jamb failure and allow the building
to fully withstand its specified wind load requirements. The
rolling door manufacturer can provide a guide data sheet for
quantifying the loads imposed by the overhead coiling doors
due to the design wind load.
The following conditions need to be considered:
The wall above the door opening must be designed to support
the total hanging dead load. The face of wall-mounted doors
may extend above the opening for 12 to 30 in. (305-762
mm). The door guide wall angles must be mounted to the
wall above the opening to support the door. When the door
has a hood to cover the coiled door and counter-balance,
some provision must be made to fasten the top of the hood
and hood supports to the masonry wall. See also Fasteners
for Concrete Masonry (ref.3).
Reinforcement in jambs is recommended to adequately
distribute the forces imposed by the door.
Reinforcement locations should be planned such that the
reinforcement does not interfere with expansion anchor
placement.
ACCOMMODATING MASONRY
REINFORCEMENT AND DOOR FASTENERS
Rolling door contractors and installers sometimes encounter reinforcement in walls at locations where door jamb
fasteners have been specified. Arbitrarily changing either
the reinforcement location or the fastener location is not
recommended, as either can negatively impact performance.
Changing the door manufacturer's recommended jamb fastener
locations may reduce the structural performance of the rolling
door or possibly void the fire rating.
The typical masonry jamb detail shown in Figure 3
indicates recommended vertical reinforcement locations
178
for concrete masonry jambs to provide an area for the door

fasteners. The detail shows a reinforcement-free zone to
allow for fasteners of either face-mounted or jamb-mounted
rolling doors. The Door and Access Systems Manufacturers
Association International (DASMA) recommends that vertical
reinforcement should be within 2 in. (51 mm) of either corner
of the wall at the jamb (ref. 4).
Existing Construction
Before installing fasteners in existing masonry construction, the following steps should be followed to locate the
reinforcement, to avoid interference:
If structural drawings are available, the project engineer
should review the drawings to determine whether or not
the jamb reinforcement locations conflict with the specified
door jamb fastener locations.
If the buildings structural plans are not available, either
drill representative pilot holes or use a device similar to
an electronic stud locator to determine the steel reinforcement locations.
Once the steel reinforcement has been located, if it is
concluded that the reinforcement will interfere with installing
jamb fasteners, DASMA recommends that one of the following courses of action be taken:
1. Consider an alternate door jamb mounting or door size
to assure that the reinforcement will not interfere with jamb
fasteners.
Force
F1
A
Force
F3
2. If an alternate door jamb mounting or alternate door size

cannot be accomplished, consult a structural engineer to determine a workable solution. One possible solution is to contact
the door manufacturer to obtain an alternate conforming hole
pattern for the mounting, which would not interfere with the
existing reinforcement. Another solution may be to bolt a steel
angle to the concrete masonry jambs, which allows the door
guides to then be welded or bolted to the steel angle.
FIRE-RATED ROLLING DOOR CONNECTIONS
When installed in a fire-rated concrete masonry wall,
rolling steel fire doors must meet the code-required fire rating
corresponding to the fire rating of the surrounding wall. For
fire testing, the doors are mounted on the jambs of a concrete
masonry wall intended to replicate field construction. The fire
door guides must remain securely fastened to the jambs and
no through gaps may occur in the door assembly during the
test.
Figure 4 shows a representative jamb construction and
guide attachment details for a four-hour fire rated assembly.
Note that guide configurations and approved jamb construction will vary with individual fire door manufacturer's listings.
Consult with individual manufacturers for specific guide details
and approved jamb constructions.
Force
F5
Door opening
Door opening
Load Direction 1
Curtain
Force
F2
Force
F3
Load Direction 1
Curtain
Force
F2
C
Force
F1
Load Direction 2
Force
F4
(a) Without windlock

C
A
Force
F2
(a) Without windlock

Force
F5
Door opening
Force
F1
Windbar
Load Direction 2
Load Direction 1
Curtain
Force F3
Windlock
Load Direction 2
(b) With windlock

Figure 1Imposed Forces for Face-Mounted Doors
(ref. 5)
Door opening
Force
F3
B
C
Force
F1
Force
F2
Windlock
Force
F4
Windbar
Load Direction 1
Curtain
Load Direction 2
(b) With windlock

Figure 2Imposed Forces for Jamb-Mounted Doors
(ref. 5)
179
2 in. (51 mm) A

max. clearance
Vertical
reinforcement
Grout-filled
cell
Alternate
jamb-mounted
door
Thickness
varies
2 in. (51 mm) A

max. clearance
Face-mounted door
Note that a minimum amount of masonry cover over reinforcing bars is required (refs. 6, 7) to protect against steel corrosion. For masonry exposed to weather or earth, this minimum cover is 11/2 in. (38 mm) for No. 5 (M#16) bars and smaller,
and 2 in. (51 mm) for bars larger than No. 5 (M#16). However, DASMA recommends a maximum distance of 2 in. (51 mm)
from the face of the masonry to the reinforcing bar (ref. 4) in order to provide the largest possible clear area for fastener
installation. See Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry (ref. 9) for more detailed information on placing reinforcement
in concrete masonry.
Figure 3Typical Masonry Jamb Detail for Face-Mounted and Alternate Jamb-Mounted Rolling Doors (ref. 4)
2 in. (51 mm) A
max. clearance
Grout-filled cell
2 in. (51 mm)

max. clearance
2 in. (51 mm) A

max. clearance
A
Note that a minimum amount of masonry cover over reinforcing bars is required (refs. 6, 7) to protect against steel corrosion. For masonry exposed to weather or earth, this minimum cover is 11/2 in. (38 mm) for No. 5 (M#16) bars and smaller,
and 2 in. (51 mm) for bars larger than No. 5 (M#16). However, DASMA recommends a maximum distance of 2 in. (51 mm)
from the face of the masonry to the reinforcing bar (ref. 4) in order to provide the largest possible clear area for fastener
installation. See Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry (ref. 9) for more detailed information on placing reinforcement
in concrete masonry.
B
Note: Underwriters Laboratories has approved the welded guide details ONLY AS SHOWN. FM Approvals (Factory Mutual) does not allow guides to be welded to steel jambs.
Figure 4Approved Jamb Construction for Maximum 4-Hour Fire Rating (ref. 8)B
180
REFERENCES
1. Allowable Stress Design of Concrete Masonry Lintels, TEK 17-1B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
2. Precast Concrete Lintels for Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 17-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2000.
3. Fasteners for Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-5. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
4. Metal Coiling Type Door Jamb Construction: Steel Reinforcement In Masonry Walls, TDS-259. Door and Access Systems
Manufacturers Association International, 2005.
5. Architects and Designers Should Understand Loads Exerted By Overhead Coiling Doors, TDS-251. Door and Access Systems
Manufacturers Association International, 2005.
8. Common Jamb Construction for Rolling Steel Fire Doors: Masonry ConstructionBolted and Welded Guides, TDS-261.
Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International, 2005.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

181
NCMA TEK
CONCRETE MASONRY
HURRICANE AND TORNADO SHELTERS
Keywords: construction details, high winds, hurricane,
impact, reinforced masonry, storm shelters, testing, tornado
INTRODUCTION
Extreme windstorms, such as hurricanes and tornadoes,
can pose a serious threat to buildings and their occupants in
many parts of the country. Hurricanes and tornadoes produce
wind pressures and generate flying debris at much higher levels
than those used to design most commercial and residential
buildings. Hence, these storms require residents to either
evacuate the area or seek protection in dedicated shelters.
Storm shelters are buildings, or parts of buildings, that are
designed and built specifically to provide a highly protected
space where community members or occupants can seek refuge
during these events.
The newly-developed standard ICC-500, Standard on the
Design and Construction of Storm Shelters (ref. 1), provides
design and construction requirements for hurricane and tornado
shelters. The standard covers structural design requirements
for these shelters, as well as requirements for ventilation,
lighting, sanitation, egress and fire safety.
ICC-500 covers both hurricane and tornado shelters, and
includes requirements for two types of shelters: community
shelters, buildings specifically dedicated to provide shelter
during a storm; and residential shelters, which are typically
reinforced rooms within a home, where the occupants can
safely seek refuge during a hurricane or tornado.
Prior to the publication of ICC-500, builders and homeowners seeking storm shelter guidance have used the FEMA
320 publication Taking Shelter From the Storm: Building a
Safe Room Inside Your House, the FEMA 361 publication
Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters,
and the NCMA publication Concrete Masonry Tornado Safe
Rooms (refs. 2, 3, 6). Research performed at the Texas Tech
University Wind Science and Engineering Research Center
(ref. 4), however, found that the FEMA recommendations were
overly conservative for concrete masonry for impact resistance.
Concrete masonry walls have been tested to withstand the
ICC-500 criteria, resulting in more economical wall designs
than those previously recommended by FEMA.
TEK 5-11, Residential Details for High-Wind Areas (ref.
TEK 5-14
Details (2008)
5), provides prescriptive requirements for reinforced concrete

masonry homes in hurricane-prone areas, based primarily on
providing a continuous load path from roof to foundation.
These are general residential details, and do not address storm
shelters. In contrast, the requirements described in this TEK
apply only to dedicated shelters, or to shelter areas within a
home, meant to provide temporary protection during a storm.
Concrete masonry walls capable of meeting the ICC-500
requirements are presented, as well as the results of impact
testing on concrete masonry walls. Note that this TEK does
not address all requirements of ICC-500.
ICC-500 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA FOR SAFE
ROOM WALLS AND FLOORS
General design considerations for storm shelters include:
adequate wall and roof anchorage to resist overturning and
uplift,
walls and ceiling, as well as openings such as doors and
windows, must withstand design wind pressures and resist
penetration by windborne objects and falling debris, and
connections between building elements must be strong
enough to resist the design wind loads. Figure 2 shows a
typical detail for connecting a concrete roof slab to concrete
masonry shelter walls, using reinforcing bars to provide
adequate load transfer.
ICC-500 defines design tornado wind speeds across the
United States, and hurricane design wind speeds for applicable
coastal areas. When the shelter is to provide shelter from both
hurricanes and tornadoes, the most restrictive of the two design
criteria should be used for design. The reader is referred to
the standard (ref. 1) for maps defining these speeds. Note that
wind speeds in ICC-500 are much higher than wind speeds in
ASCE-7 (ref. 7) or the International Building Code (refs. 8,
9), and are considered to provide the maximum or ultimate
tornado or hurricane design wind speed at a site. Therefore,
the wind load contribution in the load combinations is adjusted
accordingly. For example, 1.0W rather than 1.6 W is used
as the factored wind load in strength design combinations.
In allowable stress design, 0.6W is used instead of W. Wind
pressures are to be based on exposure C, although exposure
B is permitted if it exists for all wind directions.
182
In addition to being designed for these design wind

speeds, shelter walls and ceilings must be able to withstand
impact from flying debris, whose projectile speed varies with
the design wind speed.
The ICC-500 design criteria vary with location. The
concrete masonry walls tested at Texas Tech were tested at
the most stringent of the ICC-500 wind speeds and impact
requirements, as follows. For tornado shelters, the highest
design wind speed prescribed by ICC-500 is 250 mph (402
km/h). Corresponding walls and ceilings must withstand
impact from a 15 lb (6.8 kg) wooden 2 x 4, propelled at 100
mph (161 km/h) and 67 mph (108 km/h), respectively.
These conditions will more than satisfy the less stringent
requirements for hurricane shelters. For hurricane shelters,
the highest design wind speed in ICC-500 is 237 mph (381
km/h) (with the exception of Guam, which has a design
hurricane wind speed of 256 mph (412 km/h)). In addition,
walls subject to this 237 mph (381 km/h) design wind speed
must be capable of withstanding impact from a 9 lb (4.1 kg)
wooden 2 x 4 propelled at 100 mph (161 km/h). Ceilings and
other horizontal surfaces must withstand impact from the same
projectile propelled a 25 mph (40 km/h).
In addition to these requirements, ICC-500 defines requirements for tie-down to the foundation and adequate foundation
sizing to resist the design overturning and uplift forces.
CONCRETE MASONRY ASSEMBLIES FOR

STORM SHELTERS
A typical concrete masonry storm shelter design is
shown in Figure 1. Several concrete masonry systems have
been successfully tested to withstand the 15 lb (6.8 kg) 2 x
4 propelled at 100 mph (161 km/h) (ref. 4). Solidly grouted
8-in. (203-mm) concrete masonry walls with No. 5 (M #16)
reinforcement at 48 in. (1,219 mm) o.c., with one horizontal
No. 5 (M#16) min. at the top of the wall and in the footing or
bottom of the wall, can withstand these conditions. All weight
classes of concrete masonry meet the strength and impactresistance requirements. The engineer will use the masonry
weight in the shelter design to resist overturning. Regardless
of the concrete masonry density, the weight of the grouted
masonry assembly provides increased overturning resistance
compared to low-mass systems.
Although solidly grouted 6-in. (152-mm) concrete masonry walls with No. 4 (M #13) bars at 32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
successfully passed the impact test, they may not have enough
weight to resist overturning for the most severe tornado loading, based on a 250 mph (402 km/h) wind speed. Hence, the
details included in this TEK show 8-in. (203-mm) storm shelter
walls. Solidly grouted 6-in. (152-mm) walls may be adequate
for lower wind requirements, however.
A ceiling system using 7-in. (178-mm) deep bottom chord
bearing steel joists infilled with concrete masonry units and
Impact rated door max. size 3 ft (914 mm)
(door may swing in or out)
Tee anchorage
four per jamb
6ft to 8 ft (1.83 to 2.44 m)

is optimum for stability
6 ft to 8 ft (1.83 to 2.44 m)
is optimum for stability
1 ft 6 in.
(457 mm)
No. 5 (M #16)
vertical
reinforcement
at 48 in.
(1,219 mm)
o.c., max.
3 ft
(914 mm)
Grout solid (typ.)

Reinforced lintel above
door w/one No. 5 (M #16)
16 ga. metal
door frame
8 in.
(203 mm)
CMU, min.
Grout all cells solid
Note: The total height of the shelter (from the top of the floor slab to the top of the ceiling slab) should not exceed 8 ft
(2.44 m) to reduce vulnerability to overturning.
Figure 1Plan View of Typical Concrete Masonry Storm Shelter
183
grout to a nominal 8-in. (203-mm) depth was also tested and

found to withstand the 15 lb (6.8 kg) 2 x 4 at 67 mph (108
km/h) protocol (ref. 4). No. 4 (M #13) reinforcing bars were
placed perpendicular to the joists, at 8 in. (203 mm) o.c.
Note that all assemblies were successfully tested using
standard masonry grout per ASTM C 476 (ref. 10). Some
previous references recommend the use of concrete to fill
the masonry cores, rather than grout, but this is contrary
to the building code and is highly discouraged.
RESIDENTIAL SHELTERS
The purpose of an in-home shelter is to provide an area
where the occupants can safely shelter during a high wind
event. In flood prone areas, the shelter must not be built
where it can be flooded. The shelter should be accessible
from all areas of the house and should be free of clutter to
provide immediate shelter. If not within the residence, the
shelter needs to be within 150 ft (45.72 m) of the residence
(ref. 1). FEMA (ref. 2) suggests a basement, an interior room
on the first floor on a foundation extending to the ground or
on top of a concrete slab-on-grade foundation or garage floor
as good locations for an in-home shelter.
Below-ground safe rooms provide the greatest protection,
as long as they are designed to remain dry during the heavy
rains that often accompany severe windstorms. When shelters
are located below grade, the soil surrounding the walls can
be considered as protection from flying debris during a high
wind event, as long as the wall is completely below grade and
soil extends at least 3 ft (914 mm) away from the wall, with
a slope no greater than two inches per foot (167 mm/m) for
that 3 ft (914 mm) distance. When these conditions are met,
the walls do not need to meet the missile impact requirements
described above. Below-grade ceilings must have a minimum of 12-in. (305-mm) of soil cover to be exempt from
the impact testing requirements.
Sections of either interior or exterior residence walls that
are used as walls of the safe room must be separated from
the structure of the residence so that failure of the residence,
which is designed for a much lower loading, will not result
in a failure of the safe room.
Residential Retrofit
Special consideration must be given when retrofitting a
shelter into an existing home. Figures 3 through 5 illustrate
typical details for connecting shelter elements to an existing
basement wall.
The results of recent testing (ref. 4) has improved the
economy of constructing retrofits. Previously, a concrete masonry
storm shelter would have required a large dedicated foundation.
Research confirms, however, that considering the weight of fully
grouted concrete masonry, a large foundation is not required to
adequately resist the uplift and overturning forces.
Accordingly, ICC-500 allows concrete masonry storm
shelters to be constructed within one and two family dwellings
on existing slabs on grade without a dedicated foundation,
under the following conditions:
the calculated soil pressure under the slab supporting the
Do not attach shelter ceiling

to floor or ceiling above
4 in.
(102 mm)
No. 4 (M #13)
bar at 16 in.
(406 mm) o.c.
min.
Concrete ceiling No.4 (M #13)
bar at 16 in. (406 mm) o.c. each
way, min.
8 in. (203 mm)
CMU wall,
solid grouted
with one No. 5
(M #16)
at 48 in.
(1,219 mm)
o.c. min.
Two No. 4 (M #13) or

one No. 5 (M #16)
continuous in bond beam
Figure 2Typical Shelter Wall/Ceiling Connection
Existing
reinforced 8 in.
(203 mm)
masonry
basement wall,
min. with soil the
full height of the
shelter
New masonry
shelter walls (see
Figures 4 and 5)
Figure 3Retrofit Shelter: Plan View
No. 4 (M #13)
reinforcing bar
epoxied into floor
slab at all corners
and each side of
doorway, min.
31 2 in. (89 mm) min.

thickness existing
slab-on-grade w/
6 x 6 W1.1 x W1.4
A
WWF, min.
CL
8 in. (203 mm)

solid grouted
CMU min.
with 4 in. (102
mm) cast-in-place
roof.
Splice per code
This slab reinforcement is not required when the slab

dead load is not required to resist overturning.
Figure 4Retrofit Shelter: Direct-Dowel to
Existing Slab
184
storm shelter walls does not exceed 2,000 psf (95.8 kPa) for
design loads other than the design storm events and 3,000 psf
(143.6 kPa) for design storm shelter events,
at a minimum, the storm shelter is anchored to the slab at
each corner of the structure and on each side of the doorway
opening (see Figure 4), and
the ICC-500 slab reinforcement requirements are waived
if the slab dead load is not required to resist overturning.
Epoxy No. 4 (M #13)

dowel at 16 in. (406 mm)
o.c., min.
Existing
reinforced 8 in.
(203 mm)
masonry wall
COMMUNITY SHELTERS
Requirements for community shelters are similar to those
for residential, but require a larger area and additional features
in anticipation of sheltering more people. For example, community storm shelters require: signage to direct occupants to
storm shelter areas; wall, floor and ceiling assemblies with a
minimum 2-hour fire resistance rating; as well as additional
ventilation and sanitation facilities.
Development length
Figure 5Retrofit Shelter: New Wall/Existing Wall
Connection
REFERENCES
1. Standard on the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters, ICC-500. International Code Council and National Storm
Shelter Association, 2008.
2. Taking Shelter From the Storm: Building a Safe Room Inside Your House, FEMA 320. Federal Emergency Management
Agency, 2004.
3. Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters, FEMA 361. Federal Emergency Management Agency, 2000.
4. Investigation of Wind Projectile Resistance of Concrete Masonry Walls and Ceiling Panels with Wide Spaced reinforcement
for Above Ground Shelters, NCMA Publication MR 21. Texas Tech University Wind Science and Engineering Research
Center, 2003.
5. Residential Details for High-Wind Areas, TEK 5-11. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2003.
6. Concrete Masonry Tornado Safe Rooms, TR 200. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
7. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7-02 and ASCE 7-05. American Society of Civil Engineers, 2002 and 2005.
10. Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry, ASTM C 476-07. ASTM International, Inc., 2007.
Provided by:
www.ncma.org

185
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
on
concrete
DETAILS FOR HALF-HIGH

INTRODUCTION
Concrete masonry offers numerous functional advantages,
such as structural load bearing, life and property protection,
durability and low maintenance. Half-high concrete masonry
units offer the additional advantages of a veneer-like appearance
in economical single wythe construction. As for all concrete
masonry units, integrally colored half-high brick-like units
provide enduring strength and lasting resistance to fire and
wind while maintaining a virtually maintenance-free faade.
These attributes are appealing for both new construction and
renovations in historic districts.
Many designers are turning to half-high masonry because
of its economy. As an alternative to a traditional cavity wall,
these walls offer the same finished appearance, exterior durability and low maintenance coupled with a shorter construction
time because of the single wythe loadbearing design. This TEK
describes the use of half-high units for single wythe masonry
construction. For veneer applications, see Refs. 1 and 2.
HALF-HIGH UNITS
Half-high concrete masonry units are produced to the same
quality standards as other concrete masonry units. ASTM C
90 (ref. 3) governs physical requirements such as minimum
compressive strength, minimum face shell and web thicknesses,
finish and appearance, and dimensional tolerances.
Like other concrete masonry units, half-highs are produced
in a variety of sizes, unit configurations, colors and surface
textures. In addition, special shapes, such as corners and bond
beam units are also available.
WALL PERFORMANCE
Structural design considerations for half-high construction
are virtually the same as those for conventional concrete masonry
units. One aspect that may be different for half-high units is the unit
strength. Typical nonarchitectural concrete masonry units have a
minimum unit strength of 1,900 psi (13.10 MPa), corresponding
to a specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm, of 1,500 psi
(10.34 MPa). Half-high and other architectural units, however,
are typically manufactured to a higher unit strength. Designers
should check with producers about the strength of locally available
Related TEK:
3-8A, 5-7A, 19-2A
NCMA TEK 5-15
masonry
technology
TEK 5-15
Details (2010)
units, with the intent of taking advantage of these higher strengths

in their designs when available.
Section properties for half-high units are essentially the
same as for full-height units, and the same design aids can be
used for both (see Ref. 4). In addition, because the core sizes
are also typically the same as for full-height units of the same
thickness, considerations for maximum reinforcing bar size as
a percentage of the cell area are the same as well. See Ref. 5
for more detailed information.
Because there are more horizontal mortar joints in a wall
constructed using half-high units, there is slightly less concrete
web area in the wall overall. Although this theoretically reduces
the wall weight, in practice the wall weights of walls constructed
using half-high units are within 1 psf (0.05 kPa) of those for
full height units (see Ref. 6).
To facilitate the construction of bond beams, half-high
bond beam units are typically available with depressed webs to
accommodate horizontal reinforcement. Grouting two half-high
units provides an 8-in. (203-mm) deep bond beam, as shown in
Figures 1 through 3. Note that the bottom unit of the bond beam
should have depressed webs to accommodate the horizontal
reinforcement, but the top unit need not have depressed webs.
Single Wythe Half-High Construction

in Hartland, Wisconsin
Keywords: bond beam, construction details, flashing, reinforced concrete masonry,

single wythe construction, water penetration resistance
1
186
Performance criteria for fire resistance , energy efficiency

and acoustics of half-high units can be considered to be the
same as for similar full height units. See Refs. 7 through 11 for
further information. In addition, detailing window openings,
door openings, etc., is the same as for single wythe masonry
walls constructed using full-height units.
pocket in the masonry wall or by joist hangers, Figure 4 shows

a unique application where half-high units have been corbelled
out to provide bearing for a wood truss floor. This also provides
continuous non-combustible bearing thickness without the need
to stagger the joists. See Ref. 12 for additional floor and roof
connection details.
As for any single wythe construction, particular care should
CONSTRUCTION
be taken to prevent water from entering the building nterior. Dry
Construction with half-highs is very similar to that for conwalls are attained when both the design and construction address
ventional units. Some differences include: an increased number of
water movement into, through and out of the wall. Considerations
courses laid per wall height, greater amount of mortar needed, as
include potential sources of water, unit and mortar characteristics,
well as the difference in bond beam construction noted above. Crack
crack control, workmanship, mortar joint tooling, flashing and
control considerations are the same as for full height units.
weeps, sealants, and water repellents. For single wythe masonry,
As an alternative to supporting trusses by means of a
an integral water repellent in both the units and mortar, as well
as a compatible post-applied
surface water repellent are
Proprietary flashing and weep system
recommended. See Refs. 13
-18 for more information.
Reinforcement and grout, as required
Figure 1 shows a proJoint reinforcement at 16 in. (406 mm) o.c.
prietary flashing system that
collects and directs water to
Flashing and weeps in ungrouted
the exterior of the wall and
cores over bond beams
out weep holes, without compromising the bond at mortar
8-in. (203-mm) high bond beam:
joints in the face shells (see
two units high
Ref. 15 for recommended
both courses fully grouted
flashing locations). There
reinforcement, as required
are a number of generic and
reduced webs for bottom unit:
proprietary flashing, drain.
1 / 2 in
8 in.
age, weep, mortar dropping
3
.
3 in
control, and rain screen
in.
2
3 in.
systems available. Single
31/2 in.
wythe flashing details using
conventional flashing are
Mesh or other grout stop
included in Ref. 14.
device
Bearing plate detail*
Solid grouted single
Post-applied surface water
wythe walls tend to be less
repellent
susceptible than ungrouted
* Steel bar joists welded or bolted to bearing plate
or partially grouted walls to
moisture penetration, since
Figure 1Bearing Detail on Single Wythe Wall (ref. 19)
8-in. (203-mm) half-high unit*
Strap anchor at 2 ft (610 mm)
o.c. (for lateral support)

Strap anchor at 2 ft (610 mm)
o.c. (for lateral support)

Through-wall flashing with
stainless steel drip edge, weeps
at 32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
10-in. (254-mm) half-high units*
grouted to form bond beam
Mesh or other
grout stop device
repellent
Through-wall flashing with

stainless steel drip edge, weeps
at 32 in. (813 mm) o.c.
8-in. (203-mm) half-high units*
grouted to form bond beam
Mesh or other
grout stop device
repellent
* integral water repellent in units & mortar

Figure 2Exterior Loadbearing Wall With Wood Truss Floor (ref. 19)
2
NCMA TEK 5-15
187
Flashing
2 in. (51 mm) high soap
unit
2 in. (51 mm) concrete
topping
Precast planks
4-in. (102-mm) half-high
units*
Rigid insulation
8-in. (203-mm) halfhigh*
Bearing pad, min.

3 in. (76 mm)
bearing
"%!2).'0!$
v-)."%!2).'
Wallboard
channel
v$7#
Post-applied surface
water repellent
Gypsumvwallboard
$297!,,
* integral water repellent in units & mortar
Exterior Nonloadbearing Wall Detail Precast Hollow Core Flooring

Representative
R-values*, with:
2 in. (51 mm) extruded
polystyrene =
R 13.2 h.ft2.oF/Btu
(2.3 m2.K/W)
voids and cavities where moisture can collect

are absent. As a result, solid grouted walls
do not require flashing and weeps, although
they do require other moisture control provisions, such as sealants and water repellents.
For partially grouted walls, flashing should
be placed in ungrouted cells.
REFERENCES
1. Concrete Masonry Veneers, TEK 3-6B.
2. Crack Control for Concrete Brick and
other Concrete Masonry Veneers, TEK
10-4. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
3. Standard Specification for Loadbearing
Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C 9006b. ASTM International, Inc., 2006.
Flashing
2 in. (51 mm) high soap unit

2 in. (51 mm) concrete topping
2 in. (63 mm)

polyisocyanurate =
R 19.5 h.ft2.oF/Btu
(3.4 m2.K/W)
21/2 in. (63 mm)
polyisocyanurate =
R 22.9 h.ft2.oF/Btu
(4.0 m2.K/W)
10-in. (254-mm) precast planks

4-in. (102-mm) half-high units,
integral water repellent in units
and mortar
1
/2 in. (13 mm) rigid insulation
Bearing pad, 3 in.
(76 mm)
min. bearing
5-v"%!2).'
1
1- /2 in. (38 mm)

* Based on insulation
7#
channel
for
R-values of 10, 14.4
,%#2/5'().
electrical
rough-in
and 17.8, respectively
(plus a reflective air
Gypsum
wallboard
297!,,
space for the polyisocyanurate). Check with
Rigid4(%2-!87)4(
insulation with
your
manufacturer,
joints
taped,
as required
34!0%$
as R-values may vary
slightly.
Post-applied surface

units, grouted to form bond
beam, integral water repellent
in units and mortar
Mesh or other grout stop device
8-in. (203-mm) half-high units,
integral water repellent in units
and mortar
/#/#534/-
water
repellent
.293%!,%2
Vapor retarder,
as required
Generic or proprietary throughwall flashing in ungrouted cells
Note that loadbearing corbels are required to be designed (ref. 20).

Figure 3Exterior Wall With Precast Hollow Core Plank Floor (ref. 19)
NCMA TEK 5-15
188
6-in. (152-mm) CMU

11/2 in. (38 mm) channel
for electrical rough-in
Gypsum wallboard
Note: loadbearing corbels are required to be designed (ref. 20).
Figure 4Interior Bearing Wall With Top Chord

Bearing Wood Truss Floor (ref. 19)
REFERENCES (continued)
4. Section Properties of Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 14-1B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
6. Concrete Masonry Wall Weights, TEK 14-13B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
7. Fire Resistance Ratings of Concrete Masonry Assemblies, TEK 7-1C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2009.
8. R-Values for Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 6-2B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2009.
9. Sound Transmission Class Ratings for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 13-1B. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
10. Noise Control With Concrete Masonry, TEK 13-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
11. Outside-Inside Transmission Class of Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 13-4. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
12.Floor and Roof Connections to Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 5-7A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
13.Water Repellents for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-1. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2006.
14. Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
15. Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
16. Flashing Details for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-5A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
17. Joint Sealants for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-6. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
18. Characteristics of Concrete Masonry Units With Integral Water Repellents, TEK 19-7. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
19. Intelligent Design, Half-High Architectural CMU. Illinois Concrete Products Association.

www.ncma.org
Provided by:
NCMA TEK 5-15
189
An
information
series
from
the
national
authority
AESTHETIC DESIGN WITH

CONCRETE MASONRY
INTRODUCTION

One aspect of concrete masonry that has kept it at the
forefront of building materials is its ability to incorporate
and reflect a broad spectrum of existing architectural
styles, as well as providing the designer with the ability
to develop and present unique aesthetic affects and techniques. When skillfully designed, simple materials can
provide unparalleled aesthetic enhancement. Inventive
patterns, color choices (unit and mortar), unit sizes, and
surface finishes (split face and standard) can be used in
various concrete masonry bond patterns to evoke a sense
of strength, modernity, tradition, or even whimsy.
Within the confines of meeting applicable building
codes and specifications, concrete masonry's modular
sizes and range of colors, textures and patterns provide
ample opportunity to demonstrate a design technique or
overcome design challenges. In addition to the architectural
finish, concrete masonry can provide the wall's structure,
fire resistance, acoustic insulation, and energy envelope.

This TEK addresses the proper application of architectural enhancements in concrete masonry wall systems. Where
appropriate, related NCMA TEK and other documents are
referenced to provide further information and detail.
on
concrete
masonry
technology
TEK 5-16
Details (2011)
These requirements assume an understanding of the

techniques unique to the nature of masonry. The design and
construction team should establish and consistently support
ground rules affecting aesthetic interpretations of a project.
It is also important for the client to realize the aesthetic
standard that the project is based on, and that unusually
high aesthetic standards can be more costly. In addition,
certain high-profile areas, such as a building entrance,
may require a custom level of quality, commensurate with
an additional cost for the defined area. Several state and
local masonry associations have developed guidelines for
defining aesthetic requirements, and these can be a good
resource for clarifying a project's aesthetic standards.
Communication With Clients

Common dilemmas faced by designers are a clients
changing expectations and responses to the projects changing appearance over time and under varying conditions.
As discussed below, there are some basic requirements
relative to aesthetics, but these are far from comprehensive.
It is important to realize that code requirements primarily
govern structural performance, not aesthetics. For example,
code-required construction tolerances are designed to ensure that masonry units are placed such that the completed
wall can act structurally as an integrated unit.
Related TEK:
1-1E, 2-3A, 3-8A, 5-2A, 5-12,

8-4A, 10-2C, 10-3, 10-4, 19-1
NCMA TEK 5-16
Figure 1Use of Several Unit Colors to

Complement the Site
Keywords: aesthetics, architectural masonry, architectural

units, banding, concrete masonry units, control joints, modular coordination, sample panel
190
1

Sample panels are a good means to communicate
the minimum contract-based aesthetic standard to all
parties. The sample panel is typically constructed prior to
the project, and in some cases a portion of the work can
serve as the sample panel. The sample panel remains in
place or at least available until the finished work has been
accepted, since it serves as a comparison for the finished
work. The sample panel should contain the full acceptable
range of unit and mortar color, as well as the minimum
expected level of workmanship. Cleaning procedures,
as well as application of any coatings or sealants, should
also be demonstrated on the sample panel. See TEK 8-4A,
Cleaning Concrete Masonry, (ref. 1) for more information
on cleaning.
CONSIDERATIONS FOR CHOOSING
Architectural Concrete Masonry Units

One of the most significant architectural benefits of
designing with concrete masonry is its versatilitythe
finished appearance of a concrete masonry wall can be
varied with the unit size and shape, color of units and
mortar, bond pattern, and surface finish of the units. The
term "architectural concrete masonry units typically is
used to describe units displaying any one of several surface
finishes that affect the color or texture of the unit, allowing
the structural wall and finished surface to be installed in a
single step. TEK 2-3A, Architectural Concrete Masonry
Units (ref. 2) provides an overview of some of the more
common architectural units, although local manufacturers
should be consulted for final unit selection.
Architectural concrete masonry units are used for
interior and exterior walls, partitions, terrace walls and
other enclosures. Some units are available with the same
treatment or pattern on both faces, to serve as both exterior and interior wall finish material, increasing both the
economic and aesthetic advantages. Architectural units
comply with the same performance-based quality standards as conventional concrete masonry, such as Standard
ASTM C90 (ref. 3). See Aesthetics in ASTM C90 (page
4) for more information.
Concrete Masonry Unit Color
Being produced from natural aggregates, concrete
masonry has natural color variations from unit to unit.
When a more monotone appearance is desired, there are
various techniques that may be specified to increase the
color uniformity in concrete masonry. Perhaps the best
method is to specify the use of mineral pigments in the
concrete mix, which are available in a wide range of colors.
Pigments provide an integral color throughout the unit and
minimize variations in color and texture found naturally
in aggregate and sand deposits. Using several colors of
integrally-colored concrete masonry units in the same
2
wall is an effective technique for producing other visual

impacts, such as two-tone banding or complementary color
palates (see Figure 1).

Other methods are also used to improve color uniformity. One method is to specify the use of a post-applied
stain, paint or coating on the units. With a paint or coating,
the resulting film minimizes the texture of the masonry
surface as well as the visual impact of the mortar joints.
Paints and coatings for concrete masonry should be compatible with the masonry, and should in general allow for
water vapor transmission. TEK 19-1, Water Repellents for
Concrete Masonry Walls, (ref. 4) contains information on
the applicability of different types of paints and coatings
for concrete masonry walls.
A more laborious method to improve color uniformity is to arrange with the masonry contractor for a presorting of on-site supplied block during certain stages of
construction.
Interaction With Sunlight

Because it is produced from natural materials, concrete
masonry walls often interact with changing sunlight in
much the same way that natural stone does, appearing to
change color as the light hits the wall at different angles.
Figure 2 shows how even a conventional gray concrete
masonry wall can interact with sunlight to present a range
of color. This same attribute can be used to advantage with
electric lighting, as well as on interior walls.
Figure 2Effect of Changing Sunlight on Gray

Concrete Masonry
191
NCMA TEK 5-16

Fluted concrete masonry units provide a rich texture
and tend to enhance the sound attenuating properties of
concrete masonry. The vertical flutes also provide an
interesting interplay of light and shadow, which can be
much more dramatic than smooth-faced units.
MORTAR JOINTS

While mortar generally comprises less than ten percent
of a typical concrete masonry wall surface area, it can
have a significant impact on the overall aesthetics of the
completed structure. Mortar joint finishing, profiles and
color can all impact the overall wall aesthetics. See also
Concrete Masonry Handbook for Architects, Engineers,
Builders (ref. 5) for information on mortar joints.
Mortar Joint Tooling

Tooling refers to finishing the mortar joints with a
profiled tool that shapes and compacts the surface of the
joint and provides a sharper, cleaner appearance for the
wall. The surface shape of the tool determines the joint's
profile (discussed in more detail in the following section).
Tooling mortar joints also helps seal the outer surface
of the joint to the adjacent masonry unit, improving the
joint's weather resistance. For this reason, tooled joints that
compact the mortar and do not create ledges to hold water
are recommended for construction that will be exposed to
weather.

Mortar joints should be tooled when the mortar is
thumbprint hard (a clear thumbprint can be pressed into
the mortar without leaving cement paste on the thumb).

Tooling the joints before they reach this stage results in
lighter colored joints, because more cement paste is brought
to the surface of the joints. Joints tooled too early can also
subsequently shrink away slightly from the adjacent concrete masonry unit. Tooling at the proper time allows this
initial shrinkage to occur, then restores contact between
the mortar and the unit producing a more weather-resistant
joint. Conversely, later tooling can produce a darker joint.
A consistent time of tooling will minimize variations in
the final mortar color.

For the cleanest result, horizontal mortar joints
should be tooled before vertical joints. For white and
light-colored mortar, Plexiglas jointers can be used to
avoid staining the joints during tooling. After all joints are
tooled, any mortar burrs on the wall should be trimmed
off with a trowel or other tool (a tool such as a plastic
loop is easier to use on a split face wall than a trowel,
for example). As a final step the joints are dressed using
a brush, a piece of burlap, or similar material.
Mortar Joint Profiles

Traditional mortar joint profiles are illustrated in Figure 3. For walls not exposed to weather, the joint profile
selection can be based on aesthetics and economics (as
some joint profiles are more labor-intensive to produce).
For exterior exposures, however, the mortar joint profile
can impact the wall's weather resistance, as discussed
above.

Unless otherwise specified, mortar joints should be
tooled to a concave profile when the mortar
is thumbprint hard (refs. 6, 7). For walls
exposed to weather, concave joints (Figure
3a) improve water penetration resistance by
directing water away from the wall surface.
In addition, because of the shape of the tool,
the mortar is compacted against the concrete
masonry unit to seal the joint. V-shaped joints
3a) Concave Joint (standard
3c) Grapevine Joint
3b) "V" Joint
(Figure 3b) result in sharper shadow lines than
unless otherwise specified)
concave joints.

Grapevine and weather joints (Figures
3c, 3d) provide a water-shedding profile, but
do not result in the same surface compaction
as concave or V-shaped joints. Both are used
in interior walls to provide strong horizontal
3d) Weather Joint
3e) Beaded Joint
3f) Flush Joint
lines.

Beaded joints (Figure 3e) are formed by
tooling the extruded mortar into a protruding
bead shape. Care must be taken to obtain a
straight line with the bead. Although technically a tooled joint, the beaded tooler does not
produce the same mortar surface compaction
3g) Squeezed Joint
3h) Struck Joint
3i) Raked Joint
as a concave or V-shaped tool. In addition,
the protruding bead can allow water, ice or
Note that not all joint profiles are appropriate for all exposures.
snow to collect. Therefore, beaded joints
are not recommended for weather-exposed
Figure 3Mortar Joint Profiles
NCMA TEK 5-16
192
3
construction.

Flush joints (Figure 3f) are typically specified when
a wall will be plastered. Excess mortar is simply struck
off the face of the wall with the trowel, then dressed with
a brush or other tool.

Squeezed or extruded joints (Figure 3g) are made
using excess mortar that is squeezed out as units are laid.
They may be specified for interior walls.

Struck joints (Figure 3h) provide a strong horizontal
line, similar to weather joints, however because the shape
provides a ledge for rain, ice or snow, they are not recommended for walls that will be exposed to weather.

Raked joints (Figure 3i) provide a dramatic contrast
between the units and mortar joints. They are formed using
a joint raker, which removes the mortar to a maximum depth
of 1/2 in. (13 mm). With raked joints, small imperfections
on unit edges can be more noticeable, because the mortar
is not compacted against the unit (the compaction tends to
fill in small surface irregularities along the unit edge). The
resulting joint is not weather-resistant, and may not leave
enough mortar cover over horizontal joint reinforcement
(joint reinforcement is required to have 5/8 in. (16 mm)
mortar cover in walls exposed to weather or earth (refs.
6, 7)). A better option for exterior surfaces is to specify an
integrally colored mortar to provide the visual contrast.
Mortar Joint Color

Choosing a specific mortar color allows additional
creativity by specifying integral color to either provide
a visual contrast or to match the unit color, as shown in
Figure 4. Note that using a mortar color that matches the
surrounding units minimizes the effects of minor mortar
staining; i.e., with a contrasting mortar color, greater care
should be used to remove mortar droppings and splatters
from the masonry units.
Because foreign material in mortar sand can affect
the mortar quality, as well as appearance, ASTM C144,
Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
(ref. 8), limits deleterious substances in aggregates for
masonry mortars. Sand can also affect mortar color: sands
from different natural sources may have different hues.
Therefore, all of the sand for a particular project should
come from the same source. Silica sand, which is more
expensive than typical masonry sand, is often specified for
white mortar. Consistent batching and mixing procedures
also help produce uniform mortar color from batch to
batch. See TEK 3-8A, Concrete Masonry Construction
(ref. 9), for further information.

Using a consistent amount of mix water is important
to maintain color uniformity for all mortars and especially
when using integrally colored mortar. Changing the
amount of water can significantly change the resulting
mortar color intensity. For this reason there are special
methods and equipment, such as shading materials and
equipment from direct sunlight, the use of cooled water,
and the use of damp, loose sand piles to reduce excessive
4
retempering. Mortar that is too stiff or older than 2 1/2

hours after initial mixing is to be discarded.
EXPECTATIONS FOR UNITS AND
CONSTRUCTION
Aesthetics in ASTM C90

ASTM C90 provides minimum requirements for
concrete masonry units that assure properties necessary
for quality performance. The specification includes
requirements for materials, as well as dimensional and
physical requirements such as minimum compressive
strength, maximum water absorption, maximum dimensional tolerances, and maximum linear drying shrinkage.
It also includes finish and appearance criteria for concrete
masonry units.

It should be noted that the requirements in ASTM C90
are intended to address the performance of the masonry
units when installed, not the aesthetics of the units nor of
the constructed masonry. The time for product inspection
is before placement. As such, the finish and appearance
criteria, for example, prohibits defects that would impair
the strength or permanence of the construction, but permit
minor cracks or chips incidental to usual manufacturing,
shipping and handling methods.

Qualities that are not included in C90 include color,
surface texture, surface features such as scores or flutes,
density choice, water repellency, fire resistance rating,
thermal properties and acoustic properties. If required,
these properties must be addressed in project contract
documents. ASTM C90 does, however, include acceptance
criteria for unit color and surface texture: namely, that
the finished unit surfaces that will be exposed in the final
structure conform to an approved sample of at least four
units. The sample should represent the range of color and
texture permitted on the job. As a practical matter, color
and texture should be expected to vary somewhat due to
the nature of the material.

The ASTM C90 specification is described in more
detail in TEK 1-1E, ASTM Specifications for Concrete
Masonry Units (ref. 10).
Considerations for Integrally Colored
Smooth-Faced Units

Integrally-colored concrete masonry units are available in a wide variety of colors and shades. The mineral
oxide pigments are evenly dispersed throughout the concrete mix, producing a low-maintenance enhancement
that lasts the life of the structure.

During unit manufacture, the integrally-colored concrete mix is placed into a steel mold, which is stripped off
while the concrete is still plastic. This stripping of the mold
draws moisture and coloring pigment to the unit surface,
which impacts the surface appearance. On split-faced or
ground-faced units, this surface is either ground away or
not exposed (in the case of split-faced units). Because the
193
NCMA TEK 5-16
construction. The permissible tolerances are intended to

ensure that misalignment of units or structural elements
does not impede the structural performance of the wall.
Although the tolerances are not intended for the purpose of
producing an aesthetically pleasing wall, these tolerances
are generally adequate for most aesthetic applications as
well. If tighter tolerances are desired, they must be specified in the project documents.
Construction Tolerances

As an example, unless otherwise specified, the
The International Building Code and Specification for
actual location of a masonry element is required to
Masonry Structures (refs. 6, 7) contain site tolerances for
be within a certain tolerance of where the element is
masonry construction which allow for deviations in the
shown on the construction drawings: + 1/2 in.
in 20 ft, + 3/4 in. max
(+ 13 mm in 6.2 m, + 19
mm max). More precise
placement dimensions
can be specified, typically at a higher cost.
Tolerances apply
to: plumb, alignment,
levelness and dimensions
of constructed masonry
elements, location of elements, levelness of bed
joints, mortar joint thickness, and width of collar
joints, grout spaces and
cavities. A full discussion
of code-required masonry
construction tolerances is
presented in TEK 3-8A,
Use of complementary mortar to emphasize pattern
Concrete Masonry Construction (ref 9).
formed surface is the final exposed surface on smoothfaced units, however, these units will have a wider color
variation than is seen with split-faced or ground-faced
units. Understanding this color variation will help avoid
possible disappointment that the finished wall does not
have the color uniformity of a painted or stained wall.
MODULAR
COORDINATION
Ground face units with

complementary mortar
Glazed units with contrasting

mortar
Figure 4Examples of Contrasting and Complementary Unit

and Mortar Colors
NCMA TEK 5-16
Concrete masonry
structures can be constructed using virtually
any layout dimension.
However, for maximum
construction efficiency,
economy, and aesthetic
benefit, concrete masonry
elements should be designed and constructed
with modular coordination
in mind. Modular coordination is the practice of
laying out and dimensioning structures to standard
lengths and heights to
accommodate modularlysized building materials.
194
5

Standard concrete masonry modules are typically 8 in.
(203 mm) vertically and horizontally, but may also include
4-in. (102-mm) modules for some applications. These modules provide the best overall design flexibility and coordination with other building products such as windows and
doors. Designing a concrete masonry building to a 4- or
8-in. (102- or 203-mm) module will minimize the number
of units that need to be cut, providing a more harmonious
looking masonry structure. TEK 5-12, Modular Layout of
Concrete Masonry (ref. 11) provides details of modular
wall layouts and openings.
CONTROL JOINTS

Control joints, a type of movement joint, are one
method used to relieve horizontal tensile stresses due to
shrinkage of concrete products and materials. They are
essentially vertical planes of weakness built into the wall
to reduce restraint and permit longitudinal movement due
to anticipated shrinkage. When control joints are required,
concrete masonry requires only vertical control joints.
When materials with different movement properties are
used in the same wythe (such as clay masonry and concrete
masonry), this movement difference needs to be accommodated, and may require horizontal movement joints
as well (see the Banding section, below). Recommendations for control joint spacing, locations and construction
details can be found in TEK 10-2C, Control Joints for
Concrete Masonry WallsEmpirical Method, TEK 10-3,
Control Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsAlternative
Engineered Method, and TEK 10-4, Crack Control for
Concrete Brick and Other Concrete Masonry Veneers
(refs. 12, 13, 14).

Aesthetically, control joints typically appear as continuous vertical lines in the field of the masonry walls,
and perhaps at other areas of stress concentration, such
as adjacent to openings, at changes in wall height, etc.
Several strategies can be used to make control joints less
noticeable. Perhaps the simplest approach is to align the
control joint with another architectural feature, such as
a pilaster or recess in the wall. In this case, the vertical
shadow line provided by the architectural feature provides
an inconspicuous control joint location.
veneer has also become very popular. The architectural

effect is very pleasing; however, proper detailing must be
provided to accommodate the different movement properties of the two materials to prevent cracking. The detail
shown in Figure 6 has demonstrated good performance
in many areas of the United States and is the preferred
detail, as it is economical and maintenance free. Horizontal joint reinforcement is placed in the mortar joints
above and below the band, as well as in the band itself
if it is more than two courses high. In addition, lateral
support (wall ties) are provided within 12 in. (305 mm)
of the top and bottom of the band and the band itself
must contain at least one row of ties. Some designers
prefer placing joint reinforcement in every bed joint of
the concrete masonry band. In this case, a tie which accommodates both the tie and reinforcement in the same
joint (such as seismic clips) should be used. Another,
but less recommended, option is to use horizontal slip
planes between clay masonry and the concrete masonry
BANDING
Concrete masonry banding is successfully used in
many architectural applications. Banding can be accomplished with different colors of block; with different
textures, for example a smooth-faced band in a split-faced
wall (see Figure 5); with different unit sizes, such as the
use of a 4-in. (102-mm) high band in a wall of 8-in. (203mm) units; or with a combination of these techniques.
Combining masonry units of different size, color and
finish provides a virtually limitless palette.
The use of concrete masonry bands in clay brick
6
Figure 5Banding Example: Split-Faced

Bands in Ground Face Field
195
NCMA TEK 5-16
Wall tie, within

12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Vapor retarder, per

local practice
Adjustable ladder
Clay brick
W1.7 (9 gage)
(MW 11) at
16 in. (406 mm)
o.c. or equivalent
Closed cell rigid

insulation, as
required
Concrete masonry
accent band
Air space, 1 in.

(25 mm), min.,
2 in. (51 mm)
preferred
Wall tie, within

12 in. (305 mm)
of band
Figure 6Banding Detail:

Concrete Masonry Band in Clay Brick Veneer
Light from
surface-mounted
fixture
Offset, diffuse and/or

partially blocked light
from wall-mounted
fixture
Unwanted
Unwantedlong
long shadow
shadow
Allowable offset from

materials, construction, and
combined movements
Low to subliminal light

= darkened area: no
shadows
Figure 7Use of Diffuse Lighting to

Control Shadows
NCMA TEK 5-16
band (see TEK 5-2A, Clay and Concrete

Masonry Banding Details, Reference 15).
The maximum spacing of expansion
joints in the clay masonry wall should be
reduced to no more than 20 ft (6.1 m) when
concrete masonry banding is used. When
the clay masonry expansion joint spacing
exceeds 20 ft (6.1 m), an additional control
joint should be placed near mid-panel in
the concrete masonry band, although the
joint reinforcement should not be cut in
this location. At locations of expansion
joints in the clay masonry, joints should
be continued through the concrete masonry
band and the joint reinforcement cut at
these locations. TEK 5-2A provides a
fuller discussion and additional details for
combining these two materials, including
details for incorporating clay masonry
bands into concrete masonry walls.
LIGHTING DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS FOR
CONCRETE MASONRY WALLS

Masonry has historically been associated with diffuse illumination located on or recessed
into ceilings, as step (walkway) fixtures located below
the waist, or generally placed at a distance from the
masonry wall assembly. Diffuse lighting does not concentrate a focused beam but rather spreads the light to
provide soft illumination. Although this is sometimes
accomplished using an array of many individual light
sources at a distance, it is more typically accomplished
with fixtures and devices made for this purpose. When
wall-mounted light sources are necessary, there are
specialized fixtures adapted for masonry that internally
refract, reflect, deflect, partially block, diffuse, and/or
shade light from directly impinging on the wall surface.
Often, the fixture includes additional light diffusers facing away from the wall surface to assist in softly lighting
the adjacent area. No noticeable shadows are cast onto
the wall, because the shadow is intentionally located
away from the wall surface, thus masonry aesthetics
are enhanced with a lower lighting intensity and more
graceful illumination. These concepts are illustrated
in Figure 7.
Non-diffuse light shining onto a concrete masonry
wall from a surface-mounted light fixture or sconce
can sometimes cast unwanted long shadows, giving
the erroneous visual appearance of unacceptably poor
materials or workmanship (see Figure 7). With nondiffuse light, glossy surface treatments and coatings
could also inadvertently magnify this problem. Welldesigned diffuse light can eliminate such concerns.
Certain concrete masonry units, such as ground
196
7
face (also called honed or burnished), can

be highly reflective. Figure 8 shows a residential project using a custom-fabricated
white ground face block. The designer
used a complementary balance of several
lighting fixtures with what might have
otherwise been a challenging masonry
reflective finish. The harmonious use of
interior lighting combined with exterior
overhead (recessed trim) and step lighting
is an effective way of solving this challenge.

Figure 8Diffuse Lighting With Ground Face

Concrete Masonry
REFERENCES
1. Cleaning Concrete Masonry, TEK 8-4A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
2. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 2-3A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
4. Water Repellents for Concrete Masonry Walls, TEK 19-1. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2005.
5. J. A. Farney, Melander, J. M., and Panarese, W. C., Concrete Masonry Handbook for Architects, Engineers, Builders, Sixth Edition,
Engineering Bulletin 008. Portland Cement Association, 2008.
6. International Building Code, International Code Council, 2009.
7. Specification for Masonry Structures, TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, 2008.
8. Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar, ASTM C144-04. ASTM International, 2004.
9. Concrete Masonry Construction, TEK 3-8A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
10. ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units, TEK 1-1E. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2007.
11. Modular Layout of Concrete Masonry, TEK 5-12. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2008.
12. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsEmpirical Method, TEK 10-2C. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2010.
13. Control Joints for Concrete Masonry WallsAlternative Engineered Method, TEK 10-3. National Concrete Masonry Association,
2003.
14. Crack Control for Concrete Brick and Other Concrete Masonry Veneers, TEK 10-4. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2001.
15. Clay and Concrete Masonry Banding Details, TEK 5-2A. National Concrete Masonry Association, 2002.
16. Architectural Enhancement; Aesthetical Design With Concrete Masonry, NCMA AIA/CES Provider Program #000530. National
Concrete Masonry Association.

www.ncma.org
Provided by:
197
NCMA TEK 5-16

Ncma Tek Manual Parts 1-5

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Ncma Tek Manual Parts 1-5

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

NCMA TEK

National Concrete Masonry Association

ASTM SPECIFICATIONS FOR

2003 and 2006 editions of the International Building Code

LOADBEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Table 1ASTM Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units

IBC. The designations were withdrawn because they were

Gross area* (shaded) = width (actual) x length (actual)

Net area* (shaded) = net volume (actual)

Figure 1Gross and Net Areas

but permit minor cracks incidental to usual manufacturing

from a building brick (C 55) primarily by its intended use.

Minimum net area

Maximum water absorption,

below freezing, but unlikely to be saturated with water.

surface burning characteristics, adhesion, color permanence,

To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK Index,

Codes & Specs (2010)

ing, as well as provisions for quality assurance, testing

Keywords: building codes, construction, quality assurance,

specific action to modify the article in the supplemental

that the minimum compressive strength of units could be

NCMA TEK 1-2C

As in Part 1, Part 2 also includes new provisions

Updates to 2008 MSJC Specification

NCMA TEK 1-2C

13750 Sunrise Valley Drive, Herndon, Virginia 20171

NCMA TEK 1-2C

BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS

Keywords: building codes, construction, masonry design,

2003 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE

The majority of jurisdictions in the United States adopt

The 2003 International Building Code (ref. 1) adopts

MSJC Code and

Figure 1Masonry Structural Code

The 2002 MSJC Code and Specification

Seismic Design Requirements

additional parapet wall requirements, covering flashing and

To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK Index,

TEK 1-4 2004 National Concrete Masonry Association

Bond, running: The placement of masonry units such that head

Compressive strength of masonry: Maximum compressive

Diaphragm: A roof or floor system designed to transmit

flame, hot gases and heat when subjected to a standardized

Height-to-thickness ratio: The height of a masonry wall

125 lb/ft3 (2,000 kg/m3). [4]

Plaster: (See "Stucco.")

height to radius of gyration. (2) The ratio of a member's

Wall, curtain: (1) A nonloadbearing wall between columns or

Wall, solid masonry: A wall either built of solid masonry

To order a complete TEK Manual or TEK Index,

TYPICAL SIZES AND SHAPES OF

8" (203 mm)

Single corner unit

75/8" (194 mm)

Figure 1Nominal and Actual Unit Dimensions

Corner return unit

Figure 2Typical Concrete Masonry Units

the different sizes of concrete masonry units as listed in

Table 1Minimum Thickness of Face Shells

Double open end unit

Average of measurements on 3 units taken at the thinnest point

Bond beam units

Figure 3Shapes to Accommodate Reinforcement